The URL can be used to link to this page

3764 Orlando Dr - BC06-001683 (WASHINGTON MUTURAL BANK) (NEW BUILDING) DOCUMENTS1 PERMIT ADDRESS J;) `Dy O CONTRACTOR _ ADDRESS PHONE NUMBER PROPERTY V ADDRESS YQ7) . PHONE NUMBER ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR MECHANICAL CONTRACTO PLUMBING CONTRACTOR MISCELLANEOUS CONTRACTOR PERMIT NUMBER FEE MISCELLANEOUS CONTRACTOR PERMIT NUMBER FEE lie SUBDIVISION PERMIT #C) o - 3 DATE ) PERMIT DESCRIPTION PERMIT VALUATION (\ OCX? ()C)O SQUARE FOOTAGE r% LWA O a H to rtiAt CITY OF SANFORD PERMIT APPLICATION Permit # : EA0114 Date: 1 ` t l ^ O L- Job Address: 31164- Wr7 Orl V e- Description of Work:=UA Wj eti T-po %WY,&- N-4 Total Square Footage o 300 Historic District: Zoning: Value of Work: $ Ll (0 _Q0Q Permit Type: Building Electrical Mechanical Plumbing Fire Sprinkler/Alarm Pool Electrical: New Service - # of AMPS Addition/Alteration Change of Service Temporary Pole Mechanical: Residential Non -Residential Replacement New (Duct Layout & Energy Calc. Required) Plumbing/ New Commercial: # of Fixtures # of Water & Sewer Lines # of Gas Lines Plumbing/ New Residential: # of Water Closets Plumbing Repair - Residential or Commercial Occupancy Type: Residential Commercial Industrial Construction Type: # of Stories: # of Dwelling Units: Flood Zone: (FEMA form required) 13 Bonding Company: Addras:_ Mortgage Leader. Address: Arcbfte" agineer. Phone: Address: Fax: _ Application is hereby made to obtain a permit to do the work and installations as indicated. I certify that no work or installation has commenced prior to the issuance of a permit and that all work will be performed to meet standards of all laws regulating construction in this jurisdiction. I understand that a separate permit must be secured for ELECTRICAL WORK, PLUMBING, SIGNS, WELLS, POOLS, FURNACES, BOILERS, HEATERS, TANKS, and AIR CONDITIONERS, etc. OWNER' S AFFIDAVIT: I certify that all of the foregoing information is accurate and that all work will be done in compliance with all applicable laws regulating construction and zoning. WARNING TO OWNER: YOUR FAILURE TO RECORD A NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT MAY RESULT IN YOUR PAYING TWICE FOR IMPROVEMENTS TO YOUR PROPERTY. IF YOU INTEND TO OBTAIN FINANCING, CONSULT WITH YOUR LENDER OR AN ATTORNEY BEFORE RECORDING YOUR NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT. NOTICE: In addition to the requirements of this permit, there may be additional restrictions applicable to this property that may be found in the public records of this county, and there may be additional permits required from other governmental entities such as era a or federal agencies. Acceptance of permit is verification that I will notify the owner of the property of the requirem of F ' ien w, 3. 1) Signature of Owner/Agent Date Si Contractor Agent Print Owner/Agent's Name Name Signature of Notary -State of Florida Date Signal of •Statel6a to my COMMISSION # DD 1 EXPIRES, February 25,? troTnnv uo n 0jj00Y Co Owner/ Agent is _ Personally Known to Me or Con rally Known to Me or Produced ID _ Produced ID E-l a _ J APPROVALS: ZONING: Special. Conditions: Rev 032006 UTIL: FD: ENG: BLDG: 5 N0.4936""P. 3waI+ N Permit Number Aproel.ldeatil(adort Number II.SQ+eD-S//-oGbe , re"'ad by. UC.a p 4l Neoc,*rA. be Ai,*Wflo J •dt$7 GJ N tt /' 44. ,icf, 177ta'PReturnto: 74.017CE OF COMM MUNaM tisltqu cum. 1 !IT lMf a oi?DL+ DA "al tto p Ct.M' 8 8 28060'.SU43 odo OVILI o6 tloslu ff M Mtlllw FM moo MOM lK t bon" SiFTI`MIN Wr aN9 &ANl E tllME Cat" t OABM State ofO1oA , County of - t er is. Fl as the `°'"° (') w111 beanade to oa teal peeper , ad is aotlo d mju&d odoa b provided is N Cthieet ottrmeaoemmatl • Dooerlr.l .- a of i & fttp (Hpl deemipiom of the p KY. +ad o w uddreee if available). COT I UNer oypt AVIr f - O*4Il sown. A Qoot b2, ptlea of laoprovr a z. taieoesa! asc/w•o ps 81+ eg e/a vt ) Saiv+a, A6, u77 3. ow' M lalbtmagea AddrmPMVvsi 0 R• epbaaeNi Mbert "- flli* '7037 13-ayS-7 SO10Nup1e7ytle $41dar• pfothar tlaep the owner chow" chow)' e7t S. Addroee F7i er w Addros* N At ora y NwMiNPi'•rOn !. NlAnber y /y.S7o 6, ialita atsty ( Y) vft AM*; Wg. 5 7o1 Fax F ,AVV Ad&= F' boao Nuaaerb AUMMofboad Nam 1 Addrouber Feat Nas ber a Pert M vvidsld the OftWv4dofFlorldededprodded - by #718.13(1xerpy epop w6m &WON or other dooms aoay be NameAddwaFTas a ftb additlotr mida a• o N ytotlded is 1713.13(t)(b), BtatWe., tbaltilioty m t00eive a otrpy of the l 1pnor!t Netioe A, dtbep nxase Nnuoba . 10. 4ate of aogee oteomq rAt e 8 t11Mdate laep&. MQ ; plrrdondgeLaeeYar>imtrtbedetoo[reoo Data 81Pd 1 ae w lip ...audrtpWwpor ;717.]3(1)(g),"ororoer ei, in 6b or bar aoead," . aaT b0 perrniped [ao i4 m Mbou4Ma ae2® _ Mu",,..,_ MAY-22-2006 MON 01:31PM ID: REVISIONS PERMIT # 06- 1 C0,53 DATE Mi4Y y , ono G ADDRESS 37(y OR, SHr,JFDFZD EL. 32771 CONTRACTOR RL(30 L AssocrArHs - CGC o5'7/aq PH # Yo'7 383-- 7AY3 FAX # yo7-78$-/L/'. DESCPRITION OF REVISION: RELocATC fpEuMRG A Y-jSoT N.,9- IT / S NOT L ft FR©r klraShl ti GToN Myrc(_ -B'ArJ-K " z" 'I57=—R c ,, Rr-rgvR0- DA _ rS N 3.4Ck19L_ - Cony GVL-rjIVC a:ti i FFRS UTIUTIE FIRE r DALE SCHNACKEL COMPANY, CONSULTING ENGINEERS OF OMAHA 3035 South 72nd Street, Suite 101 Omaha, Nebraska 68124-3583 Telephone No. 402-391-7680 Fax: 402-391-7488 May 3, 2006 Preston Wilcox Albu 8 Associates, Inc. 1460 Minnesota Ave. Winter Park, FL 32789 RE: DSC Project Name: Washington Mutual - South Sanford DSC Project No.: 050380 Dear Preston: We have no exception to the attached field routing of the sanitary sewer system. If you have any questions, please let me know. Sincerely, Gregory Roy Schnackel, PE cc: file maY-m 00 lQ083 ACATAPANOPLUMBING 4072738030 P3 4" - Gm 1 NO r ACU-7 NOTF 1 Vo)T 12 O CO / r / 112"- i 3/4" 2" 0 N 7E B N07E 7 ti— r 1 " A? r" AWE O I NOTE 4 NOIE' 9 r. GCO NOTE '14 2. FN R P.V.C. C.1, 0' Zr. 1 MIN. 4-1 mac ., INOTE41 ) NOW V2" _ I r ,/2a it T May $ 00 10,07a ACATAPANOPWMBING 4072738030 PZ A. CATAPANO PLUMBING R\(C. P-o 13OX678521.ORLn: DO.M..:2867 14cv- ?-X-;0 i 1 AX (a07) 273-GI E City of Sanford Certificate of Occupancy This is to certify that the building located at 3764 Orlando Drive for which permit number 06-1683 has heretofore been issued on April 13, 2006 and has been completed according to plans and specifications filed in the office of the Building Official prior to the issuance of said building permit, to wit as New Office, Banks subdivision regulations ordinances of the City of Sanford with the provisions of these regulations. Staff Approval Building: Bill Oden Engineering & Planning: G. Hyatt Public Works: N/A Utilities: R Blake Fire Department: M. Minnetto Date 10/03/06 10/10/06 10/1 /06 10/10/06 Conditions (if blank, no conditions apply) DM HUBER FAMILY LP Q),3" YYZ .,.;,___ 10/11/06 Property Owner Building Official Date BUILDING DEPARTMENT - Re. 3764 Orlando Dr _ Page 1 From: MATTHEW MINNETfO To: DEPARTMENT, BUILDING Date: 10/10/2006 8:29:55 am Subject: Re: 3764 Orlando Dr CO completed last week. BUILDING DEPARTMENT 10/10/2006 8:25 am >>> 06- 1683 Commercial Albu Preston 407-383-9743 This was called in when Joanne and Debbie were out, sorry for the rush BUILDING DEPARTMENT - Re: 3764 Orlando Dr 1 From: RUBEN HYATT To: BUILDING DEPARTMENT Date: 10/10/2006 8:52:08 am Subject: Re: 3764 Orlando Dr passed 10-10-06 BUILDING DEPARTMENT 10/10/06 8:25 AM >>> 06-1683 Commercial Albu Preston 407-383-9743 This was called in when Joanne and Debbie were out, sorry for the rush BUILDING DEPARTMENT - Re: 3764 Orlando Dr From: CATHY LOTEMPIO To: DEPARTMENT, BUILDING Date: 10/10/2006 8:53:18 am Subject: Re: 3764 Orlando Dr This is n/a for Public Works 10.10.06 Cathy J. LoTempio Customer Service Rep Public Works Department 407-330-5627 fax# 407-330-5601 BUILDING DEPARTMENT 10/10/2006 8:25 am >>> 06-1683 Commercial Albu Preston 407-383-043 This was called in when Joanne and Debbie were out, song for the rush I BUILDING DEPARTMENT - Re: Fwd: 3764 Orlando Dr CLEAR 10/10/06 _ 1 From: RICHARD BLAKE To: BUILDING DEPARTMENT Date: 10/10/2006 11:40:14 am Subject: Re: Fwd: 3764 Orlando Dr CLEAR 10/10/06 Cleared 10/10/06 Richard Blake City of Sanford Utility Engineer 407-330-5609 ED WOODS 11:16 am Tuesday, October 10, 2006 >>> RICHARD BLAKE 10/10/06 8:52 AM >>> Richard Blake City of Sanford Utility Engineer 407-330-5609 BUILDING DEPARTMENT 8:25 am Tuesday, October 10, 2006 >>> 06-1683 Commercial Albu Preston 407-383-9743 This was called in when Joanne and Debbie were out, song for the rush DM HUBER FAMILY LIMITED PARTNERSHIP P.O. BOX 730 WINDERMERE, FL 34786 407) 253-0255 Fax: (407) 3-1 oos RECEIVEDE-mail: dhuber@cfl.rr.com SEP 11 200E REQUEST FOR PREPOWER INSPECTION September 11, 2006 City of Sanford Dan Florian, Building Official P.O.Box 1788 Sanford, FL. 32772-1788 RE: Prepower Inspection Request for the Washington Mutual Bank located at 3764 Orlando Drive, Sanford, FL. To Whom It May Concern: This letter is written to request a prepower inspection for the address referenced above. Please be advised that such building will not be occupied until the Certificate of Occupancy has been released. Sincerely, a A' 14-" Donald M. Huber STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF ORANGE r SWORN and subscribed before me this // - day of September, 2006. kPitY.PL7oris Birkinbine Commission # DD292477 Notary Public Expires May 20, 2008 My Commission Expires: ,a ge„d9d7royFain. Inur.rca.lnc eo04e5-7010 Fwmlt II : 6 L4 U 6 & — /& Job AMINN: 3 i& 4 ORLAN D Daalplba ed Wort: CRY OF SANFORD Pif7tMfl' AFFWCATION Dam 74 Va be or Wom S S O o O o• Pff" Types Building Ete WGW )e Modwow Mumbiat Peo 3PdMWAhno Pool BlaMkd:NewScM=-MofAWS qOO AddWoWAIMistion Chmpo(Savios Tica"MPole /soA Mae taaakat RdMMdal Nast-RaidatW RePleoemaa New Mm Layout & I:wV Cok ReQurtsd) PWwblaW New Co ma dd: R or F"axwm 1 or Wow A Sawn Uses # cross Uaee PlumbWgIR iRedieugal: P of water Clam P mWa= Repok - RaldemW or CDmmm W OcnpaatyT"L Ra WaWd CoanmemW )( W&WW Coaetn Om TM L P or SWiee P of 1DwaMeE Uadtr: Flood ZDwr (FEAU hm mod 1 Oanwra Nswe D Adarew:/.a S •% • Ma. 7 a p / lam Cesusemr IQ= dt Ad&= 04KC-4vN OO C. JUT Sole I I- Nwwbec & C. OC rum&rtz Zr - ad o7 Sl2-/333 Caeaeetrwww. STt oc "U;+c { r,-4 rem Addram Martp p Leadw: Ad*= ArebiletU spseea rhim Addrae the Appliesdea w MebF ao# to Dbaia a pewolt q dp me wa1lr and edaoe • isdleemOd. I oa0 twee Novak or WaLttlbu bw aoamnemill pain a dw leeuefloe da peaW aced Oat m wot wiU bo poReaad ao mew wAoft& oraU Iswe urdstiap aoauwaWm is abb joirdifooa. 1 oe0eaaeead tat a xFenge pemdt Baal be ma m d tr>IBCTRWAL WORK. NAM PA 3101 r WE" FOOL % PUIWACE& BOaAR& HBATER& TANKS. awd Ant COMMONERS,, dL 9 toeattly flat adt dtw laabaeeetloa b eoeoaae aeb rwr etl woes wQt be doses b eaalliaaea w1O adl a pptleaba Ilea i OcOW dmi ald aloft WARMM TOOWNIER: YOUR FAR NRE TO RBWRD A tMM OF MAY RESULT IN YOUR PAYINO TWK,S FOR BEFR0VSWM TO YOUR MFERTT. Ip YOU DITM TO OBTA N FD IANCM CONSULT WnW YOUR IANDER OR AN ATTORNEY BEFORE RBOORDWG YOUR NOTICE OF m= b edam a tae aeQobeenewe ddde paaat, abwa aaq M addhioael aaaeieafeaw appliabM a bie Daaoeabr tat am be Rawl b me PI Mb aaoodeor dib oo 4 sere loss any be addiaind 0milte wa d flow otlar Noaeeawamd wWw eueb ao wetrr weam meeo dbfAn. meat aP 00W6 w 66W aooeks. Aaaepfeooe dpadt a eallioegoo drt I wtU ao0h ms oaaerdahe paapenr ot}be S1pW0 *(*ftWAV0 Dec ftWOwWAPoat'eNeese 91 w Diploids DIU OwmdAPeat b _ Peeaoa W Kaaoem ao Mc or itiodeoe0ID tiw, FsJu. _ J/ 0 Si{fataed PATRICIA. HAMBRICK Notary Public, State of Florida My cpmm expires Mar 11, 2007 Bonded thru Ashton Apenc , Inc. IO. DD 17882 CoansomdAPeDt b . hodeead m APPROVALS: Z WM. UTIL: FD: BNat'K BLDO: 8pdd Cmditiae: Rani O3rm Z/Z 'd l 1EE 'ON ON[ S31VIOOSSV I n91V WdOS:E 9001 El'aV CITY OF SANFORD PERMIT APPLICATION Permit # : V I i 1 Date: Oi- z$-O9i t ob Address::376 Y O&?A,1 J DR, bescription of Work: S iTE C0iVS-TAQe?70X) 120014,M - 1XI1 Y0, Total Square Footage Historic District: Zoning: Value of Work: S :3 5P• OW Permit TypeABuilding Electrical Electrical: New Service - # of AMPS Mechanical: Residential Non -Residential _ Plumbing/ New Commercial: # of Fixtures Plumbing/New Residential: # of Water Closets Occupancy Type: Residential Commercial Mechanical Plumbing Fire Sprinkler/Alarm Pool _ Addition/Alteration Change of Service Temporary Pole _ Replacement New (Duct Layout & Energy Cale. Required) of Water & Sewer Lines # of Gas Lines Industrial Plumbing Repair - Residential or Commercial Construction Type: # of Stories: # of Dwelling Units: Flood Zone: (FEMA form required) O Owners Name & Address: w#4",,Kx nw -yTz1,4L jj/o-A-AK CL41117/D G-OIyDDAIO Phone: -7/3-,!54V5-220 L Pontractor Name & Address: l r l-7 u ff :5 ; M dZKh5 - Y60 /%'t/A/.VIS50TR-AIC- 14P 3Z7!Ifg State License Number: CGC 057169 Phone & Fax: Bonding Company: Address: Mortgage Lender: Address: Architect/Engineer: Address: Contact Person: Phone: Phone: Fax: Application is hereby made to,obtain a permit to do the work and installations as indicated. 1 certify that no work or installation has commenced prior to the issuance of a permit and that all work will be performed to meet standards of all laws regulating construction in this jurisdiction. I understand that a separate permit must be secured for ELECTRICAL WORK, PLUMBING, SIGNS, WELLS, POOLS, FURNACES, BOILERS, HEATERS, TANKS, and AIR CONDITIONERS, etc. OWNER'S AFFIDAVIT: 1 certify that all of the foregoing information is accurate and that all work will be done in compliance with all applicable laws regulating construction and zoning. WARNING TO OWNER: YOUR FAILURE TO RECORD A NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT MAY RESULT IN YOUR PAYING TWICE FOR IMPROVEMENTS TO YOUR PROPERTY. IF YOU INTEND TO OBTAIN FINANCING, CONSULT WITH YOUR LENDER OR AN ATTORNEY BEFORE RECORDING YOUR NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT. N TI E: In addition to the requirements of this permit, there may be additional restrictions applicable to this property that may be found in the public records of this county, and there may be additional permits required from other governmental entities such as water management districts, state agencies, or federal agencies. Acceptance of permit is verification that I will notify the owner of the property of the requirements of Florida Lien Law, FS 713. XX Signature of Owner/Agent Date Signature of Contractor/Agent Date Print, Owner/Agent's Name Print Contractor/Agent's Name i Signature - ate Signature of Notary -Stare of Florida Date DEBBIE BLANTON w ooMMISSION I DD IGM1 EXPIRES: February 25, 2W7 Owner/Al Rr Contractor/Agent is _ Personally Known to Me or Produced I b 11)-1_ Produced ID APPROVALS: ZONIN . -- Mr-r— : FD: Special Conditions: Rev 03/2006 ENG: BLDG: 7J 3o J 39 10 41 Au I X3 Y E_ Qt JG. t PANTED DIRECTIONAL ARROWS c WITH TEXT AS NDICATED-CENTER 5 ASPHALT ON DRIVE LANE-TYP. DRIVEWAY SEE CIVIL PANTED TEXT SIZE MA FAIT { TO MATCH SHOPPHO CENTER B STANDARDS. ! T WASHINGTON MUTUAL OCCASIO SITE: SOUTH SANFORDIPANTEDDIRECTIONAL I ARROWS - TYPICAL LIVE OAK CENTER 9zm SANFORD. FL W4.a fiv i"f J Pormb A' 06 Job Addrtes: CITY OF SANPORD PBRMR APPLICATION Dab: DeseriptlonotWork _/ylYl d-G 1/naF./GJf r.ti: r- / L —Taftissyerolpowsp Nldwb District: ZoelnS: valve of Wotiu S Pormk Typal Buihlin8 Electrical MvJmical Plumbing Plm Spd&WAIUM Pool ZIKU*al: New Swvloe - M of AMPS AddkiontAkerdlon Chop of Service Temporary Pole Maebantoal: Raldeatld Non-Raldendal Replaoaean New (Duo Layout & UwU Cale. Required) MvmbI* New CormraercW: a of Pixtsrrw ? Mot Water & Scwor Line! M of Oar Lines Iile7- Mumb"Mow 111"Maatbl: N of Water Closes Plumbing Repair - Wdential or Commeal Oeeupamey Ty K Residmdd Commaolal ladv9dal rd Cowatruetloa Type: 0 of Stories: N of Dwailia8 Umits: Flood Zomt' (FLMA tans nqulred ) Ow om Now A AddnM: MOW. ContractsName • AOdMM 50. I' & 1/ 34/ lJ///,/ [,_ ,,-ettrz.4_ Skis Lino* Number: L-ovr-c - v laoee • Fits• 3 % T t Caraaet I'eraom: me W,7 Beedleg C.mpaay: Address: Morlpte L 0dw. . Addrew. ArchkNOTAstaaer: MM Addrw I rim Applloatba b hereby made to obtain t paradt q d0 tM0 wpk tad itaWiMbns a, irdbaled I oeMy VIM ao work or InittllMlom hM aMunamgd prior loom blatWtoe of t pemma the attest W weAt wan I" parmmtad to maM attmdatda of W Itwa redutMla` earomlai.m w Ibb JerWiaian. 1 url0nsta1t01bM t MparMe permit mint be wound Ibr ELECTRICAL WORK, PUMMBWO, SIGNS, WELLS, POOLS, FURNACES, BOILEM& HEATERS. TANKS. and AM CONDITIONERS, au. I Mft 00 IN Me loins I om,11lomIs MUM and OW all work will be dm in compliance with all IWIU k hire replYMhrp em ruMbn are aft WARNINO TO OWNER: YOUR FAILURE TO RECORD A NOTICE OF COMMBNCBMENT MAY RESULT IN YOUR PAYINO TWICE FOR WROVEMEN73 TO YOUR PROPERTY. IP YOU INTEND TO OBTAIN FINANCINO. CONSULT WITH YOUR LENDER OR AN ATTORNEY BEFORE RBCORDINO YOUR NOTICE OF COMMBNCEMBNT. u addltloa b are otau. pemrit, dace aury be adeitional ranie+ions appliable to dlis propub that saes bo (home a ale pubNo,acords of tbb mooed, and Il srt may d. addiuoad pamils "quired eom odrar aorsru mmd sadda such a water nu mpum dlaft, suite apneia,.r IbdwW aeoaoiea Aeoepglae otperrNt b rerllloMlOa Oat [ will rgtly d1e owror of are property of tb. cequlneroru of Plan rl.aw>.4jj3 sw wrcofOwawAperu DW P& I OwncdApmt's Nam. SVmm ofNouipSweofMids D#te OwusdAp rA b _ PUMMId lGlown Its Me or PMdwW ID NNW Date M DARLENE MORALES MY COIVMSSION q DM97913 a EXPIRES: MAMA 08. 2008 ContractorlApmt b PetMaWy Fla "• Produced ID APPROVALS: 70NINO' UTIL• FD• BNO. BLDO• Spa. W Comdidou _ --- Row 034M 1/ 1 'd l IEE 'ON DN1 S31VIDOSSV 9 n61V WJIVE 9001 'El 'IdV CITY OF SANFORD PERMIT APPLICATION Permit # : w ' " 1 Date: Y /I.J /0 6 Job Address: .3 7ai y O+LCA!y& v A ttwC , 54A1A" ., P 3777/ Description of Work. Da,%" mC Total Square Footage Historic District: NO Zoning: C- Z Value of Work: $ Yi vqo Permit Type: Building_ C Electrical Electrical: New Service - # of AMPS Mechanical: Residential Non -Residential _ Plumbing/ New Commercial: # of Fixtures Plumbing/New Residential: # of Water Closets Occupancy Type: Residential Commercial Construction Type: # of Stories: Mechanical Plumbing Fire Sprinkler/Alarm Pool _ Addition/Alteration Change of Service Temporary Pole _ Replacement New (Duct Layout & Energy Calc. Required) of Water & Sewer Lines # of Gas Lines Plumbing Repair - Residential or Commercial Industrial of Dwelling Units: Flood Zone: (FEMA form required) Owners Name & Address: An Me imt 814^ff- `l "P p.p. dtip 73 fl . w Iv DGX .wrw .1'L. 3 Y 71l Phone: Contractor Name & Address: 70f State License Number: C' GG O.r7/G 9 Phone & Fax: Y&-7 -7B,f-1V#'V1W7-74d-/Y6J Contact Person: 670T-A G A A**Cf Phone: YOi- WO /Yl3 Bonding Company: Address: Mortgage Lender: Address: Architect/Engineer: Ca! t-f 44f C 207- 'L.2' Phone: ZG(" - 623 -YL r't Address: -C?rt 44r ZAf01v S G-tR_ A T nq /_ Fax: 2-06 4 -'1b 2& Application is hereby made to obtain a permit to do the work and installations as indicated. 1 certify that no work or installation has commenced prior to the issuance of a permit and that all work will be performed to meet standards of all laws regulating construction in this jurisdiction. 1 understand that a separate permit must be secured for ELECTRICAL WORK, PLUMBING, SIGNS, WELLS, POOLS, FURNACES, BOILERS, HEATERS, TANKS, and AIR CONDITIONERS, etc. OWNER'S AFFIDAVIT: 1 certify that all of the foregoing information is accurate and that all work will be done in compliance with all applicable laws regulating construction and zoning. WARNING TO OWNER: YOUR FAILURE TO RECORD A NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT MAY RESULT IN YOUR PAYING TWICE FOR IMPROVEMENTS TO YOUR PROPERTY. IF YOU INTEND TO OBTAIN FINANCING, CONSULT WITH YOUR LENDER OR AN ATTORNEY BEFORE RECORDING YOUR NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT. NOTICE: In addition to the requirements of this permit, there may be additional restrictions applicable to this property that may be found in the public records of this county, and there may be additional permits required from other governmental entities such as water management districts, state agencies, or federal agencies. Acceptance of permit is verification that 1 will notify the owner of the property of the requirements of Florida Lien Law, FS 713. I i pC Signature of Owner/Agent Date Signature o Contractor Agent Date Print Owner/Agent's Name . Signature of Notary -State of Florida Date Owner/Agent is _ Personally Known to Me or Produced 1D APPROVALS: ZONING: l UTIL: FD: Special Conditions: Rev 03/2006 dy.G6d G • i9t'?c Print Contractor/Agent's Name J-c-- Signature of Notary -State of Florida Date Contractor/Agent is _ Personally Known to Me or Produced ID ENG: BLDG: w CITY OF SANFORD PERMTF APPLICATION Job Addreas:37(ay0Ej/'i o C , _Sn n ry-) y4 T. - 2,D'17,;= Daerlptlon of Worst. P n I (" a ( Total Square Footage Ellotorlc District: Zoning: value of Worla i q01 000 Pertnit Type: Building Electrical Modm9cal Plumbing Firc Spdolkler/Alorm Pool Electrical: New Service —N of AMPS AdditioWAltaotion Chan of Service Tcmporwy Pole Medranical: Residential Non -Residential Replacement New {Duct Layout tits Energy Calc. Required) Plumblog/ New Commercial: d of Fixtures 4 of Water & Sewer Lines f1 of Gas Lines Plumbia;lNow RastdeaNal: N of Water Closets Plamblag Repair — Residential or Commercial Occupancy Type: Residential Cottmmvial _ 1/ _ Industrial Cotrstrt cam Type: N of Saw": 4 of Dwdrog Units: Food Zone. • (nMA fans required) 0 2=1 '71F MW ;l 911 U e • ',&1..•. v1 1 A V.WJ U27M ?A. I I• seadlag CaoWa,: l itr`.'Q . Address: Morvw Lomim:. Addrae: AlF&WrtlBsjiaetr: Pbose: Address FIE Application is baft made women a ptmmft oft the wotk ind ittstalimdm as indicated. i oatiry teat ao work ar lastallamon has mrnnrm om prior io dw bmamoe of a p=4 sad teat au work vnU be pe tmmd to maer arandards of au imva mpdztiq amunuction in ttds judsdicdom I understm ad do m separmte pwmk Ink be smmed Ibr 8 ECTRICAL WORK, nA M MO, SIGNS, WEDS, POOLS, FURNACES,1101LERS, HEATERS. TANKS, and AIR CONDITIONERS, etc. I oettly that au of the %mlioing tatbrmaalon Is eoourase and that all work will be done in omwliwwo with all applicable laws nguWing construction and aalbrg. WARNING TO OWNER: YOUR FAILURE TO RECORD A NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT MAY RESULT IN YOUR PAYING TW= FOR IMPROVEMENTS TO YOUR PROPERTY. IT YOU WEND TO OBTAIN FINANCIM CONSULT W RM YOUR LENDER OR AN ATTORNEY BEFORE RECORDING YOUR NOTICE OF COMMENCEMEM'. _ r Nn=: In addition to Rite tegaimrnew of this permit, there may be additional reurictiom this ooaaty, and there may be eddit mW permit; mquned from other gaysmnreat d cooties s Aeogmanee of ptsmlt Is valtioNon dra I udll Dotty tie owner of tee property SiP*Mof0waer/A9ot , ' Date Pratt Ow=dA&Wo Nano Siaraerre cf Notary State of Florida Date Owrm/AVM b _ Pwsonally Known to Me or Prodwxd m that sW be fbund In the public rwor& of 4ladiols, Oft agencies, or hderal agarcip. hen Law, FS 713. or/Aeent' Dale S - 3 •iJ signalers; omow-sm of FbAoj Dace O1 R • P Q' JO ANN M. JOMWM C04, MY COMMISSION i DD 28M EXP" ° P tread eIRES: MarcR wn orproducelA APPROVALS: ZONING: UTIL: FD: ONQ BLDO• Special Caodit uw Rev 03=06 Z/t 'd l lEE 'ON DNI S31b'I om i neiv MW E 9001 E l 'ads Quick Lube 127 Project Summary 1/17/06 2:46 PM TOTALS Total Labor Cost 2,938.04 Total Material Cost 7,309.38 Total Subs Cost 450.00 Total Other Costs 435.00 JOB TOTAL COST r11.132.42 A 8 " Bid O Plumbing Bid" S.F. 3.5 Tons Points Quote Price of Labor 10 11 12,508.34 47% 12 12,650.48 52% 13 12,795.89 57% 14 12,944.6.7 62% 15 13,096.96 67% 16 13,252.88 72% 17 13,412.55 78% 18 13,576.12 83% Total w/o markup 11,132.42 Points 20 95% of Labor 19 13,743.73 89% Markup 2,783.11 3,975.86 per S.F. 1 20 13.915.53 95% Total Cost 13,915.53 per Ton 21 14,091.67 101 % 22 14,272.33 107% Total w/o -markup 11,132.42 Points 25 126% of Labor 23 14,457.69 113% Markup 3.710.81 4,240.92 per S.F. 24 14,647.92 - 120% Total Cost 14,843.23 per Ton 25 14,843.23 126% 26 15,043.81 133% 27 15,249.89 140% Total w/o markup 11.132.42 Points 25.29 128% of Labor 28 15,461.69 147% Markup 3,767.58 4,257.14 er S.F : . ' 29 t ! 1'5,679.46' L" 155%, Quoted: 1 . 0,,14;900:00 1 ;' ;; per7on -; y 30, 15;903.46 162% - NOTES .. m1.1, m2.1, m2.2,.m4.1, m4.2, m5.1, 10.04.05 F&I 1 split 1 sds, 4 exh sys, J 6 1112" amfg 1 fds, 8 grilles, 6 louvers ' Mb Page 1 of 1 Permit # : O 9 1 (0 U CITY OF SANFORD PERMIT APPLICATION Date: Job Address: 3—Jta4 6MA Av4pp prLtyt;. 'PIwFIF40 F-WILIPA 3 -1-1•1 Description of Work: hiew M-ft %t4u. atwu %4 b%%L& -yf1 'F&L VA&%1 .,w *j N tAtuft, Historic District: Nib Zoning: 44 - Z Value of Work: coot 4W Permit Type: Building 1L Electrical _A Mechanical _ Plumbing 7e Fire Sprinkler/Alarm Pool Electrical: New Service — # of AMPS (660 Addition/Alteration Change of Service Temporary Pole _ Mechanical: Residential Non -Residential _)L Replacement New (Duct Layout & Energy Calc. Required) Plumbing/ New Commercial: # of Fixtures # of Water & Sewer Lines Z # of Gas Lines Plumbing(New Residential: # of Water Closets Z Plumbing Repair — Residential or Commercial Occupancy Type: Residential Commercial X Industrial Total Square Footage: Construction Type: 114 # of Stories: _L # of Dwelling Units: e' Flood Zone: (FEMA torn required for other than X) Parcel #: 11 - ZO • 30 . '9 VA • O dy 0 • COt0 (Attach Proof of Ownership & Legal Description) Owners Name & Address: vm Hcamot. t 0- TO _1 o Nttstttt:T69,104 311'1 ` Phone: Contractor Name & Address: 1L*0 1MWdN39eh AM& , lyp"Inn pNIL a n • 3M&j State License Namber: Phone & Fax: %S1.18 r . Ir'i0 Contact Person:—"" AI-154 Phone: Its • 14 t;o Bonding Company. Address: Mortgage Leader: Address: Architect/Engiaeer. Address: 1447.0 Phone: _ 7-0% • & Z; •r{&K(v Fax: 70& 4011 • 11%2jq Application is hereby made to obtain a permit to do the work and installations as indicated. I certify that no work or installation has commenced prior to the issuance of a permit and that all work will be performed to mat standards of all laws regulating construction in this jurisdiction. I understand that a separate permit must be secured for ELECTRICAL WORK, PLUMBING, SIGNS, WELLS, POOLS, FURNACES, BOILERS, HEATERS, TANKS, and AIR CONDITIONERS, etc. OWNER'S AFFIDAVIT: I certify that all of the foregoing information is accurate and that all work will be done in compliance with all applicable laws regulating construction and zoning. WARNING TO OWNER: YOUR FAILURE TO RECORD A NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT MAY RESULT iN YOUR PAYING TWICE FOR IMPROVEMENTS TO YOUR PROPERTY. IF YOU INTEND TO OBTAIN FINANCING, CONSULT WITH YOUR LENDER OR AN ATTORNEY BEFORE RECORDING YOUR NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT. NOTICE; In addition to the requirements of this permit, them may be additional restrictions applicable to this property that may be found in the public records of this county, and there may be additional permits required from other governmental entities such as water management districts, state agencies, or federal agencies. Acceptance of permit is verification that wit notify the owner of the 14prortyoftherequirementsofFloridaLaw, FS 71 Signature of OwnWAgent Da; Signature of tor/Agent Date Print Owner/Agent's N e Print Contractor/Agent's Name / jt, p0 of Florida Date Signaor (Notary- tale to qYL a Jean A.-SrownCommission # DD292477 0 y r; Expires May 20, Q08 1 N : Commission # DD298590 r'I r r tladad T y Known to Me or Contractor/Agent is X Ir gS]June 19, 2008 Produced ID —Produced iD ""'anoa, cio, aooaatata APPLICATION APPROVED BY: Bldg: initial & Date) Special Conditions: Zoning: Initial & Date) Utilities: FD: initial & Date) (Initial & Date) V3 L/, a / 9 - S"7 CITY OF SANFORD PERMIT APPLICATION RECEIVED FEB U 2 2006 Permit # ou.- I O> Job Address: _ W • I-&% MAtw Rt- Date: Description of Work-. 4WA tsAMK tt. mnkl6t, W I t>&Iya — df" t•oc V0&%k1K6VJA VUUTUAL Historic District: I ND Zoning: 04- • 2 Value of Work: $ i t coo txt Permit Type: Building h Electrical k Mechanical Plumbing A Fire Sprinkler/Alarm Pool Electrical: New Service — # of AMPS 600 Addition/Alteration Change of Service Temporary Pole Mechanical: ResidI ential Non -Residential A Replacement New (Duct Layout & Energy Calc. Required) Plumbing/ New CI mmercial: # of Fixtures -2 _ # ofWater & Sewer Lines # of Gas Lines /) _ Plumbing/ New Residential: # of Water Closets 2 Plumbing Repair — Residential or Commercial y OccupancyType: Residential Commercial Industrial Total Square Footage: J "' Construction Type: 11 # of Stories: # of Dwelling Units: .Bzpq__ FloodZone: (FEMA form required for other than X) I Parcel #: OO\ O (Attach Proof of Ownership & Legal Description) I Owners Name & Address: bTA kkiJ\bM FA w t!4 Q? 1. . v • is •r I s C w ih t as taut. I r Ll+-Ut7A &Q-lib Phone: Contractor Name & lAddress: BS tlrtFrQ.V AI Mt9 State License Number: Phone & Fax: Contact Person: Phone: Bonding Company: Address: Mortgage Lender: Address: Architect/ Engineer: Address: 147, A-16 Phone: 2o6. 623• 40t(6 q S l•t Fax: U(P • b7-3 • (46?-K Application is hereby inade to obtain a permit to do the work and installations as indicated. 1 certify that no work or installation has commenced prior to the issuance of a permit and that all work will be performed to meet standards of all laws regulating construction in this jurisdiction. 1 understand that a separate permit must be secured for ELECTRICAL WORK, PLUMBING, SIGNS, WELLS, POOLS, FURNACES, BOILERS, HEATERS, TANKS, and AIR CONDITIONERS, etc. OWNER' S AFFIDAVIT: 1 certify that all of the foregoing information is accurate and that all work will be done in compliance with all applicable laws regulating construction and zoning. WARNING TO OWNER: YOUR FAILURE TO RECORD A NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT MAY RESULT IN YOUR PAYING TWICE FOR IMPROVEMENTS TO YOUR PROPERTY. IF YOU INTEND TO OBTAIN FINANCING, CONSULT WITH YOUR LENDER OR AN ATTORNEY BEFORE i RECORDING YOUR NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT. NOTICE: In addition to the requirements of this permit, there may be additional restrictions applicable to this property that may be found in the public records of this county, and there may be additional permits required from other governmental entities such as water management districts, state agencies, or federal agencies. Acceptance of permit is verification that I will notify the owner of he property of the requirements of Florida Lien Law, FS 713. G ' 174 0 6 Signature of Owner/Agent Date Signature of Contractor/Agent + + t Date Stw C Qr1cs 13R4N Prt w er/Agent' Name Print Contractor/Agent'M I er 1i r, 14 " I A Signature of Notary -State of Fleriia Date Signature of Notary-S a of lada . T to Owner/ Agent is _' Personally Known to Me or Contractor/Agent is Produced ID _ Produced ID rAk•' ` APPLICATION APPROVED BY: Bldg: 1 tilities: J P Z a 'FD: Initial & ate) nitial & Date) (Initial & Date) '%.- (Initial- Dal-14 Special Conditions: _. 1. umn y IMPACT FEES y9/ sD !33,46 Y Division of Corporations Pagel of 2 1'/]iC 7AI? r—, -,a-I . -- -T- . - ._,.. F' _.. fe- u$li'Ig.. U1Y 1 Florida Limited Partnership D M HUBER FAMILY LIMITED PARTNERSHIP PRINCIPAL ADDRESS 625 MAIN STREET SUITE 27 WINDERMERE FL 34786 Changed 03/21/2005 MAILING ADDRESS P.O. BOX 730 WINDERMERE FL 34786 Changed 03/23/2004 Document Number FEI Number Date Filed A03000001168 N/AE 08/ 15/2003 State Status Effective Date FL ACTIVE NONE Actual Contribution 680,000.00 Registered Ajaent Name & Address HUBER, DONALD M 8038 WHITFORD COURT WINDERMERE FL 34786 General Partner Detail Name & Address Document Number D & S HUBER COMPANY 8038 WHITFORD COURT P03000055417 WINDERMERE FL 34786 http://www.sunbiz.org/scripts/cordet.exe?al =DETFIL&nl=AO3000001168&n2=NAMFW... 3/30/2006 Division of Corporations Page 2 of 2 Annual Reports Report Year Filed Date 2004 03/23/2004 2005 03/21 /2005 2006 01/10/2006 Previous Filing j Return to Est--j Next Filing No Events No Name History Information Document Images Listed below are the images available for this filing. 01/10/2006 -- ANNUAL REPORT 03/21/2005 -- ANN REP/UNIFORM BUS REP 03/23/2004 -- ANN REP/UNIFORM BUS REP 08/15/2003 -- Domestic LP THIS IS NOT OFFICIAL RECORD; SEE DOCUMENTS IF QUESTION OR CONFLICT Corporations Inquiry ' Corporations Help http://www. sunbiz.org/scripts/cordet.exe?a 1=DETFIL&n 1=AO3000001168&n2=NAMFW... 3/30/2006 Division of Corporations , ki Page 1 of 2 ins ark+f-r,C, r ziiu s r*iltit,ar. :I U U1 ,C Ipqu Florida Profit D & S HUBER COMPANY PRINCIPAL ADDRESS 625 MAIN ST SUITE #27 WINDERMERE FL 34786 Changed 02/28/2005 MAILING ADDRESS P.O. BOX 730 WINDERMERE FL 34786 Changed 02/25/2004 Document Number FEI Number Date Filed P03000055417 200033316 05/19/2003 State Status Effective Date FL ACTIVE NONE Registered Agent Name & Address HUBER, DONALD M 8038 WHITFORD COURT WINDERMERE FL 34786 Officer/Director Detail Name & Address Title HUBER, DONALD M 8038 WHITFORD CT. P WINDERMERE FL 34786 HUBER, SUSAN F 8038 WHITFORD CT. D WINDERMERE FL 34786 Annual Reports http://www.sunbiz.org/scripts/cordet.exe?al=DETFIL&n 1=PO3000055417&n2=NANIFW... 3/30/2006 Division of Corporations 0 Page 2 of 2 Report Year Filed Date 2004 02/25/2004 2005 02/28/2005 2006 03/27/2006 Previous Filing j Return to List j Next Filing No Events No Name History Information Document Images Listed below are the images available for this filing. 03/27/2006 -- ANNUAL REPORT 02/28/2005 -- ANN REP/UNIFORM BUS REP 02/25/2004 -- ANN REP/UNIFORM BUS REP 05/20/2003 -- Domestic Profit THIS IS NOT OFFICIAL RECORD; SEE DOCUMENTS IF QUESTION OR CONFLICT Corporations Inquiry Corporations Help" http://www.sunbiz.org/scripts/cordet.exe?al =DETFIL&nl=PO3000055417&n2=NAMFW... 3/30/2006 Seminole County Property Appraiser Get Information by Parcel Number Page 1 of 1 r1Ai.D.7.. AleON,CFA.I...rA f r 4t Ae rF' 3.;: +ra `r r..'•':f..' : w. 3Gf1,RiQC&'Gtie"f.ffs'9Y PL. FlitY.6r 2 d. i • vV., 22: • r ••} •: • f•'•.:':<}•:,, dvi{}:••.}'•'..:..,... 1. :.' N.... i1G:: 'r'rS:.ltFO5i7: FL..:f;r`"JT -7G. 4i3T - ilS-'-:5i68 r • . x`. .,F.}::{•::::::: r,7;:. f <{:.!'4i . y{ ' - 2006 WORKING VALUE SUMMARY GENERAL Value Method: Market Parcel Id: 11-20-30-519-0000-0010 Number of Buildings: 0 Owner: DM HUBER FAMILY LP Depreciated Bldg Value: $0 Mailing Address: PO BOX 730 Depreciated EXFT Value: $0 City,State,ZipCode: WINDERMERE FL 34786 Land Value (Market): $468,704 Property Address: 3764 ORLANDO DR SANFORD 32771 Land Value Ag: $0 Facility Name: Just/Market Value: $468,704 Tax District: S4-SANFORD- 17-92 REDVDST Assessed Value (SOH): $468,704 Exemptions: Exempt Value: $0 Dor: 10-VAC GENERAL-COMMERCI Taxable Value: $468,704 Tax Estimator SALES 2005 VALUE SUMMARY Deed Date Book Page Amount Vac/Imp Qualified 2005 Tax Bill Amount: $9,353 SPECIAL WARRANTY 10/2004 05494 1014 $490,000 Vacant No 2005 Taxable Value: $468,704 DEED DOES NOT INCLUDE NON -AD VALOREM Find Sales within this DOR Code ASSESSMENT LAND LEGAL DESCRIPTION Land Assess MethodFrontage Depth Land Units Unit Price Land Value PLATS; Pick... .=;= SQUARE FEET 0 0 58,588 8.00 $468,704 LOT 1 LIVE OAK CENTER PB 62 PGS 9 - 11 NOTE: Assessed values shown are NOT certified values and therefore are subject to change before being finalized for ad valore tax purposes. If you recently purchased a homesteaded property your next ear's property tax will be based on JusUMarket value. re_web. seminole_county_title?PARC EL=11203051900000010&coparcel=203 2/2/200 r'1 SANFORD FIRE DEPARTMENT FIRE PREVENTION DIVISION 300 N. Park Ave., Sanford, Fl. 32771 / P. O. Box 1788, Sanford, Fl. 32772 407 302-2520 / FAX (407) 302-2526 R Plans Review Sheet Date: February 7, 2006 Business Address: 3764 Orlando Drive Occur. Ch.38 Business Business Name: Washing Mutual Ph. () FAX () Contractor: To be determined Ph. (206)623-4646 FAX (206)623-4625 Reviewed [ ] Reviewed with comment [NJ Rejected [ ] Reviewed by: Timothy Robles, Fire Marshal/Plans Examiner —74o o: Comment: Plans reviewed as Business Occupancy. FD reserves right to require applicable code requirements if occupancy use changes. 4,000 sq ft building 1.1 Application —New Building. 1.2 Mixed — N/A 1.3 Special Definitions — Meets F.F.P.C. - 6.1.11.1 (Record keeping/Business transactions). 1.4Classification of Occupancy — Business F.F.P. C. 1.5 Classification of Hazard of Contents — Ordinary/6.2.2.2. 1.6 Minimum Construction — N/R 2.2 Means of Egress Components — O.K. 2.3 Capacity of Egress — One, person per 100 sq ft (50 or more occupants shall comply with 44' isle ways 2.4 Number of Exits — O.K. two remote exits (less than 75' ft OK) 2.5 Arrangement of Egress — O.K., will field verify 2.6 Travel Distance — O.K. 1 SANFORD FIRE DEPARTMENT FIRE PREVENTION DIVISION 300 N. Park Ave., Sanford, Fl. 32771 / P. O. Box 1788, Sanford, Fl. 32772 407 302-2520 /FAX (407) 302-2526 2.7 Discharge from Exits — O.K., will field verify 2.8 Illumination of Means of Egress — O.K.; will field verify 2.9 Emergency Lighting — O.K.; will field verify 2.10 Marking of Means of Egress — O.K.; will field verify? 2.11 Special Features — 3.1 Protection of Vertical Openings — 3.2 Protection from Hazards — N/N 3.3 Interior Finish - Class "A " 3.4 Detection, Alarm and Communications Systems Not Required 3.5 Extinguishing Requirements — as per NFPA 10 — Two (2) 3A rated fire extinguishers required in this building mounted at 36 "from floor to bottom see blueprints Mount one fire extinguisher in break room. 3.6 Corridors — 4 Special Provisions 5 Building Services 5.1 Utilities — 5.2 HVAC — 5.3 Elevators, Escalators, Conveyors: 5.4 Rubbish Chutes, Incinerators, and Laundry Chutes — N/A Sanford City Code — Chapter 9 Fire Sprinklers: Monitoring: N/A Other: NFPA 1 3-5.1 Fire Lanes — Not Required; 3-6.1 Key Box — Not Required; will field verify, see application 3-7.1 Bldg. Address Number Posted and Legible - Required; will field verify, SIX 6') in size contrasting in color (see blueprints) N CITY OF SANFORD FIRE DEPARTMENT FEES FOR SERVICES PHONE # 407-302-1091 * FAX #: 407-330-51677- 1 DATE: 0G PERMIT #: ©V — ` BUSINESS NAME/ PROJECT: in, I ;-6 16L.-- ADDRESS: 2 r IEJEcl I A z Y- . r PHONE NO. CONST. INSP. [ ] C / O INSP.:[ 1 REINSPECTION [ ] PLANS REVIEW F. A. [ ] F.S. [ HOOD [ ] PAINT BOOTH [ ] BURN P MIT [ ] TENT PERMIT f ] ANK PER [ ] OTHER TOTAL FEES: $ 1 ' RO (PER UNIT SEE BELOW) %M0 COMMENTS: Address / Bldp,. # / Unit # 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. H. 12. 13, 14. 15, 16. 17. 18. 19, 20. Sguare Footage Fees per Bldg. / Unit Fees must be paid to Sanford Building Department, 300 N. Park Ave., Sanford, FI. 32771 Phone # -407- 330- 5656. Proof of Payment must be made to Fire Prevention division before any further services can take place. I certify that the above is true and correct and that I will comply with all applicable codes and ordinances of the City of Sanford, Florida. Sanford Fire tion Divisio Applicant's Signature DEVELOPN,[ NT FXE WQ tKSHEET Utility Department v'yq L Date Za14-06— Project Name: Gti/9Sy a T• phone:- owner/Contact Person: Address. Residential Non- Residential 1) TYPE OF DEVELOPMENT: R . s a Family ' Multi -Family Commercial; Industrial . 2)- TYPE OF UNIT( )- Single 3) TOTAL NUMBER OF UNITS or.pgLlpINGS: i 4) TYPE OF UTILITYCONNECTION: Individual MasterElTapRequired Tap Existing a) Meter: In . b) Sewer Tap: Individ ' Common Tap Required Tap Existing s/,-inch -y2-inch 2-inch• Supplied by El 5) WATER METER SIZE 1inch ® 1 Contractor None individual Master Supplied by El6) AWS METER: Meter- Meter. Contractor a Meter Size: '/.-inch 1-inch 1 %cinch 2-inch, Supplied byt .. . Contractor SL M—MARY OF IMPACT FEES METER SET -aid TAP CI3AR Water impact fees........ $ —Ly COMMENTS;, , Sewer impact fees...C —' Water Meter set .......... $ i Water Meter set an Meter deposit and S/C.- $ f,- pSewertap ............. $.. .. .. '• I AWS Meter Set...,,..' $ AWS Meter Tap & Set..$ , TOTAL DUE 9......... $ oe Signature - Utility Director or Engineer Date: Z L Updated: July, 2005 I, I Page 1 of 2 City of Sanford Utility Department P.O. Box 1788, Sanford, Fl. 32772 Phone (407) 330-5641 City Of Sanford Utility Department DEVELOPMENT FEE WORKSHEET (cont.) Water System Impact Fees Equivalent Residential Connectron (ERC) = 300'Gallons Per Day (GPD) Residential three (3) bedrooms or more. 1193/Unit - Single family structure, or unit containing o is based on 894,50/UIi t - Multi -family unit or Mobile Home unit containing less than three (3) bedrooms. (This categoryry judgment/assumption, estimation that such fa y.uOi .on average require,75% - 225 GPD single family unit•) Commercial — Industrial.— Institudonslup 1193 /ERU - Fixture unit schedule from So Plumbing Code will be used. One ERU will be charged connection and betotwenty (2) fixture units. For projects having more than twenty (20) fixture units the Impact Fee will be determined by incrementsof.25% based on multiples of five (5) fixture units. abova-'the" twenty' (20) fixture unit base for the first ERU. (Example: twenty-five (25) fixture units will be rated as 1.25 ERU; twenty-six (26) fixture units will be rated as 1.5ERU.) Sewer System Im WEEquivalent Residential Connections a 300 Gallons Per Day (GPD) Residential S2688/ Unit - Single family structure'or multi -family unit containing than (3) bedrooms ormore: S2016/ Unit • Multi -family unit or Mobile Home unit containing less than three (3) bedrooms. (This category is based on judgmentlassumption/ estimation that :such family units on,$verage require 750/9 of _water and sewer service of an average single family unit,) Commercial — Industrial — Institutional " 52688/ ERU -Fixture unit schedule from Southern Plumbing Codb will be useii: `One Eii-&— it be charged for connection and up to twenty (20) fixture units. For projects having more than twenty (20) fixture Units the Impact Fee will be incrementsof259/o based on multiples of five (5) fixture unitsiabove thc.twenty'(20) :fixture unit base for the first ERU. ( Example: twenty-five (25) fixture units will be rated as 125 ERU; twenty-six (26) fixture units will be rated as 1.5 ERU.) 185 L. For traps larger than 2 inches, trench type drains and floor sinks use Table 709.2. unit value: " . .. • . AshowerheadoverabathtuborwhirlpoolbathtubattachmentsdoesnotincreasethedrainagcAAMunitvalueoffixturesnotlistedinTable709.I or for noting of devices intermittent Seesection709.2 through 709.4 for methods of computing flows. ' Trapsize will be consistent with the fixture outlet size.'For the purpose of corriputmg`loads on building drains and sewers, water closets or confirmedbytestiII& urinalsshallnotbeWiledatalowerdrainagefixtureunitunlessthewervalueswaterclosets rmurinals shall not be rated at a lower drainage fixture unit For thepurposeofcomputingloadsonbuildingdrainsandsewers. unless the lower values are confirmed by testing. TABLE 7092 DRAINAGE FIXTURE UNITS FOR FIXTURE DRAINS OR TRAPS FDnVRE DRAM OR DRAJNAGE FIXTURE TRAP SIZE ( facba)- UNIT VALUE _ 1 % 2 3 = F• V. 2 % 4 3 5 4 li COMMERCIAL — INDUSTRIAL — INSTITUTIONAL FEE CALCULATION: Total Fixture Units (F.U.): Z S F.U. Total ERU( s): Total F.U. — divide by 20.3/ Z FRU(s) (F.U. / 20 = ERU ) Water Impact Fee: $1193 x . 21C ERU(s) — $ 101 Sewer Impact Fee: $2688 x 1. Z SERU(s) — S 33 Updaed: July, 2005 Page 2 or 2 Standard Plumbing Code 1997 COUNTY OF SEMINOLE ' t IMPACT FEE STATEMENT STATEMENT NUMBER: 06100002 DATE: April 04, 2006BUILDINGAPPLICATION #:.06-10000269 BUILDING PERMIT NUMBER: 06-10000269 UNIT ADDRESS: ORLANDO AVE. 3764 11-20-30-519-0000-0010 _ TRAFFIC ZONE:022 JURISDICTION: SEC: TWP: RNG: SUF: PARCEL: SUBDIVISION: TRACT: PLAT BOOK: PLAT BOOK PAGE: BLOCK: LOT: OWNER NAME: ADDRESS: APPADDRRESS: 3200SOUTHWEST INGTON EUFREEWAY, #1307 HOUSTON TX 77027 LAND USE: BANK DRIVE-THRU TYPE USE: WORK DESCRIPTION: CITY-SANFORD FEE BENEFIT RATE UNIT CALC UNIT TOTAL DUE TYPE - DIST SCHED RATE UNITS TYPE ROADS - ARTERIALS Bank/ Savings - ROADS JJ--cCOLLECTORS FIREn!0CUEngs CO - WIDE ORD Drive In 5,756.00 NIA Drive In 00 LIBRARY N/A SCHOOLS N/A PARKS N/A LAW ENFORCE N/A DRAINAGE N/A 4. 000 1000gsft 23,024.00 4. 000 1000gsft .00 00 00 00 00 00 AMOUNT DUE 23,024.00 STATEMENT y RECEIVED BY: /' SIGNATURE: PLEASE PRINT NAME) DATE: k/o4 NOTE TO RECEIVING SIGNATORY/APPLICANT• FAILURE TO NOTIFY OWNER AND ENSURETIMELYPAYMENTMAYRESULTINYOURLIABILITYFORTHEFEE. *** DISTRIBUTION: 1-BLDG DEPT 3-APPLICANT 2- FINANCE 4-LAND MANAGEMENT NOTE** PERSONS ARE ADVISED THAT THIS IS A STATEMENT OF FEES DUE UNDER THE SEMINOLECOUNTYROADFIRE/RESCUE, LIBRARY AND/OR EDUCATIONAL ISSUANCEOFABUILDINGPERMIT. PERSONS ARE ALSO ADVISED THAT ANY RIGHTS OF THE APPLICANT, OR OWNER, TO APPEAL THE CALCULATION OF ANY OF THE ABOVE MENTIONED IMPACT FEES MUST BE EXERCISED BY FILING A WRITTEN REQUEST WITHIN 45 CALENDAR DAYSOFTHERECEIVINGSIGNATUREDATEABOVEBUTNOTLATERTHANCERTIFICATEOFOCCUPANCYOROCCUPANCY. THA REQUEST FOR REVIEW MUST MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF. THE COUNTY LAND DEVELOPMENT CODE. COPIES OF RULES GOVERNING APPEALS MAY BE PICKED UP, OR REQUESTED, FROMTHEPLANIMPLEMENTATIONOFFICE: 1101 EAST FIRST STREET, SANFORDFL, 32771; 407-665-7356. PAYMENT SHOULD BE MADE TO: SEMINOLE COUNTY OR CITY OF SANFORD BUILDING DEPARTMENT 1101 EAST FIRST STREET SANFORD, FL 32771 PAYMENT SHOULD BE BY CHECK OR MONEY ORDER AND SHOULD REFERENCE THECOUNTYBUILDINGPERMITNUMBERATTHE `POP LEFT OF THIS STATEMENT. THIS STATEMENT IS NO LONGER VALID IF A BUILDING PERMIT IS NOT*** ISSUED WITHIN 60 CALENDAR DAYS OF THE RECEIVING SIGNATURE DATE ABOVE DETAIL OF CALCULATION AVAILABLE UPON REQUEST. CALL 407-665-7356. r-60 MNyPvia R 5"li GIY a.Jw"91W I A& Permit Number Parcel Identification Number I1-20-30 -S19-DOOd•dD/DI Prepared by: Return to: NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT . . State of --0 /d.d County of '797"Iu,04C MARYANNE eitlftiE, VLEldt OF C1RWIT MW EENIMILF_ LUINIFY OX C>f?(W Dg 0439; UpA) CLERK'S 0 2006059643 RECORDED 04/13/2006 11.06:11 AN' WWRDING FEES 10.00 RECUIW 8Y t holden UteIMIED COPX MAR NN MORSE 1 R RC IT COURT IA, UN X. FLORIDA APR '1 The undersigned hereby gives notice that improvement(s) rovement s will be made to certain real property, Z Y p () p p rty, and in accordance with Chapter 713, Florida Statutes, the following information is provided in this Notice of Commencement. I l . Description of property (legal description of the property, and street address if available). L oT / , uaE OAX WvVu C , AaoIV P44T 7-#6f-tVX- Q 0V& b 2, PA, rr r 9 V444 I/ Cv vwTYl Ftoee49 - 3 7b y 02[4-*##o o D 2. General description of improvements) Pogo, F6 r 3277/ 132* vui 84"k, 3. Owner information Name WASH/NGriPw MWTW 41, Telephone Number 71J - Sy3- L.390 Address3200swFl:<' WAY Fax Number 713-S9f3-7$,1S Hous"N. TiVoAS -770Z77 Interest in Property: I-QSEWiDe-e 4. Fee Simple Title Holder (if other than the owner shown above) Name Telephone Number Address Fax Number 5. Contractor Name gt.Ro 44fJWoAre3,Tft, Address 19 6 0 r t wovc s d nl 40C w, T" A4", ori, 327E 6. Surety (if any) Name Address Telephone Number 907- 700- /5/S"0 Fax Number Y07. 700 - Iy6 jTelephone Number Fax Number Amount of bond $ 7. Lender (if any) Name Telephone Number Address ( Fax Number 8. Persons within the State of Florida designated by Owner upon whom notices or other documents may be servedasprovidedby §713.130)(a)7., Florida Statutes. Name Telephone Number Address Fax Number 9. In addition to himself or herself, Owner designates the. following to receive a copy of the Lip nor's Notice asprovidedin §713.13(1)(b), Florida Statutes. Name Telephone Number . Address Fax Number 10. Expiration date of notice of commencement (the expiration date is one year from the date.of recording mk-sss different date is specified): Ce ' Date Signed Si re o wrier [ I=: per §713.13(1)(g), "owner must sign ...and no one else may be permitted to sign in his or her stead." SW n to an, subscri ed befo me this C21 I day of ' _ , ZO s b IlIt . . y who is X. ersonally known tome OR -produced as identification. DE` IDRE CIWIN $i ature of Not Notory Publicgnary (notarial seal must appear below) Fume Revised: aN State of Texas My Commission Expires -. February 11, 2007 + e Florida Department of Community Affairs EnergyGauge F1aCom v 2.11 FORM 40OC-2004 Prescriptive Compliance for Commercial Buildings Jurisdiction: SANFORD, SEMINOLE COUNTY, FL (691500) Short Desc: 050380 Project: Washington Mutual Owner: Address: Live Oak Center 3764 Orlando Drive City: Sanford State: Florida PermitNo: 0 Zip: 32771 Storeys: 1 Type: Retail Conditioned Area: 3881 • denotes lighted Class: Renovation to existing building Cond + UnCond Area: 3881 area. Does not include wall crosection areas Max Tonnage: 4.2 (if different, write in) Compliance Summary Component Design Criteria Result ENVELOPE PRESCRIPTIVE PASSES LIGHTING POWER 5,295.00 5,600.92 PASSES LIGHTING CONTROLS PASSES EXTERNAL LIGHTING None Entered HVAC SYSTEM PASSES PLANT None Entered WATER HEATING SYSTEMS PASSES PIPING SYSTEMS PASSES Met all required compliance from Check List? Yes/No/NA IMPORTANT NOTE: An input report Print -Out from EnergyGauge Com of this design building must be submitted along with this Compliance Report. 1 /20/2006 EnergyGauge FlaCom v 2.11 FORM 40OC-2004 I hereby certify that the plans and specifications covered by this calculation are in compliance wi Efficiency Code. PREPARED BY: DATE: I hereby certify that this building is in compliance with the Florida Energy Efficiency Code. Review of the plans and specifications covered by this calculation indicates compliance with the Florida Energy Code. ,Before construction is completed, this building will be inspected for compliance in accordance with Section 553.908, F.S. BUILDING OFFICIAL: DATE: PLANS RRIEWED CITY OF SANFORD OWNER AGENT - DATE: If required by Florida law, I hereby certify (') that the i system design is in REGISTRATIONcompliancewiththeFloridaEnergyCode. No. ARCHITECT: ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DESIGNER I GregoryiR. Schnackel PE 0048442 / FL IR. LIGHTING SYSTEM DESIGNER: Gregory Schnackel PE 0048442 / FL MECHANICAL SYSTEM DESIGNER: Gregory R. Schnackel PE 0048442 / FL PLUMBING SYSTEM DESIGNER: Gregory R. Schnackel PE 0048442 / FL Signature is required where Florida Law requires designito be performed by registered design professionals. Typed names and registration numbers may be used where, all relevant information is contained on signed/sealed plans. Project: 050380 Title: Washington Mutual Type: Retail WEA File: Orlando.TMY) Method C: Prescriptive Envelope Compliance Item Zone Description I Design Limit Meet Req Glass RTUS Percent glass Max allowed .000 50.000 Yes Skylights RTUS Percent Skylight Max allowed .000 5.000 Yes Glass ACU/COND Percent glass Max allowed .000 50.000 Yes Skylights ACU/COND Percent Skylight Max allowed .000 5.000 Yes Meets Prescriptive Envelope Requirements -- PASSES 1 /20/2006 EnergyGauge FlaCom v 2.11•FORM 40OC-2004 N i External Lighting Compliance Description Category Allowance Area or Length ELPA CLP W/Unit) or No. of Units W) W) Sgft or ft) I None Project: 050380 Title: Washington Mutual Type: Retail WEA File: Orlando.TMY) Lighting Power Compliance Space Ashrae Description Area Height No. of Design Effective Allowance ID sq.ft) I (ft) Spaces W) W) W) 101 18,00 Banking Activity Area 217 I 10.0 1 576 276 326 102 18,00 Banking Activity Area 2,639 10.0 1 6118 3886 3,958 103 18,00 Banking Activity Area 126 10.0 1 124 124 189 105 18,00' Banking Activity Area 297 10.0 1 248 248 445 108 6 Toilet and Washroom 66 10.0 1 62 62 59 109 1 Electrical Mechanical 18 I 10.0 1 17 17 27 Equipment Room - General 110 6 Toilet and Washroom 67 10.0 1 62 62 60 111 5 Corridor 85 10.0 1 124 124 42 112 9 Food Service - Bar/Lounge 185 10.0 1 248 248 222 113 18,00' Banking Activity Area 83 10.0 1 124 124 124 107 1 Electrical Mechanical 98 10.0 1 124 124 147 Equipment Room - General Design 7827 (W) PASSES Effective: 5295 (W) Allowance: 5600.922 (W) 1/20/2006 EnergyGauge FlaCom v 2.11 FORM 400C-2004 Project: 050380 Title: Washington Mutual Type: Retail WEA File: Orlando.TMY) Lighting Controls Compliance Acronym Ashrae Description Area No. of Design Min Compli- ID sq.ft) Tasks CP CP ance 101 001 Banking Activity Area 217 0 1 1 PASSES 102 001 Banking Activity Area 2,639 0 6 2 PASSES 103 001 Banking Activity Area 126 0 1 1 PASSES 105 001 Banking Activity Area 297 0 1 1 PASSES 108 6 Toilet and Washroom 66 0 1 1 PASSES 109 1 Electrical Mechanical Equipment 18 0 1 1 PASSES Room - General 110 6 Toilet and Washroom 67 0 1 1 PASSES 111 5 Corridor I 85 0 1 1 PASSES 112 9 Food Service - Bar/Lounge 185 0 1 1 PASSES 113 001 Banking Activity Area 83 0 1 1 PASSES 107 1 Electrical Mechanical Equipment 98 0 1 1 PASSES Room - General PASSES 1/20/2006 EnergyGauge Fla i m v 2.11 FORM 400C-2004 Project: 050380 Title: Washington Mutual Type: Retail WEA File: Orlando.TMY) System Report Compliance ACU/CON ACU-1/COND-1 Constant Volume Air Cooled No. of Units D I Split System < 65000 Btu/hr 1 Component Category Cap city Design Eff Design IPLV Comp- Eff Criteria IPLV Criteriai liance Cooling System Air Cooled < 65000 Btu/h I 11.40 10.00 8.00 PASSES Cooling Capacity Air Handling Air Handler (Supply) - 0.09 0.90 PASSES System -Supply Constant Volume I RTU-1,2,3, RTU-1,2,3,4 Constant Volume Air Cooled No. of Units 4 Single Package System < 65000 Btu/hr 4 Component Category Capacity Design ER Design IPLV Comp- Eff Criteria IPLV Criteria liance Cooling System Air Cooled < 65000 Btu/h 11.30 9.70 8.00 PASSES Cooling Capacity I Air Handling Air Handler (Supply) - 0.70 0.90 PASSES System -Supply Constant Volume IPASSES I Plant Compliance Description Installed Size Design Mini Design Min Category Comp No Eff Eff IPLV IPLV liance I None 1/20/2006 EnergyGauge FlaCoi v 2.11 FORM 40OC-2004 Project: 050380 Title: Washington Mutual Type: Retail WEA File: Orlando.TM1) Water Heater Compliance Description Type Category Design Min Design Max Comp Eff Eff Loss Loss liance HWH-I Electric water heater <= 12 [kW) 0.98 0.92 PASSES PASSES Project: 050380 Title: Washington Mutual Type: Retail WEA File: Orlando.TMY) Piping System Compliance Category Pipe Dia Is I Operating Ins Cond Ins Req Ins Compliance inches] Runoutl Temp [Btu-in/hr Thick [in] Thick [in] IF] .SF.FI I Domestic and Service Hot Water 0.25 False 105.00 0.28 0.50 0.50 PASSES Systems I PASSES 1/20/2006 EnergyGauge FlaCom v 2.11 FORM 400C-2004 Project: 050380 Title: Washington Mutual Type: Retail WEA File. Orlando.TMY) Other Required Compliance Category Section Requirement (write N/A in box if not applicable) Check Infiltration 406.1 Infiltration Criteria have been met System 407.1 HVAC Load sizing has been performed Ventilation 409.1 Ventilation criteria have been met ADS 410.1 Duct sizing and Design have been performed T & B 410.1 Testing and Balancing will be performed Motors 414.1 Motor efficiency criteria have been met Lighting 415.1 Lighting criteria have been met O & M 102.1 Operation/maintenance manual will be provided to owner RooVCeil 404.1 R-19 for Roof Deck with supply plenums beneath it Report 101 Input Report PInt-Out from EnergyGauge FlaCom attached? 1 /20/2006 EnergyGauge FIaC i m v 2.11 FORM 40OC-2004 7 EnergyGauge FlaCom v 2.11 INPUT DATA REPORT Protect Information Project Name: 050380 Orientation: North Project Title: Washington Mutual Building Type: Retail Address: Live Oak Center Building Classification. Renovation to existing building 3764 Orlando Drive State: Florida No.of Storeys: 1 Zip: 32771 I GrossArea: 3881 Owner: Zones No Acronym Description Type I Area Multiplier Total Area IsQ Isn 1 RTUS RTU-1,2,3,4 CONDITIONED I 3782.8 1 3782.8 El ACU/COND ACU-I/COND-I CONDITIONED 98.0 1 98.0 1/20/2006 EnergyGauge FlaCom v 2.11 1 Spaces No Acronym Description Type Depth Width Height Multi Total Area Total Volume Iftl Iftl Iftl prier ]sf] Icil In Zone: RTUS 1 101 Foyer Banking Activity Area 20.79 10.44 10.00 1 217.0 2170.5 2 102 Financial Center Banking Activity Area 47.60 55.44 10.00 1 2638.9 26389.4 3 103 Security Room Banking Activity Area 12.16 10.36 10.00 1 126.0 1259.8 4 105 Workroom Banking Activity Area 20.81 14.27 10.00 1 297.0 2969.6 5 108 Mens Restroom Toilet and Washroom 9.30 7.10 10.00 1 66.0 660.3 6 109 Jan Electrical Mechanical 5.84 3.08 10.00 1 18.0 179.9 Equipment Room - General 7 110 Womens Restroom Toilet and Washroom 9.38 7.14 10.00 1 67.0 669.7 8 Ill Corridor Corridor 12.74 6.67 10.00 1 85.0 849.8 9 112 Breakroom Food Service - Bar/Lounge 13.21 14.00 10.00 1 184.9 1849.4 10 113 Workroom Banking Activity Area 9.23 8.99 10.00 1 83.0 829.8 In Zone: ACU/COND 1 107 Elec/Data Room Electrical Mechanical 14.89 6.58 10.00 1 98.0 979.8 Equipment Room - General Lighting No Type Category No. of Watts per Power Control Type No.of Luminaires Luminaire IW] Ctrl pts In Zone: RTUS In Space: 101 I Compact Fluorescent General Lighting 6 46 276 Manual On/Off I O 2 Incandescent Display/Accent Lighting 5 60 300 Manual On/Off 1 D In Space. 102 I Compact Fluorescent General Lighting 28 46 1288 Manual On/Off 1 1202006 EnergyGauge FlaCom v 2.11 2 Compact Fluorescent General Lighting 7 46 322 Manual On/Off 1 O 3 Incandescent General Lighting 16 23 368 Manual On/Off 1 O 4 Incandescent General Lighting 7 54 379 Manual Orr/Off 1 D 5 Incandescent General Lighting 4 54 216 Manual On/Off 1 0 6 Incandescent General Lighting 2 54 108 Manual On/Off 0 O 7 Incandescent General Lighting 1 60 60 Manual On/Off 0 O 8 Incandescent General Lighting 18 60 1080 Manual Or Off 0 0 9 Suspended Fluorescent Display/Accent Lighting 16 62 992 Manual Oa/Off 1 0 10 Suspended Fluorescent General Lighting 2 33 66 Manual On/Off 1 O 11 Suspended Fluorescent Display/Accent Lighting 20 62 1240 Manual On/Off 1 D In Space: 103 1 Recessed Fluorescent - General Lighting 2 62 124 Manual On/Off 1 D No vent In Space: 105 1 Recessed Fluorescent - General Lighting 4 62 248 Manual On/Off 1 O No vent In Space: 108 1 Suspended Fluorescent General Lighting 1 62 62 Occupancy sensor without 1 0 Daylighting In Space: 109 1 Compact Fluorescent General Lighting 1 17 17 Manual On/Off 1 In Space. 110 1 Suspended Fluorescent General Lighting 1 62 62 Occupancy Sensor with 1 Timer without Daylighting In Space: 111 I Recessed Fluorescent - General Lighting 2 62 124 Manual On/Off 1 O No vent In Space: 112 1 Recessed Fluorescent - General Lighting 4 62 248 Manual On/Off 1 O No vent In Space: 113 1 Recessed Fluorescent - General Lighting 2 62 124 Manual On/Off 1 No vent In Zone: ACU/COND In Space: 107 1/20/2006 EnergyGauge FlaCom v 2.11 3 I Recessed Fluorescent - No vent General Lighting 2 62 124 Manual On/Off I Walls No Description Type Width H (Effec) Multi 1ft1 111111 plier Area 1sf1 DirectionConductance Heat Dens. R-Value 18tu/hr. st F7 Capacity 11b/cf1 1h.sEF/Btu) 1Btu/sEF1 In Zone: Windows No Description Type Shaded U SHG 1Btu/hrsfFl Vis.Tr W H (Effec) Multi Total Area ftl Ifti plier Isn In Zone: In Wall: Doors No Description Type Shaded? Width H (Effec) Multi 1ft1 Ift) plier Area 1sf) Cond. Dens. Heat Cap. R-Value 1Btu/hr. sE F) 11b/cfi 1Btu/sE F) 1hsEF/Btu) In Zone: In Wall: Roofs No Description Type Width H (Effec) Multi 1ft] 1111 plier Area 1sf1 Tilt ldeg) Cond. Heat Cap Dens. R-Value 1Btu/hr. SE F1 1Btu/sE F1 jib/cf1 jhsEFBtu) In Zone: 1/20/2006 EnergyGauge FlaCom v 2.11 Skylights No Description Type U SHGC Vis.Trans W H (Effec) Multiplier Area Total Area IBtu/hrsfF) Ift) Ift) IS11 ISfI In Zone: In Roof: D Floors No Description Type Widtb H (Effec) Multi Area Cond. Heat Cap. Dens. R-Value Ift) Ift) plier Isfl IBtu/br. sf. FI IBtu/sE FI Ilb/cq IhsEFBtu) In Zone: D Systems ACU/COND ACU-1/COND-I Constant Volume Air Cooled Split No. Of Units 1 System <65000 Btu/hr Component Category Capacity Efficiency IPLV 1 Cooling System (Air Cooled < 65000 Bluth Cooling 17800.00 11.40 8.00 D Capacity) 2 Air Handling System -Supply (Air Handler (Supply) - 525.00 0.09 D Constant Volume) RTU-1,2,3,4 RTU-1,2,3,4 Constant Volume Air Cooled Single No. Of Units 4 Package System <65000 Btu/hr Component Category Capacity Efficiency IPLV 1 Cooling System (Air Cooled < 65000 Btu/h Cooling 50200.00 11.30 8.00 D Capacity) 2 Air Handling System -Supply (Air Handler (Supply) - 1600.00 0.70 D Constant Volume) 1/20/2006 EnergyGauge FlaCom v 2.11 Plant Equipment Category Size Inst.No ETf. IPLV Water Heaters W-Heater Description Capacit Cap.Vnit I/P Rt. EfYicienc Loss 1 Electric water heater 10 [Gal] 5 JkW] 0.9800 [En [Btu/h] Ext-Lighting Description Category No. of Watts per Area/ben/No. of units Luminaires Luminaire Isf/ft/NoJ Control Type Wattage IWI Piping No Type Operating Insulation Temperature Conductivity IFJ I Btu-in/h.sEF1 Nomonal pipe Diameter IinJ Insulation Thickness IinJ Is Runout? 1 Domestic and Service Hot Water Systems 105.00 0.28 0.25 0.50 No Fenestration Used Name Glass Type No. of Glass SHGC VLT Panes Conductance Btu/h.sf.FJ 1/20/2006 EnergyGauge FlaCom v 2.11 Materials Used Mat No Acronym Description Only R-Value RValue Thickness Used )h.sEFBtuJ IN Conductivity lBtu/h.1t.FJ Density lb/c1) SpecificHeat IBtu/lb.FJ Constructs Used No Name Simple Massless Conductance Heat Capacity Construct Construct lBtu/hsEFJ )Btu/sEFJ Density Ib/ctl RValue lhsLFBtu) Layer Material Material Thickness No. i11J Framing Factor 1/20/2006 EnergyGauge FlaCom v 2.11 l gai consultants transforming ideas into reality September 25, 2006 City of Sandford Building Department PO Box 1788 Sanford Florida 32772-1788 Re: Washington Mutual on US 17/02 '/4 mi North of Lake Mary Blvd. TO WHOM IT MAY CONCERN The Finished floor elevation of 49.94 conforms to the requirements set forth in the City of Sanford Section 18-4 as the site was constructed in substantial compliance with the approved Construction plans by AVID Engineering. Sincerely Linda J. Griffin 618 East South Street Orlando, FL 32801 Tel 407.423.8398 Fax 407.843.1070 www.gaiconsultants.com sees ------ •-- -. _. ... .. ._.'__•• sees.. - •----..._ sees _ _. f d ao rV en Q Vl toO40 N rV O 3 v LnLL mOO N en N m a i - ice - - - _- - - — -'. 71 i - ',_,`i '; a . ( I 1 1 I •,'— - -- . is .. _ — r'„-: — qp Washington-- Mutual i - . == `:._ I I I %' % - - 4.000 3G. I I III II I II -- - _ __,.: --•_.- • :4. -• someone t_ V i• The BOLD IS —BUILT IB'FORYI77ON si omm Aer.aw v eased an astssat ,e amur"nents tab'n at am sw,seFt mber Z1, 20" ey W Cansuttmstq, hHL #18 L South Street, Ortasda, Florida SMOt TeL I0I—I21—OSM. This anti wad' does under my direction and to believed to be accurate. - 0 Lbw.r. Cri P 45 Bad of Signing Porids S Not oo" withma ells s+rvsyore raised SOGL SIGN LEGEND yr - 77 Pw s 'ICTES 1 sau: I' = 2W 0 L JOO CC UJ Z2 CO) Q) r^ y gaf consultants al NGO su use same $nm aawea naa 321M Nat (MO 4U-6NO Pft= ND./ww No. ANOISLI2 3 of 15 7 ..... 7- ------ j., 22% L- Xip AT- i. 7: V r lui r af Washington t Washington Mutual F-Lz 4!L A, AN. ao sow As -ever m"muryom momon hmvm to eased an actual mvemourrmento taken at the .its Sn4mn8wr V. ZOM bv W Coneuttaw" hie. &F8 Jr. South Street Orfimvrda n"4" 3"Of rA 407-42383". 7hw work war done under vnV direction ant is b&Uewd to be accurst& c_..<.. ('' S-1 9 a V& J. Griffin t,4S #&4F JU b-d of S4r-W ReAds Pmfimerfional Und SunwVor Mat we" wahma am sur"Vom p4masure & ortow "w"d .eat I r-AA' 1--, *--" 1,& to #Sf" 01 2W w SCALL I - 2w GRADING LEGEND DRAINAGE STRUCTURES ERU CALCULATIONS rtm le NIET CRATE a.-----4a32 O TYPE T, NLET CRATE EL------4a22 BY MUD TYPE CRATE a--4am mAOOOLE NM a.-40.30 11 NV.- "09 NV.-4&74 (DL) S. NV.- WOO TYPE ' C PLET CRATE M-4" E. NV. 4173 S. NV.: 43-M 7' 7 INLET PROTECTICIN DETAIL sate I =' " I Q. Uj 0 O Ct U, Q 0 o -a 0 1-. 0 R;Q) U_ qz cc CL 60230 consultants m LOT som :TEXT njum mm D. O.T. I N D E.X o S 0 F"mm FILTER FAB-RIC JAC-K=-T PRwwT Nm/bAm No. A= 1=12 SKMT 4 of 15 4 ' • ' E , GIs Washington Mutual 49.94 F I--- III _ • r( E '(n. R C.O.' Y4LVF —: 71h : -: z C.O.- I• SERVICE AEIFA wrgy A— The BOLD AS --BUILT IIVN I)MATION shown Mason w bawd on aetuat +nsaa+oemrnto taken at the site September 21. zoos bV CU ConSUMMI186 Ina. s/s Z. South Strwt. ortando. rtorido 52801 Tsi 407-*23-839& This, work u4m done under my direction and to bstie"d to tat accurate. T/Z 4 J. GrifAn #45 D of Signing Ptaridis P*ef Land S Not valid without the Surveyors signature a ortgbwt Tsiwd at CAICAI Canis, o ta. ITK L8 /5804 FIRE FLOW 0EMAN1) o' 2W 40' SCALE 1' - 2W am- Q 0 0U 0 9 004 0 sr y gai consultants 0 "M ass EAST BOOM S11IT QaAIOO. FLOOM Snot ROM- (an m -am PNOJECT No./DAM No. A050MIL12 5 of 15 a 0 gai consultants transforming ideas into reality September 25, 2006 City of Sandford Building Department PO Box 1788 Sanford Florida 32772-1788 Re: Washington Mutual on US 17/02 '/4 mi North of Lake Mary Blvd. TO WHOM IT MAY CONCERN The Finished floor elevation of 49.94 conforms to the requirements set forth in the City of Sanford Section 18-4 as the site was constructed in substantial compliance with the approved Construction plans by AVID Engineering. Sincerely Linda J. Griffin t 618 East South Street Orlando, FL 32801 Tel 407.423,8398 Fax 407.843.1070 www.gaiconsultants.com A t qipp Washington Mutual Z 7;- Z. t "446 it - A 7. 7- Me SOLD AS-BVZLT INFOAMAT70N shown her"m is based an affftw "beastowntensw toter at Um a"* September zt, zoos by CAI CanvuUwWx,1n& 618 S. Ortarmia. Ybride I f TOL 407-423-M& This work was dam undirr my di0vatim and 118, bableved to be aeeurct& r4i P Do"' of 94mbw Not rebid witAosrt t" Survelpore rat"d MML La 03804 SIGH '-EGEND 7— SITE LEGEND E3 F Vr, C I WALe I' z 20' 1 U.1 K'- 902W y gai consultants mml eve Ew San" Ulm CMLVM RANX 32M PHOM. (an nmw No./wm AMISLI2 SHMT 3 of 15 FA 7k, 7- 44FOt L q$o irnl- ISO 12% 6.. z Washington FMutual 49-" F. ELz lit The SOLD AS-BVZLT MAMMON shown harem to based an actual wwanar"tente taken at the alto September 21, ZOM br CAI CanvultanW hw- M S. South Street Ortmuld, FtOr"s IWOf 79L 407-423-832& This work was done undrr any dbvetion mid is beavood to be accurate., r.p& J. Crifjvn 43 Plard" Prefe"donal ..Wr ju Dad Sof4—W Not "" wwund the Surveyors sign"" & vr4bwl red"d M&L 1--Alr Connsltmitq jh& LB #S#04 GRADING. LEGEND DRAINAGE STRUCTURES rtK 1c, gas rfK 'a, MET 9-1 Gull GmiE a ------ 4a22 NV.-"-u BLOOCM By MW ME T, MR.0 MIE a---M MANN= M EL-49.30 IL NV.- ".09 MV.-43.74 (M) S. Off.- ".M TWE e NLrr GRATE EL-4&" ENV. 43.73 S MI.- 43-M or 20' 40* SCALE I' - 201 ERLI CALCULATIONS INLET PROTEOTION DETAIL F. D. 0. T, INDEX No. --- '4--,30— - JACKETFILTERFABRIC scrt v = 20 oae 09-22 802W y gai consultants 0 MI 018 UP SOM SVM OftMXP. FUIM% 3200, MOM- (an m-Ase MO= MO./DASH NO. ADMISLI2 4 of 15 N 44 N 7— 4A4j4r*- 117 7 If A. V ol 21 VALVE' 6 Ap- Washington Mutual 4,000 so.. ft. 49.94 F.F. EL= 7— WATER BACK -FLOW J. I 7C C.OLN-, SERVO. . METER ........... ....... E The BOLD AS-DV7Lr INAPRAUTION shown hemon up bared on actual meaeurentents, taken at the vile'Septrnsher 21. 2006 bl, W Convultant@6 hic. 818 Z. South Stmt. Orlando. Florida $280f Tel. 407-423-8398. This work was done under my direction and it believed to be wourata. A— 9 rptaa J. Bad of Signing rwrwa Prof, Land Su&Qfor Not waNd without the Suru&Vary vignatury & original raised evol. CAF —, — hw- LN 83604 UTILITY LEG -END RE FLOW CENIAND w 20* 40' SNsiRTTM SCALE- I' - 20' WAL- 1* = 20' mm 09-22-M 002m y gal consultants ce mi ws Lw Sam S"m Comm nomm 3mm ROOM- (an m-sm P"XVT MCLAASH AMISLI SHEET 5of I Armour Unsderfer Engineering, INC 13456 SE 21"h Place, Suite 200, Bellevue, WA 98005 425) 614 - 0949 FAX (425) 614 - 0950 STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS FOR: WAMU South Sanford Live Oak Center, Sanford, Florida For: Callison Architecture, Inc. 1420 Fifth Avenue, Suite 2400 Seattle, WA 98101 Kit Chan Brian U nsderFer, P.E., S.E. r AUE Job No. 5338 WAMU SOUTH SANFORD Gravity Loading Roof Dead Load: Roofing 4 psf Metal Deck 2 psf Insulation 1.5 psf Joists 2 psf Ceiling 3 psf Misc / Mech 2.5 psf Tot 15 psf Live Load 25 psf Total Load = 40 psf Metal Decking Design Check of Spans = 3 Deck Type B-20 Max SDI Span = 7 3/4 ft from table Max C to C Span = 7 1/2 ft OK Allowable Load = 72 psf from table Total Load = 40 psf OK THEREFORE OK 4mnour Unsderfer Engineering, 13456 SE 27th PI., Ste. 200, Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 614-0949 Project: WAMU South Sanford Pg. No. Address: Sanford, FL Date: 12/27/05 Client: Callison Architecture, Inc. Job No.: 5338 Design of Open Web Joists J1 Open Web Joists in Canopy Span = 27 ft Max. Trib Width = 6.60 ft Roof Dead = 15 psf Roof Live = 25 psf J3 Open Web Joists in Main Building Span = 25 ft Max. Trib Width = 5.50 ft Roof Dead = 15 psf Roof Live = 25 psf Total load = 264.0 plf Total load = 220.0 plf Design Factor 1.15 Design Factor 1.15 Design Total Load = 303.6 plf Design Total Load = 253.0 pif Design Live Load = 165.0 plf Design Live Load = 137.5 plf Joist Size = 20K4 Joist Size = 161<3 Joist Weight = 7.6 plf Joist Weight = 6.3 plf Dead Capacity = 339 pif Dead Capacity = 260 pif Live Capacity = 247 plf Live Capacity = 167 pif LL ==> 0 of L/240 370.5 plf ( With Design Factor) LL ==> o of U240 250.5 pif ( With Design Factor) JOIST IS OK JOIST IS OK J1 Open Web Joists 20K4 @ 6.6' jJ3 Open Web Joists 16K3 @ 5.5' on center J2 Open Web Joists In Main Building Span = 22 ft Max. Trib Width = 6.70 ft Roof Dead = 15 psf Roof Live = 25 psf Total load = 268.0 pif Design Factor 1.15 Design Total Load = 308.2 pif Design Live Load = 167.5 pif Joist Size = 16K3 Joist Weight = 6.3 pif Dead Capacity = 337 pif Live Capacity = 247 pif LL ==> A of U240 370.5 pif ( With Design Factor) JOIST IS OK J2 Open Web Joists 16K3 @ 6.7' on center armour Unsderfer Engineering, 13456 SE 27th PI., Ste. 200, Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 614-0949 2roject: WAMU South Sanford Pg. No. Address: Sanford, FL Date: 12/27/05 Iient: Callison Architecture, Inc. Job No.: 5338 Design of Open Web Joists J5 Open Web Joists at Drive Thru Design of Joists With Mech. Weight J6 Open Web Joists at Bay 1 With Mechanical Unit Span = 37 ft Span = 27 ft Trib Width = 5.20 ft Trib Width = 6.70 ft Roof Dead = 15 psf' Roof Dead = 15 psf Roof Live = 25 psf Roof Live = 25 psf Total load = 208.0 pif Total load = 268.0 plf Design Factor 1.15 Design Factor 1.15 Design Total Load = 239.2 plf Design Total Load = 308.2 plf Design Live Load = 130.0 plf Design Live Load = 167.5 plf Joist Size = 22K6 Mechanical Unit = 85012 = 425 Ibs Joist Weight = 9.2 pif Mech. Design Wt. = 425 x 1.15 = 489 Ibs Dist. Fom End = 7 ft Dead Capacity = 243 plf Moment = 2534 ft-Ibs Live Capacity = 141 plf Mom. Live + Dead = 28085 ft-Ibs LL ==> A of L/240 211.5 pif ( With Design Factor) Mom. Max = 30619 ft-Ibs = 367 in -kips Reaction = 4523 Ibs JOIST IS OK New Total Load = 285.6 plf (Without Design Factor) 1.15 Open Web Joists 22K6 @ 5.2' on center New Design TL = 336.0 pif (With Design Factor) Joist Size = 18KCS2 ( Using KCS-Joists ) Joist Weight = 9 plf DESIGN MOMENT 395 in -kips DESIGN SHEAR 4700 Ibs JOIST IS OK J6 Open Web Joists 18KCS2 Sufficient Joist Size = Joist Weight = Dead Capacity = Live Capacity = LL ==> o of U240 JOIST IS OK 20K4 ( Using K-Joists ) 7.6 plf 339 pif 247 plf 370.5 plf 1.16 Open Web Joists 20K4 @ 6.7' on center armour Unsderfer Engineering, 13456 SE 27th PI., Ste. 200, Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 614-0949 Project: WAMU South Sanford Pg. No. Address: Sanford, FL Date: 12/27/05 Client: Callison Architecture, Inc. Job No.: 5338 I Design of Joists With Mech. Weight Design of Girder Trusses J7 Open Web Joists at Bay 2 With Mechanical Unit I rGTI Span = 27 ft No. of Bays = 9 bays Trib Width = 6.70 ft Max.Spacing OWJ = 6.60 ft Roof Dead = 15 psf Trib Width = 27 ft Roof Live = 25 psf Point Loads = 7128 Ibs 7.1 kips Girder Depth = 40 in Total load = 268 plf Design Factor 1.15 JGTI Designation 40G9N7.11K Design Total Load = 308.2 plf Design Live Load = 168 plf Reaction tl = 28512 Ibs 28.5 kips Reaction II = 17820 Ibs 17.8 kips Mechanical Unit = 850 / 2 = 425 LBS Reaction dl = 10692 Ibs 10.7 kips Mech. Design Wt. = 425 x 1.15 = 489 LBS Dist. Fom End = 3 ft Moment = 1303 ft-Ibs Mom. Live + Dead = 28085 ft-Ibs Mom. Max = 29388 ft-Ibs = 353 IN -KIPS GT2 Reaction = 4595 Ibs No. of Bays = 9 New Total Load = 289.3 plf (Without Design Factor) Max.Spacing OWJ = 6.60 ft New Design TL = 340.4 plf (With Design Factor) Trib Width = 24 ft Point Loads = 6336 Ibs 6.3 kips Joist Size = 18KCS2 ( Using KCS-Joists) Girder Depth = 40 in Joist Weight = 9 plf GT2 Designation 40G9N6.31K DESIGN MOMENT 395 in -kips DESIGN SHEAR 4700 Ibs Reaction 0 = 25344 lbs 25.3 kips Reaction II = 15840 Ibs 15.8 kips JOIST IS OK Reaction dl = 9504 Ibs 9.5 kips 1.17 Open Web Joists 181KCS2 Sufficient USE: 40G9N7.1K For Girder Trusses Joist Size = 20K6 ( Using K-Joists ) Joist Weight = 8.9 plf Dead Capacity = 416 plf Live Capacity = 301 plf Dead @ L / 240 451.5 plf JOIST IS OK J7 Open Web Joists 201K6 @ 6.7' on center armour Unsderfer Engineering, 13455 SE 27th PI., Ste. 200, Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 614-0949 01roject: WAMU South Sanford Pg. No. kddress: Sanford, FL Date: 12/27/05 client: Callison Architecture, Inc. Job No.: 5338 Beam Design (Simple span) Fy = 36 ksi Roof Dead= 15 psf Roof Live= 25 psf Tot = 40 psf Beam 1 In Canopy End Of Canopy Beam Parallel To Joists Span = 37 ft Trib = 2.5 ft w roof- 100.0 plf wt. Parapet/Wall 20 psf ht. Parapel/Wall 5 ft w Parapet/Wall 100 plf Oil (DL+LL) = 200.0 plf Moment (DL+LL) = 34225 ft-Ibs Shear (DL+LL) = 3700 Ibs SMEaD = 17.29 in' Try W12x26 Beam Depth = Web Thickness = Ix = Sx = tj 0 FOR BEAMS WITH A CONCENTRATED LOAD: Point Load = 0 Ibs V max = 3700 Ibs X, = 0 ft M max = 34225 ft-Ibs Rxn @ A = 0 Ibs Rxn @ B = 0 Ibs w TOTAL, v = 200 plf Rxn LL = 1156 Ibs w TOTAL, M = 200 plf Rxn DL = 2544 Ibs Max Shear & Moment Shear @ A = 3700 Ibs V max = 3700 Ibs Shear @ B = 3700 Ibs M max = 34225 ft-Ibs Beam Is: Compact 12.22 in Unbraced Length, Lb = 0.23 in L. = 6.85 ft 204 in° LC = 7.63 ft 33.4 in' 4 = 17.06 ft Cb = 1 Beam Is: Fully Braced So: 1 ft Ignore Fb = 23.76 ksi Governs Fb = 0 kis Fb = 0 ksi Fb = 0 ksi Sx = 33.4 in' 17.29 in' OK Moment Cap. = 66132 ft-Ibs 34225 ft-Ibs OK Shear Cap. = 40473 Ibs 3700 Ibs OK Deflection, An = 1.43 in L 1311 L / 240 OK Deflection, ALL = 0.45 in L / 997 L / 360 OK Beam 1 In Canopy USE W12x26 krmour Unsderfer Engineering, 13456 SE 27th PI., Ste. 200, Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 614-0949 Project: WAMU South Sanford Pg. No. Address: Sanford, FL Date: 12/27/05 Client: Callison Architecture, Inc. Job No.: 5338 I Beam Design (Simple Spam Fy = 36 ksi Roof Dead= 15 psf Roof Live= 25 psf Tot =. 40 psf Beam 2 In Canopy End Beam Next to Bldg: Parallel To Joists Span = 27 ft Trib = 3 ft w roof= 120.0 plf wt. Parapet/Wall 8 psf ht. Parapet/Wall 2.5 ft w ParapetfWall 20 plf DL+LL) = 140.0 plf Moment (pL+LL) = 12758 ft-Ibs Shear (pL+LL) = 1890 Ibs S,REaD = 6.44 in' P FOR BEAMS WITH A CONCENTRATED LOAD: Point Load = 9790 Ibs V max= 11499 Ibs X, = 0.5 ft M max = 15318 ft-Ibs Rxn A = 9609 Ibs Rxn B = 181 Ibs w TOTAL, v = 852 plf Governs Rxn LL = 1013 Ibs w TOTAL, M = 168 plf Rxn DL = 877 Ibs Max Shear & Moment With Point Load Shear A = 11499 Ibs M max = 77639 ft-Ibs Shear B = 2071 Ibs V max = 11499 Ibs Try W18x35 Beam Is: Compact Cb = 1 Beam Is: Fully Braced So: Beam Depth = 17.7 in Unbraced Length, Lb = 1 FT Ignore Web Thickness = 0.3 in L. = 6.33 ft Fb = 23.76 ksi Governs Ix = 510 in' L. = 6.61 ft Fb = 0 kis Sx = 57.6 in' L, = 14.78 It Fb = 0 ksi Fb = 0 ksi Sx = 57.6 in' 6.44 in' OK Moment Cap. = 114048 ft-Ibs 77639 ft-Ibs OK Shear Cap. = 76464 Ibs 11499 Ibs OK Deflection, An = 0.11 in L / 2863 L / 240 OK Deflection, ALL = 0.06 in L / 5343 L / 360 OK Beam 2 In Canopy USE W18x35 Note: Use for connectivity krmour Unsderfer Engineering, 13456 SE 27th Pi., Ste. 200, Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 614-0949 Project: WAMU South Sanford Pg. No. Address: Sanford, FL Date: 12/27/05 Client: Callison Architecture, Inc. Job No.: 5338 Beam Design (Simple Span) Fy = 36 ksi Roof Dead= 15 psf Roof Live= 25 psf Tot = 40 psf Beam 3 In Bay U2 Edge Beam Parallel To Joists Span = 27 ft Trib = 3.3 ft w roof-- 132.0 plf wt. Parapet/Wall 8 psf ht. Parapet/Wall 2.5 ft w Parapet/Wall 20 plf w (DL+LL) = 152.0 pif Moment (DL+LL) = 13851 ft-Ibs Shear (DL+u.) = 2052 Ibs S,REaD = 7.00 in' P FOR BEAMS WITH A CONCENTRATED LOAD: Point Load = 0 Ibs V max = 2052 Ibs X, = 0 ft M max = 13851 ft-Ibs Rxn @ A = 0 Ibs Rxn @ B = 0 Ibs w TOTAL, v = 152 plf Rxn LL = 1114 Ibs w TOTAI. M = 152 plf Rxn DL = 938 Ibs Max Shear & Moment Shear @ A = 2052 Ibs V max = 2052 Ibs Shear @ B = 2052 Ibs M max = 13851 ft-Ibs Try W12x14 Beam Is: Compact Cb = 1 Beam Is: Fully Braced So: Beam Depth = 11.91 in Unbraced Length, Lb = 1 FT Ignore Web Thickness = 0.2 in 4 = 3.48 ft Fb = 23.76 ksi Governs IX = 88.6 in* LC = 4.21 ft Fb = .0 kis S. = 14.9 in' LC = 9.42 ft Fb = 0 ksi Fb = 0 ksi S. = 14.9 in' 7.00 in' OK Moment Cap.- 29502 ft-Ibs 13851 ft-Ibs OK Shear Cap. = 34301 Ibs 2052 Ibs OK Deflection, ATL = 0.71 in L / 458 L / 240 OK Deflection, ALL = 0.38 in L / 844 L / 360 OK Beam 3 In Bay 1&2 USE W12x14 krmour Unsderfer Engineering, 13456 SE 27th PI., Ste. 200, Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 614-0949 Project WAMU South Sanford Pg. No. Address: Sanford, FL Date: 12/27/05 Client: Callison Architecture, Inc. Job No.: 5338 Beam Design (Simple Span) Fy = 36 ksi Roof Dead= 15 psf Roof Live= 25 psf Tot = 40 psf Beam 4 In Bay3 Edge Beam Parallel To Joists Span = 21.5 ft Trib = 3.3 ft w roof-- 132.0 plf wt. Parapel/Wall 8 psf ht. ParapetlWall 2.5 ft aD Parapet/Wall 20 plf 10) (DL+LL) = 152.0 plf Moment (oL+LL) = 8783 ft-Ibs Shear (QL+LL) = 1634 Ibs S,REQ`o = 4.44 in' Try W12x14 Beam Depth = Web Thickness = Ix = S. P FOR BEAMS WITH A CONCENTRATED LOAD: Point Load = 0 Ibs V max = 1634 Ibs X, = 0 ft M max = 8783 ft-Ibs Rxn @ A = 0 Ibs Rxn @ B = 0 Ibs w TOTAL, v = 152 plf Rxn LL = 887 Ibs 0 TOTAL, M = 152 plf Rxn DL = 747 Ibs Max Shear & Moment Shear @ A = 1634 Ibs V max = 1634 Ibs Shear @ B = 1634 Ibs M max = 8783 ft-Ibs Beam Is: Compact 11.91 in Unbraced Length, Lb = 0.2 in LC = 3.48 ft 88.6 in' L. = 4.21 ft 14.9in' LC= 9.42ft Cb = 1 Beam Is: Fully Braced So: 1 FT Ignore Fb = 23.76 ksi Governs Fb = 0 kis Fb = 0 ksi Fb = 0 ksi S. = 14.9 in' 4.44 in' OK Moment Cap. = 29502 ft-Ibs 8783 ft-Ibs OK Shear Cap. = 34301 Ibs 1634 Ibs OK Deflection, A• L = 0.28 in L / 907 L / 240 OK Deflection, ALL = 0.15 in L / 1671 L / 360 OK Beam 4 In Bay3 USE W12x14 krmour Unsderfer Engineering, 13456 SE 27th PI., Ste. 200, Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 614-0949 Project: WAMU South Sanford Pg. No. Address: Sanford, FL Date: 12/27/05 Client: Callison Architecture, Inc. Job No.: 5338 01' LLX 8.9 Loads: LC 1, total Results for LC 1, total Reaction units are k and k-ft ARMOUR UNSDERFER E.. KIT CHAN 5338 6.12k WAMU SOUTH SANFORD, FL BEAM B5 AT TOWER I Jan 4, 2006 at 10:11 AM 5338L beam b5 at tower.r2d Company : ARMOUR UNSDERFER ENGR Jan 4, 2006 Designer KIT CHAN 10:19 AM Job Number: 5338 WAMU SOUTH SANFORD, FL Checked By: Global Display Sections for Member Calcs 5 Max Internal Sections for Member Calcs 97 Include Shear Deformation Yes Merge Tolerance in 12 P-Delta Analysis Tolerance 10.50% Hot Rolled Steel Code AISC: ASD 9th Cold Formed Steel Code AISI 99: ASD Wood Code NDS 91/97: ASD Wood Temperature 10OF Concrete Code ACI 2002 Number of Shear Regions 4 Region Spacing Increment in 4 Concrete Stress Block Rectan ular Use Cracked Sections Yes Bad Framing Warnings No Unused Force Warnings Yes General Material Properties Label E lksil G lksil Nu Therm Al Fs Fl nancaurirmmal 1 aen Conc3NW 3155 1372 15 6 145 2 gen Conc4NW 3644 1584 15 6 145 3 aen Conc3LW 2085 908 15 6 11 4 gen Conc4LW 2408 1047 15 6 11 5 en Alum 10600 4077 3 1.29 173 6 1 gen Steel 1 29000 1 11154 3 1 .65 1 .49 7 1 RIGID 1 1e+7 1 0 1 0 0 Hot Rolled Steel Properties 1 ahal F rksil . G rksil Nu Therm AlF5 Fl nencifvrkmwai vsian.-n 1 A36 Gr.36 29000 11154 3 65 49 36 2 A572 Gr.50 29000 11154 3 65 49 50 3 A992 29000 11154 3 65 49 50 4 A500 Gr.42 29000 11154 3 65 49 42 5 A500 Gr.46 29000 11154 3 65 49 46 General Section Sets Hot Rolled Steel Section Sets Label Shape Desi n List Type Material Desi n Rules A 1n2 190 270 1... 10180 in4 1 BEAM I W12X26 I Wide Flange Beam I A992 I Typical 7.65 1 17.3 1 204 RISA-2D Version 6.5 [P:\2005\5338 WAMU NF South Sanford\Eng\5338_ beam b5 at tower.r2d] Page 1 Company ARMOUR UNSDERFER ENGR Jan 4, 2006 Designer KIT CHAN 10:19 AM Job Number: 5338 WAMU SOUTH SANFORD, FL Checked By: a Joint Coordinates and Temperatures Label X [ft] Y [ftl Temn !Pl 1 N1 0 0 0 2 N2 6.75 0 0 3 N3 21.25 0 0 4 N4 24.5 0 0 Joint Boundary Conditions Member Primary Data Label I Joint J Joint Rotate(deg) Section/Shape Design List Tvoe Matarial necinn Prise 1 M1 N1 N2 BEAM Wide Flange Beam A992 T icaly 2 M2 N2 N3 BEAM Wide Flan - a Beam 1 A992 T ical 3 M3 N3 N4 BEAM Wide Flan a Beam A992 Tvuical Basic Load Cases BLC Description Catwory X Gravity Y Gravity Joint Point Distributed 1gravity None 11 1 3 2 1 point load None 2 Load Combinations Description Solve PD... SR... BLC Factor BLC Factor BLC Factor BLC Factor BLC Factor BLC Factor BLC Factor BLC Factor 1 total IYesl I I 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 Yes Load Combination Design Description ASIF CD ABIF Service Hot Rolled Cold Formed Wood Generate Fnntinna Hot Rolled Steel Design Parameters Label Shape Lengttl[ft] Lb-out[ft] Lb-in[ft] Lcomp top[ ... Lcomp bot[... K-out K-in Cm Cb out a In cvjnv Joint Loads and Enforced Displacements BLC 2: point load) Joint Label L D M Direction Ma n'itude k k-ft in rad k's^2/(t 1 I N2 L Y -6.12 2 N3 L Y -3.96 RISA-2D Version 6.5 [P:\2005\5338 WAMU NF South Sanford\Eng\5338 beam b5 at tower.r2d] Page 2 Company : ARMOUR UNSDERFER ENGR Jan 4, 2006 Designer KIT CHAN 10:19 AM Job Number: 5338 WAMU SOUTH SANFORD, FL Checked By: Member Distributed Loads (BLC 1 : gravity) AAernL,er 1 I,nl I'1i.e.+tir.w QMri \A___4 ..4_rVia r_J ••---:..._n_.r. 1 M1 Y 32 32 w.. wouwr iv 0 r-"U Locauon ib 0 2 M2 Y 32 32 0 0 3 M3 Y 32 32 0 0 Member Point Loads Joint Reactions 1 1 N1 0 8.879 I mL I K-n I 0 2 1 N4 0 9.041 I 0 3 1 Totals: 0 17.92 4 1 COG ft: X: 12.36 Y: 0 Joint Deflections I r. Jnint 1 =hMl 1 1 N1 0 0 rNuuAuun lraul 1.116e-2 2 1 N2 0 801 6.635e-3 3 1 N3 0 412 9.521 e-3 4 1 N4 0 0 1.064e-2 Member Section Deflections (By Combination) 1 R U.—n r 1 .1-1 1 1 M1 1 0 0 rl L/ Mauo NC 2 2 0 229 2777.045 3 3 0 447 1748.909 4 4 0 641 2019.209 5 5 0 801 NC 6 1 M2 1 0 801 NC 7 2 0 985 617.968 8 3 0 968 480.461 9 4 0 766 675.4 10 5 0 412 NC 11 1 1 M3 1 0 412 NC 12 2 0 313 8177.662 13 3 0 211 7122.502 14 1 4 0 106 NC 151 5 0 0 F NC Member Section Forces I L` RA--kmr I .$--I Qe.. 1 1 M1 1 0 8.879 LIVIII11 A-R 0 2 2 1 0 8.339 14 528 RISA-213 Version 6.5 [P:\2005\5338 WAMU NF South Sanford\Eng\5338_ beam b5 at tower.r2d] Page 3 i ., Company : ARMOUR UNSDERFER ENGR Jan 4, 2006 Designer KIT CHAN 10:19 AM Job Number: 5338 WAMU SOUTH SANFORD, FL Checked By: Member Section Forces (Continued) LC Member Label Sac AYiallkl ch—rtrl 3 3 0 7.799 28.145 4 4 0 7.259 40.85 5 5 0 6.719 52.644 6 1 M2 1 0 599 52.644 7 2 0 561 52.714 8 3 0 1.721 48.579 9 4 0 2.881 40.238 10 5 0 4.041 27.693 11 1 M3 1 0 8.001 27.693 12 2 0 8.261 21.086 13 3 0 8.521 14.269 14 4 0 8.781 7.24 15 5 0 9.041 0 Member Advanced Data Label I Release J Release I Offsetrinl J Offs In T/C Only Physical TOM Inactive 1 M1 I Yes 2 M2 I Yes 3 M3 I Yes Member A/SC ASD Steel Code Checks By Combination) If, Mamhar Shona I1C May 1 nr_Hfl Shaer 11C I rm-rRl Cerlr.n CFr1..Gl uw6-.a 1 1 M1 W12X26 631 6.75 158 0 24.678 30 30 1.75 85 H2-1 2 1 M2 W12X26 637 1.813 072 14.5 124.678 30 30 1 85 H1-2 3 1 M3 W12X26 332 0 1 .161 3.25 1 24.678 30 30 1.75 85 H1-2 Member A/S/ Cold Formed Steel Code Checks LC Member Shape QC Max LocEftj Shear UC Loc ft Pn k Tn k Mnfk-ftl Cb Cm E n No Data to Print ... RISA-2D Version 6.5 [P:\2005\5338 WAMU NF South Sanford\Eng\5338_ beam b5 at tower.r2d] Page 4 Beam Design (Simple Span) Fy = 36 ksi Roof Dead= 15 psf Roof Live= 25 psf Tot = 40 psf Beam 6 In Bay 3 Edge Beam Parallel To Joists @ Tower Edge Span = 18 ft Trib = 3 ft w roof-- 120.0 plf wt. Parapet/Wall 20 psf ht. Parapet/Wall 9 ft w Parapet/Wall 180 plf CD (OL+LQ = 300.0 plf Moment (DL+L-) = 12150 ft-Ibs Shear (DL+LL) = 2700 Ibs S,REQ-D = 6.14 in' Try W12x14 Beam Depth = Web Thickness = Ix Sx = P FOR BEAMS WITH A CONCENTRATED LOAD: Point Load = 0 Ibs V max = 2700 Ibs X, = 0 ft M max = 12150 ft-Ibs Rxn @ A = 0 Ibs Rxn @ B = 0 Ibs w TOTAL. V = 300 plf Rxn LL = 675 Ibs w TOTAL, M = 300 plf Rxn DL = 2025 Ibs Max Shear & Moment Shear @ A = 2700 Ibs V max = 2700 Ibs Shear @ B = 2700 Ibs M max = 12150 ft-Ibs Beam Is: Compact 11.91 in Unbraced Length, Lb = 0.2 in LC = 3.48 ft 88.6 in° LC = 4.21 ft 14.9 in' L. = 9.42 ft Cb = 1 Beam Is: Fully Braced So: 1 FT Ignore Fb = 23.76 ksi Governs Fb = 0 kis Fb = 0 ksi Fb = 0 ksi Sx = 14.9 in' 6.14 in' OK Moment Cap. _ 29502 ft-Ibs 12150 ft-Ibs OK Shear Cap. = 34301 Ibs 2700 Ibs OK Deflection, ATL = 0.28 in L / 783 L / 240 OK Deflection, ALL = 0.07 in L / 3133 L / 360 OK Beam 6 In Bay 3 USE W12x14 krmour Unsderfer Engineering, 13456 SE 27th PI., Ste. 200, Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 614-0949 Project: WAMU South Sanford Pg. No. Address: Sanford, FL Date: 12/27/05 Client: Callison Architecture, Inc. Job No.: 5338 P) S. It Beam Design (simple span) Fy = 36 ksi Roof Dead= 15 psf Roof Live= 25 psf Tot = 40 psf Beam 7 In Bay 1 Edge Beam Perpendicular To Joists Span = 23 ft Trib = 13.5 ft w roof-- 540.0 pif wt. Parapet/Wall 8 psf ht. Parapet/Wall 2.5 ft w Parapet/Wall 20 pif CD (DL+LL) = 560.0 plf Moment (DL+LL) = 37030 ft-Ibs Shear (DL+LL) = 6440 Ibs S,RWD = 18.70 in' Try W12x19 Beam Depth = 12.16 in Web Thickness = 0.235 in Ix = 130 in° Sx = 21.3 in' a P FOR BEAMS WITH A CONCENTRATED LOAD: Point Load = 0 Ibs V max = 6440 Ibs X, = 0 ft M max = 37030 ft-Ibs Rxn @ A = 0 Ibs Rxn @ B = 0 Ibs w TOTAL. v = 560 plf Rxn LL = 3881 Ibs w TOTAL, M = 560 pif Rxn DL = 2559 Ibs Max Shear & Moment Shear @ A = 6440 Ibs V max = 6440 Ibs . Shear @ B = 6440 Ibs M max = 37030 ft-Ibs Beam Is: Compact Unbraced Length, Lb = LC = 4.23 ft LC = 4.44 ft LC = 9.92 ft Cb = 1 Beam Is: Fully Braced So: 1 FT Ignore Fb = 23.76 ksi Governs Fb = 0 kis Fb = 0 ksi Fb = 0 ksi S. = 21.3 in' > 18.70 in' OK Moment Cap. = 42174 ft-Ibs > 37030 ft-Ibs OK Shear Cap. = 41149 Ibs > 6440 Ibs OK Deflection, eTL = 0.94 in L / 295 < L / 240 OK Deflection, ALL = 0.56 in L / 490 < L / 360 OK Beam 7 In Bay 1 USE W12x19 krmour Unsderfer Engineering, 13456 SE 27th PI., Ste. 200, Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 614-0949 Project: WAMU South Sanford Pg. No. Address: Sanford, FL Date: 12/27/05 Client: Callison Architecture, Inc. Job No.: 5338 Beam Design (simple span) Fy = 36 ksi Roof Dead= 15 psf Roof Live= 25 psf Tot = 40 psf Beam 8 In Bay 1 Edge Beam Perpendicular To Joists Span = 29 ft Trib = 13.5 ft w roof= 540.0 plf wt. Parapet/Wall 8 psf ht. Parapet/Wall 2.5 ft w Parapet(Wall 20 plf w (DL+LL) = 560.0 plf Moment (DL+LL) = 58870 ft-Ibs Shear (DL+LL) = 8120 Ibs S,REO'D = 29.73 in' FOR BEAMS WITH A CONCENTRATED LOAD: Point Load = 0 Ibs V max = 8120 Ibs X, = 0 ft M max = 58870 ft-Ibs Rxn @ A = 0 Ibs Rxn @ B = 0 Ibs w TOTAL, v = 560 plf Rxn LL = 4894 Ibs w TOTAL, M = 560 plf Rxn DL = 3226 Ibs Max Shear & Moment Shear @ A = 8120 Ibs V max = 8120 Ibs Shear @ B = 8120 Ibs M max = 58870 ft-Ibs Try W12x30 Beam Is: Compact Cb = 1 Beam Is: Patially Braced So: Beam Depth = 12.34 in Unbraced Length, Lb = 6.7 FT Use Web Thickness = 0.26 in L. = 6.88 ft Fb = 23.76 ksi Governs IX = 238 in' L. = 7.67 ft Fb = 0 kis SX = 38.6 in' Lc = 17.16 ft Fb = 0 ksi Fb = 21.6 ksi S. = 38.6 in' 29.73 in' OK Moment Cap. = 76428 ft-Ibs 58870 ft-Ibs OK Shear Cap. = 46201 Ibs 8120 Ibs OK Deflection, ATL = 1.29 in L / 270 L / 240 OK Deflection, Au = 0.78 in L / 447 L / 360 OK Beam 8 In Bay 1 USE W12x30 krmour Unsderfer Engineering, 13456 SE 27th PI., Ste. 200, Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 614-0949 Project: WAMU South Sanford Pg. No. Address: Sanford, FL Date: 12/27/05 Client: Callison Architecture, Inc. Job No.: 5338 pl ul d9 Beam Design (Simple span) Fy = 36 ksi Roof Dead= 15 psf Roof Live= 25 psf Tot = 40 psf Beam 9 In Bay 3 Edge Beam Perpendicular To Joists Span = 17 ft Trib = 10.8 ft w roof-- 432.0 plf wL Parapet/Wall 8 psf ht. Parapet/Wall 2.5 ft o) ParapetfWall 20 plf w cDL,LL> = 452.0 plf Moment (DL+LL) = 16329 ft-Ibs Shear (DL+LL) = 3842 Ibs S,REQ'D = 8.25 in' P FOR BEAMS WITH A CONCENTRATED LOAD: Point Load = 0 Ibs V max= 3842 Ibs X, = 0 ft M max = 16329 ft-Ibs Rxn @ A = 0 Ibs Rxn @ B = 0 Ibs CD TOTAL, V = 452 plf Rxn LL = 2295 Ibs 0) TOTAL. M = 452 plf Rxn DL = 1547 Ibs Max Shear & Moment Shear @ A = 3842 Ibs V max = 3842 Ibs Shear @ B = 3842 Ibs M max = 16329 ft-Ibs Try W12x14 Beam Is: Compact Cb = 1 Beam Is: Patially Braced So: Beam Depth = 11.91 in Unbraced Length, Lb = 6.5 FT Use Web Thickness = 0.2 in LC = 3.48 ft Fb = 0 ksi IX = 88.6 in' LC = 4.21 ft Fb = 18.29 kis Governs S. = 14.9 in' L. = 9.42 ft Fb = 0 ksi Fb = 11.57 ksi SX = 14.9 in' 8.25 in' OK Moment Cap. = 22710 ft-Ibs 16329 ft-Ibs OK Shear Cap. = 34301 Ibs 3842 Ibs OK Deflection, en = 0.33 in L / 617 L / 240 OK Deflection, ALL = 0.20 in L / 1033 L / 360 OK Beam 9 In Bay 3 USE W12x14 krmour Unsderfer Engineering, 13456 BE 27th PI., Ste. 200, Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 614-0949 Project: WAMU South Sanford Pg. No. Address: Sanford, FL Date: 12/27/05 Client: Callison Architecture, Inc. Job No.: 5338 r.. ti ' Beam Design (Simple Spam Fy = 36 ksi Roof Dead= 15 psf Roof Live= 25 psf Tot = 40 psf Beam 10 In Bay 3 Edge Beam Perpendicular To Joists Span= 18 ft Trib = 10.5 ft w roof-- 420.0 plf wt. Parapet/Wall 8 psf ht. Parapet/Wall 2.5 ft w Parapet/Wall 20 plf W (DL+LL) = 440.0 plf Moment (DL;u) = 17820 ft Ibs Shear (DL;LL) = 3980 Ibs S,REcrD = 9.00 in' P FOR BEAMS WITH A CONCENTRATED LOAD: Point Load = 0 Ibs V max = 3960 Ibs X, = 0 It M max = 17820 ft-Ibs Rxn @ A = 0 Ibs Rxn Q B = 0 Ibs 0 TOTAL, V = 440 plf Rxn LL = 2363 Ibs w TOTAL, M = 440 plf Rxn DL = 1597 Ibs Max Shear & Moment Shear @ A = 3960 Ibs V max = 3960 Ibs Shear @ B = 3960 lbs M max = 17820 ft-Ibs Try W12x14 Beam Is: Compact Cb = 1 Beam Is: Patially Braced So: Beam Depth = 11.91 in Unbraced Length, Lb = 6 FT Use Web Thickness = 0.2 in L. = 3.48 ft Fb = 0 ksi IX = 88.6 in" LC = 4.21 ft Fb = 19.13 kis Governs Sx = 14.9 in' LC = 9.42 ft Fb = 0 ksi Fb = 12.53 ksi S. = 14.9 in' 9.00 in' OK Moment Cap. = 23753 ft-Ibs 17820 ft Ibs OK Shear Cap. = 34301 Ibs 3960 Ibs OK Deflection, An = 0.40 in L / 534 L / 240 OK Deflection, ALL = 0.24 in L / 895 L / 360 OK Beam 10 In Bay 3 USE W12x14 4 krmour Unsderfer Engineering, 13456 SE 27th PI., Ste. 200, Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 614-0949 Project: WAMU South Sanford Pg. No. Address: Sanford, FL Date: 12/27/05 Client: Callison Architecture, Inc. Job No.: 5338 Beam Design (Simple span) Fy = 36 ksi Roof Dead= 15 psf Roof Live= 25 psf Tot = 40 psf Beam 11 In Bay 3 Edge Beam Perpendicular To Joists Span = 21.5 ft Trib = 9 ft w roof-- 360.0 pif wt. Parapet/Wall 8 psf ht. Parapet/Wall 2.5 ft w Parapet/Wall 20 plf CD (DL+LL) = 360.0 pif Moment (DL+LL) = 21957 ft-Ibs Shear (DLL) = 4085 Ibs S.REO-D = 11.09 in' Try W12x19 Beam Depth = Web Thickness = Ix = S. FOR BEAMS WITH A CONCENTRATED LOAD: Point Load = 0 Ibs V max = 4085 Ibs X, = 0 ft M max = 21957 ft-Ibs Rxn @ A = 0 Ibs Rxn G B = 0 Ibs 0 TOTAL. V = 380 pif Rxn LL = 2419 Ibs a) TOTAL. M = 380 plf Rxn DL = 1666 Ibs Max Shear & Moment Shear Q A = 4085 Ibs V max = 4085 Ibs Shear @ B = 4085 Ibs M max = 21957 ft-Ibs Beam Is: Compact 12.16 in Unbraced Length, Lb = 0.235 in LC = 4.23 ft 130 in` L, = 4.44 ft 21.3 in' L. = 9.92 ft Cb = 1 Beam Is: Patialiy Braced So: 7.5 FT Use Fb = 0 ksi Fb = 17.14 kis Governs Fb = 0 ksi Fb = 15.38 ksi Sx = 21.3 in' 11.09 in' OK Moment Cap. = 30424 ft Ibs 21957 ft Ibs OK Shear Cap. = 41149 Ibs 4085 Ibs OK Deflection, An = 0.48 in L / 532 L / 240 OK Deflection, ALL = 0.29 in L / 899 L / 360 OK J' l Beam 11 In Bay 3 USE W12x19 krmour Unsderfer Engineering, 13455 SE 27th PI., Ste. 200, Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 614-0949 Project WAMU South Sanford Pg. No. Address: Sanford, FL Date: 12/27/05 Client: Callison Architecture, Inc. Job No.: 5338 1 . 1 Beam Design (Simple Span) Fy = 36 ksi Roof Dead= 15 psf Roof Live= 25 psf Tot = 40 psf Beam 12 In Bay 3 Edge Beam Perpendicular To Joists Span = 18 ft Trib = 12.5 ft w roof-- 500.0 plf wt. Parapet/Wall 20 psf ht Parapet(Wall 9 ft w Parapet/Wall 180 plf w (DL;LL) = 680.0 plf Moment (DL+LL) = 27540 ft-Ibs Shear (DL+LL) = 6120 Ibs S,REQ'D = 13.91 in' Try W12x19 Beam Depth = 12.16 in Web Thickness = 0.235 in IX = 130 in° S. = 21.3 in' P FOR BEAMS WITH A CONCENTRATED LOAD: Point Load = 0 Ibs V max = 6120 Ibs X, = 0 ft M max = 27540- ft-Ibs Rxn @ A = 0 Ibs Rxn @ B = 0 Ibs w TOTAL. v = 680 plf Rxn LL = 2813 Ibs w TOTAL. M = 680 plf Rxn DL = 3307 Ibs Max Shear & Moment Shear @ A = 6120 Ibs V max = 6120 Ibs Shear @ B = 6120 Ibs M max = 27540 ft-Ibs Beam Is: Compact Unbraced Length, Lb = LC = 4.23 ft LC = 4.44 ft LC = 9.92 ft Cb = 1 Beam Is: Patially Braced So: 6 FT Use Fb = 0 ksi Fb = 19.61 kis Governs Fb = 0 ksi Fb = 19.22 ksi S. = 21.3 in' 13.91 in' OK Moment Cap. = 34808 ft-Ibs 27540 ft-Ibs OK Shear Cap. = 41149 Ibs 6120 Ibs OK Deflection, ATL = 0.43 in L / 507 L / 240 OK Deflection, ALL = 0.20 in L / 1103 L / 360 OK Beam 12 In Bay 3 USE W12x19 krmour Unsderter Engineering, 13455 BE 27th PI., Ste. 200, Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 514-0949 Project: WAMU South Sanford Pg. No. Address: Sanford, FL Date: 12/27/05 Client: Callison Architecture, Inc. Job No.: 5338 Column Design ITS Column) Column 1 @ Girder Trusses LOADING DESIGNATION: VERIFY COLUMN W/ ECCENTRIC LOAD) INPUT DATA: P Length L 16 ft e Effective L KLx 16 ft Y toof KLy 16 ft M=Pxe Axial Load P 32.4 kips Moment (x-dir) Mxx 64.8 k-in X TS COL. Moment (y-dir) Myy 99.4 k-in Yield Stress Fy 46.0 ksi Section used TS8X4X1/2 OUTPUT: Section Props. A 10.40 in` Ix 75.10 in" ly 24.60 in` Sx 18.80 in' Sy 12.30 in' rx 2.69 in ry 1.54 in weight 35.24 #/ft b/t 16 in/in KLx/rx 71.38 KL^ 124.68 KUr max 124.68 Cc 111.55 fa P/A 3.12 ksi fbx M)WSx 3.45 ksi fby Myy/Sy 8.08 ksi Fa 9.61 ksi Eq: E2-2 Fb 30.36 ksi Compact Section F'ex 29.31 ksi F'ey 9.61 ksi Unity Check AISC ASD MANUAL: 0.86 OK Eq. 1-11-1 OA9 OK Eq. H1-2 RESULT: Use T=4=2 Availability a Weight 35.24 #/ft Availability: a = good, b = somewhat available, c = not readily available, 7 = unknown) lrmour Unsderfer Engineering, 13456 SE 27th PI., Ste. 200, Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 614-0949 Project: WAMU South Sanford Pg. No. CD-1 Address: Sanford, Florida Date: 01/03/06 Client: Callison Architecture, Inc. Job No.: 5338 f Column Design (Ts columns) Column 2 @ Columns In Building Nearest Canopy LOADING DESIGNATION: VERIFY COLUMN W/ ECCENTRIC LOAD) INPUT DATA: P Length L 16 ft e Effective L KLx 16 ft Y KLy 16 ft M = P x e Axial Load P 14.6 kips Moment (x-dir) Mxx 29.2 k-in X TS COL. Moment (y-dir) Myy 9A k-in Yield Stress Fy 46.0 ksi Section used TS4X4X1/2 OUTPUT: Section Props. A 6.36 in` Ix 12.30 in' ly 12.30 in' S. 6.13 in' Sy 6.13 in' rx 1.39 in ry 1.39 in weight 21.63 #/ft b/t 8 infin KL./rx 138.13 KVry 138.13 KUr max 138.13 C. 111.55 fe P/A 2.30 ksi fbx Mxx/Sx 4.76 ksi fby Myy/Sy 1.53 ksi Fe 7.83 ksi Eq: E2-2 Fb 30.36 ksi Compact Section F'ex 7.83 ksi F'ey 7.83 ksi Unity Check AISC ASD MANUAL: 0.59 OK Eq. 1-11-1 0.29 OK Eq. H1-2 RESULT: Use TS4X4X1/2 Availability a Weight 21.63 #/ft Availability: a = good, b = somewhat available, c = not readily available, 7 = unknown) krmour Unsderfer Engineering, 13456 SE 27th PI., Ste. 200, Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 614-0949 Project: WAMU South Sanford Pg. No. CD-2 Address: Sanford, Florida Date: 01/03/06 Client: Callison Architecture, Inc. Job No.: 5338 Column Design (Ts Columns) Column 3 @ Tower Connecting Beams 5 811 LOADING DESIGNATION: VERIFY COLUMN W/ ECCENTRIC LOAD) INPUT DATA: P Length L 16 ft e Effective L KLx 16 ft Y 91 to KLy 16 ft M=Pxe Axial Load P 8.1 kips Moment (x-dir) Mxx 16.2 k-in X TS COL. Moment (y-dir) Myy 26.0 k-in Yield Stress Fy 46.0 ksi Section used TS4X4X1/4 OUTPUT: Section Props. A 3.59 in` Ix 8.22 in' ly 8.22 in° S. 4.11 in' Sy 4.11 my rx 1.51 in ry 1.51 in weight 12.21 #/ft b/t 16 in/in KLx/rx 127.15 KLVry 127.15 KL/r max 127.15 C 111.55 fe P/A 2.26 ksi fbx Mxx/Sx 3.94 ksi fby Myy/Sy 6.33 ksi Fa 9.24 ksi Eq: E2-2 Fb 30.36 ksi Compact Section F'ex 9.24 ksi F'ey 9.24 ksi Unity Check AISC ASD MANUAL: 0.69 OK Eq. 1-11-1 OA2 OK Eq. H1-2 RESULT: r777W TS4X4X1/4 Availability a Weight 12.21 Xft Availability: a = good, b = somewhat available, c = not readily available, ? = unknown) krmour Unsderfer Engineering, 13456 SE 27th PI., Ste. 200, Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 614-0949 Project: WAMU South Sanford Pg. No. CD-3 Address: Sanford, Florida Date: 01/03/06 Client: Callison Architecture, Inc. Job No.: 5338 Column Design (TS Columns) Column 4 @ All Other Column Locations LOADING DESIGNATION: VERIFY COLUMN W/ ECCENTRIC LOAD) INPUT DATA: Length L 16 ft Effective L KLx 16 ft Y of KLy 16 ft Axial Load P 14.6 kips Moment (x-dir) Mxx 29.1 k-in ' X Moment (y-dir) Myy 0.0 k-in Yield Stress Fy 46.0 ksi Section used TS4X4X1/4 OUTPUT: P e M=Pxe TS COL. Section Props. A 3.59 in` IX 8.22 in' ly 8.22 in' S. 4.11 in' Sy 4.11 in' rX 1.51 in ry 1.51 in weight 12.21 #/ft b/t 16 intiin KWrX 127.15 KVry 127.15 KUr max 127.15 Cc, 111.55 fe P/A 4.07 ksi fbX Mxx/Sx 7.08 ksi fby Myy/Sy 0.00 ksi Fs 9.24 ksi Eq: E2-2 Fb 30.36 ksi Compact Section F'ex 9.24 ksi F'ey 9.24 ksi Unity Check AISC ASD MANUAL: 0.86 OK Eq. 1-11-1 0.38 OK Eq. 1-11-2 RESULT: Use TS4=114 Availability a Weight 12.21 #Mt Availability: a = good, b = somewhat available, c = not readily available, ? = unknown) R krmour Unsderfer Engineering, 13456 SE 27th PI., Ste. 200, Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 614-0949 Project: WAMU South Sanford Pg. No. CD-4 Address: Sanford, Florida Date: 01/03/06 Client: Callison Architecture, Inc. Job No.: 5338 Footing Design (Isolated Footing) Footings Under Columns Labeled 1 fc = 3000 psi H = 2 ftPTL = 32400 Ibs fy = 60000 psi qe = 1600 psf PDL = 12150 Ibs Length, R = 18 in PLL = 20250 Ibs Width, a = 5 in Assumed Depth of Footing: 12 in d = 9 in q, = 1600 - (1' * 150pcf) - (1' * 100pcf) = 1351 psf AREaD = P total / qe = 24 fe TRY: 5 x 5 q„= 1.4*DL)+(1.6*LL) Area Check Depth For One -Way Shear: w = 60 in b = 60 in c = 18.5 in V„ = 15232 Ibs Check Depth For Two -Way Shear: bo = 2*(5 + 9) + 2*(18 + 9) 82 in V„ = 44213 Ibs 49410 = 1976 psf 25 dREaD = V„ 0)*(2)*(fc0.5)*(b) _ Area = 15232 4930 b YAM width/2 c d 25 fe ( Footing Adequate Size 3.1 in Check: dREaD + Cover < Assumed Depth 3.1 + 3 = 6.1 < 12 (OK) dREQ'D = Vu _ 44213 0)*(4)*(pCo.$)*(bo) 13474 = 3.3 in Check: dREQ'D + Cover < Assumed Depth 3.3 + 3 = 6.3 < 12 (OK) Design of Longitudinal Reinforcement: I" _ (b / 2) - (a/2) = 2.29 ft c = 5.327 in Reber Size # = 4 M. _ (I )*(w)*(q„)*(I /2) = 26 k-ft a = 4.528 in Bar Diam. = 0.5 in M As,REQ'D = = 0.86 in2 fy * (d - a/2) Number of Bars Needed = 5 #4 bars @ 10.7" o.c. C Are Adequately Spaced Design of Transverse Reinforcement: I = (w / 2) - (a / 2) = 1.75 ft c = 5.327 in Reber Size # = 4 M„ _ (I )*(b)*(q„)*(I/2) = 15 k-ft a = 4.528 in Bar Diam. = 0.5 in As,REQ'D = Md = 0.49 in fy *(- a/2) Number of Bars Needed = 3 #4 bars @ 17.83" o.c. C Are Adequately Spaced USE 5' x 5' Footing with 5 #4 bars @ 10.7" o.c. each way r * .P Footing Design (isolated Footing) Footings Under Columns Labeled 2 1 P = 3000 psiPn = 14600 Ibs fy = 60000 psi PDT = 5475 Ibs Length, = 18 in Pu = 9125 Ibs Width, a = 5 in Assumed Depth of Footing: 12 in d = 9 in qe = 1600- - (1' * 150pcf) - (1' * 100pcf) = 1361 psf AREQ'D = P total / qe = 10.8 fe TRY: q„= (1.4*DL)+(1.6*LL) Area Check Depth For One -Way Shear: w = 48 in b = 48 in c = 12.5 in V„ = 5800 Ibs Check Depth For Two -Way Shear: b, = 2*(5 + 9) + 2*(18 + 9) 82 in V. = 18618 Ibs H= 2ft qe = 1600 psf 4 x 4 Area = width W c width/2 a d 16 fe ( Footing Adequate Size / 22265 = 1392 psf 16 dREaD = Vu 5800 0)*(2)*(p,0.$)*(b) = 3944 = 1.5 in Check: dREaD + Cover < Assumed Depth 1.5 + 3 = 4.5 < 12 ( OK) dRECYD = Vu _ 18618 9)*(4)*(.0.5)*(b,) 13474 = 1.4 in f Check: dREQ'D + Cover < Assumed Depth 1.4 + 3 = 4.4 < 12 (OK) Design of Longitudinal Reinforcement: I* _ (b / 2) - (a / 2) = 1.79 ft c = 5.327 in Rebar Size # = 4 M„ _ (I )*(w)*(q„)*(l /2) = 9 k-ft a = 4.528 in Bar Diam. = 0.5 in As.REQD = 0.3 in2 fy *Md - a/2) Number of Bars Needed = 2 #4 bars @ 20.75" o.c. Are Adequately Spaced Design of Transverse Reinforcement: I = (w / 2) - (a / 2) = 1.25 ft c = 5.327 in Rebar Size # = 4 M„ _ (I )*(b)*(q„)*(I/2) = 4 k-ft a = 4.528 in Bar Diam. = 0.5 in Aa.REQ D = 0.13 InfyM(d - a/2) Number of Bars Needed = 1 #4 barC > Is Adequate USE 4' x 4'Footing with 2 #4 bars @ 20.75" o.c. each way j : *'I Armour Unsderfer Engineering, 13456 SE 27th PI., Ste. 200, Bellevue, WA 98005 425) 614-0949 Project: WAMU South Sanford Pg. No. FD-2 Address: Sanford, Florida Date: 01/03/06 Client Callison Architecture, Inc. Job No.: 5338 Footing Design (isolated Footing) Footings Under Columns Labeled 3 Pn = 8100 Ibs f = 3000 psi H 2 ft fy = 60000 psi qe = 1600 psf PDi. = 3038 Ibs Length, R = 18 in Pu = 6063 Ibs Width, a = 5 in Assumed Depth of Footing: 12 in d = 9 in qe = 1600 - (1' * 150pcf) - (V * 100pcf) = 1351 psf AREaD = P total / qe = 6 fe TRY: 3 x 3 q„= (1.4*DQ+(1.6*LL) Area Check Depth For One -Way Shear: w = 36 in b = 36 in c = 6.5 in VU = 2231 Ibs Check Depth For Two -Way Shear: bo = 2*(5 + 9) + 2*(18 + 9) 82 in V„ = 8753 Ibs Design of Longitudinal Reinforcement: Area = width w, m width/2 c d 9 fe ( Footing Adequate Size l 12354 = 1373 psf 9 dREaD = Vy 2231 0)*(2)*(fCo.5)*(b) - 2958 = 0.8 in Check: dREQ'D + Cover < Assumed Depth 0.8 + 3 = 3.8 < 12 (OK) dREaD = Vu _ 8753 0)*(4)*(fC0.5)*(b,) 13474 - 0.6 in Check: dREaD + Cover < Assumed Depth 0.6 + 3 = 3.6 < 12 (OK) I = (b / 2) - (a / 2) = 1.29 ft c = 5.327 in Rebar Size # = 4 M„ _ (I)*(w)*(q„)*(r/2) = 3 k-ft a = 4.528 in Bar Diam. 0.5 in M A4.REa D = * fy * (d - a/2) = 0.1 in2 Number of Bars Needed = 1 #4 bar Is Adequate Design of Transverse Reinforcement: I = (w / 2) - (a'/ 2) = 0.75 It c = 5.327 in Rebar Size # = 4 M„ _ (I)*(b)*(q„)*(r/2) = 1 k-ft a = 4.528 in Bar Diam. = 0.5 in M ' As,REQ D = * fy * (d - a/2) = 0.03 inz Number of Bars Needed = 1 #4 bar Is'Adequate USE 3' x 3' Footing with 1 #4 bar each way 0 Armour Unsderfer Engineering, 13456 SE 27th PI., Ste. 200, Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 614-0949 Project: WAMU South Sanford Pg. No. FD-3 Address: Sanford, Florida Date: 01/03/06 Client Callison Architecture, Inc. Job No.: 5338 1.' A .. Footing Design (Isolated Footing) Footings Under Columns Labeled 4 f = 3000 psi Pn = 14600 Ibs fy = 60000 psi PDT = 5475 Ibs Length, R = 18 in Pu = 9125 Ibs Width, a = 5 in Assumed Depth of Footing: 12 in d = 9 in q, = 1600 - (1' * 150pcf) - (1' * 100pcf) _ , 1351 psf AREA-D = P total / qe = 10.8 fe TRY: q„= (1.4*DL)+(1.6*LL) Area Check Depth For One -Way Shear: w = 30 in b = 30 in c = 3.5 in V„ = 2577 Ibs Check Depth For Two -Way Shear: bo = 2*(5 + 9) + 2*(18 + 9) 82 in V„ = 12811 Ibs 2.5 x 2.5 22265 = 3634 psf 6.3 dREQ'D = Vu 0)*(2)*(pC0.5)*(b) _ H = 2 ft q, = 1600 psf c Area = 6.3 fe Use Bigger \ Footing l 2577 2465 = 1 in Check: dREaD + Cover < Assumed Depth 1 + 3 = 4 < 12 (OK) dREaD = V. 12811 0)*(4)*(fCo.$)*(b,) 13474 = 1 in Check: dREaD + Cover < Assumed Depth 1 + 3 = 4 < 12 (OK) Design of Longitudinal Reinforcement: I = (b / 2) - (a / 2) = 1.04 ft c = 5.327 in Rebar Size # = 4 M„ _ (I)*(w)*(q„)*Q*12) = 5 k-ft a = 4.528 in Bar Diam. = 0.5 in As.REQ D = = 0.16 inZ fy * M( d - a/2) Number of Bars Needed = 1 #4 bar Is Adequate Design of Transverse Reinforcement: I = (w / 2) - (a / 2) = 0.50 ft c = 5.327 in Reber Size # = 4 M„ _ (I)*(b)*(q„)*(I*/2) = 1 k-ft a = 4.528 in Bar Diam. = 0.5 in M° As,REQ D = 0.03 in fy * (d - a/2) Number of Bars Needed = 1 #4 bar Is Adequate USE 2.5' x 2.5' Footing with 1 #4 bar each way Armour Unsderfer Engineering, 13456 SE 27th PI., Ste. 200, Bellevue, WA 98005 425 614-0949 Project: WAMU South Sanford Pg. No. FD-4 Address: Sanford, Florida Date: 01/03/06 Client: Callison Architecture, Inc. Job No.: 5338 Wind Design IC Wind Loading esi n Criteria Basic Wind Speed (3 sec. gust), Vas = 110 mph Building Lengths (ft): Heights to Check (ft): Mean Roof Height = 26 ft Transverse Dir.= 56 Tower = 26.00 Rise in Roof Per 12" = flat in, LC = 1 Longitude Dir.= 77 Roof = 17.00 Wind Exposure B, C, or D (see FBC 2001) B Exposure 2a = 11.2 Ground = 0.00 Category I, II, III, or IV (see FBC 2001) II Category Wind Output PS=1*1w*Ps30= Where: Tower Roof Ground X = 1.00 1.00 1.00 L - 1 p'W = Wind Loadi Int. Roof = Int. Wall = Ext. Roof = Ext. Wall = E-W = N-S = Int. Wall = Ext. Wall = E-W = N-S = Int. Wall = Ext. Wall = E-W = N S = A 0.0 plf 57.2 pif 0.0 plf 86.4 pif 68.9 pif 65.7 pif 165.1 pif 249.6 plf 198.9 pif 189.7 plf 108.0 plf 163.2 plf 130.1 pif 124.0 pif A-M EM-91 Tower Level Trib. Ht. Above Roof = Trib. Ht. Below Roof = E I F 0.00 ft 4.50 ft Roof Level Trib. Ht. @ Fourth = 13.00 ft Ground Trib. Ht. @ Third = 0 8.50 ft G H 16 -10. 25.3 0 S N Plan View A Cr z m c F E-W Longitudinal Direction Averaged Wind Loads: E-W N-S Tower = 68.9 65.7 Roof = 198.9 189.7 Ground = 130.1 124.0 rmour Unsderfer Engineering, 13456 SE 27th PI., Ste. 200, Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 614-0949 Project: WAMU South Sanford Pg. No. LD-1 Address: Sanford, Florida Date: 01/03/06 Client: Callison Architecture, Inc. Job No.: 5338 Wind Girts and Wall Supports 1 Tube Steel Support For Canopy Box Above @ Canopy Weight of Wall = 18 psf It for stucco wall and a for metal studs Height Wall = 3 ft Max. Span = 37 ft Total Weight = 108 plf . Two walls total M = 18482 ft-Ibs S = 8.04 in 1 Rqd = 127.7 in L DALLow = 1.23 in 360 Try: TS8X8X1/2 S = 32.9 in OK I = 131 in' OK ATE = 1.2 in OK USE: TS8X8X1/2 For Box Support Above G Canopy Metal Studs With Parapets Wind Pressure = 19.2 psf maximum wind pressure Height of Stud = 20.26 ft Height of Parapet = 6 ft maximum allowed Stud Spacing = 16 in o.c. ON and = 25.60 plf V = 215 Ibs M = 346 ft-Ibs S Rqd = 0.20 in 1 Rqd = 0.1 in AALL cant = 0X in L AALL beam= 0.48 in 360 Try: 600S 162-33 VcApAcrry = 612 Ibs OK McApAcrry = 951 ft-Ibs OK S = 0.577 in3 OK I = 1.793 in4 OK ATL cant = 0.00 in OK ATE beam = 0.46 in OK rmour Unsderfer Engineering, 13456 SE 27th PI., Ste. 200, Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 614-0949 2roject: WAMU South Sanford Pg. No. kddress: Sanford, Florida Date: 01/03/06 client: Callison Architecture, Inc. Job No.: 5338 y, 1-V -I. Framing at Tower Wall Weight of Wall = 18 psf le for stucco wall and a for metal studs Height Wall = 9 ft Span = 21 ft Total Weight = 162 plf Spacing of Braces = 1.4 ft P Brace = 226.8 Ibs Screws Type Mil. Try: 2 #10 screws 43 Mill. VCAPACITr = 526 Ibs > 226.8 Ibs OK Use: 2 — 43 Mil. #10 screws Sheathing Ecc. = 12 in M = 2721.6 in-Ibs C and T = 25.2 Ibs Neligible Overhang Design w = 40 psf Canopy Len = 4 ft Thickness of Canopy 2 ft M = 320 ft-Ibs/ft T&C@16"o.c.= 213lbs Screws Type Mil. Try: 2 #10 screws 43 Mil. PCAPACITY = 218 Ibs > 213 Ibs Use: 2 -- 43 Mil. #10 screws OK Armour Unsderfer Engineering, 13456 SE 27th PI., Ste. 200, Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 614-0949 Project: WAMU South Sanford Pg. No. Address: Sanford, Florida Date: 01/03/06 Client: Callison Architecture, Inc. Job No.: 5338 Tube Steel Wind Girt Above Beam @ Tower Wind Pressure = 19.2 psf max wind pressure Tributary Height = 4.5 ft w„d„ d = ' 86A plf effected span length Span = 21.5 ft 21.5 ft M = 4992 ft-Ibs S = 2.17 in 1 Rqd = 19.9 in L HALLOW = 0.72 in -- 360 Try: TS6X4X1/4 S = 7.36 in OK I = 22.1 in OK ATL = 0.65 in OK USE: TS6X4X114 For Wind Girts Above Beam @ Tower Tube Steel Wind Girt Below Beam @ Tower Wind Pressure = 19.2 psf max wind press Tributary Height = 8 ft Wwind = 153.6 pif effected span ler Span = 21 ft 21 ft M = 8467 ft-Ibs S = 3.68 in 1 Rqd = 33.1 in° L HALLOW = 0.70 in — 360 Try: TS6X4X1/2 S = 11.8 in OK I = 35.3 in OK ATL = 0.66 in OK USE: TS6X4X1/2 For Wind Girts Below Beam @ Tower 4 rmour Unsderfer Engineering, 13456 SE 27th PI., Ste. 200, Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 614-0949 Project: WAMU South Sanford Pg. No. Address: Sanford, Florida Date: 01/03/06 Client: Callison Architecture, Inc. Job No.: 5338 Tube Steel Wind Girt at Vestibule Wind Pressure = 19.2 psf max wind pressure Tributary Height = 9 ft Wind = 172.8 plf effected span length Span = 17 ft 17 ft M = 6242 ft-lbs S = 2.71 in I Rqd = 19.6 in L DAuow = 0.57 in — 360 Try: TS6X4X5/16 S = 8.72 in OK I = 26.2 in° OK An = 0.43 in OK USE: TS6X4X5/16 For Wind Girls rmour Unsderfer Engineering, 13456 SE 27th PI., Ste. 200, Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 614-0949 Project. WAMU South Sanford Pg. No. Address: Sanford, Florida Date: 01/03/06 Client: Callison Architecture, Inc. Job No.: 5338 1 1 e+iKV 'e a 19,2 Trpr-. t LO'4 j' WOn`w. tq-2(5i= 0 L2I Armour Unsderfer Engineering A 13456 SE 27th PI., 200, Bellevue, WA 98005 A (425) 614-0949 Project: C '[- Eng.Z— Pg. Address: Ver. 1 • ,, 11Client: `'W1Xo'A iri(Wi Date: lob No50.5 Lx 1.728k Loads: LC 1, LATERAL Results for LC 2, TOTAL - Reaction units are k and k-ft ARMOUR UNSDERFER E. KIT CHAN 5338 WAMU SOUTH SANFORD, FL Moment frame -Drive thru 3.6 Jan 3, 2006 at 1:15 PM 5338 dirve thru moment frame.2d Company : ARMOUR UNSDERFER ENGR Jan 3, 2006Designer : KIT CHAN 1:31 PMJobNumber: 5338 WAMU SOUTH SANFORD, FL Checked By: Global Display Sections for Member Calcs 5 Max Internal Sections for Member Calcs 97 Include Shear Deformation Yes Merge Tolerance in 12 P-Delta Analysis Tolerance 10.50% Hot Rolled Steel Code AISC: ASD 9th Cold Formed Steel Code AISI 99: ASD Wood Code NDS 91/97: ASD Wood Temperature 10OF Concrete Code ACI 2002 Number of Shear Regions 4 Region Spacing Increment in 4 Concrete Stress Block Rectangular Use Cracked Sections Yes Bad Framing Warnings No Unused Force Warnings Yes General Material Properties 1 aen Conc3NW 3155 1372 Lw 15 1 nerm li to r- 6 uensftyf MM3 145 2 gen Conc4NW 3644 1584 15 6 145 3 nen Conc3LW 2085 906 15 6 11 4 gen . Conc4LW 2408 10600 1047 15 6 11 5 gen Alum 4077 3 1.29 173 6 aen Steel 1 29000 1 11154 3 65 49 7 RIGID 1 1e+7 1 0 0 0 Hot Rolled Steel Properties 1 A36 Gr.36 29000 11154 3 0.... 6551 r ve Eh 49 ' YIe3 ksi 36 2 A572 Gr.50 29000 11154 3 65 49 50 3 A992 29000 11154 3 65 49 50 4 A500 Gr.42 29000 11154 3 65 49 42 5 A500 Gr.46 29000 11154 3 65 49 46 Cold Formed Steel Properties 1 A570 33 29500 11346 3 w r 65 vcl IaR N i"J 49 T Iela KSI 33 MmaW ksi 52 2 A607 C1 55 29500 1 11346 3 1 .65 1 .49 1 55 F 70 General Section Sets 1 -k-1 CL... T.. ._. 1 GEM RE4X4 Beam en Conc3NW II1 1 6 21 333 l 21-333 4 2 RIGID None I RIGID 1 1e+6 1e+8 1 1e+8 RISA-213 Version 6.5 [P:\...\5338 WAMU NF South Sanford\Eng\5338_dirve thru moment frame.r2d] Page 5 r Company : ARMOUR UNSDERFER ENGR 0062Janan1:33, DesignerKITCHAN2 PM JobNumber: 5338 WAMU SOUTH SANFORD, FL Checked By: Cold Formed Steel Section Sets Hot Rolled Steel Section Sets Joint Coordinates and Temperatures 1 _ 6-1 1 N1 p 0 Temp 2 N2 36.67 0 0 0 3N301204N436.67 12 0 Joint Boundary Conditions Member Primary Data 1 Nil I N1 I N3 VwYVIYVIIq Q COLUMN vasl n usi Wi- d—a-F1=1 i Beam A99Material2 Desi n Rules IT 2M2N2N4COLUMNWideFlanaBeamA992vocal 3 M3 N3 N4 BEAM Wide Flan a Beam A992 Tjr-nl Basic Load Cases Load Combinations Load Combination Desian I' 1s ..ti.... AQIC nm Aelr . 1 LATERAL Yes vIu rVI111uu Yes vv000 Yes concrete Yes Footin s 2 TOTAL Yes Yes Yes Yes4 tes RISA- 2D Version 6.5 [P:\... \5338 WAMU NF South Sanford\Eng\5338 dire thru moment frame.r2d] Page 6 Company ARMOUR UNSDERFER ENGR Jan 3, 2006DesignerKITCHAN1:31 PMJobNumber: 5338 WAMU SOUTH SANFORD, FL Checked By: Cold Formed Steel Design Parameters Hot Rolled Steel Design Parameters Joint Loads and Enforced Displacements (BLC 1 : LATERAL) Member Distributed Loads BLC 2: GRAVITY) Member Point Loads Joint Reactions 1 C Irvin .Lsl .. n_, 1 1 N1 871 R 227 MZ K-ft 6.264 2 1 N2 857 227 6.151 3 1 Totals: 1.728 0 4 1 COG ft: NC NC Joint Deflections 1 1 I N1 0 0 Komon fradl 0 2 1 N2 0 0 0 3 1 N3 052 0 2.529e-4 4 1 N4 051 0 2.448e-4 Member Section Deflections 1 C U=MhIw 1 0hel Ce•. .. r._, 1 1 M1 1 0 IIIn 0 L/ KBUo NC 2 2 0 007 NC 3 3 0 021 6710.542 4 4 0 038 3744.038 5 5 0 052 2768.031 RISA-2D Version 6.5 [P:\ ..\5338 WAMU NF South Sanford\Eng\.5338 dirve thru moment frame.r2d] Page 7. r x•'4• 3 Company : ARMOUR UNSDERFER ENGR Jan 3, 2006 Designer KIT CHAN 1:31 PM Job Number: 5338 WAMU SOUTH SANFORD, FL Checked By: Member Section Deflections (Continued) If, IUornhor I shol Ce.. ., r 7 6 1 M2 1 0 0 in# Lly RBoo NC 7 2 0. 007 NC 8 3 0 021 6839.539 9 4 0' 038 3819.576 10 5 0 051 2827.962 11 1 M3 1 052 0 NC 12 2 052 01 NC 13 3 051 0 NC 14 4 051 01 NC 15 5 t .051 0 NC Member Section Forces 1 1 M1 1 227 871 IVlwnen R-Tt 8.264 2 2 227 871 3.652 3 3 227 871 1.04 4 4 227 871 1.572 5 5 227 671 4.164 6 1 M2 1 227 857 6.151 7 2 227 857 3.579 8 3 227 857 1.006 9 4 227 857 1.566 10 5 227 857 4.138 11 1 M3 1 857 227 4 184 12 2 857 227 2.104 13 3 857 227 023 14 4 857 227 2.057 15 5 857 227 4.138 Member Advanced Data I nhol I Roloxo _1 Relmce 1 flffceffinl . -1 rlff-friwl Tu+ ^-h. n-._v- Member A/SC ASD Steel Code Checks 1 r` RAmmk.r Shane I It' Mw 1 ro-rf41 Sher I It, 1 . F44.l c-n._cl 1 1 M1 W14X26 073 0 012 0 8.344 30 29.081 v 1 2.3 vn1 333 c n 1-11-3 2 1 M2 W14X26 073 0 012 0 8.344 30 29.081 1 2.3 331 H1-2 3 1 M3 W16X40 065 0 1 .002 0 1.889 30 6.017 1 1 204 H1-1 Member A/S/ Cold Formed Steel Code Checks LC Member Shane UC Max Lodftl Shear UC Loelftl Pnrkl 7nfkl nenrk-ffl r-1, r,.... r__ RISA-2D Version 6.5 [P:\... \5338 WAMU NF South Sanford\Eng\5338_dirve thru moment frame.r2d] Page 8 Beam Design (cantilever beams) Beam 15 In Canopy Edge Beam Perpendicular To Canopy Joists Beam Details: 26.25 It 9.2 ft 13.0 ft 9.2 ft 350 plf 500 plf 850 plf 0 Ibs Oft 0 Ibs Wide Flanne Shane: W16X26 fy = 36 ksi Wt / Ft = 26 plf Properties: E = 29 ksi A = 7.68 in` Ix = 301 in` d = 15.69 in Sx = 38.4 in' tw = 0.25 in rx = 6.26 in V2 = 0.125 in ly = 9.59 in' bf = 5.5 in Sy = 3.49 in' 4 = 0.345 in ry = 1.12 in Note: Negative values represent an upward deflection and positive values reneresent a downward deflection. Loadcase• 1 2 3 Uniform Load Point Between Point @ End On Beam Supports of Overhang RA = 9.79 kips 0.00 kips 0.00 kips Re = 20.35 kips 0.00 kips 0.00 kips Vx = 1.26 kips 0.00 kips 0.00 kips Vx1 = 0.00 kips 0.00 kips 0.00 kips V11187 P.O. = 9.79 kips 0.00 kips 0.00 kips Vmax Nen, 12.53 kips 0.00 kips 0.00 kips Mx = 55.39 ft-k 0.00 ft-k 0.00 ft-k Mx1 = 0.00 ft* 0.00 ft-k 0.00 ft-k Mmax Pos. = 56.33 ft-k 0.00 ft-k 0.00 ft-k Mmax MOO. 35.97 ft-k 0.00 ft-k 0.00 ft-k S, ROWS = 28.45 in 0.00 in 0.00 in 1, REWD = 223.19 in4 0.00 in4 0.00 in4 An, x = 0.73 in 0.00 in 0.00 in An,, x1 = 0.44 in 0.00 in 0.00 in An MAX = 0.73 in 0.00 0.00 in ALL, x = 0.43 in 0.00 in 0.00 in ALL, x1 = 0.26 in 0.00 in 0.00 in 1 &2 1 &3 1,2&3 Uniform + Point Uniform + All Loads Between Point @ End Applied 9.79 kips 9.79 kips 9.79 kips 20.35 kips 20.35 kips 20.35 kips 1.26 kips 1.26 kips 1.26 kips 0.00 kips 0.00 kips 0.00 kips 9.79 kips 9.79 kips 9.79 kips 12.53 kips 12.53 kips 12.53 kips 55.39 ft-k 55.39 ft-k 55.39 ft-k 0.00 ft-k 0.00 ft-k 0.00 ft-k 56.33 ft-k 56.33 ft-k 56.33 ft-k 35.97 ft-k 35.97 ft-k 35.97 ft-k 28.45 in 28.45 in 28.45 in 223.19 in4 223.19 in4 223.19 in4 0.73 in 0.73 in 0.73 in 0.44 in 0.44 in 0.44 in 0.73 in 0.73 in . 0.73 in 0.43 in 0.43 in 0.43 in 0.26 in 0.26 in 0.26 in rnour Unsderfer Engineering, 13456 BE 27th PI., Ste. 200, Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 614-0949 Project: WAMU South Sanford Pg. No. kddress: Sanford, Florida Date: 01/03/06 6lient: Callison Architecture, Inc. Job No.: 5338 Beam Design (cantilever beams) Strength and Deflection Checks: lChecking W16x26 As Beam Choice Y Beam Is: Compact Cb.= 1 Beam Is: Patially Braced S Unbraced Length, L = g b 6 ft Use X---- — .X 4 = 5.6 ft Fb = 0 ksi Lc = 6.03 ft Fb = 0 ksi 4 = 13.49 ft Fb = 0 ksi Fb = 20.15 ksi Governs y Checks: Loadcase: 1 V, ALLOW = 56.48 kips 12.53 kips OK. M, ALLOW = 64.48 ft-k 56.33 ft-k OK S, ALLOW = 38.40 in' 28.45 in' OK ATL, SPAN = 0.88 in 0.73 in OK ALL, SPAN = 1.31 in 0.43 in OK ATL, CANT = 0.54 in 0.44 in OK ALL, CANT = 0.81 in 0.26 in OK ATL MAX = 0.88 in 0.73 in OK Beam 15 In Canopy USE W16x26 n rmour Unsderfer Engineering, 13456 SE 27th PI., Ste. 200, Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 614-0949 7roject: WAMU South Sanford Pg. No. kddress: Sanford, Florida Date: 01/03/06 client: Callison Architecture, Inc. Job No.: 5338 w#Ukl W&O - Armour Unsderfer Engineering A 13456 SE 27th PI., 200, Bellevue, WA 98005 A (425) 614-0949 Project: W04Ar 1( $ T• Eng. Kc- Pg. Address: Ver. Client: " ac Date: Job No. 5 A WAMU Sanford, FL Lateral Loads Wind Loading Basic Wind 110 MPH Wind Pressure 29.1 Exposure B Iw = 1 Wind Load = 29 PSF Loads on Foundation Area of Lights = 1.3 SF No. of Lights = 3 Diam. Of Pole 8 IN P top = 113.5 LBS w pole = 12.9 PLF Height = 30 FEET Moment = 9224.7 LBS FEET Pier Footing Design All. Foud. Press = 2500 PSF Per Soil Report Lat. Brg = 150 PSF/FOOT OF DEPTH Depth of Embed = 5 FEET 24 INCHES Embedment Rqd = 5.1 FEET < 5 FEET USE: 24" diameter x 5'-0" embeded Pier Diameter Armour Unsderfer Engg, 13456 SE 27th PI., Ste. 200, Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 614-0949 Project: WAMU South Sanford Pg. No. Address: Sanford, FL Date:1/06/06 Client: Callison Architecture, Inc. Job No.: 5338 Bolt Size and Embedment Moment = 9224.7 LBS FEET d btwn Bolts = 11.3 IN on Diagonal T / Bolt = 9783 LBS T ult = 13695.912'LBS Bolt Capacity Bolt Embedment 18 INCHES Diameter of Bolt = 1.25 INCHES PHI Bolt = 0.85 Fy = 60000 PSI fc = 2500 PSI Ns = 73631 LBS Concrete Breakout Assume 6" emb. Pier Diameter = 24 INCHES c edge = 6 INCHES Proj. A of Fail. max = 113 IN^2 Proj. A w/ Edge = 1.13 IN^2 W2= 0..9 Vi3= 1.25 Nb= 17636.326 PHI Ncb= 16879 LBS Pullout Extention of Hook = 3.75 INCHES W4= 1.4 PHI = 0.75 Np = 10546.875 Npn= 14765.625 PHI N n = 11074 Side Blowout` I Ab = 4.6875 IN^2 PHI = P.75 Nsb = 103923.05 LBS Therefore use 11/4" A.B. with 18" Embedment 0 j- d Armour Unsderfer Engg, 13456 SE 27th PI., Ste. 200, Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 614-0949 Project: WAMU South Sanford Pg. No. Address: Sanford, FL Date:1/06/06 Client: Callison Architecture, Inc. Job No.: 5338 Ceiling Joist Design Ceil. LL = 10 PSF Wind Uplift = 33.1 PSF Dead Load = 4 PSF Joist Spacing 1.33 FEET Net w = 14 PSF Net U = 36.5 PSF t Span = 36.67 FEET No Verts = 2 Spans = 12:22 FEET V Down = 171.13 LBS V Up = 296.69 LBS i M Down = 347.75 LBS FT = M Up = 906.64 LBS FT = Try: 600S162-43 t V cap = 1358 LBS M cap = 16680 LBS IN 4173.02 LBS IN 10879.65 LBS IN 296.69 Therefore OK 10879.65 Therefore OK L Unbraced = 12.2 FEET (See AISIWIN Outputs) Therefore No Lateral Bracing Required beyond Center Use: 6005162-43 , @ 1.33 FEET with 2 Vertical Screw Cap = 140 LBS for #10 in 33 Mil V max = 296.69 LBS I No Screws = 2.1 i Use: 2 #10 Screws at Each Connection 3 #10 @ Center Support P max Vert. _ 1 200 LBS Per FBC krmour Unsderfer Engineering, 13456 SE 27th PI., Ste. 200, Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 614-0949 Project: WAMU South Sanford Pg. No. Address: Sanford, FL Date: 1/06/06 Client: Callison Architecture, Inc. Job No.: 5338 I www.clarkwestem.com 1996 AISI Specification ASD DATE: 1/4/2006 5338 wamu south sanford SECTION DESIGNATION: 6003162-43 Single INPUT PROPERTIES: Web Height = 6.000 in Top Flange = 1.625 in Bottom Flange = 1.625 in Stiffening Lip = 0.500 in Punchout Width = 1.500 in Steel Thickness = 0.0451 in Inside Comer Radius = 0.0712 in Yield Stress, Fy = 50.0 ksi Fy With Cold -Work, Fya = 50.0 ksi Punchout Length = 4.000 in ALLOWABLE CEILING JOIST SPANS INPUT PARAMETERS Dead Load = 4.0 psf DL Multiplied by 1.00 for Strength Checks Live Load = 10.0 psf LL Multiplied by 1.00 for Strength Checks Wind Load = 33.1 psf WL Multiplied by 1.00 for Strength Checks Deflection Limit = U240 Wind Load Not Modified for Deflection Calculations Bearing Lengths for Web Crippling: End Condition = 6.0 in Interior Condition = 6.0 in Shear and Web Crippling .Capacity Based on Unpunched Web ALLOWABLE CEILING SPANS - TWO or MORE EQUAL SPANS JOIST MECHANICAL BRACING AT: SPACING NONE MID Pt THIRD Pt 12.0 in 11' 7" 14' 6" 14' 10" I I 16.0 in 10, 9" 12' 2" 12' 2" 24.0 in 91211 9' 2" 91211 www.clarkwestem.com 1996 AISI Specification ASD DATE: 1/4/2006 5338 wamu south sanford SECTION DESIGNATION: 600S162-43 Single INPUT PROPERTIES: Web Height = 6.000 in Steel Thickness = 0.0451 in Top Flange = 1.625 in Inside Comer Radius = 0.0712 in Bottom Flange = 1.625 in Yield Stress, Fy = 50.0 ksi Stiffening Lip = 0.500 in Fy With Cold -Work, Fya = 50.0 ksi Punchout Width = 1.500 in Punchout Length = 4.000 in OUTPUT PROPERTIES: Effective Section Properties, Strong Axis Neutral Axis from Top Fiber (Ycg) 3.1174 in Moment of Inertia for Deflection (Ixx) 2.3158 in^4 Section Modulus (Sxx) 0.6959 in 3 Allowable Bending Moment (Ma) 1736.31 Ft -Lb Gross Section Properties of Full Section, Strong Axis Neutral Axis from Top Fiber (Ycg) 3.0000 in Moment of Inertia (Ixx) 2.3158 inA4 Cross Sectional Area (A) 0.4469 inA2 Radius of Gyration (Rx) 2.2764 in Section Properties, Weak Axis Gross Neutral Axis (Xcg) From Web Face 0.4139 in Gross Moment of Inertia (lyy) 0.1484 inA4 Radius of Gyration (Ry) 0.5762 in Effective Section Modulus (Syy) 0.1047 inA3 Effective Neutral Axis (Xcg) from Web Face 0.7207 in Allowable Moment (May) 261.25 Ft -Lb Other Section Property Data Net Area at Punchouts 0.3792 inA2 Member Weight per Foot of Length 1.5206 Ib/ft Allowable Shear Force In Web (Unpunched) 1358 lb Allowable Shear Force In Web (Punched) 984 lb Pao for use in Interaction Equation CS-2 5772 lb Torsional Properties Dist. from Shear Center to Neutral Axis (Xo) 1.0805 in St. Venant torsion Constant (J x 1000) 0.3030 inA4 Warping Constant (Cw) 1.0823 in^6 Radii of Gyration (Ro) 2.5849 in Torsional Flexural Constant (Beta) 0.8253 Allowable Web Crippling Loads (lb) 6.00in END BRNG 6.00in INT BRNG Cond 1 Cond 3 Cond 2 Cond 4 Single Member 744 504 1399 806 Punchout Reduction 0.969 0.969 C A L L I S 0 N PROJECT MANUAL PERMIT/CONSTRUCTION SET OFFICE PERMIT #t6A%p-(Z PLANS REVIEWED CITY OF SANFORD WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA January 18, 2006 CALLISON ARCHITECTURE, INC. 1420 Filth Avenue, Suite 2400, Seattle, Washington T 206 623 4646 F 206 623 4625 www.callison.com WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO - SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 00001 - TABLE OF CONTENTS PART 1 BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 0 - CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS 00320 GEOTECHNICAL DATA 00370 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES 00371 OWNER -PAID TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS - PROVIDED BY WASHINGTON MUTUAL PART 2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - PROVIDED BY WASHINGTON MUTUAL 01110 SUMMARY OF WORK 01210 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01310 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01710 PROJECT CLOSEOUT DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK 02300 EARTHWORK 02320 SUBSLAB PREPARATION 02365 TERMITE CONTROL 02621 FOUNDATION DRAINAGE PIPING 02753 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02765 TRAFFIC MARKING 02848 PRECAST PARKING BUMPERS 02891 TRAFFIC SIGNAGE DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03001 CONCRETE 03546 CONCRETE SLAB REPAIR DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04211 BRICK VENEER DIVISION 5 - METALS 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05210 STEEL JOISTS 05310 STEEL DECK 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTIC 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06400 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK TOC-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO - SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 00001 - TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07111 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07190 WATER REPELLENTS 07211 BATT AND BLANKET INSULATION 07212 RIGID BOARD INSULATION 07541 MECHANICALLY ATTACHED THERMOPLASTIC ROOFING 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07724 ROOF HATCH 07920 JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08115 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08210 WOOD DOORS 08310 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 08415 ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS AND ENTRANCES 08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08710 DOOR HARDWARE 08730 DOOR AND HARDWARE INSTALLATION 08800 GLAZING DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09111 LIGHTGAGE METAL SUPPORT FRAMING 09220 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09250 GYPSUM BOARD 09300 TILE 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09614 CONCRETE SEALER 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING 09680 CARPET 09682 CARPET TILES 09775 REINFORCED PLASTIC PANEL WALL COVERING 09900 PAINTING DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10536 METAL AWNINGS 10810 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10999 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT NOT USED DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS- 12491 HORIZONTAL BLINDS DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13852 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 13910 - FIRE PROTECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 13925 - FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS TOC-2 . 1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO - SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 00001 - TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS NOT USED DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15072 VIBRATION ISOLATION 15082 PIPING INSULATION 15086 DUCT INSULATION 15145 PLUMBING PIPING 15146 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15186 REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 15410 PLUMBING FIXTURES 15735 PACKAGED ROOF TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15810 DUCTS 15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES 15850 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 15950 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING 16070 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16123 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16131 CONDUIT 16138 BOXES 16140 WIRING DEVICES 16155 EQUIPMENT WIRING 16210 ELECTRICAL UTILITY SERVICES 16412 ENCLOSED SWITCHES 16443 PANELBOARDS 16491 FUSES 16510 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES 16520 EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES 16721 TELEPHONE, DATA AND SECURITY PATHWAYS DIVISION 17 - SYSTEMS 17000 STRUCTURED CABLING INFRASTRUCTURE END TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-3 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA DOCUMENT 00320 - GEOTECHNICAL DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The following geotechnical report -dated June 29, 2005, was prepared by Professional Service Industries (PSI), Inc, of Orlando, FL; phone (407-304-5560). Geotechnical Engineering Services Proposed Washington Mutual Bank Lake Mary Boulevard and U.S. Highway 17-92 Sanford, Seminole County, Florida Report Number PSI 757-55246 B. The complete soils investigation reports and associated supplements are available for review at the office of the Architect or the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Applicable END OF DOCUMENT 00320-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA DOCUMENT 00370 - TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES 1.1 SUMMARY A. In addition to testing performed by the Contractor for its own convenience, and testing and inspection required under the Contract Documents, tests as described in the Document 00371 - Owner -Paid Testing and Inspection Services, are to be performed under separate contracts. B. The Owner reserves the right to modify testing and inspection requirements described herein. END OF DOCUMENT 00370-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA DOCUMENT 00371 - OWNER -PAID TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The Owner will furnish testing and inspection services for the above Project. Requirements herein are intended as basic descriptions of required tests and may be waived or expanded without impact on the Contract price, except as necessary to accommodate substantial changes in coordination requirements. B. Reference to "testing laboratory" in singular shall not be construed to limit work under this document to a single testing agency. C. Comply with requirements of the Florida Building Code as amended by the jurisdictional code authority. D. Personnel employed in the inspection of soil, rock, concrete, and steel, specified under Divisions 2,3, and 5 of these specifications shall be qualified under the requirements of ASTM E329 - Standard Specification for Agencies engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction. E. Inspection and Test Reports: Prepare reports giving results and observations of tests, and stating compliance or noncompliance with Contract Documents. Include records of observations and tests performed, and other items as specified, herein. Duties and Responsibilities of the Testing Laboratory, 1. Submit written reports of inspections and tests to the Owner, Architect, and other parties designated by the Owner. 2. Submit copies of inspection reports to the jurisdictional building department, as required. 3. Submit copies of inspection reports to the Architect's Structural Engineer of items specified in Divisions 3, 4, and 5. 4. Upon request, provide interpretation of test results. 5. Submit final signed report as required to comply with provisions of UBC Paragraph 1701.3. G. Testing Laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Approve or accept any portion of the work. 3. Perform any duties of the Contractor. 1.2 EQUIPMENT A. Furnish all equipment to perform the required tests and inspections, except as required to be furnished by the General Contractor as described in the Contract Documents. 1.3 REQUIRED TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Earthwork: 1. Inspect spread footing excavations for conformance to the Contract Documents. 2. Fill Materials: Perform tests to determine acceptability for use. 3. Compaction: Perform density tests to determine compliance with specified compaction requirements. 4. Inspect capillary break and vapor barrier installation for conformance to Contract Documents. B. Trenching and Piping: 1. Perform compaction tests for bedding at one test per 100 linear feet of pipe bedding. 2. Perform compaction tests at one compaction test per lift per 100 linear feet of fill over pipe. 00371-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA DOCUMENT 00371 - OWNER -PAID TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES C. Asphalt Paving: 1. Perform in place density tests with a nuclear gage. 2. Record ambient and asphalt temperatures. 3. Perform Marshal Analysis tests to determine asphalt composition. Perform one test per day. D. Concrete Formwork: 1. Inspect forms for location, design, configuration, and seal of form joints and ties. 2. Check condition of bond surfaces, locations and sizes of all embedment items, and anchorage for prevention of displacement. E. Steel Concrete Reinforcement: 1. Obtain a copy of approved reinforcing steel placement drawings from the General Contractor. 2. Check reinforcement in place prior to the placement of concrete. F. Concrete: 1. Analyze concrete mix design. 2. Aggregate: Review source of aggregate to verify that supplier can furnish concrete of consistent quality. 3. Require mill reports for cement used. Perform tests on cement at Contractor's expense if reports cannot be furnished. 4. Inspect consolidation methods and finishing for conformance with contract requirements. 5. Slump and Air Content: a. ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C94. b. Test when strength specimens are made, and as often, in the professional opinion of the testing agency, as is necessary for control checks and acceptance proposed. 6. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F. and below, and when 80 degrees F. and above; and each time a set of compression test specimens is made. 7. Compressive Strength Tests: Test in accordance with ASTM C 39.Compression Test Specimens: 1) Collect in accordance with ASTM C31; mold and store cylinders for laboratories cured test specimens, except when field -cured test specimens are required. 2) Provide one set of 5 cylinders of each concrete class placed in any. one day, or for each 5,000 sq. ft. of surface area placed, unless otherwise indicated. Utilize cylinders in testing procedures as follows: 1 cylinder tested at 7 days, 1 cylinder tested at 14 days,2 cylinders tested at 28 days, and 1 cylinder retained in reserve for later testing if required. Special Requirements for Early Strength Concrete: Provide 2 additional cylinders (for a total of 7 per set) while placing concrete that will be post -tensioned. Test the 2 additional cylinders at 14 day. 4) Special Requirements for Drilled Piers: Provide one set of 5 cylinders per 50 cubic yards or fraction of drilled pier concrete c. When the frequency of testing will provide less than 5 strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. d. When the strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory - cured cylinders, notify all parties immediately by use of faxed test reports. 8. Concrete Reports shall include: a. Weather and date of pour. b. Name of concrete supplier and truck number. c. Exact mix used and maximum size of aggregate. d. Location in building where placed. e. Cylinder identification. f. Date cylinder received in laboratory. g. Slump data. h. Brand and type of cement used. i. Entrained air content (if required). j. Amount of water added after batching, if any. k. Sequential numbering of reports. 00371-2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA DOCUMENT 00371 - OWNER -PAID TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES I. Compressive strengths. 9. Report test results in writing to the Architect and the Contractor on the same day that tests are made. G. Masonry Veneer: 1. Take samples of mortar during masonry construction, in accordance with UBC Std. 21-16, and grout in accordance with UBC Standard 21-18. Take one test (3"x3"x6" prism) and cast two specimens for each 30 cu. yd. of grout placed each day. 2. Mill reports for masonry units are required. Perform tests if reports are unavailable. Notify the Owner of the extra service performed. 3. Testing of reinforcing shall be as specified for steel concrete reinforcing. H. Drilled in Anchors, Anchor Bolts, Headed Studs, and Epoxy or Cement Grouted Dowels or Anchors: 1. Provide periodic inspection of installation, including drilled holes after cleaning. 2. Confirm proper edge distances, depths, and spacings. 3. Provide tension testing. Test anchors indicated on Structural Drawings in accordance with the Structural Notes. Structural Welding: 1. Perform visual inspection of all field fillet welding, including stud anchor welds . Inspection of fillet welds shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1. 15 percent of all fillet welds shall be inspected by magnetic particle or dry penetrant methods. All full penetration welds shall be tested by ultrasonic methods in accordance with the requirements of AWS D1.1, Section 6, part III, by ASNT Level II technicians. Any size frequency (1.0, 2.35, 5.0 MHz) and angle (45, 60, 70, and 90) may be used to indicate the size, orientation, and type of discontinuity more accurately. 2. Verify welding materials, equipment, and welder qualifications. 3. Inspection reports shall include the following: a. Item inspected. b. Welder's name, certificate expiration date, certified positions. c. Electrode used. 4. Exceptions to Welding Inspection: Shop welding need not be inspected when shop has been registered and approved by jurisdictional code authorities, in accordance with UBC 1701.7. J. Structural Steel 1. Mill reports are required for all structural steel materials. Perform tests to verify strength of steel if mill reports cannot be furnished by the supplier to the laboratory for certification. Notify the Owner of extra services performed. 2. Shop Fabrication: Furnish visual inspection during fabrication of structural steel and components JAISC certified fabricators exempt from inspection requirement). Shapes, sizes, classes, and types of steel and threaded fasteners shall be verified for conformance with Contract Documents. 3. Field Assembly: Perform visual inspection of the installation of structural steel. Verify locations of all anchorages and inserts. Where adjustments are required, reinspect to confirm compliance with Contract Document requirements. K. Steel Decking: Perform visual inspection of welds. L. Cold Formed Metal Framing: Test stud gages and zinc coating thicknesses of random samples. M. Roofing: Inspect roof deck before roofing is started; perform inspection while roofing is being installed to verify compliance with Contract Documents and roofing materials manufacturer's specifications. Inspect all roof related flashing. N. Portland Cement Plaster: Perform periodic inspection as necessary to verify condition of substrate, compliance with Contract Documents, materials handling, application procedures, treatment of joints and penetrations, temporary protection, provisions for weeping and drainage, and sealant installation. 00371-3 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO - SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA DOCUMENT 00371 - OWNER -PAID TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 00371-4 01 /18/06 IN Washington Mutual 1.1. SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES 1. Summary 2. The Work 3. Contract Documents 4. Document Sets 5. Warranties 6. Owner's Rights 7. Field Engineering 8. Off -Hours Work 9. Phasing Requirements 10. Coordination 11. Reference Standards 12. Quality Control 13. Products and Materials 14. Temporary Facilities 15. Owner Furnished, Contractor Installed 16. Owner Furnished and Installed 17. Owner Provided, Contractor Makes Connections 18. Owner Furnished, misc. Work by others 19. Project Schedule 20. Supplier Diversity B. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Master Contractor's Agreement between Owner and Contractor, Including General Conditions. 2. Section 00100 Bid Requirements 3. Section 01210 Price and Payment Procedures 4. Section 01310 Administrative Requirements 5. Section 01710 Closeout Procedures 6. Drawings, Project Manual (Division 01 through 16 inclusive), Construction Contract; including General and Supplementary Conditions. 7. Other documents that are a supplement to the Contract Documents. In the event of conflict the contract documents shall take precedence over the bidding documents. Bid Requirements (Instructions to Bidders, Invitation to Bidders, Bid Form) Geotechnical Reports. Hazardous Materials Survey. 1.2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The Contract Documents consist of the Contract, General Conditions, Project Addenda, Drawings and the Project Manual which includes; the Specifications, and modifications incorporated in the documents before the execution of the contract. A. Project will be constructed under a Master Construction Agreement as modified by the Owner. B. Owner will retain others for the provision and installation of selected items as described elsewhere. C. The Contractor will be given one set of Printed Contract Documents and one electronic copy for use in the project. Additional copies including the cost of printing and distribution of the 01110-1 Washington Mutual 011 10.6oc Printed: 3129104 I Washington Mutual documents are the responsibility of the Contractor. D. The term "day' as used throughout the contract documents and this Section shall mean calendar day' unless stated otherwise herein. 1.3. DOCUMENT SETS A. Due to the close interaction required of the documents, the Contract Documents for this Work will only be issued as complete sets, which shall consist of a bound set of drawings and a bound Project Manual which includes the Specifications, and other relevant documents. B. The Owner and the Architect hereby disclaim any responsibility for any/all assumptions or decisions made by any bidder, contractor, subcontractor, materialmen, supplier or any other party who did not receive or work from a complete set of Contractor Documents as described herein. 1.4. WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES: Unless specifically stipulated in the individual sections of these specifications all Work shall be guaranteed by the Contractor against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year.after the date of Grand Opening. 1.5. OWNER'S RIGHTS UPON THE PREMISES: The Owner reserves the right to enter upon premises, to use same, and to have Work done by other contractors, or to use parts of the Work of the Contractor before Substantial or Final Completion of the Work (it being understood that such use by the Owner in no way relieves the Contractor from full responsibility for his entire Work until final completion of the contract). A. Full Washington Mutual occupancy of an existing building: (Occupied Remodel) Washington Mutual will occupy the site and existing building during construction. Cooperate with Washington Mutual to minimize conflicts and facilitate Washington Mutual usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Washington Mutual operations. B. Partial Washington Mutual occupancy: Washington Mutual reserves the right to occupy and place and install equipment in completed areas prior to substantial completion provided such occupancy does not substantially interfere with completion of the Work. Placing of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 1. A Certificate of Substantial Completion, or other authorization, will be executed for each portion of the Work occupied prior to Washington Mutual occupancy. 2. The Contractor shall obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from local building officials prior to Washington Mutual occupancy. 1.6. FIELD ENGINEERING: A. Laying out building: The Drawings indicate the lot lines, a bench mark, and permanent reference marking for the guidance of the Contractor in finding the proper locations and elevations of the building. Contractor is responsible for preserving, maintaining, or replacing any and all benchmarks, survey stakes, monuments, or other control points disturbed, or required, by the Work. B. Provide and maintain grades, lines, and levels. Report errors in dimensions before commencing Work. C. Provide such field engineering services as are required for proper completion of the Work including but not limited to; structural design of shoring, bracing, and temporary supports, forms, stairs, ladders, and similar items provided by Contractor as part of means and methods of construction. D. For new locations and or additions provide a Final Property (ALTA) Survey. Before substantial completion, prepare a final property survey showing significant features for the project. Include a certification, signed by the Surveyor, to the effect that metes, bounds, lines and levels of the project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. 01110-2 Was"lon Mutual 01110.doc NNW: 3I29101 NIP Washington Mutual E. Surveyor: Engage a Land Surveyor registered in the state where the project is located, to perform land surveying required. 1.7. OFF -HOURS WORK: A. Off -hours work shall be defined as Work performed outside of regular branch business hours, including weekends, or on bank holidays. Off -hours Work must be approved in advance by the Owner's Designated Representative. In an occupied facility Off -hours work will be mandatory, how much will depend on the Contractors needs in scheduling the Work. Once the facility is open to the public, Contractor must schedule ALL Work in areas that are unprotected by approved sound or safety barriers (Caution Tape is not an approved safety barrier) to be performed at such times other than normal Facility business hours (off -hours). No additional compensation will be allowed for scheduled night, or off- hours Work. B. If overtime work or special equipment are the means of maintaining existing services, the Contractor shall provide same without extra cost to the Owner, unless prior written notice is given by the Owner. . C. Sawing, jack -hammering, or other noise or vibration conditions caused by demolition removal procedures shall be performed after business hours of the branch, Monday through Friday or weekends if required, however, prior coordination with the Owner is required. Contractor shall research and follow local ordinances concerning noise abatement, as well. 1.8. PHASING REQUIREMENTS: A. For Occupied Remodel Projects: 1. Contractor is to include in their bid to allow for multiple phases of work. 2. Coordinate use of premises under direction of the Owner, and in accordance with the requirements of jurisdictional code authorities. 3. Owner Occupancy Requirements: Owner retains the right to occupy the existing portions of the premises during entire period of construction. Cooperate with the Owner to minimize conflict, and facilitate Owner's operations. 4. Perform work in Owner occupied areas only while the facility is closed, unless approved otherwise. 1.9. COORDINATION - CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR THE FOLLOWING: A. Coordinate Work of the various Sections of the Specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of the project elements, with provisions for accommodating items to be installed later. B. Stage and coordinate all activities, so as'to minimize interference with tenants, or Owners, operations that will continue during the course of the Project, both in the building and those on the site or adjacent sites. C. Utilities (including, but not limited to, water, electricity, gas, sewer, telephone, and site lighting) serving occupied tenant areas are not to be interrupted. Access to occupied tenant spaces, and parking in the vicinity of occupied tenant space, is not to be blocked. D. All staging and construction activities that may affect other tenants are subject to Owner's approval, and will be coordinated with the Owner's Designated Representative. E. Verify characteristics of elements of interrelated operating equipment are compatible; coordinate Work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. F. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical Work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. G. Coordinate and verify actual dead loads for mechanical and electrical equipment with 01110-3 Washington MUNal o111o.doc Printed: 3lt" QI Washington Mutual equipment indicated in Drawings. H. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduits, as closely as practicable; make runs parallel with lines of building. I. Provide proper access and clearance for equipment and components requiring maintenance, repair, and servicing. Provisions shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. J. Coordinate Work of all design/build subcontractors with other Work indicated on the Drawings. K. In finished areas, except as otherwise shown in the Contract Documents, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. L. Execute cutting and patching to integrate elements of Work, uncover ill-timed, defective, and non -conforming Work, provide openings for penetrations of existing surfaces, and provide samples for testing. Seal penetrations through floors, walls, ceilings, and roofs. M. Contractor shall be responsible for Coordination of Work with Owner's Separate contractors and scheduling and coordinating deliveries of materials provided by Owner. 1.10. REFERENCE STANDARDS A. For products or quality specified by association or trade standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more stringent requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. The date of the standard is that in effect as of the bid date, or date of the Work Authorization when there are no bids, except when a specific date is specified. 1.1 1. QUALITY CONTROL A. CONTINUOUS SUPERVISION: Contractor shall employ and maintain at the jobsite, as required to fully and efficiently execute the Work, a project superintendent with previous experience in similar retail projects. Contractor shall designate the superintendent for the Project at the time of Award but not later than prior to commencement of Work. Contractor shall not replace the superintendent without the prior approval by the Owner. B. SKILLED LABOR: Contractor shall use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the Work. Owner has the right to require Contractor to remove from its work force assigned to the Work any employees deemed incompetent, careless, or otherwise objectionable, or any personnel whose actions are deemed to be contrary to public interest or inconsistent with the best interest of the Project. Contractor shall promptly furnish qualified substitutes for any employees that, in the opinion of Owner are unsatisfactory. C. Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, tools, equipment, superintendence, temporary facilities, and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work. D. Government Requirements: Contractor shall comply with ordinances and regulations of public authorities. Specific clarifications, modifications, or waivers of building code requirements are listed in the applicable sections. E. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods and sequences of construction, and for the safety of workers and others on the construction site. F. Coordination of Work with Owner's separate contractors, scheduling and coordinating deliveries of materials provided by Owner G. MEASUREMENTS: Before ordering any material or doing any Work, each Contractor shall 01110-4 Washington Mutual 011 10.doc Printed: Y291W V1 Washington Mutual verify all measurements at the building and shall be responsible for the correctness of same. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed on account of difference between actual dimensions and measurements indicated on the Drawings. Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Architect for consideration before proceeding with the Work. H. MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS: All manufactured items, material, and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with Manufacturer's directions. 1. EXAMINATION PRIOR TO INSTALLATION: 1. Prior to starting Work, carefully inspect installed Work of other trades and verify that such Work is complete to the point where Work may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. 2. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning Work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. J. MOCK-UPS 1. Provide mock-ups as specified in the individual specification sections. When the initial mock-up is unacceptable to the Architect, provide additional mock-ups until approval is obtained. 2. Do not proceed with subsequent work until approval of the mock-up is obtained. 3. Approval of mock-up shall be the standard of workmanship and materials for the remainder of the work similar to the mock-up. 4. Maintain mock-up in approved condition, until directed otherwise. 5. Unless specified otherwise, remove mock-up at completion, when directed by Architect. 6. Unless specified or approved otherwise, schedule mock-ups a minimum of 5 working days prior to actual installation of the work represented by the mock-up. 7. Notify the Architect and Owner a minimum of 5 working days prior to mock-up. 8. For each mock-up, provide conditions which will replicate the conditions of the actual installation, including lighting. K. TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES: 1. Owner's Responsibilities: a. Tests and inspections shall be in accordance with code requirements, and as listed on the Structural Drawings. 2. Contractor's Responsibilities: a. Cooperate with testing laboratory personnel, and furnish access, tools, samples, certifications, test reports, design mixes, equipment, storage, and assistance as requested by the testing laboratory. b. Notify Architect and testing laboratory 48 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring inspection and testing. When tests or inspections cannot be performed, through the fault of the Contractor, reimburse the Owner for the additional costs incurred. c. Remove and replace all Work found not complying with the Contract Documents. Remedies shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents and code 01110-5 Washington Mutual 011 10.doc Printed: 3I29101 NP Washington Mutual requirements. d. If initial tests and inspections indicate deficient Work, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the costs of all subsequent tests and inspections related to the deficiency. e. All damage which may occur to the Work as a result of normal testing operations shall be repaired by Contractor to match surrounding surfaces. f. Schedule testing and inspection so that the Work of testing and inspection personnel will be as continuous and brief as possible. g. Tests and inspections shall be in accordance with code requirements and as indicated in the individual Specifications Sections. 1.12. PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS: A. PRODUCTS: Provide products of same kind from a single source. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and similar terms. 1. Deliver, store, and handle products according to manufacturer's written instructions, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. 2. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage and to prevent overcrowding construction spaces. 3. Deliver in manufacturer's original sealed packaging with labels and written instructions for handling, storing, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products at time of delivery for compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure items are undamaged and properly protected. 5. Store heavy items in a manner that will not endanger supporting construction. 6. Store products subject to damage on platforms or pallets, under cover in a weather tight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required. 7. Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged, and are new at the time of installation. 8. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, and other devices and components needed for a complete installation and the intended use and effect. 9. Do not attach manufacturer's labels or trademark on surfaces exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior, except for required nameplates. B. PRODUCT SELECTION: Select products as follows: 1. Where only a single product or manufacturer is named, provide the item specified. No substitutions will be permitted. 2. Where two or more products or manufacturers are named, provide one of the items specified. No substitutions will be permitted. 3. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, accompanied by the term "or approved" provide the named item or comply with provisions concerning "product substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product or manufacturer using the Substitution Request Form, attached herein under Section 01310, Administrative Requirements. 4. Where a product is described with required characteristics, with or without naming a brand or trademark, provide and submit a product that complies with those 01110-6 Washington Mutual 011 10.doc Pnnted: 3/29M W1 Washington Mutual characteristics and other Contract Document requirements. 5. Where compliance with performance requirements is specified, provide products, and submittals that comply and are recommended by the manufacturer for the application. 6. Where compliance with codes, regulations, or standards, is specified, select and submit a product that complies with the codes, regulations, or standards referenced. 7. See Section 01310 for Submittal Requirements. C. Unless otherwise indicated, Owner's Designated Representative will select color, pattern, and texture of each product from manufacturer's full range of options. 1.13. TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Standards: Comply with NFPA 241, "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations'; ANSI Al Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition"; and NECA Electrical Design Library's 'Temporary Electrical Facilities." Electrical service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. B. Provide temporary utility services to Project site for use during Work on the Project. Arrange for and coordinate temporary utility services with local utility companies. Remodel or OCrijpied Spaces- The Contractor shall sequence the Work and provide temporary and/or intermediate utility service in such a manner as to maintain existing levels of service for electrical power, fire protection, telephone, security, data systems, lighting, heating, and ventilation systems so that the daily operation of the site is not disrupted. 1. Fire Exits: Maintain all existing fire exits throughout the Work on the Project or provide new and/or temporary fire exits as required by the local governing authority. 2. Fire Sprinkler System: The Contractor shall sequence the Work and provide temporary and/or intermediate fire service in such a manner as to maintain with out interruption the present level of fire protection as is in the existing building. Provide barriers as required to protect existing spaces from the new construction areas. Contractor shall provide a "Fire Watch", fire extinguishers and other means of fire protection as necessary during periods of interruption of the existing system as required to protect the facility and meet the Fire Marshal's and building owner's requirements. 3. Contractor shall separately meter and pay use charges for temporary utility services. During occupied remodel projects Owner shall pay for all water and electrical usage for the duration of the project.) Contractor shall make all necessary changes or modifications required to existing services to accommodate the construction and maintain the existing services. 4. Provide temporary heat for curing or drying of Work, and for protection of new Work on the Project from adverse effects of low temperatures. Use of gasoline -burning heaters and open -flame heaters expressly denied. Contractor shall pay for all costs associated with temporary heating. 5. Contractor shall provide telephone service for use during Work on the Project for all construction activities and Sub -Contractor use. Contractor shall provide a fax machine with a separate designated number for communication during Work on the Project. C. Coordinate with Owner for assignment of construction field office and staging space within its own occupied space. D. Install project identification and other signs in locations directed by Owner's Designated Representative to inform the public and persons seeking entrance to Project. E. Collect waste daily and, when containers are full, legally dispose of waste off -site in accordance with all local regulations. 01110-7 Washinglon Mulual 011 10.doc Printed: Y29/04 11111 Washington Mutual 1. Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials in separate closed waste containers. 2. Dispose of material according to applicable laws and regulations. F. Provide temporary fire protection until permanent systems supply fire -protection needs. Provide adequate numbers and types of fire extinguishers. Store combustible materials in fire -safe containers in fire -safe locations. G. NO SMOKING SHALL BE PERMITTED WITHIN INTERIOR SPACES OF THE PROJECT SITE. H. Provide temporary environmental controls as required by authorities having jurisdiction including, but not limited to, erosion and sediment control, dust control, noise control, and pollution control. 1. Provide containment or other means to prevent dust from penetrating to the atmosphere of occupied spaces and other areas that may be adversely affected by dust. 2. Contractor shall provide and install temporary filters at all return air grills within area of Work to prevent dust from entering ductwork. These filters should remain in place until area is ready to be turned over to the Owner for fixturing. Temporary filters shall be maintained and replaced on a regular basis, to prevent degradation of system performance, and to maintain proper air flow. 3. Unless approved otherwise, limit excessive noise producing activities to non -business hours. Comply with all Local ordinances, Specification Section 01110, 1.10 and landlord restrictions on noise producing activities. 4. Unless approved otherwise, the use of radios or other portable stereo equipment shall be prohibited on the Project site. I. Provide temporary weather -tight closures of openings in exterior surfaces to provide acceptable working conditions and protection for materials, to allow for temporary heating, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Where necessary, provide doors with self - closing hardware and locks. Exterior enclosures shall be sufficiently well constructed to prevent blow off during inclement weather, and shall be sealed tight to prevent water penetration and excessive air infiltration. J. Maintain pedestrian and vehicular access to the site and within the site to provide for emergency vehicle access and to facilitate the adjacent business operations. K. Temporary Construction: 1. Obtain prior approval from Owner for all modifications to existing systems or facilities not indicated. Remove temporary systems or facilities when use is no longer required. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary systems or facilities required as part of the Work. L. Protection: Protect existing and new construction from damage caused by construction operations; provide protective covering to protect surfaces as appropriate. 1.14. OWNER FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED: A. The Owner will Furnish for the Contractor to install the following: 1. Kitchen appliances in break room (Includes Refrigerator, Microwave, Coffee Machine, Water Dispenser, White Board, and Bulletin Board) 2. Carpet (Some locations only - refer to Finish Schedule) 3. Porcelain tile (See Finish Schedule for specific Tiles) 4. Lockers 5. Kids Area (Gameboy w/ security tether, books, toys) 01110-8 Washington Mutual01110.doc NNW: 30" 0 Washington Mutual 6. Chair Rail (Some locations) 7. Pylon sign holder (freestanding) 8. Light Fixtures, as scheduled. (Not all light fixtures are provided by Owner) B. Owner shall furnish shop drawings and product data to Contractor. C. Owner shall arrange and pay for delivery to site. D. Contractor shall review shop drawings and product data for coordination of construction processes. E. The Contractor shall designate delivery dates in the Contractor's construction schedule and shall receive, unload and install at the site. The Contractor is responsible for protecting items from damage, including damage from exposure to the elements, and for repair or replacement of items damaged as a result of his operations. F. Contractor shall receive and unload products at site, inspect for completeness and damage, handle and store items until installed. Contractor shall immediately notify Owner's Designated Representative immediately of any damaged or incomplete items, and shall upon request provide a complete list of all items damaged or incomplete. G. Contractor shall install, finish and protect products. H. Contractor shall repair or replace items damaged by Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.15. OWNER FURNISHED AND INSTALLED ITEMS: A. The Owner will enter into a separate contract for the furnishing and installation of the following: 1. Building Exterior Signage and logo. 2. Interior Dimensional Graphics 3. Bank equipment, including ATM's and Drive Through Equipment 4. Pneumatic Tube system 5. Furniture and Furnishings. 6. Safe in Security Room 7. Custom Freestanding Casework 8. Electronic Security System 9. Telecommunications and data systems. 10. Low voltage cabling 11. Music System B. Owner shall provide shop drawings, rough openings dimensions, electrical requirements to Contractor as needed. C. Owner shall make all required final installations and connections. D. Contractor shall coordinate rough opening requirements and installation schedule with other construction. E. Contractor shall provide all conduits, pull strings, cable, junction boxes, mud rings, and other items as indicated on drawings. 1.16. OWNER PROVIDED WITH FINAL CONNECTIONS BY CONTRACTOR: A. The Owner will enter into a separate contract for providing the following, Contractor is required to make final connections : 1. Identifying Devices: All electrical signs, including neon, to be connected to electrical power by Contractor. 2. ATM's 3. Consultation Platform Desks, Electrical Subcontractor shall make final connections. 4. Contractor to verify ALL voltage requirements. 01110-9 Washington Mutual01110.doc Panted: 3129M 11111 Washington Mutual 5. Entry Door Security, Contractor to provide door and hardware, Owner to make security tie-in. See Responsibility Matrix in Drawings. B. Owner shall provide shop drawings, rough openings dimensions, and electrical requirements to Contractor as needed. C. Owner shall make all required final installations and connections. D. Contractor shall coordinate rough opening requirements and installation schedule with other construction. E. Contractor shall provide all conduits, pull strings, cable, junction boxes, mud rings, and other items as indicated on drawings. 1.17. OWNER TO FURNISH AND INSTALL WITH MISCELLANEOUS WORK BY OTHERS: A. Contractor shall provide blocking and backing for Owner supplied fixtures as shown on drawings. 1.18. PROJECT SCHEDULE The Work of this Project shall generally include the following schedule milestones for completion of the project. See attached sample schedule of Owner's requirements and coordination dates. Contractor shall submit a complete Project Schedule in accordance with the requirements of Specification Section 01310, incorporating the Owner's Project requirements including phasing of the Project. 1.19. SUPPLIER DIVERSITY Owner is committed to Supplier Diversity by providing opportunities for small, women, minority and disabled business enterprises (WMDVBE's) to participate in its purchasing and contracting activities on a competitive basis. While it is not a requirement to subcontract any portion of the Work, subcontracting with WMDVBE's is an integral component of Owner's overall Supplier Diversity commitment, Owner expects its Prime Contractors/Suppliers to partner with.Owner in meeting Owner's Supplier Diversity commitment by subcontracting with WMDVBE's to the maximum extent possible. All Prime Contractor's/Suppliers doing business with Owner shall submit a WMDVBE Subcontracting Plan and Report in accordance with the Instructions and Plan and Report incorporated as an Exhibit to the applicable Work Authorization Document. PART 7 not ICT-s NOT USED PART- 3 EXECUTION NOT USED End of Section 01110 Attach OWNER Sequence Schedule Here 01110-10 Washinglon MAW 011104m Pdnkd: 3129N0 11411 Washington Mutual 1.1. SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES 1. Alternates 2. Unit Prices 3. Allowances 4. Changes to Contract 5. Application for Payment B. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Master Contractor's Agreement between Owner and Contractor, Including General Conditions 2. Section 00100 Bid Requirements 3. Section 01110 Summary of Work 4. Section 01310 Administrative Requirements 5. Section 01710 Closeout Procedures 1.2. ALTERNATES A. An alternate is a change to the Bid Price for changing the Work as described in the alternate. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all alternates. B. Alternates selected by the Owner shall be incorporated into the Contract Sum. 1.3. UNIT PRICES A. Unit Prices will be exercised at the option of Owner at its sole discretion. B. Prices stated for each Unit Price shall include all costs for the Project covered by the Unit Price including overhead and profit. C. Unit Prices shall be valid for the duration of the Contract. D. The Construction indicated on the Drawings constitutes the Work. Amounts stated for unit prices constitute the amount to be added or subtracted to the Contract Sum for changes to the Work. E. Provide detailed documentation to support the quantities associated in the billing of Work performed using Unit Prices. 1.4. ALLOWANCES A. If one or more of components of the Work cannot be adequately designed or described prior to the'preparation of the Contract Sum, then an allowance shall be determined by the architect and included in the Contract Documents at time of bidding for incorporation in the Contractor's Bid for those components of the Work and subsequently in the Contract Sum and used in determining the Contractor's Fee. All such allowances shall be itemized in Contractors Bid. B. Once an allowance item is adequately designed or described. Owner shall issue such information to Contractor for pricing. The costs of the Work for such allowance items shall be compared with the amount of the allowance, and if such cost of the Work is different from the allowance, the Contract Sum shall, by a Change Order, be adjusted by the amount of the difference, and the Contractor's Fee shall be adjusted in accordance with the contract. Contractor to provide detailed documentation to support all costs to be billed in the allowance. C. Provide documentation in accordance with Specification Section 01210 - 1.5.E. and the General Condition of the Contract. 01210-1 Washington WW101210.60t Printed: M2 04 @V Washington Mutual D. COSTS INCLUDED IN ALLOWANCES 1. Cost of product to Contractor or subcontractor, less applicable trade discounts. 2. Delivery to site. 3. Labor required under allowance. 4. Contractors Fee (Overhead and Profit) is not to be included in the allowance but in the Contract Sum. 1.5. CHANGES TO CONTRACT: A. It is expected and contemplated that changes in the Work will occur during the course of the Work. The parties agree that the adjustments to Contract Sum and Contract Time, if any, provided by a Change Order or under the Construction Change Directive process, shall constitute the total and complete compensation and remedy for a change in the Work, including any effect of the individual change and any cumulative effects of prior changes in the Work as a whole, and all direct and indirect costs of any kind or nature, including without limitation overhead, extended overhead, profit, impact costs, ripple costs, delay costs, inefficiency costs, and all other costs or damages of any kind. B. This Specification is a supplement to the General Conditions of the Master Contractor's Agreement between Owner and Contractor. In the event of conflict between it and the Agreement, the language in the agreement shall supercede the specification. C. This Section outlines the procedures governing processing of Change Orders and related documents. 1. SUBMIT name of the individual authorized to receive, and approve, change order documents, and be responsible for informing others in Contractors employ or Subcontractors of changes to the Work. 2. CHANGE LOG: Contractor shall keep a log of all items that may potentially affect the Contract Sum or Contract Time. This log is to be discussed and submitted to both the Owner and Architect weekly as a part of the Project meeting minutes. The log shall include at a minimum a potential change or change proposal number, a description, the originating document, and it's tracking status. Tracking shall include the change proposal number, change order number (once approved), date of occurrence, and amount of change proposal. 3. Except in an emergency, no extra Work will proceed without a written Change Order, or Construction Change Directive, issued by the Architect and signed by the Owner, or a Construction Change Authorization Order issued by the Owner's Designated Representative. 4. Owner will not be obligated to pay for Work completed without prior written authorization from Owner's Designated Representative. D. CHANGE DOCUMENTS 1. REQIJESI EOR INFORMATION (RFI), Issued by the Contractor to the Architect and/or Owner. Proceeding with the Work described in the Architect's response to Contractor's RFI indicates that there will NOT be a change in either Contract Sum or Contract Time. a. If Contractor desires a clarification of a particular point in the Construction Documents from the Architect or Owner, Contractor shall submit a request for additional information (RFI) form to the Architect and the Owner. A response will be made by issuance of a clarification in the form of an Architect's Supplemental Instruction (ASI), or be made on the RFI form. Any response on a Contractors RFI shall be treated as if the Architect issued an Architect's Supplemental Instructions and is assumed to have no impact on either Contract Sum or Contract Time. b. The Contractor shall keep a numbered log of all such requests. Each request should be sent BOTH to the Owner and the Architect. Each request shall 01210-2 Washington Mutual 01210.doc Panted: 3/29/04 PJ Washington Mutual include at a minimum: the date of the request, the Specification Section, Drawing number and location, a brief explanation of the question, the time frame within which a response is required, and a space for a reply, and an indication if there will be any cost or time impact. c. A clarification or response to the RFI does NOT authorize any changes in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. d. Within ten 0 0) days after the receipt of a response to an RFI, Contractor shall submit any request for adjustment in either the Contract Sum or Contract Time to the Owner and the Architect in writing in the form of a change proposal. This change proposal shall include a complete estimate and breakdown of all costs and time impacts per the requirements of this Specification and the Contract Documents. 2. (ASI): Issued by the Architect as an interpretation to the Contract Documents. Proceeding with the Work described in the Architect's Supplemental Instructions, indicates that there will NOT be a Change in either the Contract Sum or Contract Time. a. From time to time during the progress of the Work the Architect may issue supplemental instructions and or clarifications which interpret the Contract Documents or order minor changes in the Work WITHOUT change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. Such minor changes are authorized under the Contract. b. Proceeding with the Work described in an ASI indicates the Contractor acknowledges that there will be no change in either the Contract Sum or Contract Time. c. Within ten (10) days after the receipt of an ASI, Contractor shall submit any request for adjustment in either the Contract Sum or Contract Time to the Owner and the Architect in writing in the form of a change proposal. This change proposal shall include a complete estimate and breakdown of all costs and time impacts per the requirements of this Specification and the Contract Documents. 3. PROPOSAI REQ1 IF : Proposal Request (PR), May be issued by any team member. This is NOT a Change Order nor a direction to proceed with the Work described in the Proposal Request. a. From time to time during the Work on the Project of Construction the Owner or Architect may issue a Proposal Request which includes a detailed description of a proposed change with or without supplementary or revised drawings and specifications. This request is for an itemized quotation for changes in the Contract Sum and/or Contract Time for the proposed modifications to the Contract Documents. b. Contractor will formulate a cost for the change in the form of a Contractors Change Proposal and forward it to the Architect for review prior to beginning any proposed Work. The Contractor shall respond by issuing a Change Proposal within ten (10) days. Costs will be calculated and submitted in accordance the Specifications and the Contract. c. When cost or credit for the change has been agreed upon by the Owner and the Contractor, the Architect will include the request in a Change Order. d. All proposals will be issued by the Architect in numbered sequence. e. If the Owner or Architect is unable to obtain acceptable timely proposals for the changes that are necessary, he may under the General Conditions of the Contract, issue a Construction Change Directive. 01210-3 Wasli gim Mutual 01210.doc Prinled: 3129104 QY Washington Mutual a. The Contractor may propose a change by submitting a Change Proposal for change to the Architect and Owner, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum and/or Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing the effect on the Work by Contractor, Sub -Contractor's, and Owner's Separate Contractors. b. Use a standard proposal form or letter issued by the Contractor issued in a numbered sequence. c. The Contractor shall within 10 days of receiving notice of a condition which it feels involves a Change in Contract Sum or Contract Time, submit, in writing, to both the Owner and the Architect an estimate of the costs per the requirements of the Specifications and Contract. Prices must be submitted within 10 days of any initial Work being done. Costs submitted after the Work has been completed will not be reimbursed, unless prior written approval from Owner's Designated Representative has authorized Time and Material Pricing. Such Time and Material Pricing shall be submitted within 10 days of completion of the Work. d. Whenever Change Proposals to adjust the Contract Sum become necessary, The Owner will have the right to select the method of pricing to be used by the Contractor. The options will be in order of preference: i. Lump Sum, Based on Contractors Proposal Request lump sum quotation. ii. Unit Price, For Predetermined unit prices and quantities. iii. Time and Materials, Submit itemized accounting and supporting data after completion of change. e. When submitting a Change Proposal, include copies of all related documents, Drawings affected, RFI's, ASI's , PR's) and backup information supporting the costs, to expedite review. f. The Owner and the Architect will review the costs and once approved, the Change will be incorporated into a Change Order. 5. CONSTRIICIION CHANGE DIRECTIVIf(CCD): Issued by the Architect or the Owner's designated Representative, and Signed by both the Architect and the Owner. a. Architect (or Owner) may issue a directive, signed by both the Architect and the Owner, instructing the contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. A Construction Change Directive is a tool for directing changes in the Work which, if not implemented expeditiously, might delay the project or cause the Owner to incur additional costs. A Change Directive shall be used where the Owner and the Contractor, for whatever reason, have not reached agreement upon the proposed changes in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. b. The document will describe change in the Work, and will designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. c. The Contractor must promptly proceed with the change directed. d. If the proposed method of adjustment is acceptable, the Contractor shall sign the CCD and so advise the Architect. The method selected shall be utilized in the determination of future pay applications. e. If the proposed method of adjustment is not acceptable, the Contractor shall so advise the Architect within 10 days. In such event, the method of adjustment will automatically become that. designated in Subparagraph 7.3 of the Master Contractor's Agreement. 01210-4 WatiNnglon Mutual 01210.doc Pointed: 329M 0 Washington Mutual f. The Architect should prepare a Change Order for the Work described in the directive when (a) the Contractor agrees with the proposed adjustments to the Contract Sum and Contract Time upon receipt of the Construction Change Directive, or (b) the Contractor and Owner agree to the change in Contract Sum and Contract Time pursuant to Subparagraph 7.3 of the Master Contractor's Agreement. g. A Construction Change Directive Signed by the Contractor indicates agreement of the Contractor with the Directive including the adjustment in Contract Sum (or Guaranteed Maximum Price) and Contract Time. Such agreement shall become effective immediately and be forwarded to the Architect for inclusion in a Change Order. 6. • Use Standard Washington Mutual Contractor Change Order Form. Change Orders are issued by the Architect. A Change Order is the mly Document that changes the Contract Sum or Contract Time. a. Change Orders are issued to amend the Contract Documents, Contract Sum, and/or Contract Time. Change Orders incorporate one or more of the following: a Contractor's Change Proposal, Construction Change Directive, or Construction Change Authorization, into a Change Order to the Contract Work Authorization Document). b. Execution of Change Orders: Architect will issue three copies of the Change Order for signatures by the parties. Once the Owner has signed the Change Order it will be forwarded to the Contractor for execution and signature. The Contractor shall forward one fully executed original, each to the Architect and the Owner. Contractor will retain one original for its records. A copy of the executed Change Order should be attached to the Application for Payment. c. Contractor shall promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to include each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Sum as shown on Change Order. d. Contractor shall promptly revise Progress Schedule to reflect any change in Contract Time. e. Contractor shall promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents in accordance with Specification Section 01310. E. DOCUMENTATION OF CHANGE IN CONTRACT SUM AND CONTRACT TIME. 1. Maintain detailed records of Work done. Provide full information required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs of changes in the Work. 2. Document each quotation for an adjustment in either Contract Sum or Contract Time with sufficient data to allow evaluation of the Change Proposal. 3. Provide data to support computations: a. Quantities of products, labor and equipment. b. Taxes, insurance and bonds. c. Overhead and profit in accordance with the Master Contractor's Agreement. d. Justification for any adjustment in Contract Time. e. Credit for deletions from contract, similarly documented. 4. Support each claim for additional costs, and for Work done on a time and material or cost plus basis, with additional information: a. Origin and date of claim. b. Dates and times Work was performed, and by whom. c. Time records and wage rates paid. d. Itemized Invoices and receipts for products, equipment and Subcontractors, similarly documented 01210-5 Waslinglon Mutual01210.doc Printed: Y29104 W Washington Mutual 1.6. APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT: A. FORMAT Use Washington Mutual Form for Application and Certification for Payment supported with Washington Mutual continuation sheet. (A sample is attached herein). B. APPLICATION PREPARATION: 1. In Preparing the Application for payment, Complete the continuation sheet as backup to the Application for payment using the schedule of values described in section 01310. 2. Except as otherwise indicated, complete every entry provided on the Washington Mutual Application for Payment form, including notarization and execution by authorized persons. Incomplete applications will be returned without action. Entries must match current data and schedule of values and progress schedule report. Listing must include amounts of change orders issued prior to the last day of the period of construction" covered by the application. C. APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT TRANSMITTAL: 1. Submit four (4) executed copies of each Application for Payment. One copy of which shall have attached all applicable waivers of lien. Each Application for Payment must have a unique invoice number, and be submitted as an original with original signatures and notarized, no photo copies will be accepted. 2. Attached to the Application for Payment for each progress payment and the final payment shall be the following: a. If the Application for Payment relates to a progress payment, an Interim Lien Waiver and Release in a form acceptable to the Owner and executed by the Contractor; b. an Interim Lien Waiver and Release in a form acceptable to Owner, executed by each Subcontractor, Sub -subcontractor and supplier who performed work or delivered materials or equipment during the period covered by the current Application for Payment, and who is still performing work or delivering materials or equipment in connection with the Work, except to the extent agreed otherwise in writing by the Owner; and c. a Final Lien Waiver and Release in a form acceptable to Owner, executed by each Subcontractor, Sub -subcontractor and supplier who completed work or delivery of materials or equipment during the period covered by the previous Application for Payment, except to the extent agreed otherwise in writing by the Owner; and, if the Application for Payment relates to the final payment, a Final Lien Waiver and Release in a form acceptable to the Owner and executed by the Contractor. D. INITIAL PAYMENT APPLICATION: The principal administrative actions and submittals which must precede or coincide with the submittal of first Application for Payment include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Listing of Subcontractors and principal suppliers and fabricators. (Due Prior to commencement of Work.) 2. Schedule of Values 3. Project Schedule. 4. Schedule of submittals (submittal control log). 5. Listing of Contractor's staff assignments and principal subcontractors with phone numbers. 6. Copies of acquired building permits and similar authorizations and licenses from governing authorities for current performance of Work. 7. Performance and/or payment bonds, if required. (Due Prior to commencement of 01210-6 WasNglon MAW 01210.doc Prinled: MM W Washington Mutual Work.) 8. Evidence satisfactory to Owner that Contractors insurance coverage has been secured Due Prior to commencement of Work.) 9. Initial Project Schedule. E. FINAL PAYMENT APPLICATION: The administrative actions and submittals which must precede or coincide with submittal of the Final Application for Payment include but are not limited to: 1. Completion of Prerequisites to Final Completion as indicated in Section 01710 Project Closeout" requirements. 2. Submit final Application for Payment after completion of Project closeout procedures with release of liens and supporting documentation. Include consent of surety to final payment and insurance certificates. 3. Completion of the requirements for Final Payment in accordance with Article 9 of the Master Contractor's Agreement. F. PAYMENTS: The Owner will make progress payments on account of the Contract once a month, based on the value of Work accomplished or materials on the job site, as stated in the schedule of values on the Application and Certificate for Payment. Payments will be made on protected materials on hand at the job site properly stored, protected, and insured. Estimated quantities shall be subject to the Architect's review and judgment. Payment Schedule: Provided that an itemized Application for Payment is received by the Architect not later than the - day of a month, the Owner shall make payment to the Contractor not later than the last day of the following month. If the Architect receives an Application for Payment after the date fixed above, the Owner shall make payment not less than sixty (fiW days after the Architect receives the Application for Payment. Retainage: The Contractor shall deduct ten percent MW as Retainage from each Application for Payment. Retainage shall be shown as a separate line item on the Application for Payment. Retainage shall be released to the Contractor in accordance with the provision set forth in the Agreement. PART 2 RRnnl ICIS NOT USED RART :1 IEXECI 1110N NOT USED End of Section 01210 01210-7 Waslinglon Mutual01210.doc Pdnled: 312WW W Washington Mutual Contractor Change Order to MWashington MutualWorkAuthorization # g Project Name Address Contractor Contact Name Date Architect Contact Name Change Order Number In order to expedite the Work and avoid or minimize delays that may affect Contract Sum and Contract Time, the Contract documents are hereby amended as described below. Please provide reasons for changes in description. Submit supporting documentation for changes with this request. Proceed with Work promptly after Change Order is approved. The Work Authorization is requested to be changed as follows: Change Description SUBTOTAL CONTRACTOR OVERHEAD AND PROFIT Percentage TOTAL COST OF CHANGE ORDER Cost Previous A. Original Work Authorization Total r.. $ List of all previous Change Orders with approval amount / approval date 1 $ 6 $ 2 $ - 7 $ 3 $ - 8 $ 4 $ 9 $ 5 $ I J10 $ - B. Total Change by previously authorized Change Orders C. Revised Work Authorization Total (lines A 6 B) This Change D. Work Authorization Total will be increased/decreased by $ E. Revised Work Authorization Total including this Change Order (lines C & D) $ iContract Time F. Original Work Authorization Start Date (date) G. Original Work Authorization End Date (date) H. Revised End Date changed by all previous approved Change Orders (date) I. Revised End Date approved by this Change Order (date) Authorization~ _ I hereby certify the above is true and correct Approved: EPS] Washington MutualContractorArchitect Signature) (Signature) Name Name Name Date Date Date Not Valid Until Signed by Contractor, Architect and Owner Washnglon MAO 0121040c Signature) 01210-1 Printed: 9RW QQD Washington Mutual flWashington Mutual Application for Payment TO OWNER: FROM CONTRACTOR: ARCHITECT: APPLICATION NO: 0000000-0 Washington Mutual Bank Project Contractor Project Architect APPLICATION DATE: Address Address Address PROJECT #: 0000000 City, State, Zip City, State, Zip City, State, Zip PROJECT NAME: - Contact Contact Contact PERIOD FROM: Email Address Email Address Email Address PERIOD TO: Contractor's Section In accordance with the Contract Documents the undersigned Contractor certifies to Washington Mutual to the best of the their knowledge the Work covered by this Application for Payment has been completed. Application is made for payment in connection with the Work Authorization Document. The Contractor also certifies the current payment shown in this Application for Payment is now due, and that all amounts have been paid for previous Application for Payments. 1. ORIGINAL CONTRACT TOTAL $ 0.00 CONTRACTOR: 2. NET CHANGE BY ALL APPROVED CHANGE ORDERS $ 0.00 By: Date: Name and Title 3. CONTRACT TOTAL TO DATE $ 0.00 d. TOTAL COMPLETED AND STORED TO DATE $ 0.00 S. TOTAL RETAINAGE = 10% OF COMPLETED WORK $ O 6. TOTAL EARNED LESS RETAINAGE - Q 0.00 7. LESS PREVIOUS CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT $ 0.00 8. CURRENT PAYMENT DUE $ 0.00 9. BALANCE TO FINISH, INCLUDING RETAINAGE $ 0.00 Notanzea tsy Subscribed and sworn to before me this Notary Public: State of: mission expires: County of: D seal) Architect's Section In accordance with the Contract Documents, the Architect certifies to Washington Mutual to the best of their knowledge that the Work has progressed as indicated and the Contractor is entitled to payment of the AMOUNT CERTIFIED. AMOUNT CERTIFIED ................................. Attach explanation it amount certified differs from the amount applied) ARCHITECT AUTHORIZATION: By: Date: This Application for Payment is not negotiable. The AMOUNT CERTIFIED is payable only to the Contractor named above. Issuance, payment and acceptance of payment are without prejudice to any rights of Washington Mutual or the Contractor under this Contract. 01210-1 Washington Mutual 01210.doc Printed: Y29M pQP Washington Mutual 1019 Washington Mutual Continuation Sheet APPLICATION NUMBER: 0000000-0 APPLICATION DATE: - PROJECT #: 0000000 PROJECT NAME: - PERIOD FROM: - PERIOD TO: - Work Com leted Total Total PriorItemScheduled Completed and Percentage Balance to Retention Number Description of Work Sub -Contractor Value Applications Last This Period Stored to Date Completed Finish Percentage does not include Last Application tall Wong Completes) Amount Application) 01 Division 1- GeneralConditions SO.DD SO.00 SO.00 SO.DO 0.00 NDIV/01 SO.00 0.00 02 Division 2 - Sitswork I Demolition 0.00 0.00 S0.D0 SO.00 0.00 NDIVIOI SO.00 SO.00 03 Division 3 . Concrete 0.D0 0.00 SO.DO SO.00 0.00 NDIV/01 0.00 SO.00 D4 Division 4-Masonry 0.D0 SO.00 0.DO 0.00 SD.00 NDIV/01 0.00 0.00 05 Division 5. Metals 0.DO D.00 SO.DO 0.0D D.00 NDIV/01 0.00 0.00 D6 Division 6. Woods / Plastics / Carpentry SO.00 SO.00 SO.00 SO.00 0.00 0DIV/01 50.00 SO.00 07 Division 7 - Moslture I Thermal Protection 0.00 SO.00 SO.00 SO.DD SO.00 NDIV/01 SO.00 SO.00 08 Division 8 . Doom / Windows I Hardware 0.00 S0.0D 0.00 S0.D0 SO.00 NDIV/01 SO.00 SO.00 09 Division 9 • Framing A Drywall 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 NDIV/01 0.00 S0.0D 10 Tile 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 SO.00 DIV/01 0.00 S0.00 11 Coiling 0.00 SO.DO 0.00 0.D0 SO.00 4DIV/01 0.00 SO.DO 12 Resilient Flooring 0.00 0.D0 SO.00 SO.DO 0.00 0DIV/01 SO.00 50.D0 13 Carpeting 0.00 SO.00 0.00 SO.DD 0.00 NDIV/Ol S0.00 0.00 14 Painting 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 NDIV/0! 0.00 0.00 15 Wall Coverings 50.00 S0.DO 0.00 0.00 0.00 NDIV/OI SO.00 SO.DO 16 Division 10 - Accessories, Storage, Specialties D $0.00 0.D0 0.00 0.00 SO.DO DIV/0! 0.00 SO.DD 17 Division 12 • Furnishings 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 SO.DD DIV/OI D.00 S0.00 18 Division 15 • HVAC 0.00 SO.DO 0.00 0.D0 0.00 NDIV/Ot SD.DO 0.D0 19 Plumbing O 50.00 S0.D0 0.00 0.00 SO.DD DIV/01 50.00 S0.D0 20 21 Fire Sprinkler System Division 16 - Electrical 0.00 SO.00 0.D0 0.DO 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 S0.00 SO.DD NDIV/DI DIV/01 0.00 0.00 50.DD D.00 22 USE THESE LINES FOR EXTRA ITEMS 0.00 0.00 SO.00 0.00 0.00 DIV/01 0.00 SO.00 23 a 50.00 0.D0 D.00 0.00 SO.DD DIV/01 0.00 SO.DO 24 50.D0 SO.00 50.00 0.D0 SO.DO DIV/DI 0.00 O.DO 25 0.DD SO.00 D.DO 0.00 0. DO DIV/01 0.00 SO.00 26 SO.00 0.00 O.00 SO.00 0.D0 DIV/0! SO.00 S0.D0 27 Bonds / Insurance I Permits SO.00 SO.00 0.00 SO.00 SO.DD DIV/01 SO.00 SO.00 28 Overhead / Profit SO.DD SO.00 S0.0D SO.00 O.DO NDIV/01 0.00 0.00 29 Taxes SO.00 0.00 SO.DO 0.00 0.00 DIV/DI SO.DO 0.00 30 Subtotal 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0DIV/01 0.00 0.00 CHANGE ORDERS 01 0.D0 0.00 SO.DD SO.00 SEE NDIV/01 0.00 0.00 02 SO.DO 0.00 S0.00 0.00 0.D0 NDIV/01 0.00 0.00 03 SO.00 SO.00 SO.DO SO.00 SO.00 DIV/01 0.00 S0.00 04 0.D0 SD.00 0.D0 50.00 SO.00 DIV/01 0.00 0.00 05 0.D0 50.00 S0.D0 S0.00 0.00 DIV/01 O.DO 0.00 06 O.00 0.00 0.D0 0.00 0.00 DIV/O! S0.00 0.D0 07 SO.D0 0.00 0.00 0.00 SO.00 DIV/01 0.00 0.00 08 0.00 S0.00 S0.00 SO.00 SO.00 NDIV/D! 0.00 0.00 09 Subtotal 0.00 0.00 50.00 0.00 0.00 DIV/01 0.001 0.00 TOTALS I 1 $0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 DIV/01 I $0.0ol 0.00 01210.2 Washington Mutual 01210.doe Printed: V2WD4 PTV Washington Mutual 1.1. SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES 1. Summary 2. Project Meetings 3. Substitutions 4. Submittals 5. Project Schedule 6. Project Documentation B. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Contract between Owner and Contractor, Including General Conditions 2. Section 01110 Summary of Work 3. Section 01210 Price and Payment Procedures 4. Section 01710 Closeout Procedures 1.2. PROJECT MEETINGS A. PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING 1. Conduct a preconstruction conference within 10 days of execution of the Work Authorization and prior Start of Work. The purpose of this conference is to review responsibilities, procedures and introduce personnel associated with the Work. 2. Attendees: Owner's Designated Representative, Architect, Contractor and his superintendent, all major subcontractors, and other concerned parties. Provide a minimum of 14 days notice. 3. Agenda: To discuss significant items that could affect construction progress, including the construction schedule, critical sequencing of events, use of premises, access requirements, work hours, security, procedures for processing Change Orders and submittals, communication procedures and equipment delivery dates and long lead items. PROGRESS MEETINGS 1. Attendees: Assign the same person or persons to represent the Contractor, throughout the project. The contractor's superintendent should be present at each meeting. Subcontractors, materials suppliers, vendors, and other interested parties that will be affected by the decisions made or is scheduled to be on site, may be invited. 2. Conduct progress meetings at regular intervals as required, typically once each week. Notify Owner's Designated Representative of the scheduled dates and provide an outline of agenda items in advance of each meeting. Coordinate meeting dates with preparation of the payment request. 3. Review progress since the last meeting. Determine where each activity is in relation to the Contractor's construction schedule, whether each item is on time, ahead of, or behind schedule. Determine how items behind schedule can be expedited and secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the contract time. 4. Review and approve or modify the Pay Request. 5. Reporting: The Contractor shall record minutes and, no later than three (3) working days after each meeting, distribute copies of minutes of the meeting to each attendee, Owner's Designated Representative, Architect, and to parties who should have been present. Include a summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting. 01310-1 WasNnglon Melual 01310.doc Printed: y2w 19 Washington Mutual C. PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE: Conduct a pre -installation conference before each major activity that requires coordination with multiple trades and as otherwise required by the Technical Sections. The installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in the installation and coordination or integration with other materials or installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend. Advise Owner representative of scheduled meeting dates. 1.3. SUBSTITUTIONS A. Furnish products specified, except where "or approved" is used. Proposed substitute products may be submitted to the Architect for approval B. Substitutions will be considered only for the following reasons: 1. A product becomes unavailable due to no fault of the Contractor. 2. Subsequent information or changes indicate that the specified product will not perform as intended. 3. A substitute product will be in the Owner's best interest. C. PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS: Reasonable and timely requests for substitutions will be. considered. Substitutions include products and methods of construction differing from that required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor after award of Contract. 1. Submit three copies of each request for product substitution. Identify product to be replaced and provide complete documentation showing compliance of proposed substitution with applicable requirements. Include a full comparison with the specified product, a list of changes to other Work required to accommodate the substitution, and any proposed changes in Contract Sum or Contract Time should the substitution be accepted. 2. Submit requests for product substitution in time to permit processing of request and subsequent Submittals, if any, sufficiently in advance of when materials are required in the Work. Do not submit unapproved substitutions on Shop Drawings or other submittals. 3. Architect will review the proposed substitution and notify Contractor and Owner of its acceptance or rejection. D. Document each substitution request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with contract documents. Requests for substitution shall be made on Substitution Request Form, attached. Limit each request to one proposed product or system. For substitutions prior to execution of Contract, signature'and projected cost data are not required. E. A substitution request constitutes a representation that Contractor: 1. Has investigated proposed product and has determined that it meets or exceeds, in all respects, the specified product. 2. Shall provide the same warranty for substitution as for specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make other changes which may be required for Work to be complete in all respects. 4. Waives claims for additional costs which may subsequently become apparent. 5. Agrees to pay all costs of redesign related to the substitution. F. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals. G. Architect will determine acceptability of proposed substitution, and will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection within a reasonable time. 01310-2 Washington Mutual 01310.doc Printed: 3I29IO4 0 Washington Mutual 1.4. SUBMITTALS A. COORDINATE submittal preparation with construction schedule, fabrication lead-times, other submittals, and activities that require sequential operations. 1. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized due to failure to transmit submittals in time to permit processing sufficiently in advance of when materials are required in the Work. 2. Architect will not accept submittals from sources other than Contractor. 3. Make submittals to Architect assigned to the project. 4. Submit Submittal Schedule to Architect with a copy to Owner; to the attention of Project Manager assigned to the project within first week after Notice to Proceed. B. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit shop drawings showing connections, details, dimensions, finishes and fasteners. Index shop drawings to a master index. Cross-reference drawing and detail number in the Contract Document. 1. Number of Copies: Unless otherwise specified, submit to the Architect one legible reproducible and six copies for review, except that shop drawings 11"x17" or smaller may be submitted in the form of six blackline or electrostatic bond copies. C. PRODUCT DATA: 1. Submit manufacturer's catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, schedules, performance charts, illustration and other descriptive data on manufactured products and systems. 2. Where the specified product (model or catalog number) and manufacturer specified will be furnished, the contractor may submit a statement of conformance with the Contract Documents in place of the product data. 3. Identify data sheets with the section and paragraph numbers where the product or system is specified. Bind data sheet submittal in loose-leaf notebook binding system. 4. Equipment and systems must meet performance data even when specified by manufacturer's name and catalog number. 5. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options and other data; supplement manufacture's standard data to provide information unique to the Work. 6. Submit the number of copies which Contractor requires, plus 2 copies which will be retained by the Architect. D. OFFICE SAMPLES: Submit office samples of size and quantity specified or of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate functional characteristics of product, material, or system with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 1. Include identification on each sample giving full information. 2. Submit three samples, one of which will be retained by Architect, unless indicated otherwise in the technical section. E. SCHEDULE OF VALUES: 1. Submit a Schedule of Values, on Owner's Form, to the Owner's Designated Representative within 10 days of contract execution. The schedule of Values shall be broken into Work by trade, and generally follow the Work as described in the specifications and the tasks on the project schedule. 2. This Schedule will be the basis for the Contractor's Application for Payment. 3. Submit 3 copies on 8-112 "xl 1" Paper F. SUBMITTAL CONTROL LOG: 1. Not more than 10 days from the execution of Work Authorization, submit a complete list of major products proposed to be used with the name of the Manufacturer and the installing Subcontractor. 01310-3 Wast„nglon Mutual 01310.doc Printed: 3I29104 F19 Washington Mutual 2. Prepare, submit and maintain a schedule to be used by the Contractor, and Owner to monitor required submittals. The log shall indicate the following: submittal number, specification section number and title, responsible company, date submittal is. due to Contractor, date submittal is due to Architect, date submittal is due back to Contractor, and number of days allowed for fabrication and delivery, and date material is due on site as coordinated with the Project Schedule. G. CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW 1. Review submittals prior to submission and provide stamp of approval signed or initialed by Contractor, indicating the Contractor has inspected the submittals and declaring that they are complete, correct, in compliance with the Contract Documents and suitable for the Project. The Architect will not review submittals unless Contractor has previously reviewed and approved the submittals and has indicated on the submittals all required field dimensions and conditions. No exceptions. 2. Submit to Architect submittals required by each Specification Section. 3. Notify Architect in writing at time of submission of any deviation in submittals from requirements of Contract Documents. 4. Contractor to submit all parts of a required submittal (shop drawings, product data, samples, etc.) at one time. Partial submittals will not be reviewed without prior arrangement with the Architect at the Architect's discretion. H. ARCHITECT'S REVIEW 1. Architect will review submittals for design concept and conformance with the Contract Documents and return submittals requiring correcting with corrections noted thereon. 2. Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract Documents is not relieved by Architect's review of submittals unless Architect gives written acceptance of specific deviations. 1.5. PROJECT SCHEDULE: A. SUMMARY 1. The Project Schedule shall be used as a tool for planning, and coordinating the Work so that the Work is completed within the time allowed in the contract. This schedule will be used by the architect and the owner to monitor and evaluate the progress of the Work, and as a guideline for evaluating pay requests. 2. In order to ensure the timeliness of the schedule, and schedule revisions it is anticipated that some amount of forecasting will be required. It is not the intent of these scheduling requirements to dictate the actual sequence of Work but to aid in the timely completion of the activities by providing a planning and evaluation tool. It is expected that as the project progresses the actual sequencing and timing of individual events may fluctuate, however the overall Project Schedule and the Completion Date should not. 3. The term "Day" as used throughout the contract documents and this Section shall mean "Calendar Day" unless stated otherwise. 4. The contractor shall submit to the Owner's Designated Representative within 10 days after the receipt of Notice to Proceed one reproducible copy and four prints of the Project Schedule if larger than 11 x17. B. The Project Schedule shall be in a "Gantt" or horizontal bar chart format. 1. Submit Schedule in both hard copy and electronic form, including the data provided by Owner into the schedule. (Electronic form shall be readable by MS Project) 2. Show all planned activities in sufficient detail that progress can easily be determined. 01310-4 Wastinglon Mutual 0131o.doc Printed: 3MW W Washington Mutual Break up long general activities into smaller more detailed activities so that time durations of each activity shall not be greater than 15 days. 3. The schedule shall group activities similar to the schedule of values. 4. The Owner's fixturing activities for each major department shall be shown on the schedule. A sample schedule of the owner supplied Work and coordination requirements is included for incorporation into the schedule, in Section 01010 Summary of Work. 5. Show delivery and installation dates for all major products. Show the dates for enclosing the interior space, date of permanent power, mechanical system completion (including startup), substantial completion, and owner occupancy. Show as milestones all inspections required by local and state Building and Fire code officials. 6. Include a section either at the top of, or at the bottom of, the Project Schedule _ showing a schedule for submittals and shop drawings. Show the submittal dates, order dates, and delivery dates of all submittal items requiring more than three weeks lead time. Include adequate time for; order lead time, product delivery, and submittal review. C. The contractor shall be solely responsible for expediting the delivery of all materials to be furnished by him so that construction progress shall be maintained according to the Project Schedule. D. The Contractor shall review the Project Schedule on a regular basis and shall update the Project Schedule within seven (7) days of any of the following events: 1. any change in the Work affecting the Project Schedule; 2. any other event affecting the Project Schedule; 3. any request by the Owner to update the Project Schedule. E. A current Project Schedule shall be included with each Application for Payment. Each updated Project Schedule shall contain a comparison of actual progress with the estimated progress for that point in time stated in the original Project Schedule. F. The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to the Owner and Architect. G. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner and the Architect in writing of any proposed changes in the Project Schedule or the Contract Time or of any event which could delay performance of any item of the Work, stating the cause of the delay, the expected duration of the delay, the anticipated effect of the delay on the Project Schedule and the action being taken to correct the delay. H. Each week during the course of the project the contractor shall prepare a detailed short interval schedule covering the Work to be completed within the next four weeks. 1. This short interval schedule shall be updated each week, and include a full 3 week look ahead. 2. Show the Work activities in sufficient detail that it will list each trade that will be on site and the nature of the Work in progress. I. If a section of Work is behind schedule the contractor shall show on the short interval schedule a plan of action necessary to bring the project back on schedule. Such action may include but is not limited to providing added labor, materials, equipment, or other facilities, services, or subcontractors as necessary to adhere to the Project Schedule and the scheduled completion date. J. Non-Compensable Causes of Delay Include but are not limited to: Slow to mobilize, Failure to adequately staff project, Failure to provide needed equipment, Failure to coordinate, Inadequate supervision, Poor Workmanship, Poor planning. 01310-5 Washington Waal 01310.doc Pdnled: 30M SFCTInN 0131n AnMINI.STRATIVF RFOl11RFMFNTS 1111 Washington Mutual 1.6. PROJECT DOCUMENTATION: A. 1. Prior to beginning any Work of the Project, the Contractor at his/her sole expense shall obtain a set of the original project plans for the purpose of providing "As Built" Record Drawings of the Project. Prints of the appropriate sheets shall be kept at the job site and utilized for the daily recording of actual "as -built" data. At end of each Working day, the Contractor shall revise the prints in red ink for Work accomplished that day, showing any changes that were made in the course of the construction that differ from the original plans. An updated set of the record plan(s) shall be kept at the job site and available for use at the project site. In documenting "As -Built" conditions, dimensions shall be taken from two permanent points of reference building corners, sidewalk, road intersections or permanent structures), showing the location and depth of all items that were changed from the original plans, 2. Maintain at the site one copy of: Bid Documents, Contract Forms, Project Manual, Contract Drawings, Addenda, Clarifications, Change Orders, Reviewed Shop Drawings; Office Samples, Field Test Records, and Project Visit Reports. 3. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office separate from documents used for construction. 4. Keep current record of documents and label "AS -BUILT." Record location of concealed items and utility lines, field changes in dimension or detail and changes in materials furnished on Project Record Documents. Record changes from Clarifications, Change Orders and Details not on Contract Drawings. 5. Maintain a complete set of record drawings which clearly and neatly indicate exact installed locations of items which will be concealed in the Work such as conduit, piping, ducts, reinforcing, mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar items. Show all changes from the contract documents, and all uncovered existing conditions which will be subsequently concealed. 6. Record drawings shall be used for no other purpose. 7. Documents shall be in same format as the Construction Documents. 8. Keep documents current; do not permanently conceal any Work until required information has been recorded. 9. Submit As -Built Drawings within 30 days of project Substantial Completion and prior to Final Completion, 10. See Section 01710 for Submittal requirements. 1. Submit within 30 days of project Substantial Completion and prior to Final Completion 2. See Section 01710 for Submittal requirements 3. Form of Manuals: a. Prepare data in the form of instructional manuals for use by Owner's personnel. Use 8-1 /2"xl 1" format in 3-ring binder. b. Include drawings, indexed tabs, and title for each manual. c. Provide One (1) hard copy of each manual. d. Provide three (3) Compact Disks with manual scanned into portable document format (.PDF) and indexed or bookmarked for the individual specification sections. e. See Section 01310 for additional Information regarding content of Manuals. 01310-6 Washinglon Mulual 01310.doc Printed: 3129104 W Washington Mutual 4. Contents of Manuals: a. Include a project Directory, including Architect, Contractor and all subcontractors and suppliers. Include address, phone numbers, section of work or equipment supplied, and contact information. b. List products, equipment and systems used, product installers, maintenance program and local source of replacement parts. c. Include product data with specific product clearly identified. d. Include drawings of wiring and flow diagrams and system parts. e. Materials and Finishes: i) Include manufacturer's data, catalog number, color and texture. ii) Include instructions for care and maintenance of finishes. iii) Include applicable warranties as specified in each individual section of the specifications. iv) Include a tabulated list of spare parts and maintenance materials showing product description, paragraph in Project Manual listing the product and quantity delivered to Owner. f. Equipment and Systems: i) Include manufacturer's description, operation characteristics, performance data, testing and balancing data and printed operating and maintenance instructions. ii) Include manufacturer's catalog number and replaceable parts list. iii) Include instructions for start-up, break-in, summer and winter operating, control diagrams, stopping, shut -down emergency procedures, operating sequence, maintenance procedures and servicing schedule. iv) Include as -installed color coded piping diagrams and valve charts with valve tag numbers and valve functions. v) Include circuit directories of panel boards and as -installed color coded wiring diagrams. vi) Include as -installed color coded duct and damper layouts with air flow ratings and fan sizes. vii) Include a tabulated list of spare parts and maintenance materials showing product description, paragraph in Project Manual listing the product and quantity delivered to Owner. g. Submit complete data for each piece of equipment and component used in the Work, including its location within the building. h. Where applicable, submit manufacturer, model, and serial number of each piece of existing equipment to remain and new equipment. i. Submit operation and maintenance data for mechanical and electrical systems. j. Arrange in a binder with a section for each system. k. Include complete project directory including Architect, Contractor, and all subcontractors and suppliers, list including addresses, and phone numbers and contact person. I. Include all applicable manufacturer warranties and guarantees. C. SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS: Provide products, spare parts, and maintenance materials in quantities specified in each Section, in addition to that used for construction of Work. Coordinate with Owner, deliver to Project site and obtain receipt prior to final payment. 01310-7 Washingbn Mutual 01310.doc Printed: 32W 0 Washington Mutual D. PROJECT PHOTOS 1. Contractor shall take weekly photos of the project for documentation. Forward hard copies,or electronic copies to the Owner's Designated Representative on a weekly ibasis. 2. At the Completion of the job the Contractor shall take photographs of all major elements of the project and forward either hard copies or electronic copies to the Owner's Designated Representative at the completion of the project. Include Interior and exterior elevations, Equipment, roof, parking and other major elements. E. DAILY REPORTS 1. Contractor's supervisory personnel shall prepare on a daily basis a "Daily' Construction report. Contractor shall make such reports available to Owner upon request. Each daily report shall include at a minimum the following: a. List of all subcontractors and other separate contractors on site including crew size. b. Weather conditions on the day, including high and low temperatures. c. Accidents or injuries, other safety issues or corrective actions. d. Meetings or other significant discussions. e. Unusual events f. Delays, shortages, loss, and hindrances g. Changes received. h. Comments or corrections from Governing authorities. I. Summary of Work performed PARL2 PRnni ICIS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED End of Section 01310 Washington Mutual 01310.doc 01310-8 Printed: 3I29I00 11111 Washington Mutual TO: [DESIGN FIRM]. DATE: --------------------- We hereby submit the following for your consideration in lieu of the specified item(s) for the above project: Specification Section ------- . Paragraph--------. Referenced Drawing(s)-------------------- SpecifiedItem: -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Proposed Substitution: ------------------------------------------------------------------------ Reason for Substitution:----------------------------------------------------------------------- COMPLETE THE FOLLOWING (Use back or additional sheets if necessary). 1. Does the substitution affect dimensions shown on Drawings? Yes ------ No -----. 2. If yes, indicate changes: -------------------------------------------------------- 3. What effect does the substitution have on other trades? -------------------------- 4. What effect do applicable code requirements have on substitution? 5. Describe the differences between the proposed substitution and the specified item(s): 6. How do manufacturer guarantees compare between proposed and specified items? Same Different (Explain on back.) Attachments: What is projected lump sum installed cost difference between proposed substitution and least expensive specified item? S----------------------. [ No Change ; (decrease); increase ] The undersigned hereby Certifies that the proposed substitute item has been fully investigated and has been determined to be equal or superior to that specified in all respects; that the same or greater warranty will be furnished, that required maintenance service and source for replacement parts are available, and that incorporation of the proposed substitute item will not affect functional clearances. Warrants that coordination, installation, and changes to the project as necessary to accommodate the proposed substitution shall be the Contractor's responsibility, that use of the substitute item(s) will not delay project completion, and that claims for additional costs related to its incorporation which may become subsequently apparent will be borne by the Contractor. Approved For Architect Review: By: Signature Title Signature shall be by a person having authority to legally bind the Contractor to the above terms. Substitution Substitution Allowed Substitution Allowed As Noted Not Allowed Date: Signature DESIGN FIRM] Title 01310-9 WasMnglon Mulual 01310.doc Pnnled: 3129104 @u Washington Mutual 0 01310-10 Washington MNual 01310.doc . Printed: 30M 1.1. SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES l . Substantial Completion 2. Cleaning 3. Final Completion 4. Additional Review 5. Project Record Documents (As -Built Drawings) 6. Operation and Maintenance Data 7. Instruction of Owners Personnel B. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Contract between Owner and Contractor, Including General Conditions 2. Section 00100 Bid Requirements 3. Section 01 1 10 Summaryof Work 4. Section 01210 Price and Payment Procedures 5. Section 01310 Administrative Requirements 1. 2. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: A. PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, in addition to requirements of the General Conditions, complete the following. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, include an anticipated completion date. 2. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 3. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 4. Coordinate final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. 5. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 6. Complete startup and testing of systems. 7. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects including paint. 11. Submit list of all Subcontractors and suppliers to Architect and Owner's Designated Representative B. INSPECTION: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect and Owner will either proceed with inspection or deny the request based on evidence that the Contractor is not ready for inspection. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 01710. 1 Washinglon MuW 01710.doc Printed: Ma M 119 Washington Mutual 1.3. CLEANING PRIOR TO FINAL INSPECTION: A. Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning shall be strictly adhered to. Damage to surfaces shall be corrected or materials replaced. B. Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, manufacturer's labels, fingerprints, etc. from sight -exposed surfaces. Repair, patch and touch up marred surfaces. C. Clean heating and cooling ducts, blowers, coils, fixtures, equipment, piping and grilles. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent filters, on all equipment, whether new or existing. Flush water systems and disinfect domestic water lines. D. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. E. Broom clean exterior paved surfaces and walks. Rake clean landscaped areas. Vacuum clean interior spaces. Wash interior and exterior glazing and mirrors. F. Clean interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. G. Sweep clean roof, clean gutters, downspouts and drains. H. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. I. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned -out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. J. Maintain in cleaned condition until final completion or Owner occupancy. 1.4. FINAL COMPLETION: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: A. Submit a final Application for Payment according to "Payment Procedures." B. Submit Final Certificate of Occupancy. C. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. D. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. E. Submit pest -control final inspection report and warranty where required by documents. F. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents required by the project specifications. G. Prepare and submit surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. H. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. 1. As -Built Drawings: As -built drawings submitted to the Architect upon completion of construction. Final payment will be withheld until delivery of these drawings. J. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Operations and Maintenance Manuals submitted to the Architect upon completion of construction. Final payment will be withheld until delivery of these Manuals. K. Contractor shall submit in writing a log of all project changes showing that all have been resolved. Final Payment will not be released by the Owner until the Contractor notifies Architect in writing that there are no outstanding or remaining project revisions. L. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect and Owner will either proceed with inspection or deny the request based on evidence that the Contractor is not ready for inspection. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 01710-2 Washington Mut al 01710.doc Pnnted: 3129/04 11111 Washington Mutual M. Prior to final payment, submit the following affidavits using the forms listed below: 1. Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims AIA Document G706. 2. Consent of Surety to Final Payment AIA Document G707. 3. Contractor's lien release, and lien releases from each subcontractor; Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens AIA Document C706A 4. ALTA survey, as required under Section 01110. 5. ADDITIONAL REVIEW FEES: Should Architect, or other inspector, perform more than one additional review due to failure of the Work to comply with the claims of status or completion made by the Contractor, Owner will compensate Architect for such additional service and deduct the amount of such compensation from the final payment to the Contractor. 1.6. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS: ( - ): A. Submit within 30 days of project Substantial Completion and prior to Final Completion: B. The Contractor's Original and complete set of Redlined drawings including all As -Built information shall be copied into 3 complete printed sets. The original As -Built Drawing, with Contractor's mark-ups, shall be sent to the Architect. C. Contractor shall submit One (1) full set of the of the As -Built drawings to the Owners Designated Representative with a copy of the transmittal letter sent to the Architect containing date, Project title, Contractor's name and address, list of documents, and signature of Contractor. D. The Final full set of As -Built Drawings shall be placed into a section of 6" PVC pipe and securely mounted to the wall in the Data room. Include screw on caps to the pipe, and clearly label the pipe "As -Built Drawings". E. See Specification Section 01310 for Information regarding content of As -Built Documents. 1.7. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA: A. Within 30 days of project Substantial Completion and prior to Final Completion: B. The Contractor's Original O&M Manual(s) shall be copied into electronic portable document format (.PDF) and placed on a Compact Disk. The original O&M Manual(s) shall be Delivered to the site and placed in the Data room. C. Contractor shall submit two (2) copies of the Compact Disk containing the O&M manual in electronic (.PDF) format to the Architect with a copy of the transmittal letter to Owner's Designated Representative containing date, Project title, Contractor's name and address, list of documents, and signature of Contractor. D. The Electronic O&M Manual(s) files shall be indexed or bookmarked in the same manor as the notebook delivered to the site. E. Clearly Label Compact Disc with Project Name, location, completion date, and financial center number. F. Electronic Drawings and O&M Manuals may be on the same compact disk. G. Submit a draft of contents to the Architect for review prior to finalizing in electronic format. H. See Specification Section 01310 for Information regarding content of O&M Manuals. 1.8. INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL: A. Prior to final inspection or acceptance, fully instruct Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in the operation, adjustment and maintenance of all products, equipment and systems. A sufficient amount of time shall be allotted for this purpose. B. Closeout Manuals shall constitute the basis of instruction. 1. Review contents of manual with Owner's personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance. 01710-3 Washington Mutual 01710.doc Printed: 3129M W Washington Mutual 2. Review complete heating and cooling cycles with Owner's personnel. Review location of dampers, valves and control equipment. End of Section 01710 01710-4 Wasl inglon Mulual 01710.doc Printed: 312910e WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Earthwork. 2. Utility line trenching not specified in other Sections. B. Related Sections: 1. 00320 - Geotechnical Data: Reference to Subgrade Investigation Report. 2. 02320 - Subslab Preparation: Vapor barrier below slab. 3. 02753 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving. 4. 02621 - Foundation Drainage Piping: Drainage envelope around foundation drain. 5. Division 15 - Mechanical: Subgrade piping. 6. Division 16 - Electrical: Subgrade conduit. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. C136 - Method for Sieve Analysis of fine and Coarse Aggregates. 2. D1557 - Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-Ibf/ft3 2,700 kN-m/m3)). 3. D2103 - Polyethylene Film and Sheeting. 4. D2488 - Description and Identification of Soils (Visual -Manual Procedure) 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Accurately locate and record active and ends of abandoned utility lines at all locations where exposed by excavation, and where relocated. B. Certification that blast furnace slag, if proposed for use as fill or drainage material, is free from unacceptable content of hazardous materials. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform all sub -grade earthwork in accordance with the Geotechnical Investigation Report. Sub - grade is defined as those soils below the following: 1. Bottoms of footings and foundations; 2. 4 inches below interior slabs on grade, 3. 6 inches below concrete pavement; 4. 6 inches below landscaping, except as otherwise specified. B. Use only appropriate equipment and personnel skilled in earthwork of the type specified. C. The work of this section is subject to testing and inspection as specified in Division 1. D. Soil bearing value and fill materials shall be subject to approval by the Owner's Geotechnical Engineer prior to placement. Notify the Geotechnical Engineer at least four working days in advance of fill and backfill placement. Designate the proposed borrow areas, and permit the Soil Engineer to obtain samples for testing. 02300-1 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK E. Elevations and lines shall be established by a registered civil engineer or a licensed land surveyor, acceptable to the Architect. Preserve all markers and monuments set by the civil engineer or surveyor and, if displaced or lost, immediately replace at no additional cost to the Owner. F. Shoring 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design and installation of all shoring required to maintain the stability of excavations and trenches, and protection of adjacent construction and foundations. 2. All shoring shall be per OSHA standards and authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING A. Schedule earthwork operations during dry weather as necessary so that water sensitive native soils may be used to the greatest extent possible. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Structural Fill: 1. Non -expansive; predominantly granular; No more than 5% fines when passing a US No. 200 sieve based on the minus 3/4 fraction; free from particles greater than 3 inches in diameter, debris, organic materials, alkali, salt, petroleum products and other deleterious substances; suitable moisture content for compaction. 2. As recommended in the Geotechnical Report. B. Sand: Clean manufactured or natural river or bank sand, graded in accordance with ASTM C136: Sieve Size Percent Passin No. 4 100 No. 14 10 - 100 No. 100 4 - 30 No. 200 0-5 C. Wall Backfill Material: Well graded sand and gravel with no particles larger than 1 inch, maximum 2 percent passing U.S. No. 200 sieve, or as approved by Owner's geotechnical engineer. D. Utility Line Bedding Material: Granular; as recommended by the utility line manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Establish and identify lines, levels, contours, and datum. B. Maintain, and re-establish if disturbed, all benchmarks, monuments, and other reference points. C. Before start of grading, establish the location and extent of utilities in the work areas. Maintain, protect, reroute, or extend as required, existing utilities to remain, which pass through the'work area. Coordinate interruptions in utility services with users, and with utility companies, as appropriate. 3.2 ROUGH GRADING A. Rough grade site to levels, profiles, required contours and elevations, ready for finish grading and surface treatment. B. Unless otherwise recommended in the Geotechnical Investigations Report, cut out areas, to subgrade elevation, which are to receive stabilizing base for paving and sidewalks. 02300-2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK C. Rough grade subsoil systematically to allow for a maximum amount of natural settlement and compaction. Eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Remove roots, branches, stones, and other debris. D. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 feet unless indicated otherwise on drawings. E. Remove and dispose of legally off site all debris, and contaminated and excess soils. 3.3 EXCAVATING A. Excavate to the depths required for structures and fills indicated. B. Protect utilities uncovered by excavation. C. Remove abandoned utility service lines from areas of excavation; cap, plug or seal such lines and identify at grade. D. Stockpile and cover satisfactory excavated subsoil for re -use, where directed. Remove soils not considered suitable for use in structural fill or backfill areas from the building site and dispose at a legal disposal site. E. Where unsatisfactory subsoil is encountered, as determined by the Owner's Geotechnical Engineer, remove as directed, and replace with structural fill on a unit price basis. F. Removal of buried rock or boulders of less than 1/2 cu yd is deemed to be within the scope of this Section. G. Remove all loose and disturbed soils left in the bottom of footing excavations prior to pouring concrete. 3.4 MOISTURE CONTROL A. Provide berms, channels, coverings, or other suitable means to direct water away from excavations to prevent softening of water sensitive soils. B. Provide means to promptly remove and dispose of water entering into excavations. Dewater by means which will ensure dry excavations and the preservation of the final lines and grades at bottoms of excavations. C. Prevent water runoff due to earthwork operations, onto adjacent properties. Provide silt catchment devices as approved by the jurisdictional code authorities. D. Comply with municipal requirements for discharge of water into municipal sewer systems. 3.5 PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE A. The subgrade will be inspected by the Owner's Geotechnical Engineer. B. Proofroll all graded and backfilled areas indicated to receive slabs or pavements. 1. Notify testing laboratory prior to final proofrolling. 2. Take adequate precautions to protect foundation and retaining walls from failure or displacement due to loads in excess of design, during proofrolling operations. 3. Proofroll with heavy, rubber -tired equipment. 4. Unsuitable materials revealed by proofrolling shall be removed and replaced with specified fill materials. Recompact to specified density. 3.6 FILL AND BACKFILL A. Ensure that areas to be backfilled are free from debris and water. 02300-3 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK B. Provide fill and backfill to accommodate the structures and additional fills indicated. C. Use fill materials as recommended by Soils Engineer at areas to receive pavement and slabs. When conditions prevent native fill from being compacted, use imported structural fill. D. Place fill in maximum 8 inch horizontal loose lifts. E. Wall Backfill: Place wall backfill material as indicated. Use techniques and operate equipment to prevent damage to wall and installed waterproof membrane. F. Filling and Backfilling Prior to Approvals: 1. Do not fill or backfill prior to approval from the Owner's Geotechnical Engineer. 2. Uncover unapproved work, as directed, at no additional cost to the Owner, whether or not uncovered work is found to be nonconforming. 3. Remedy nonconforming work. G. Areas for Subsequent Planting: 1. Planters: Fill with structural fill to within 24 inches of the finished grade. 2. Lawns: Cut and fill as necessary to within 6 inches of finished grade. 3. Coordinate elevations to accommodate topsoil placement as specified elsewhere. 3.7 COMPACTION A. Compact each lift to the degree'specified until required elevation is attained. B. Compact all fill and backfill material under pavement and walk areas to 90%, as determined by ASTM D1557, except the top 12 inches shall be compacted to 95%. C. Compact all fill and backfill material under building foundations as recommended in the Geotechnical Investigations Report. D. Compaction of fills and backfills by flooding and jetting is prohibited. E. Compact fill material within landscape areas to 80 percent of maximum dry density for cohesive soils and 85 percent of maximum dry density for cohesionless soils. F. Tolerances: Compacted subgrades shall be brought to the elevations required to receive the materials listed below within the following tolerances: 1. Concrete Slabs: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 2. Topsoil for Landscaping : Plus or minus 1 inch. 3.8 TRENCHING A. Where the trenching is not specifically described on the Drawings or in other Sections of these Specifications, perform trenching as specified below. B. Excavation: 1. Make trenches with sufficient width to provide free working space at both sides of the trench and around the installed item as required for caulking, joining, backfilling, and compacting. 2. Slope trench excavations as recommended by OSHA regulations to prevent cave in. Where sloped trench excavations are not possible, properly shore such trenches in strict accordance with all pertinent rules, regulations, and codes. 3. Elevations: a. Trench as required to provide the elevations shown on the Drawings. b. Where elevations are not shown on the Drawings, trench to sufficient depth to give a minimum of 18 inches of fill above the top of the pipe measured from the adjacent finished grade, except provide a minimum of 30 inches of cover on asbestos cement pipe. 4. Correction of Faulty Grades: Where trench excavation is inadvertently carried below proper elevation, backfill with properly compacted approved material to provide a firm and unyielding 02300-4 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK subgrade and/or foundation to the approval of the Soils Engineer and at no additional cost to the Owner. 5. Subsurface Conditions: In areas where soft, unstable materials are encountered at the surface upon which nonexpansive material is to be placed, remove the unstable material and replace it with compacted structural fill, making sufficient depth to develop a firm foundation for the item being installed. C. Bedding: Place a minimum of 6 inches of bedding material in the trench to fully support the utility line. After installation of the line, fill equally on both sides of the utility line to the midpoint elevation of the line. Hand tamp bedding materials. D. Backfill: 1. Place fill as specified for the area surrounding the utility line. 2. Hand tamp fill materials which are within 12 inches of the crown of the line. 3.9 CLEAN-UP A. Upon completion of the work of this Section, remove all rubbish, trash, and debris resulting from operations. B. Remove equipment and tools; leave the site in a neat and orderly condition acceptable to the Architect. END OF SECTION 02300-5 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 02320 — SUBSLAB PREPARATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Final preparation of grade below slab. 2. Slab on grade vapor barrier. B. Related Sections: 1. 02300 — Earthwork. 2. 02365 — Termite Control. 3. 02621 - Foundation Drainage Piping: Gravel envelope around foundation drains. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use only appropriate equipment and personnel skilled in earthwork of the type specified or indicated on drawings. B. All fill material and soil bearing values shall be subject to approval by the Owner's geotechnical engineer prior to placement. Notify the geotechnical engineer at least four working days in advance. Designate the proposed borrow areas, and permit the geotechnical engineer to obtain samples for testing. C. Elevations and lines shall be established by a registered civil engineer or a licensed land surveyor.. Preserve all markers and monuments set by the civil engineer or surveyor and, if displaced or lost, immediately replace at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.3 SHORING A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design and installation of any shoring required to maintain the stability of any adjacent excavations required. 1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Schedule earthwork operations during dry weather as necessary so that more water sensitive native soils may be used to the greatest extent possible. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Structural Fill: As specified in Section 02300. B. Vapor Retarder: ASTM E1745, Class A; one of the following: 1. "Stego Wrap" by Stego Industries, LLC (877-464-7834). 2. "Vapor Block 10" by Raven Industries (800-635-3456). 3. "Griffolyn T-85" by Reef Industries, Inc. (800-231-6074). 4. "Vapor -Mat" by WR Meadows, Inc. (847-214-2100) 5. "Florprufe 120" by WR Grace. 02320 -1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 02320 — SUBSLAB PREPARATION PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MOISTURE CONTROL A. If, in the opinion of the Soils Engineer, soil material becomes either too wet or to dry for the required compaction, the soil moisture content shall be corrected by a method approved by the Soils Engineer prior to commencing or continuing compaction operations. B. Flooding: If flooding seems imminent due to adverse weather conditions, provide berms or channels to prevent flooding of subgrade. Promptly remove all water collecting in depressions. C. Softened Subgrade: Where subgrade or compacted soil has been softened or eroded by flooding or placement during unfavorable weather or by construction traffic, remove all damaged areas and recompact as specified herein. D. Dewatering: 1. Provide, and maintain at all times during construction, ample means and devices with which to promptly remove and dispose of water entering the excavations or other parts of the work. 2. Dewater by means which will ensure dry excavations and the preservation of the final lines and grades at bottoms of excavations. 3.2 PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE A. Prepare and compact subgrade in accordance with Section 02300. 3.3 SUBSLAB PREPARATION A. Under floor slabs place the following: 1. Place 4 inch lift of free structural or gravel fill, and compact as specified. 2. Place vapor barrier. Lap joints a minimum of 6 inches and seal with tape. 3.4 CLEAN-UP A. Upon completion of the work of this Section, remove all rubbish, trash, and debris resulting from operations. B. Remove surplus equipment and tools; leave the site in a neat and orderly condition acceptable to the Architect. END OF SECTION 02320 -2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO - SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 02365 - TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Soil treatment for termite control. B. Related Sections: 02300 - Earthwork: Excavation and backfill. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Proposals for alternate products and methods for applications indicated may be considered by the Architect,'subject to requirements of Division 1, system performance requirements, and applicable requirements of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS i A. Make submittals in accordance with Division 1. I B. Submit product data and application instructions. r C. Submit certification that products used comply with U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) regulations for termiticides. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Engage a professional pest control operator who is licensed and bonded according to regulations of governing authorities to apply soil treatment solution. B. Use only termiticides that bear a federal registration number of the EPA and are approved by local authorities having jurisdiction- 1.4 JOB CONDITIONS A. Restrictions: Do not apply soil treatment solution until excavating, filling, and grading operations are completed, except as otherwise required in construction operations. B. To ensure penetration, do not apply soil treatment to frozen or excessively wet soils or during inclement weather. Comply with handling and application instructions of the soil toxicant manufacturer. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Furnish written warranty, executed by Applicator and Contractor, certifying that applied soil termiticide treatment will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity is discovered during warranty period, Contractor will re -treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. B. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. 02365-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 02365 - TERMITE CONTROL PART 2 - - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL TREATMENT SOLUTION A. General: Use an emulsible, concentrated termiticide that dilutes with water, specially formulated to prevent termites infestation. Fuel oil will not be permitted as a diluent. Provide a solution consisting of one of following chemical elements. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Chloropyrifos: a. Dursban TC, Dow Chemical Co. 2. Permathrin: a. Dragnet FT, FMC Corp. b. Torpedo, ICI Americas, Inc. 3. Cypermethrine: a. Prevail FT, FMC Corp. b. Demon, ICI Americas, Inc. 4. Fenvalerate: a. Gold Coast Tribute, Du Pont. 5. Isofenphose: a. Pryfon, Mobay Corp. C. Dilute with water to concentration level recommended by manufacturer. D. Other solutions may be used as recommended by Applicator if approved for intended application by local authorities having jurisdiction. Use only soil treatment solutions that are not harmful to plants. PART 3 - - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for preparing substrate and application. B. Surface Preparation: Remove foreign matter that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and foundations. Toxicants may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended by toxicant manufacturer. C. Application Rates: Apply soil treatment solution as follows: 1. Under slab -on -grade structures, treat soil before concrete slabs are placed, using the following application rates: a. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lineal feet to soil along inside perimeter of foundation walls, along both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating slab, and around interior column footings. b. Apply 1 gallon of chemical solution per 10 sq. ft. as an overall treatment under slab and attached slab areas where fill is soil or unwashed gravel. Apply 1-1/2 gallons of chemical solution to areas where fill is washed gravel or other coarse absorbent material. c. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lineal feet of trench for each foot of depth from grade to footing, along outside edge of building. Dig a trench 6 to 8 inches wide along outside of foundation to a depth of not less than 12 inches. Punch holes to top of footing at not more than 12 inches o.c. and apply chemical solution. Mix chemical solution with the soil as it is being replaced in the trench. 2. At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated, apply at rate of 4 gallons per 10 lineal feet of penetration. 02365-2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO —'SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 02365 - TERMITE CONTROL D. Post signs in areas of application to warn workers that soil termiticide treatment has been applied. Remove signs after areas are covered by other construction E. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, landscape grading, or other construction activities following application. END OF SECTION 02365-3 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 02621 - FOUNDATION DRAINAGE PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Foundation drainage pipe system complete with required couplings and accessories. 2. Aggregate setting bed and cover. 3. Filter fabric encasement. B. Related Section: 02300 - Earthwork: Excavation for drainage pipe, and adjacent and overlaying backfills. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitutions will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): D2729 - Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Foundation Drain Pipe: PVC pipe; ASTM D2729; schedule 40 smooth pipe; perforated for foundation drainage; nonperforated for conduction to outfall; plain end; minimum 6 inch inside diameter; furnish couplings and fittings as necessary to complete system. B. Gravel: 1" minus pea gravel; washed. C. Filter Fabric: "Fibertex 150" by Crown Zellerbach, "Mirafi 140" by Nicolon/Mirafi Group, or approved. D. Accessories: Furnish gaskets, sealants, bends, tees, and other accessories as necessary for complete drainage system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install drain pipe within a pea gravel envelope totally encased by filter fabric. B. Hand trim excavations to required elevations. Do not over excavate. C. Place filter fabric at the base of the excavation prior to drainage pipe installation. Leave sufficient material to completely encase the pea gravel envelope. 02621-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 02621 - FOUNDATION DRAINAGE PIPING D. Place pea gravel in maximum 6 inch lifts, consolidating each lift. Increase compaction of each successive lift. Do not displace or damage drainage pipe when compacting. E. Lay drainage pipe at locations indicated, except in no case shall the bottom of drainage pipe be positioned lower than the bottom of the footing. Slope drainage pipe to drain. F. Prior to placing pea gravel cover, allow Architect to make visual inspection of installed drainage pipe. Notify Architect a minimum of 48 hours prior to inspection. G. Pea gravel envelope shall surround the drainage pipe by a minimum of 4 inches at the bottom, 6 inches on the side, and 12 inches on top. H. Wrap filter fabric completely around the pea gravel, and leave ready for wall backfill as specified in Section 02300. . I. Provide connection to storm sewer system or outfall using unperforated pipe. J. Provide cleanouts. Coordinate location with the Architect. Cleanouts located in paving shall have solid flush caps. END OF SECTION i 02621-2 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 02753 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete paving. 2. Concrete walks and curbs. 3. Tactile tile system. (truncated domes). 4. Subgrade preparation. B. Related Sections: 1. 02300 - Earthwork: Site preparation. 2. 03001 - Concrete: Building concrete. 3. 07920 - Joint Sealants: Sealants for control and expansion joints. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. A185 - Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. 2. A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 3. C33 - Concrete Aggregates. 4. C94 - Ready -Mixed Concrete. 5. C150 - Portland Cement. 6. C260 - Air -Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 7. C309 - Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete, 8. D994 - Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type) 9. D1557 - Tests for Moisture -Density Relations of Soils using 10 lb. Rammer and 18 inch Drop. 10. D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 1. B. Mix Designs: Prior to concrete work, submit mix designs for approval complete with data sheets for all admixtures. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Inspection and testing of concrete will be performed by a firm appointed and paid for by the Owner in accordance with Section 00371. B. Pre -Installation Conference: 1. In accordance with Division 1, schedule and administer a meeting to review and discuss the installation a minimum of one week (7 calendar days) prior to commencement of work of this Section. 2. Attendance: General Contractor, the Architect, the concrete paving installer, the sealant installer, and all other parties affected by work of this Section. 3. Agenda: Include installation scheduling and procedures, subgrade requirements, interface with building and accommodation of weep requirements at sidewalk level, direction of broom finish, criteria for acceptance of materials and work, sealant joints locations, curb cut colors and details, and coordination with work of other trades and under separate contracts. 02753-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 02753 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING C. Tactile Tile System: 1. Installer's Qualifications: Certified by tactile tile manufacturer as qualified for installation; able to show evidence of successful completion of tile installations similar to that indicated for Project. 2. ADA Compliance: Tactile warning surfaces shall comply with ADA (Title 49 CFR TRANSPORTATION, Part 37.9 STANDARDS FOR ACCESSIBLE TRANSPORTATION FACILITIES, Appendix A, Section 4.29.2 DETECTABLE WARNINGS ON WALKING SURFACES. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FILL MATERIALS A. Structural Fill: As specified in Section 02300. 2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150; normal - Type I. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33; severe weather exposure. C. Water: Clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, organic matter, or other deleterious materials. D. Admixtures: 1. Free of calcium chloride and thiocyanates; not more than .05 percent chloride ions. 2. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260, "Chem -Masters ADZ -AIR", "Darex AEA", or approved, added in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: 60 ksi yield strength (unless indicated 40 ksi); deformed billet steel bars; ASTM A615; size as shown. B. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: Plain type, ASTM A185; plain finish; 6 X 6 - W1.4 X W1.4 size unless indicated otherwise. C. Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gage annealed type, or patented system acceptable to Architect. 2.4 FORMWORK AND ACCESSORIES A. Formwork: Matched, tight fitting and adequately stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of concrete. B. Preformed Joint Fillers: 1. Non -extruding type; ASTM D1751; Sonneborn "Sonoflex Canefiber," "Sonoflex F," The Burke Company "Fiber expansion Joint," or approved. 2. Joint Cap: Strippable plastic type; W.R. Meadows "SealTight Snap -Cap"; width to match expansion joint filler material. C. Concrete Curing Compound: ASTM C309, clear acrylate type; Sonneborn "Kure-N-Seal," or Master Builders "429." D. Tactile Tile System (Truncated Domes): 1. Tile: "Armor -Tile" by Engineered Plastics Inc. (Williamsville, NY; 800-682-2525; www.armor- tile.com); vitrified polymer composite (VPC) detectable warning surface tile; sizes as indicated; cast -in -place type. Furnish with acoustical amplification plates. 2. Color: Federal Color No. 33538, yellow. Color shall be homogeneous throughout the tile. 02753-2 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 02753 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 2.5 CONCRETE MIX A. At traffic -bearing pavement, mix and proportion to produce minimum 4,500 psi concrete at 28 days with slump of 2 to 4 inches and 4 to 6 percent air entrainment; ASTM C94. B. At walks and curbs, mix and proportion to produce minimum 2,500 psi concrete at 28 days with slump of 2 to 4 inches and 4 to 6 percent air entrainment; ASTM C94. C. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when acceptable to Architect. Use of admixtures shall not relax cold weather placement requirements. D. Use set -retarding admixtures during hot weather only when acceptable to Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLACEMENT OF FILL A. Examine the areas and conditions under which the work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Place and level structural fill over prepared subgrade to a compacted depth indicated on the drawings, true to lines and levels. Compact to 95% of standard dry density per ASTM D1557. 3.2 FORMING A. Form vertical surfaces to full depth and securely position to required lines and levels. Ensure form ties are not placed so as to pass through concrete. B. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit easy dismantling and stripping, and to prevent damage to concrete during formwork removal. 3.3 PLACING REINFORCING A. Reinforce concrete walks, curbs and gutters as indicated on drawings. Allow for minimum 1-1/2 inch concrete cover. B. Do not extend reinforcing through expansion joints. Provide doweled joints through expansion joints, with one end of dowels fitted with capping sleeve to allow free movement. 3.4 FORMING EXPANSION JOINTS A. Form expansion joints at locations as indicated on the Drawings, but in no case more than 20 feet o.c. Form joints 1/2 inch wide x full depth of slab. Do not permit reinforcement to extend through expansion joints. Where possible, make joints of curbs coincide with joints in walks. Where sidewalks abut building, provide continuous joint filler. B. Fit joints with filler of required profiles, set perpendicular to longitudinal axis of walks and curbs. C. Install strippable joint cap and recess 1/2 inch below finished concrete surface, at joints to receive sealants. 3.5 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete, screed and float surfaces to a smooth and uniform finish, free of open texturing and exposed aggregate. B. Avoid working mortar to surface. 02753-3 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 02753 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING C. Control Joints: 1. Make joints straight; perpendicular or parallel to building lines and slab edges, as appropriate. 2. Control joints shall be saw cut or tooled, as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Control joints shall penetrate the slab a minimum of 1/4 the thickness of the slab. D. Tool edges of formed control and expansion joints to maximum 1/4 inch radius; tool all other exposed edges to 1/2 inch radius. E. Accessible Ramps: 1. Sloped portion of ramp, and other adjoining surfaces as indicated, shall be cast in a separate operation from the adjoining surfaces. 2. Construct ramps in accordance with Drawings, and in compliance with minimum regulatory requirements for ramp dimensions and slopes. F. Finishes: 1. Broom Finish: Provide medium broom finish for exposed surfaces of walks and pavements; broom in parallel, linear patterns, in directions as indicated on the Drawings, or if not indicated, in direction perpendicular to principle direction of travel, and parallel to joints or edges of walks. 2. Light Non -Slip Steel Trowel Finish: Provide at exterior slabs where special texture is indicated. 3. Smooth Finish: Provide for curbs. 4. Tool walkway joint edges after finishing to form smooth borders at expansion and contraction joints, as indicated on the Drawings. G. Ensure finished surfaces do not vary from true lines, levels or grade by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet when measured with a straightedge. H. Apply curing compound on finished surfaces immediately after finishing. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF TACTILE TILE SYSTEM A. Install tactile tile as indicated, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and as follows. B. Pour and finish concrete to the required dimensions and uniform slope prior to the placement. C. Place tiles accurately and tight to perimeter construction. Tamp or vibrate the tiles into the fresh concrete to make flush to the adjacent surfaces. D. Adjust tiles as necessary before the concrete sets. Place weights on each tile as necessary to ensure solid embedment in the concrete. E. Lippage Tolerance: 1/16 inch. END OF SECTION 02753-4 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 02765 - TRAFFIC MARKING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Traffic striping and graphics. B. Related Sections: 1. 02753 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving: Substrate. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitutions will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 1. B. Submit product data for each product proposed. C. Samples of traffic bumps and traffic reflectors.. 1.3 SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Pavement shall be dry and not be less than 40 degrees F, unless recommended.otherwise by the traffic marking product manufacturer. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Marking Paint: Traffic line marking paint conforming to AASHTO M248, Type F, unless approved otherwise; white color, except blue at accessibility graphics. B. Marking Paint: Benjamin Moore & Co. "M58 "Safety & Zone Marking Latex"; Kelly -Moore Preservative Paint Company (Seattle WA; 206-763-0300) "1450 - Latex Traffic Line and Marking Marking Paint; white color, except blue at accessibility graphics, or as directed by the Architect to match existing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove all dirt, debris, grease, oil, and other materials which would impair the bonding of traffic marking systems. 02765-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 02765 - TRAFFIC MARKING B. Remove existing markings at existing surfaces where so indicated. C. Accurately layout patterns prior to installation of traffic markings. Request Architect approval of layout prior to commencing application. 3.3 PAINT MARKING A. Provide striping, directional arrows, and accessibility graphics as indicated on the Drawings for new construction. Unless indicated otherwise, parking stalls -lines shall be 20 feet long and 4 inches wide B. Paint with mechanical equipment to provide uniform straight lines. C. Apply evenly at paint manufacturer's recommended rates. D. Apply number of coats as recommended by the manufacturer to minimum 6 mils dft. END OF SECTION 02765-2 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 02848 - PRECAST PARKING BUMPERS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Precast parking bumpers. B. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. C. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with requirements of Division 1. B. Product Data: Submit complete product data for each item. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. In accordance with Division 1 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PARKING BUMPERS A. 6 ft width x 6 inch high x 9-1/2 inch wide; standard product from local manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect conditions and verify that they are such that work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install parking bumpers in the locations indicated. B. Secure in position by driving steel rod through holes in precast unit into the asphalt paving. Predrill drive holes in concrete slab on grade. Grout solid. C. In addition to steel rod anchors, adhesively bond precast parking bumpers to substrate with epoxy adhesive recommended for the application. END OF SECTION 02848-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 02891 - TRAFFIC SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Exterior traffic signage. B. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification. sections apply to all work of this Section. C. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Division 1. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data where applicable. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator: Signage manufacturer with three years documented experience in work of similar type and scope. B. Qualifications of Installers: Use only skilled and experienced installers for preparation and actual installation of graphics. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SIGNS A. Exterior Traffic Signs: 1. Manufacturer: Seton Nameplate Company (Branford, CT; 800/243-6624), or approved: 2. Material: Galvanized, bonderized steel, with baked enamel finish. 3. Support: U-Channel hot -rolled steel; deep green baked enamel finish; punched for bolt mounting of sign. 4. Type: As indicated on Drawings. 5. Finish: Beaded embossed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Verify locations and spacing with Architect prior to final installation. B. Set sign posts plumb and rigid, where indicated on drawings and as detailed. END OF SECTION il 02891-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 03001 - CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cast -in -place concrete. 2. Concrete accessories. 3. Formwork, shoring, bracing, and anchorage. 4. Concrete reinforcement. B. Related Sections: 1. 02320 — Subslab Preparation: Coordination with installation of subgrades and vapor barrier. 2. 02753 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving. 3. 07920 - Joint Sealants: Expansion joint fillers. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute(ACI) 1. 301 - Specifications of Structural Concrete for Buildings. 2. 315 - Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. A185 - Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. 2. A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel for Concrete Reinforcement. 3. C33 - Concrete Aggregates. 4. C94 - Ready -Mixed Concrete 5. C150 - Portland Cement. 6. C494 - Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 7. D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Division 1. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Reinforcing and Concrete Configuration: a. Detail reinforcing in accordance with ACI 315. Indicate reinforcement sizes, spacings, locations and quantities of reinforcing, bending and cutting schedules, splicing, and supporting and spacing devices. b. Indicate embedded items. c. Show concrete configurations. 2. Slab Layouts: Dimension locations of control, expansion, and construction joints. Relate to building grid lines. C. Product Data: Submit data for each accessory, admixture, and curing material proposed for the work. D. Mix Designs: Prior to concrete work, submit mix designs for approval. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301. Maintain copy of ACI 301 on site. 03001-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 03001 - CONCRETE B. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to appointed firm for review prior to commencement of work. C. Concrete work is subject to special testing and inspection as specified in Section 00371. Notify Architect at least 48 hours before concrete is poured. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS A. Unless specified otherwise, conform to ACI 301. B. Plywood: One of the following. 1. APA B-B Plyform Class 1, EXT. 2. APA rated High Density Overlay, Plyform Class 1. EXT. C. Form Ties: Snap -off metal; cone ends. D. Chamfers and Rustication Strips: Wood or plastic; fabricate to the shapes indicated. 2.2 REINFORCING STEEL A. Reinforcing Steel: Types as indicated on the Structural Drawings. B. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, and Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcement during installation and placement of concrete. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C150, normal - Type 1 Portland, grey color. B. Normal Weight Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33; severe weather exposure. C. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. 2.4 ADMIXTURES A. Use admixtures only as approved by Structural Engineer. B. Air Entrainment Admixture: Conform with ASTM C260, Chem -Masters "ADZ -AIR", "Darex AEA", or approved, added in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. C. Water Reducer: ASTM C494, Type A; Euclid Chemical Company "Eucon Retarder - 75", Master Builders "Pozzolith 200N", Sika Chemcial Corp. "Plastocrete", or approved. D. Superplasticizer: ASTM C494, Type F or G. Euclid Chemical Company "Eucon 327", Sika Chemical Corporation "Sikament", or approved. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Bonding Agent: Acrylic type; Sonneborn "Sonnocrete", W.R. Grace "Duraweld C", Euclid Chemical Co. "Flex -con", or approved. B. Prefabricated Slab Construction Joints: The Burke Company "Keyed Kold Joint," with splice plates, stakes, and driving accessories, or approved; depth 1/2 inch less than slab thickness, galvanized sheet metal tongue and groove joint form, with knockouts for passing reinforcing bars through. C. Form Release Agent: Colorless material which will not stain concrete, absorb moisture, or impair bonding or color characteristics of coating intended for use on concrete. 03001-2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 03001 - CONCRETE D. Preformed Joint Fillers: ASTM D1751; The Burke Company "Fiber Expansion Joint", or approved. At joint locations. to receive sealant use Burke "Joint Cap", or approved, to form recess and bond break for sealant installation. E. Curing Compounds: 1. Curing Compound: W. R. Meadows, Inc., Hampshire IL (800/342-5976); "Sealtight 100- Clear".Curing Paper: Burke Kraft Curing Paper Type I-SK-30, or approved. 2.6 CONCRETE MIX A. Mix concrete in accordance with ASTM C94, and in accordance with the requirements indicated on the Structural Drawings. Provide concrete with minimum 3000 psi compressive strength, unless indicated otherwise. B. Admixtures: 1. All concrete shall contain a water reducing admixture. 2. Normal weight concrete: 5% - 7% entrained air by volume, for concrete exposed to freeze -thaw or de-icing salts, and all exterior concrete including, but not limited to, slabs, paving, sidewalks and perimeter building foundations. 3. All pumped concrete and concrete with required water/cement ratio below 0.50 shall contain superplasticizer. C. Provide fly ash at minimum 15 percent by weight of cementitious materials. D. All concrete for slab on grade shall have a maximum water/cement ratio of 0.45. 2.7 REINFORCEMENT FABRICATION A. Fabricate as indicated and in accordance with ACI 315. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK ERECTION A. Verify lines, levels, and measurement before proceeding with formwork. Align form joints. B. Use plywood forms, unless other systems are approved by the Architect. C. Use form release agent on forms in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Verify that form release agents will not affect the bond of subsequent concrete surface treatments. D. Coordinate with work of other Sections in forming and setting openings, slots, recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors, and other inserts. E. Tolerances: Comply with ACI 301, Table 4.3.1 - Tolerances for Formed Surfaces. F. Where earth forms are used, hand trim sides and bottoms of earth forms. Remove loose dirt. 3.2 REINFORCEMENT A. Place, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. B. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on the drawings at points of minimum stress. C. Provide laps and concrete cover as indicated in the Drawings. D. Discontinue reinforcing at expansion joints in slabs and curbs unless indicated otherwise. 03001-3 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 03001 - CONCRETE 3.3 PLACING CONCRETE A. In accordance with ACI 301. B. Bonding Agent: Mix thoroughly and apply strictly in accord with the manufacturer's instructions; do not use when ambient temperature is below 45 degrees F. Place concrete in contact immediately while bonding agent is still tacky. 3.4 SUBSEQUENT TREATMENT FOR FORMED SURFACES A. At formed surfaces indicated to be exposed to view in the finished work, grout fill all rock pockets, tie holes, and other surface imperfections to create a smooth surface. Grind concrete fins and other surface projections flat with adjacent surfaces. Sack concrete surface to a uniform sand finish to match mock-up, as approved by the Architect. 3.5 SLABS A. Expansion Joints: 1. Place expansion joints where slabs abut concrete walls, the building perimeter, and other fixed objects abutting or within the slab area. 2. Place perpendicular to longitudinal axis of wall and curbs. 3. Form expansion joints with joint filler. Recess joint filler 1/2 inch below finished concrete surface to receive sealant specified in Section 07920. B. Control Joints: 1. Make joints straight; perpendicular or parallel to building lines and slab edges, as appropriate. 2. Control joints shall be saw cut or tooled. 3. Control joints shall penetrate the slab a minimum of 1/4 the thickness of the slab. C. Construction Joints: Place at either expansion or control joint locations. D. Curing: 1. Apply curing compound to slabs not to receive additional finishes. 2. Unless otherwise approved by the Architect, moisture cure slabs to receive tile, resilient flooring, and other floor finish materials which are bonded to the concrete substrate. Moisture cure with curing paper. Seal the edges and secure in position to avoid displacement during subsequent construction operations. E. Finishes: Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings provide the following: 1. Full Trowel finish interior floor slab surfaces, unless specified otherwise. 2. Light steel trowel finish interior floor slab surfaces scheduled to receive tile. F. Slab Tolerances: Class B in accordance with ACI 301. END OF SECTION 03001-4 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 03546 - CONCRETE SLAB PREPARATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Filling and grinding of existing concrete slabs to obtain specified slab tolerances. 2. Fills over existing slabs to raise finish slab elevations. 3. Toppings as necessary for leveling new or existing slabs at locations indicated to receive concrete sealer only. 4. Tapered fill to transition between different finish floor elevations. B. Related Sections: 1. 02225 - Selective Demolition: Removal of tile floor finish. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Division 1. B. Product Data: Submit product data and installation instructions. 1.3 GUARANTEE A. Furnish a 5 year guarantee against defects in material and workmanship, including but not limited to, failure of bond to substrate, cracking, spalling, etc. Submit in accordance with Division 1. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Self Leveling Underlayment System: Self -leveling, pourable, cement based material, minimum 28 day compressive strength 2,000 psi; minimum bond strength 200 psi; one of the following as recommended by manufacturer for conditions. 1. Mapei Corporation "Ultraplan 1" or "Novoplan 1 2." 2. Ardex Inc. "K-15" Self -Leveling Underlayment Concrete 3. Laticrete International, Inc. "Laticrete 86 LatiLevel Thin Pour Underlayment." B. Trowelable Underlayment System: As recommended by manufacturer for conditions: 1. Mapei Corporation "Mapacem 100" or "Planitop 10". 2. Ardex Inc. "SD-P" Fast -Setting Underlayment. 3. Laticrete International, Inc. "Laticrete 220 Medium Bed Mortar mixed with "Laticrete 3701 Latex Mortar Admix." C. Cementitious Toppings: For repair of concrete surfaces at locations indicated to receive concrete sealer: 1. Self -Leveling Types: a. Mapei Corporation "Ultratop". Self -Leveling Abrasion -Resistant Topping. b. Ardex Inc. "K-500" Self -Leveling Concrete Topping. 2. Trowelable Types: a. Mapei Corporation "Marecem 100" Fast -Setting Topping Mortar b. Ardex Inc. "CD" Self -Drying Concrete Dressing. 03546-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 03546 - CONCRETE SLAB PREPARATION PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 3.2 CONCRETE REMOVAL A. Grind down prominent portions of existing slab as required under unit price provisions. B. Grind as required to provide a uniform surface within a tolerance of 1/8" in 10 feet; tolerance is noncumulative; control with 10-foot straightedge. C. Provide smooth transition between slab surfaces, except as required to accept additional fill or finish materials. 3.3 UNDERLAYMENT PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces free of grease, dirt, dust, organic impurities, curing agents, and other materials which would impair bond. B. Clean floors with detergent, scarification, shot blasting, or other methods as recommended by the underlayment manufacturer to ensure secure bond; thoroughly rinse with clear water. C. Do not proceed if other conditions exist which will not allow a satisfactory installation. D. Commencement of underlayment application shall be an indication of acceptance of the substrates. The Contractor shall assume responsibility for any unacceptable finished work caused by the improper substrate conditions. E. Provide screeds as necessary to obtain the required elevations. , 3.4 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Install underlayment as specified, and in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions, with the most stringent method to govern. B. Should concrete substrate be too dry, dampen substrate before spreading underlay; do not allow water to puddle. C. Scratch in all deep or broken areas, joints, cracks, etc., and allow to dry for a short time prior to proceeding with a uniform thickness. Scratch or trowel underlayment to the concrete substrate to insure that it "wets -in" uniformly providing proper adhesion and bond. D. Finish with a steel trowel to provide a uniform surface within a tolerance of 1/4" in 10 feet; tolerance is noncumulative; control with 10-foot straightedge. E. Provide trowelable or self leveling underlayment as appropriate for the application. 3.5 CEMENTITIOUS TOPPING INSTALLATION A. Mixing: Measure components and mechanically mix, as recommended by the manufacturer. Extend mix with aggregate only for locations where installation thickness will exceed 1 inch. B. Apply primer and overlay in full accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 03546-2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 03546 - CONCRETE SLAB PREPARATION C. Finish to a smooth level surface; do not overwork. D. Cut or tool control joints into partially cured topping. E. Installation Tolerance: In accordance with ACI 302.1R; "Very flat'; level to within 1/8" in 10 feet. END OF SECTION 03546-3 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 04211 - BRICK VENEER PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Face brick. 2. Reinforcement, anchorages, and accessories. 3. Related flashing. B. Related Sections: 1. 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing: Support framing. 2. 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood framing and sheathing. 3. 07056 - Air Barrier System: Building paper. 4. 07190 - Water Repellents: Brick water repellent. 5. 07920 - Joint Sealants: Expansion/control joint sealing. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all .work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1. Requests for substitution of brick/manufacturer shall be accompanied by samples representative of proposed color, resume of projects of type and scope similar to that of this project, and production schedule information sufficient to demonstrate plant capacity to meet project scheduling requirements. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. A36 - Structural Steel 2. A123 - Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 3. C216 - Facing Brick. . 4. C270 - Mortar for Unit Masonry. 5. C476 - Grout for Reinforced and Non -reinforced Masonry. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Division 1. B. Samples: 1. Bricks: Minimum six samples of brick type proposed for the work. a. Furnish samples from proposed supply source. b. Submit quantity of bricks as required to represent extreme range of color and finish of brick to be furnished. c. Where custom sizes are specified, submit brick of similar size to that to be furnished. 2. Mortar: a. Three cured samples of mortar proposed for the work. b. Furnish cured sample of approved exterior masonry veneer mortar to Section 07920 for color matching. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations and configurations of brick, dimension points, locations of all lashings, critical details, reinforcing, special shapes, and brick schedule. D. Product Literature: For all accessory components, mortar mixes, and additives. E. Certifications: 1. Submit manufacturer's certificate that masonry, and reinforcing, meet or exceed specified requirements. 2. Submit manufacturer's certification that mortar and grout meet the specified requirements. 04211-1 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 04211 - BRICK VENEER 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Work of this Section is subject to testing and inspection as specified in Division 1. B. Mock-up: 1. Provide mock-up in accordance with Division 1. 2. Prior to starting brick masonry work, construct on site a sample 6 x 6 foot brick panel. Sample panel shall include: a. Proposed brick indicating color and texture range. b. Mortar indicating proposed color. c. Proposed coursing, bond, joints, weep holes, and flashing. d. Sealant joint as provided in section 07920. e. Treatment of one half of the panel with proposed cleaning procedure. f. Water repellent coating as provided in Section 07190. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. In accordance with Division 1. B. As bricks are unloaded and made ready for use, compare units with job samples for appearance and quality. Reject and return broken, damaged, battered or nonconforming brick. C. Store masonry units off ground to prevent contamination by mud, dust, or materials likely to cause staining or other defects. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Wet Weather: Provide suitable cover over work exposed to weather, protect materials. Maintain cover over finished work for 48 hours after completion. B. Cold Weather: When outside temperature is below 40 degrees F, or is expected to.fall below freezing within 48 hours (Weather Bureau forecast), heat materials and provide suitable enclosures to maintain temperatures above 40 degrees F in masonry work in place for 48 hours after completion. Obtain approval of methods of protection before proceeding. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EXTERIOR FACEBRICK ' A. Conforming to ASTM C216 Type FBX-Jobsite, Grade SW. B. Brick Type: As scheduled on the Drawings. C. Provide special shapes as indicated. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Mortar: ASTM C270, Type S or M; custom color as selected by the Architect. B. Grout: In accordance with ASTM C476; 2000 psi compressive strength. C. Attachment System for Framing: 1. For Attachment to Framed Walls: Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. "DW-10 Seismiclip Interlock System", including the following: a. Anchor: "DW-10" attachment anchor with neoprene gasket. b. Fasteners: No. 12 minimum galvanized self drilling type with neoprene washers, for attachment of anchors through sheathing into metal framing. c. Tie: 1) Typical: "Byna-Tie," with "Seismiclip." 04211-2 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 04211 - BRICK VENEER 2) Special Applications: Where special configuration for installation in vertical joints required, use wire tie #DWBT. d. Reinforcing Wire: Continuous 9 gage wire. 2. Finishes: Hot dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123. D. Flexible Flashing: W.R. Grace "Perm -A -Barrier" Wall Flashing. E. Prefabricated Weeps: Flexible PVC louvered weep hole with compressible flanges; Hohmann and Barnard, Inc. model #343, gray color, or approved. F. Building Paper/Underlayment: As specified in Section 07056. G. Masonry Relieving Angles: ASTM A36, galvanized per ASTM A123. H. Cleaning Agent: One of the following as recommended by the brick manufacturer and the cleaner manufacturer as most appropriate for the brick type; ProSoCo, Inc. "Sure Klean 600 Detergent' or ProSoCo, Inc. "Vana Trol." I. Stain Remover: As recommended by the manufacturer of the cleaning agent. J. Mortar Netting: Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. "Mortar Net;" thickness equal to depth of cavity. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Verify adjacent work is ready to accept the work of this Section; verify that items provided by other Sections are properly sized and located. Commencement of masonry work constitutes acceptance of adjacent and underlying construction. Immediately notify Architect of all deficiencies. B. Establish lines, levels, and coursing. Protect from disturbance. C. Provide temporary bracing during erection of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. 3.2 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXING A. Thoroughly mix mortar and grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with the referenced standards. B. Add approved admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide uniformity of mix and coloration. C. Do not use anti -freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar or grout. D. If water is lost by evaporation, retemper mortar within two hours of mixing. Do not retemper mortar after two hours of mixing. E. Use no lime in grout. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. . Building Paper: Verify that building paper has been installed in compliance with Section 07056. B. Anchorage System: 1. Install attachment system as indicated. Where not indicated, place each attachment anchor at 16 inches on center vertically along each stud for studs at 16 inches on center. 2. Coordinate with installation of flashing materials and relieving angles. 3. Furnish additional anchors at top courses, openings, corners, at each side of expansion joints, and at other special conditions. 04211-3 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 04211 - BRICK VENEER 4. Set ties and reinforcing wire in a bed of mortar and cover with mortar for secure and complete embedment. C. Ties: 1. Install ties and anchorage clips in sequence with masonry installation. 2. Provide continuous 9 gage reinforcing wire engaged into the anchorage clips. Lap 9 gage wire as recommended by the anchorage system manufacturer. 3. Set ties and reinforcing wire in a bed of mortar and cover with mortar for secure and complete embedment. D. Double Wythe Systems 1. Install double wythe masonry system at trash enclosure in compliance with Structural Drawings. E. Coursing: 1. Place masonry to lines and levels indicated. 2. Maintain masonry courses to uniform height. 3. Lay brick masonry units in running bond to modular dimensions indicated. Form tooled concave mortar joints where exposed in the finished work; cut flush at concealed locations, including joints concealed in cavities. F. Build relieving (lintel) angles into masonry system with minimum 3 inch bearing on masonry at each end. G. Provide cleanouts at each course support as necessary to maintain cavities free of droppings. H. Placing and Bonding 1. Lay masonry in full bed of mortar, properly jointed with other work. Buttering corners of joints, and deep or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted. 2. Fully bond intersections, and external and internal corners. 3. Do not use chipped or broken units. 4. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has taken initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. 5. Remove excess mortar. 6. Bonding fresh masonry to set, or partially set, masonry: a. Remove loose mortar. b. Clean and lightly wet exposed surface of set masonry prior to laying fresh masonry. Cutting and Fitting: 1. Cut and fit masonry units to form the configurations indicated, and as required to fit the work of other sections. Saw masonry units requiring cutting with a masonry saw. Coordinate fully with other sections of work to ensure correct size, shape and location. 2. Cut or block out chases for other trades as directed by other trades at time of masonry work. 3. Obtain Architect's review prior to cutting or fitting any area which is not indicated on drawings, or which may impair appearance or strength of masonry work. 4. Do not cut faces exposed to weather. 5. Miter cut bricks in soldier courses at outside corners. J. Flexible Flashing: 1. Clean surface of masonry smooth and free from projections which might puncture or otherwise damage flashing material. 2. Install membrane flexible flashing as indicated, and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3. At support angles, start flexible flashing at exterior edge of aupport angle and extend over angle and up onto substrate a minimum of 1-1/2 inches above top of angle vertical leg. 4. Dam flashing at expansion joints and at ends of lintels, by turning up the flashing a minimum of 4 inches. 5. Set brick over flashing in a bed of mortar. 04211-4 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 04211 - BRICK VENEER K. Mortar Netting: 1. Install mortar netting in cavity between masonry and sheathing following installation of second course above base or each flashing location. L. Weepholes: 1. Provide weep openings in head joints in first course immediately above all flashing. 2. Install rope weeps at locations indicated. 3. Maximum spacing: 2'-0" o.c. 4. Keep weepholes and area above flashing free of mortar droppings. M. Expansion/Control Joints: 1. Provide expansion/control joints as indicated. 2. Keep joints clear of mortar. 3. Provide expansion joints directly below relieving angles. 4. Provide vertical joints at all inside corners in brick veneer and at other locations as indicated on the Drawings. 5. Joint Width: Match typical mortar joint. 6. Installation of sealants is specified in Section 07920. 7. Do not continue masonry reinforcing across expansion/control joints. N. Build -in Work: 1. As work progresses, build -in hollow metal frames, window frames, steel lintels, shelf angles, nailing strips, anchor bolts, plates, and other similar items supplied by other trades. 2. Build -in items plumb and true. 3. Bed anchors of hollow metal frames in mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with mortar. Fill masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings. 4. Do not build -in organic materials which will be subjected to rot or deterioration. O. At the end of each days work, stop off horizontal runs by stepping back each course; toothing is not permitted, except at toothed control joints, where indicated. P. Cut out defective joints and holes in exposed masonry and repoint with mortar. Q. Dry brush masonry surface after mortar has set at end of each day's work and after final pointing. R. Clean exposed masonry with a stiff brush and approved non -acidic solution which will not harm masonry and adjacent surfaces. If cleaning operations do not produce satisfactory results, apply an alternate cleaning agent to sample wall area of 20 sq. ft. in a location as directed by the Architect. 1. Do not proceed with cleaning until sample area is acceptable to Architect. 2. Use cleaner in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Work small sections at a time. 4. Work from top to bottom. 5. Protect adjacent materials and construction, including landscape work in place, which may be damaged by masonry cleaning operations. S. Leave work area and surrounding surfaces clean and free of mortar spots, droppings, and broken masonry. T. Tolerances: 1. Maximum Variation From Plumb: a. In lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arises: 1) 1/4 in. in 10 ft. 2) 3/8 in. in any story or 20 ft. maximum. 3) 1/2 in. in 40 ft. b. For external corners, expansion joints and other conspicuous lines: 1) 1/4 in. in any story or 20 ft. maximum. 2) 1/2 in. in 40 ft. 2. Maximum variation from level or grades for exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines: 114 in. in any bay or 20 ft. 04211-5 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 04211 - BRICK VENEER 3. Maximum variation of linear building line from an established position in plan and related portions of columns, walls and partitions: a. 1/2 in, in any bay or 20 ft. maximum. b. 3/4 inch in 40 ft. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Division 1. B. Protect face materials, sills, ledges, and offsets from mortar drippings or other damage during construction. C. Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction activities. D. At day's end, cover unfinished walls to prevent moisture infiltration. 3.5 CLEANING A. Protect adjacent surfaces from cleaning operations with protective covering. B. Remove stains, efflorescence, excess mortar, and other deleterious materials in accordance with the cleaning agent and stain remover manufacturer's instructions. C. The use of muriatic acid for cleaning masonry surfaces is prohibited. 3.6 WEATHERPROOFING A. Application of water repellent is specified under Section 07190. END OF SECTION 04211-6 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Structural steel elements, as indicated on the Structural Drawings and not specified in other Sections. 2. Structural welding. 3. Baseplate grouting. 4. Masonry relieving angles. 5. Galvanizing of structural steel elements. B. Related Sections: 1. 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Steel fabrications not indicated on the Structural Drawings; 2. 09900 - Painting: Site applied paint coatings. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1. - 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. A36 - Structural Steel 2. A53 - Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and Seamless. 3. A123 - Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 4. A143 - Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot Dipped Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedures for Detecting Embrittlement. 5. A307 - Specification for Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners. 6. A325 - High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. 7. A384 - Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion During Hot Dip Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies. 8. A385 - Providing High Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot Dip) 9. A500 - Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. B. American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (AISC): 1. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; Paragraph 4.2.1 modified by deletion of the following sentence: "This approval constitutes the owner's acceptance of all responsibility for the design adequacy of any detail configuration of connections developed by the fabricator as part of his preparation of these shop drawings." 2. Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings, including the "Commentary of the AISC Specification." C. American Welding Society (AWS): D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Division 1. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, and locations of structural members, connections, attachments, fasteners, cambers, loads. 2. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. 05120-1 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use only welders certified by the American Welding Society. B. All work of this Section shall comply with applicable referenced AWS and AISC Standards. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL STEEL A. Types as indicated on the Structural Drawings. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Non -Shrink Grout: As indicted on the Structural Drawings. B. Welding Electrodes: E71T-8 only for all shop welds and field welds of all lateral resisting elements. E-70 series low hydrogen electrodes may be used for field welds of other components not associated with the lateral resisting system. C. Primers: 1. Standard Primer: Modified alkyd; lead and chromate free; one of the following unless approved otherwise. a. "Azeron Primer Series 88HS" by Tnemec Company Inc. (Kansas City, MO; 816-483-3400). b. "Amercoat 5105" by Ameron Protective Coatings (Brea, CA; 714-529-1951). c. "Carbocoat 150HG" by Carboline Company (St. Louis, MO; 314-644-1000; 800-848-4645). 2. Special Epoxy Primer: Tnemec Series N69 Epoxoline, or approved. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate structural steel items in accordance with approved shop drawings. Properly mark and match -mark all materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling. B. Shop fabricate in parts or sections as large as practicable. C. Fabrication of Elements to Receive Galvanized Coatings: 1. Fabricate in accordance with the applicable requirements of ASTM A143, A384, and A385. 2. Remove welding slag and burrs prior to galvanizing. 3. Avoid fabrication techniques which could cause distortion or embrittlement of the steel. D. Galvanizing: 1. Galvanize in accordance with ASTM A123. Bolts, nuts, washers, and other hardware shall be galvanized in accordance with A153. 2. Surface Finish: The galvanized coatings shall be continuous, firmly adhered, smooth, evenly distributed, and free from defects detrimental to the usefulness of the product. 3. Galvanize items after fabrication to the greatest practical extent. Treat all bare steel exposed by fabrication operations with cold galvanizing compound. 4. Galvanize masonry relieving angles, rooftop equipment screen framing, framing at trash enclosure and associated gate, other structural steel framing members exposed to the weather or moist conditions, and related hardware and fasteners. E. Standard Shop Primer Application: 1. Preparation: Remove rust and scale by wire brushing, scraping, and sanding down to bare metal in accordance with SSPC-SP2 and SP3. Where SP2 and SP3 measures are insufficient, provide commercial blast cleaning in accordance with SSPC-SP6. 2. Application: Spray apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, mil minimum dry film thickness. 05120-2 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL Shop Primer: Shop prime all steel except: a. Steel encased in concrete. b. Surfaces to be field welded. c. Contact surfaces at high -strength bolts. d. Members to be galvanized. e. Members which will be concealed by interior finishes. f. Surfaces to receive sprayed fireproofing. g. Surfaces to receive other special shop primers. F. Special Shop Primer Application: 1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and as specified below. 2. Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC SP-1; commercial blast ungalvanized ferrous metal surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP6. 3. Abrade galvanized surfaces with a metal preparation pad. 4. Spray apply primers in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Apply primers tc receive field application of finish coats as specified in Section 09900. 5. Maintain at least one coat of primer at all times during installation. Immediately patch damaged coatings. 6. Apply epoxy primer to galvanized steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory. 3.2 ERECTION A. Embedded items: Furnish anchor bolts and templates, and other items as indicated, to other Sections for installation prior to placement of concrete. B. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide as required with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members when permanent members are in place and final connections are made. C. Erect structural steel in accordance with approved shop drawings and AISC "Code of Standard Practice," Section 7. D. Base Plate Grouting: Set on leveling nuts to accurate elevations and grout solid with non -shrink grout. E. Touch-up Painting: Immediately after erection, touch up weld marks and other damaged areas of galvanized surfaces with zinc rich primer. F. Tolerances: Maximum deviation from plumb, level, and alignment shall not exceed 1 in 500. END OF SECTION 05120-3 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 05210 - STEEL JOISTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Open web steel joists, including related bridging, bearing plates, angles, and supports. B. Related Sections 1. 05120 - Structural Steel: Structural steel supports. 2. 05310 - Steel Deck: Decking installed over joists C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Welding Society (AWS): D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. B. Federal Specification (FS): TT-P-31E - Paint, Oil: Iron -oxide, Ready Mixed, Red and Brown. C. Steel Joist Institute (SJI): Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists and Steel Girders. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to SJI Standard Specifications, Load Tables, and Weight Tables. B. Use only welders certified by the American Welding Society. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Division 1. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate standard designations, configuration, sizes, spacing, and locations of joists, joist coding, bridging, connections, attachments, cambers, and the like. 2. Prepare shop drawings under the seal of a professional structural engineer registered in the State of the Project. C. Calculations: Submit design calculations for open web joists. Calculations shall bear the seal of a professional structural engineer registered in the State of the Project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Open Web Joist Members: Types as indicated on the Structural Drawings. B. Primer Paint: Iron oxide; FS TT-P-31E. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Fabricate steel joists in accordance with the requirements indicated on the Structural Drawings. B. Provide chord extensions and braces as indicated. C. Prepare and shop prime with one coat of primer. 05210-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 05210 - STEEL JOISTS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION A. Erect steel joists in accordance with the Structural Drawings. B. During erection, provide temporary bracing for induced loads and stresses. C. Do not permit erection of decking until joists are braced and bridged. D. Do not field cut or alter joists without approval by Architect. E. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not primed. Use primer consistent with shop coat. END OF SECTION 05210-2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Steel deck and accessories. B. Related Sections 1. 03001 . Concrete: Concrete rooftop equipment pads. 2. 05120 - Structural Steel: Support framing. 3. 05210 -Steel Joists: Support framing 4. Divisions 15 and 16: Sleeves for conduit and pipe penetrations. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A653 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Galvanized Process, Structural (Physical Quality) B. Steel Deck Institute (SDI): Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks. C. American Welding Society (AWS): D1.3 - Structural Welding Code Sheet Steel 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Division 1. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate the following. 1. Deck layout, framing and supports, and unit dimensions and sections. 2. Types of welds and weld patterns. 3. Details of fasteners and accessories. 4. Edge form details and locations. C. Product Data: Product literature and recommended installation instructions for metal decking, including verification of gravity load and shear capacities. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Erector Qualifications: Minimum of 5 years experience on comparable steel deck installations. B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Metal deck shall be fabricated and installed to meet the requirements of the jurisdictional code authorities. C. Roof deck system shall be capable of resisting shear loads noted on the Structural Drawings. D. Welders: Certified by the American Welding Society. 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING A. In accordance with Division 1, and as follows: 1. Store off ground with one end elevated for drainage 2. For storage over extended periods of time, cover deck with waterproof material. 05310-1 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION,05310 - STEEL DECK PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2'.1 COMPONENTS A. Steel Deck: 1. ASTM A653, SQ Grade 33 minimum quality; G60 galvanized coating. 2. Fabricate deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual. 3. Furnish deck of depth and profile indicated on the structural drawings. Where gage of deck is not shown, furnish deck capable of supporting design loads indicated on the structural drawings with detailed support conditions. Maximum deflection U360, unless otherwise indicated B. Accessories: 1. Cover Plates and Closures: Fabricate from same material as metal deck. Configure to match contour of deck units, for tight fitting closure of sides and ends of decks. 2. Weld Washers: Per manufacturer's recommendations. C. Galvanizing Compound: ZRC Chemical Products Company "ZRC Cold Galvanizing Compound," or approved; metallic zinc coating in an organic binder, 90 percent minimum zinc content in the dried film. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not begin installation until. all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install metal deck units as indicated, and in accordance with the deck manufacturer's instructions. B. Install deck with minimum end laps of 2 inches, centered over the supports, with minimum 2 inch bearing unless indicated otherwise. C. Place deck units flat and square; secure to framing without warp or deflection. D. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.3. E. Cutting and Fitting: Cut deck units for all penetrations. Make cuts neat, square, and trim. F. Install closures at open ends and sides of deck units as indicated, and as required to retain concrete fill. G. Touch-up Painting: Wire brush, clean, and paint scarred areas, welds, and rust spots, with galvanizing compound. END OF SECTION 05310-2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 05400 - COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Exterior lightgage load bearing metal framing for support of brick veneer and portland cement plaster, including anchorage and bracing. B. Related Sections: 1. 05120 - Structural Steel: Related steel supports; 2. 05310 - Steel Deck: Roof deck. 3. 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Sheathing. 4. 09111 - Lightgage Metal Support Framing: Interior non-structural lightgage metal framing. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. A525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. 2. A446 - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by Hot Dip Process, Physical (Structural) Quality. 3. C954 - Standard Specifications for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 In, (0.84mm) to 0.112 In. (2.84mm) in Thickness 4. C1007 - Standard Specification for Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs and Related Accessories. C. American Welding Society (AWS): D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Division 1. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate all typical and special details, including framing details, anchorage systems, fastening systems, loads, and accessories or items required of other work for complete installation. 2. Indicate framing layouts and sizes of framed openings. C. Product Data: Indicate each type of framing member proposed; include structural characteristics. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use only welders certified by the American Welding Society. B. Welding shall comply with AWS D1.3. C. Calculate structural properties of framing members in accordance with the AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Members". D. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Framing system shall meet the requirements of currently enforced Building Code as amended by the jurisdictional authorities. 2. Furnish all calculations, engineer's stamps, drawings, and other items required by the code authorities to obtain approval of the installation. 05400-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL -GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 05400 - COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPONENTS A. Cold Formed Lightgage Steel Framing: 1. Fabricate from ASTM A446 steel sheet; minimum 54 mil. 2. Finish: G60 zinc coated finish in accordance with ASTM C525. 3. Studs: C shaped sections; 1-5/8 inch wide flanges with return lip. B. Screws: ASTM C954; self drilling, self tapping; wafer head; galvanized or cadmium plated steel. C. Zinc Rich Touch-up Paint: "Gals -weld," "Galvican," 7RC Cold Galvanized Compound," or approved. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 3.2 ERECTION A. Install lightgage structural framing in accordance with ASTM C1007, unless indicated or specified otherwise. B. Erect metal framing in accordance with the Drawings. C. Screw each joint, except where welds are indicated. D. Metal framing members shall be saw or shear cut. No torch cutting is permitted. E. Construct corners with a minimum of 3 studs per corner. F. Provide framing as required to form solid backing for all edges of sheathing and trim accessories. G. Tolerances: 1. Plumb: Within 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 2. Location: Within 1/4 inch of the required location. 3. Alignment: Stud and runner faces to receive finish materials shall not vary greater than 1/8 inch from the required plane, with no abrupt jogs or breaks in plane. 4. Level: Within 1/8 inch in 10 feet. H. Erect studs in one piece full length. Splicing and wire tying of framing components shall not be used. I. Make provision for erection stresses. Provide temporary alignment and bracing. Touch-up field welds and scratched or damaged galvanizing with zinc rich paint. I J. Attach cross studs or furring channels to studs for attachment of wall mounted items. K. Install framing between studs for attachment of electrical boxes and other mechanical and electrical items. 05400-2 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 05400 - COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING L. Ensure framing provides true and flat surfaces, ready to receive designated finish. END OF SECTION 05400-3 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Custom metal fabrications not specified in other sections. 2. Factory prefabricated components not specified in other sections. B. Related Sections: 1. 03001 - Concrete: Embedment of metal fabrications; concrete fill for bollards. 2. 05120 - Structural Steel: Masonry relieving angles; steel elements indicated on the Structural Drawings. 3. 09900 - Painting: Field painting of metal fabrications. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. A36 - Specification for Structural Steel 2. A53 - Specification for Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe 3. A123 - Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 4. A143 - Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot Dipped Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedures for Detecting Embrittlement. 5. A307 - Specification for Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners. 6. A384 - Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion During Hot Dip Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies. 7. A385 - Providing High Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot Dip) 8. A500 - Specification for Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Division 1. B. Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication and installation; indicate materials, thickness of materials, sizes, dimensions, methods of reinforcement and embedment, attachments, anchorages, provisions for work of other trades, and other pertinent information as requested by Architect. C. Product Literature: Submit product literature for all prefabricated products. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Must be experienced and regularly engaged in producing metal fabrications of the type specified; must employ only skilled personnel using proper equipment to produce work. B. Testing and Inspection: All metal fabrications are subject to special inspection as specified in Section 00371. 05500-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Carbon Steel: 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A36. 2. Pipe: ASTM A53, seamless, Type S, plain end; schedule 40 unless indicated otherwise. 3. Tubing: AST M A500. B. Tubing: ASTM A500, seamless. C. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of types as indicated, specified, or required for the assembly and installation of fabricated items. 1. Bolts: ASTM A307, unless indicated otherwise; include nuts and plain harden washers. 2. Drilled -In Concrete Anchors: Ramset "Trubolt Stud Anchor," or Hilti Fastening Systems Kwikbolt," or approved. D. Standard (Interior) Primer: Modified alkyd type (VOC compliant); lead and chromate free; gray or white color; one of the following unless approved otherwise. 1. "Azeron Primer Series FD88" by Tnemec Company Inc. (Kansas City, MO; 816-483-3400). 2. "Amercoat 5105" by Ameron Protective Coatings (Brea, CA; 714-529-1951). 3. "Multi -Bond 150" by Carboline Company (St. Louis, MO; 314-644-1000; 800-848-4645). E. Special (Exterior) Primer: 1. Manufacturer: a. Tnemec Company Inc. (Kansas City, MO; 816-483-3400). b. Carboline Company (St. Louis, MO; 314-644-1000; 800-848-4645). 2. Epoxy Primer: One of the following; color similar to finish coat. a. "Series 69 Epoxoline II," by Tnemec. b. "Carboline 888." F. Non -Shrink Grout: Master Builders "Master Flow 713," Sonneborn "Sonogrout," or approved. G. Miscellaneous Materials: Provide all incidental accessory materials, tools, methods and equipment required for fabrication and installation of miscellaneous metal items as indicated on drawings. 2.2 FABRICATION - FERROUS METAL FABRICATIONS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate as follows, unless specified or indicated otherwise. 1. Verify all dimensions and fabricate to detail with accurate sizes and shapes, straight lines, smooth curves, and sharp angles. 2. Welds shall have sufficient strength to withstand the loads applied. 3. For items exposed to view or subject to contact, grind welds smooth and level with adjacent surfaces; remove all burrs from cut edges. 4. Bend curved sections to a smooth radius free from buckles and twists. 5. Fabrications in exterior locations shall be fabricated to shed water. B. Fabrication of Elements to Receive Galvanized Coatings: 1. Fabricate in accordance with the applicable requirements of ASTM A143, A384, and A385. 2. Remove welding slag and burrs prior to galvanizing. 3. Avoid fabrication techniques which could cause distortion or embrittlement of the steel. 05500-2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS 2.3 SHOP FINISHES A. Hot Dip Galvanizing: 1. Steel fabrications shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123. Bolts, nuts, washers, and other hardware shall be galvanized in accordance with A153. 2. Surface Finish: The galvanized coatings shall be continuous, firmly adhered, smooth, evenly distributed, and free from defects detrimental to the usefulness of the product. 3. Locations: Provide hot dip galvanizing for all metal fabrications in exterior or moist conditions, including exterior bollards and rooftop screen supports. 2.4 PROTECTION A. For metal in contact with concrete, masonry, and other dissimilar materials, provide contact surfaces with coating of an approved zinc -chromate primer in manner to obtain not less than 1.0 mil dry film thickness. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install metal fabrications in accurate locations shown. Unless indicated otherwise, fabrications shall be installed plumb and level. B. Provide all anchorage devices as indicated and required for a secure installation. C. Touch-up all surfaces damaged during installation. Patch all welds and damage marks with matching primer. 3.3 SCHEDULE A. The following list includes the principal metal fabrications and finishes in the Work. 1. Roof access ladder: Galvanized finish. 2. Steel bollards: Galvanized finish with special primer to receive finish coat specified in Section 09900. 3. Low partition support: Unfinished. 4. Parapet eyehooks: Drop forged stainless steel; 1/2" diameter shank (threaded); length as indicated. 5. Gates at trash enclosure: Galvanized finish with special primer to receive finish coat specified in Section 09900. 6. Miscellaneous fabrications exposed to weather: Galvanized finish with special primer to receive finish coat specified in Section 09900. END OF SECTION 05500-3 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sheathing. 2. Blocking, nailers, and curbing. 3. Plywood terminal back boards. B. Related Sections: 1. 07541 — Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing. 2. 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitutions will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 01600. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Plywood Association (APA) B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. D2898 - Test Method for Accelerated Weathering of Fire -Retardant Treated Wood for Fire Testing. 2. E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C. American Wood Preservers' Association: Book of Standards (AWPA). D. National Lumber Grading Authority of Canada (NLGA) E. Product Standard (PS): PS-20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard F. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB). G. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau: Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber (WCLIB). H. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA). 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Work shall conform to the requirements of the currently enforced Uniform Building Code, as adopted by the jurisdiction. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store and protect products under provisions of Division 1. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Lumber shall be manufactured in accordance with PS 20, and shall be stamped and graded in accordance with WWPA, WCLIB, SPIB or NLGA grading rules. B. Moisture Content: Kiln dried to 19% maximum moisture content, except for material whose least dimension is 4 inches thick or greater. 06100-1 01 / 18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY C. Species: Hem -Fir, Spruce -Pine -Fir (SPF), or Douglas Fir Larch, unless indicated or specified otherwise. D. Structural Lumber Grades: As indicated on the Structural Drawings. E. Architectural Lumber Grades: Unexposed non-structural wood framing and blocking indicated on the Architectural Drawings shall be graded as follows: 1. Non -Structural Framing (2" to 4" thick, 2" to 6" wide): "Construction - Light Framing," "Stud," or better. 2. Blocking and Nailers: "Utility - Light Framing," or better. 2.2 PANEL MATERIALS A. Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing; CD grade; Exterior; plywood or oriented strand board, unless indicated otherwise; thicknesses as indicated. B. Terminal and Ladder Backboards: APA AC grade exterior; fire retardant treated. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: 1. Hot -dipped galvanized steel for exterior, high humidity locations. 2. G-185 galvanized coating or stainless steel fasteners at treated wood locations. B. Metal Connectors: Types as indicated on the Structural Drawings. C. Construction Adhesive: Maklenburg Duncan MD400, or other product meeting the requirements of AFG-01. 2.4 WOOD TREATMENT A. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): 1. Preservative treat all exterior lumber and plywood, including without limitation, all roofing nailers, curbs and other wood in contact with concrete, masonry, and moist conditions. Site treat sawn ends with preservative treatment. 2. For above ground use, use AWPA certified Ammonium Copper Quaternium (ACQ) or Copper Hydroxide Sodium Dimethyldithiocarbamate (CDDC) waterborne preservative with 0.25 pounds per cubic foot of wood retention. 3. For ground contract use, use AWPA Treatment C-22 using CCA waterborne preservative with 0.40 pounds per cubic foot of wood retention. 4. Treated wood shall have a maximum moisture content of 19%. 5. Treated wood shall bear the quality stamp of an inspection agency approved by the jurisdictional code authorities. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 3.2 SHEATHING A. Install sheathing as indicated. When not indicated, install as follows: 06100-2 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP i PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY i 1. Secure sheathing with edges on firm bearing. Provide solid edge blocking between sheets. 2. Secure roof sheathing perpendicular to framing members with ends staggered. I B. Allow 1/8 inch spacing at ends and edges between panels, unless otherwise recommended by panel manufacturer. 3.3 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND CURBS A. Provide blocking, nailers, and curbs for all sheathing, roof construction, metal flashing, and other l construction as indicated. B. Wood Blocking: Install wood blocking to receive mechanical fasteners for support of plumbing and electrical fixtures and equipment, cabinets, door stop plates, wood base, wainscots, coat hooks, toilet and bath accessories, kitchen equipment, and all other wall and ceiling mounted components, unless indicated otherwise. C. Backing: 1. Plywood backing shall be used in lieu of blocking at locations of wall -mounted standards and j shelving. 2. Backing shall be mounted over face of studs beneath gypsum board and shall be continuous over entire plane of wall; 1/2" thickness. 3. Secure backing with edges on firm bearing. 3.4 PLYWOOD BACKBOARDS A. Telephone Terminal Backboards: Provide a fire retardant treated plywood for telephone systems where indicated on the Drawings. B. Roof Access Ladder Backboard: As indicated on the Drawings. C. Mechanically apply directly over gypsum backing board. END OF SECTION 06100-3 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 06400 - ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic laminate casework. 2. Closet shelves and hardware. 3. Wall shelves and wall standards. 4. Option for pre -manufactured modular casework. B. Related Sections: 1. 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking for wall mounted items. 2. 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Adjacent finish work. C. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1. D. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. 1.2 REFERENCES 1 A. The Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI): Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, current edition. B. American Plywood Association (APA): Grades and Specifications. C. Kitchen Cabinet Manufactures Association (KCMA): Certified Directory. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Exposed Portions: Those surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed, including edges of doors and drawers, edges of cabinet boxes visible between drawers and doors, and countertop knee braces. B. Semi -Exposed Portions: Those areas not defined as exposed, but visible when solid (not glazed) doors and drawers are opened. C. Concealed Portions: All remaining areas not defined as exposed or semi -exposed. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Requirements: 1. Fabricator shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in producing premium grade commercial quality millwork. 1 2. Fabricator of pre -manufactured modular casework shall be a certified member of the KCMA. B. Standards: 1. Pre -manufactured modular casework shall conform to AWI Architectural Quality Standards Section 1600, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Custom casework shall conform to AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Section 400 custom" grade, unless otherwise indicated. C. Installation Requirements: 1. Design Loads at Casework Attachment to Walls : Fasteners at Wall Mounted Casework shall be capable of supporting 5 pounds per square foot uniform live lateral load, plus casework dead load, plus casework live load of 25 PSF of shelf and counter top area. 06400-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 06400 - ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Make all submittals in accordance with Division 1. B. Shop Drawings: Show all casework configurations, construction details, and locations of all hardware. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Do not deliver casework to building until "wet work" such as concrete, plaster and gypsum wallboard work have been completed and cured. B. Casework Storage: Store in dry place with adequate air circulation, avoiding excessive moisture, limiting average moisture content of wood to 8 percent or less at delivery time. C. Handling: Protect casework from excessive moisture and damage during shipment from fabrication plant. D. Replacement: In the event of damage to casework, immediately make all repairs or replace as necessary, to the approval of the Architect at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Prefinished Board: Low pressure melamine over particle board or hardboard core; color as selected. B. Plastic Laminate: Brands and colors as noted on the drawings. 1. Exposed: NEMA LD-3, general purpose and vertical grade as specified. 2. Backing Sheets: NEMA LD-3; backing grade; undecorated. C. Particle Board: Medium density particle board; comply with HUD standard 24 CFR Part 3280.308 for formaldehyde emissions. D. Plywood: PS 1; exterior grade; A grade face veneer where plastic laminate is bonded to the face; touch sanded. E. Hardwood: As required to match Owner -supplied furnishings. F. Hardware: 1. Hinges: European style concealed hinges; Blum, Grass, Hafele, or approved; self closing; 95 degree opening; number of hinges as recommended by the manufacturer for the door size and weight. 2. Drawer and Door Pulls: Hafele; #116.11.635. - 3. Drawer Slides: Full extension ball bearing; clear zinc finish; rail mount; Accuride, or approved; load rating as required for the application. a. Light Duty Rating (drawers 12 inches wide or less): Accuride 2632; 65 lb BIFMA load rating b. Medium Duty Rating(drawers 32 inches wide or less): Accuride 7432; 100 lb BIFMA load rating. c. Heavy Duty Rating (drawers 42 inches wide or less): Accuride 3640; 200 lb BIFMA load rating. 4. Keyboard Tray: Accuride "CBERGO - TRAY300". 5. Wall Standards and Brackets: K&V No. 87 standard with No. 187LL brackets full depth of shelf, anochrome finish. 6. Wall Shelf Support Clips: Zinc plated metal; K&V #211 at rear of bracket and K&V #212 at front of bracket. 7. Casework Shelf Pins: K&V #346 anochrome finish. 8. Grommets: Doug Mocket; #XG Series ( black color). 06400-2 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 06400 - ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 2.2 CASEWORK FABRICATION A. Plastic Laminate Casework Construction: 1. At the Contractor's option, casework may be custom or pre -manufactured modular casework. 2. Design: AWI Flush overlay design, unless indicated otherwise. Joint between exposed doors, drawer faces, and countertop edges shall be 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16. 3. Fabricate casework of prefinished board with matching PVC edges. 4. Particle board shall be minimum 3/4" thick unless indicated otherwise. 5. Provide openings in casework for the incorporation of all electrical and mechanical components. 6. Provide all hardware, fasteners, and exposed trim. 7. Adjustable Shelves: Provisions for shelf adjustment shall be by adjustable shelf hardware as specified herein. 8. Provide adjustable base to provide level installation which accommodates variations in floor levelness. B. Hardware Installation: 1. Install hardware straight and true and in perfect alignment horizontally and vertically with adjacent casework and hardware. 2. Carefully fit and securely attach cabinet hardware in accordance with manufacturers' printed instructions, and exercise caution not to mar or injure existing surfaces. 3. Recess adjustable shelf standards to be flush with face of finished surface. 4. Upon completion of work, and in the Architect's presence, demonstrate hardware to work freely as intended. 2.3 PLASTIC LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. Fabricate to AWI Custom grade. B. Fabricate countertops from particle board and general purpose grade plastic laminate in the shapes indicated. C. Where countertops are indicated with sinks, use exterior grade plywood in lieu of particle board. 2.4 WALL AND CLOSET SHELF FABRICATION A. Unless indicated otherwise, fabricate from minimum 3/4 inch thick hardwood plywood, plastic laminate cladding top and bottom; self edge all sides. B. As an option, wall and closet shelving may be fabricated from prefinished board, except at water heater shelving. C. Provide intermediate supports for closet pole at maximum 3 feet on center. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting'work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate casework installation with the work of other trades for final electrical and mechanical connections. 06400-3 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 06400 - ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK B. Install all casework accurately, scribed plumb, square, and level, and permanently secured in accurate position as indicated on the Drawings. C. All fasteners securing casework shall be in concealed or semi -concealed locations D. Repair or replace all damaged components in a manner approved by the Architect. E. Install wall shelves with standards firmly anchored to studs or other supports. Coordinate installation of studs or other supports to create symmetrical location of wall standards. Standards shall be at a maximum spacing of 18 inches, and located as to be a maximum distance of 6 inches from end of shelf. 3.3 CLEAN UP A. Following completion of casework installation, remove all rubbish and debris resulting from the work from the premises, legally disposed of, and leave the entire project in a neat, clean condition acceptable to the Architect. B. Do not damage adjacent surfaces while cleaning the work of this section. END OF SECTION 06400-4 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 07056 - AIR BARRIER SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Building paper air barrier and weather barrier systems. 2. Filler and membrane systems required to seal joints and penetrations to form a continuous air barrier assembly. 3. Related air barrier accessories and components. B. Related Sections: 1. 06100 —Rough Carpentry: Sheathing substrate. 2. 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Flexible flashing provided with separate sheet metal flashing systems. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Air Barrier: An air barrier is an assembly of interconnected components within the exterior envelope of a building which prevents air flow across the assembly, and which is intended to prevent excess 1 moisture transfer across the assembly driven by air pressure differentials. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. All voids within air barrier systems shall be closed to prevent air flow across the assembly. B. The following elements provided under the work of other Sections shall be considered integral parts of the air barrier assembly: 1. Concrete foundation. 2. Roof membrane. Plumbing vents and roof drains shall not be considered penetrations. 3. Exterior windows and doors. C. For the work of this Section, air barrier systems shall consist of the following: 1. Building paper base layer over solid substrates on the exterior building enclosure The outer building paper weather barrier layer is included as a part of the work of this Section, but is not a primary component of the air barrier system. 2. Connective seal from foundation wall to the building paper base layer. 3. Connective seal of building wrap to roof membrane. 4. Sealing of penetrations in the building exterior building air barrier envelope, including windows. doors, plumbing elements, electrical elements, and mechanical components, including duct penetrations at rooftop mechanical unit. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Division 1. B. Product Data: Catalog cuts and installation instructions for specified manufactured products. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator: Work of this section shall be performed by a single applicator, unless specifically approved otherwise by the Architect. 07056-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 07056 - AIR BARRIER SYSTEM B. Pre -Installation Conference: 1. Administer pre -installation conference in accordance with Division 1. 2. Schedule meeting prior to installation of air barrier components. 3. Discuss air barrier components and sequence of installation. 4. Discuss all joints and penetrations and proposed methods for sealing 5. Identify and discuss all special conditions. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. In accordance with Division 1. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Building Paper System: 1. At Cement Plaster: a. Base Layer: DuPont Company (800448-9835) "Commercial Wrap;" include manufacturer's standard tape for sealing joints and penetrations. b. Outer Layer: DuPont Company "Tyvek StuccoWrap." 2. At Brick Veneer: 2 Layers DuPont Company (800-448-9835) "Commercial Wrap. 3. Include manufacturer's standard tape for sealing joints and penetrations. 4. Include manufacturer's standard washered fasteners for installation. Staples are not acceptable. B. Flexible Flashing: 40 mil self -adhering SBS modified membrane on high density polyethylene facer. 1. Manufacturers: a. The Henry Company, Blueskin SA, (800/523-0268), Kimberton, PA;. b. WR Grace, Vycor V40. c. Fortifiber Building Systems Group, FortiFlash 40. d. DuPont Company, Tyvek FlexWrap. 2. Primer: Synthetic rubber based adhesive, or as instructed by manufacturer to suit conditions. C. Flexible Seal: Ethylene Propylene Diene Terpolymer ( EPDM ) black membrane, reinforced or non - reinforced, nominal 0.045 inch thick; complete with manufacturer's recommended splicing materials. D. Air Barrier Sealant: Single component urethane gun grade sealant. E. Foam Seal: Low expanding spray urethane foam. F. Sheet Metal Closures: 1. Minimum 24 gage prefinished galvanized steel. 2. Custom fabricated to fit the conditions. G. Accessories: Provide surface conditioners, primers, mastic, tape, and other accessories as specified by or acceptable to the manufacturer of each product. H. Fasteners: Copolymer coated, galvanized steel, or stainless steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. 07056-2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 07056 - AIR BARRIER SYSTEM B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate work with other trades as necessary to form a continuous air barrier envelope for the building. B. Building Paper Air Barrier Installation: 1. Apply two separate layers of building paper over solid exterior substrates in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations; both layers lapped to weather. 2. Apply base layer complete to form a continuous air barrier. Tape seal all joints and penetrations with manufacturer's recommended tape. 3. Apply separate outer layer weather barrier. Joints need not be taped. Outer layer shall not be installed simultaneously with the base layer. Each layer shall be separate and continuous. 4. Coordinate installation of windows and other wall penetrations with the installation of flexible flashing and building paper as shown. 5. Secure both layers with screws and washers as recommended by manufacturer, staggering joints with joints in the first layer. 6. Sequence with installation of flexible flashing and metal flashing elements as shown and as necessary to form a continuous air and weather barrier. 7. Install a single building paper base layer at soffits, sheathing separation between the drive up canopy soffit enclosure and the occupied building spaces, and other surfaces as necessary to form a continuous building paper envelope. C. Flexible Flashing: 1. Install flexible flashing as indicated and as specified below. 2. Trim flexible flashing so that it will not be exposed in the finished work. 3. Coordinate installation of flexible flashing with installation of building paper and sheet metal flashing elements. 4. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for each condition. 5. Provide flexible flashing as indicated and in the following locations to seal joints and penetrations between building paper base layer and the following: a. Concrete foundation walls. b. Roof membrane. c. Pipe, conduit, and electrical box penetrations. d. Window and door frames. e. Penetrations through the sheathing separation between the drive up canopy soffit enclosure and the occupied building spaces. 6. Provide flexible flashing at parapet tops as necessary to link to the inner building paper layers on both sides of the parapet walls. 7. Provide flexible flashing to seal the joint between sheet metal closure angles and building paper base layer. D. Foam Sealant: 1. Seal holes in electrical boxes, including around wire openings. 2. Seal penetrations which cannot be sealed with flexible flashing. 3. Provide lightgage sheet metal angle edge trim at gypsum board edges to receive sealant. E. Special Construction: 1. Provide custom fabricated sheet metal enclosures around recessed light fixtures and similar elements which penetrate building paper air barrier assemblies. 2. Mechanical Curbs: a. Rigid insulation boards at equipment curbs are installed as a part of the roofing subcontract. b. Foam seal joints between rigid insulation boards. Cut boards as necessary to allow foam penetration between the boards. c. Foam seal joints between rigid insulation board and adjacent curb construction. 07056-3 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 07056 - AIR BARRIER SYSTEM d. After installation of rooftop mechanical unit and ducts, foam seal the joint between the rigid insulation boards and the ducts. 3. Sheathing Separation Between Canopy and Occupied Building Spaces: a. Provide sheet metal angle between the bottom side of the metal deck of the canopy roof and the enclosure wall. b. Foam seal the joint between the sheet metal angle and the flutes of the deck. END OF SECTION 07056-4 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 07111 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1-GENERAL I 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Bituminous dampproofing. B. Related Sections: 1. 02300 - Earthwork: Excavation and backfill. 2. 03001 - Concrete: Substrate. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitutions will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Division 1. B. Submit product literature. 1.3 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Unless approved otherwise, install dampproofing at temperatures above 40 degrees F. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED PRODUCTS A. "Sealmastic Type 1" by W.R. Meadows (800/342-5976). B. Sonneborn "Hydrocide 600" by Sonneborn (800/433-9517) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install 2 heavy coats in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Apply to all outer below grade surfaces of building perimeter foundation walls and footings. Install from the bottom edge of the footings to within 6 inches of grade. END OF SECTION 07111-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 07190 - WATER REPELLENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Water repellent coating for exterior brick veneer. B. Related Sections: 1. 03001 - Concrete: Protection; coordination. 2. 04211 - Brick Veneer. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals under the provisions of Division 1. B. Product Literature: Include complete product literature. C. Manufacturer's laboratory test data and recommended application rates for each masonry type. D. Manufacturer's printed application instructions. E. Warranty Draft: Concurrent with initial product data submittal, submit draft of manufacturer's warranty for Architect's review of terms. Draft shall include all specified exceptions and inclusions. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Products and installation techniques shall comply with the applicable jurisdictional requirements for VOC emissions. B. Installer: Water repellent coatings shall be applied by a single firm approved by the coating materials manufacturer. C. Preliminary Testing: Unless testing has been performed prior to bid, submit samples of masonry units from stock of those to be used in the work. Submittals shall be in accordance with water repellent coating manufacturer's requirements, 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. In accordance with Division 1 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply water repellent to masonry surfaces when surface or air temperatures are below 40° or above 100° F; maintain temperatures within this range for 24 hours after water repellent application. B. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations regarding conditions of substrate to receive water repellent, weather conditions before and during installation, and protection of the installed water- repellent coating. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. 07190-1 01 /18/06 . WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 07190 - WATER REPELLENTS B. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard 10 year material and labor warranty against water penetration attributable to defects in water repellent coating materials and workmanship. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Water Repellent Material: 100% microemulsion concentrate of alkyl alkoxysilane and oligomeric alkyl alkoxysiloxanes in water -base solution, formulated for application to brick and mortar surfaces without significant change in appearance of surface; ProSoCo, Inc. "Weather Seal Siloxane WB." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspection: Inspect substrates to receive water repellent coating and verify that they are clean, dry, properly pointed, and ready for the application of water repellent materials. Verify that sealants are installed, cured, and have been accepted. Water repellent work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion and compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, water repellent, and sealant materials identical to those used in the Work. B. Notify the Architect of all unacceptable conditions, and do not commence work in those areas, until the unacceptable conditions have been resolved. Commencement of application constitutes acceptance of conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from overrun and overspray with protective covering. Mask as necessary, and cover plants and shrubs, asphalt, surfaces to be painted, windows, and all other surfaces not scheduled to receive water repellent coating. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Field apply water repellent materials to brick surfaces by airless spray, in accordance with water repellent coating manufacturer's printed application instructions. B. Apply water repellent at appropriate application rate as determined by mock-up. Base bid on application rate of 80 sf/gallon unless approved otherwise. C. Remove overspray from adjacent surfaces immediately before it dries using manufacturer's recommended solvent. Restore or replace all building components permanently damaged by overspray. D. Replace, with new equivalent materials, all landscape materials damaged by overspray or other work of this Section. END OF SECTION 07190-2 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 07211 - BATT AND BLANKET INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Thermal batt and blanket insulation. 2. Acoustical insulation. B. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. C. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. C665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. 2. E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Unfaced Batt and Blanket Insulation: ASTM C665, Type I; preformed unfaced glass fiber roll; flame spread of 25 or less and smoke developed of 50 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84; formaldehyde free, Johns Manville Corp. "Thermal -SHIELD Unfaced Fiber Glass Commercial Insulation;" or approved; oversize widths for friction -fit between metal framing. B. Acoustical Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber or mineral fiber; unfaced; widths as necessary to fit stud cavities; thickness, 3 inches minimum. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Provide other accessories, not specifically described, but required for a complete installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify adjacent materials are secure, properly spaced, dry, and ready to receive installation. B. Verify mechanical and electrical services within spaces to insulated have been installed and tested. C. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. D. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION A. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as indicated. 07211-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 07211 - BATT AND BLANKET INSULATION B. Install insulation without gaps or voids. C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Use batts free of damage. D. Install insulation with vapor barrier toward warm side of building spaces. Vapor barrier shall be continuous. Tape seal tears or cuts in vapor barrier. E. At metal stud framing, insert the insulation edges tightly into the stud channels for a friction fit. Where insulation butts the backside of stud channels at insulated partitions with sheathing on one side only, continuously tape insulation flanges to the exposed metal stud flange.] F. Provide thermal batt insulation in sufficient thickness to provide the following R values, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings: 1. Walls: R19. 2. Soffits: R30. G. Additional Requirements for Acoustical Insulation: 1. Place insulation tight around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. 2. Acoustical Insulation at Ceilings: a. Lay acoustical insulation over each acoustically insulated partition which terminates at the ceiling. Insulation shall extend a minimum of 24" each side of the centerline of the acoustical partition b. Acoustical insulation batts shall be tightly butted. c. Cut and fit neatly around mechanical and sprinkler drops. d. Fill spaces between wall batts (at top plate line) and ceiling batts to ensure complete sound closure. e. Omit insulation over tops of recessed fluorescent light fixtures; and within 2 inches of recessed incandescent fixtures. END OF SECTION 07211-2 01 / 18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 07212 - RIGID BOARD INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Thermal rigid board insulation. B. Related Sections: 1. 07211 - Batt and Blanket Insulation. 2. 07541 — Mechanically Attached Thermoplastic Roofing: Insulation provided as part of the roofing system. , C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. C518 - Test Method for Steady -State Thermal Transmission Properties by means of the Heat Flow meter. 2. D1621 - Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 3. D2842 - Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product literature and installation instructions under provisions of Division 1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 THERMAL INSULATION A. Extruded Cellular Polystyrene Board: 1. Approved Products: Dow Chemical Company "Styrofoam" or Owens Corning. "Foamular 250 Insulating Sheathing." 2. Thermal Resistance: Minimum "R" per inch of 5 RSI when tested in accordance with ASTM C518 at 75 degrees F. mean temperature. 3. Compressive Strength: Minimum 25 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM D1621. 4. Water Absorption: 0.15 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D2842. 5. Square edges; board size of 24 x 96 or 48 x 96 inches by thickness indicated. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Furnish all accessories, not specifically described but required for a complete installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify adjacent materials are secure, properly spaced, dry, and ready to receive installation. B. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verity that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. 07212-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 07212 - RIGID BOARD INSULATION I C. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. I3.2 PERIMETER INSULATION A. Use extruded polystyrene regular board as perimeter ins± lation. B. Place perimeter insulation as indicated. Joints shall be tightly butted. C. Secure the insulation in position sufficiently to hold the insulation in place against retaining walls, prior to and during backfill operations. Do not damage dampproofing system. D. Install polystyrene perimeter insulation over vapor barrier and capillary break as detailed, prior to installation of slab on grade. END OF SECTION 0 07212-2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 07541 — MECHANICALLY ATTACHED THERMOPLASTIC ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Mechanically fastened thermoplastic membrane roofing system. 2. Roof insulation and cover board. B. Related Sections: 1. 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight; do not permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure. B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing membrane manufacturer based on testing and field experience. C. Performance: Roofing system shall conform to the following: 1. Wind Uplift: Factory Mutual 1-90 or as otherwise required by the jurisdictional code authorities. 2. Fire: Underwriter's Laboratory Class B. 3. Thermal: System shall have a maximum thermal conductance of C = .033 Btuh, averaged over all surfaces to which it is applied. D. Code Compliance: 1. Contractor shall comply with the local code requirements for determination of wind design. 2. Contractor shall obtain the manufacturer's engineered design of the roofing system for the project location. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Division 1. B. Product Data: For each type of product and component proposed, including membrane, insulation, fasteners, and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Details for base flashings, membrane terminations, and penetration details. 2. Tapered insulation patterns, including slopes, insulation thickness, cricket layouts. 3. Insulation fastening patterns. 4. Traffic walkway layouts. D. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system. 2. Guarantee Draft: Concurrent with initial product data submittal, submit a draft of roof guarantee. 3. Manufacturer's installation specifications. 07541-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 07541 — MECHANICALLY ATTACHED THERMOPLASTIC ROOFING E. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals. 2. Warranties: Submit specified warranties. 3. Inspection Report:, Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed roofing' installation. F. Design and Certification: 1. Manufacturer's engineered calculations and design for installation of specified system at project location. 2. Manufacturer's certification that submitted installation design conforms to the locally enforced building code. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's warranty. B. Source Limitations: Obtain components for membrane roofing system from or approved by roofing membrane manufacturer. C. Pre -Installation Meeting: 1. Prior to ordering materials and starting the work of this Section administer a pre -roofing meeting. 2. Require in attendance the following parties: a. Owner b. Architect c. General Contractor d. Roofing installer e. Sheet metal installer f. Mechanical installer. g. Roofing manufacturer's representative 3. Agenda: Review all procedures, details, and sequence of construction. Discuss and determine responsibility for protection of the work during and after construction, and subsequent maintenance of the roofing system. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE; AND HANDLING A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. 07541-2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 07541 — MECHANICALLY ATTACHED THERMOPLASTIC ROOFING 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Guarantee: Prior to acceptance of work, furnish manufacturer's written 10 year no dollar limit guarantee executed to the Owner. Guarantee shall include workmanship and materials, and shall cover roofing, flashing, and insulation. Guarantee shall be a "full system guarantee" and include all elements of the roofing assembly. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 THERMOPLASTIC ROOFING MEMBRANE ' A. Fabric -Reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin or Ethylene Propylene Sheet: Uniform, flexible sheet formed from a thermoplastic polyolefin, internally fabric or scrim reinforced, and as follows: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements indicated, the following are acceptable manufacturers of the roofing assembly; no substitutions. a. Stevens Roofing Systems; Div. of JPS Elastomerics. b. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. c. Firestone Building Products 2. Thickness: 60 mils nominal. 3. Exposed Face Color: White. 4. Physical Properties: a. Breaking Strength: 225 IV; ASTM D 751, grab method. b. Elongation at Break: 15 percent; ASTM D 751. c. Tearing Strength: 55 Ibf minimum; ASTM D 751, Procedure B. d. Brittleness Point: Minus 22 deg F. e. Ozone Resistance: No cracks after sample, wrapped around a 3-inch diameter mandrel, is exposed for 166 hours to a temperature of 104 deg F and an ozone level of 100 pphm; ASTM D 1149. f. Resistance to Heat Aging: 90 percent minimum retention of breaking strength, elongation at break, and tearing strength after 166 hours at 240 deg F; ASTM D 573. g. Water Absorption: Less than 4 percent mass change after 166 hours' immersion at 158 deg F; ASTM D 471. h. Linear Dimension Change: Plus or minus 2 percent; ASTM D 1204. 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. General: 1. Accessory materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing. 2. Liquid -type accessory materials shall meet VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced thermoplastic polyolefin or ethylene propylene sheet flashing, 55 mils thick, minimum, of same color as sheet membrane. C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard solvent based bonding adhesive for membrane, and solvent -based bonding adhesive for base flashings. D. Cut Edge Sealant: Manufacturer's standard solvent based caulk to seal cut edges. E. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's recommended slip sheet, of type required for application. F. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard predrilled stainless -steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors. G. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard aluminum -zinc -alloy -coated or zinc -coated steel sheet, approximately 1 inch (25 mm) wide by 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick, prepunched. 07541-3 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 07541 — MECHANICALLY ATTACHED THERMOPLASTIC ROOFING H. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion -resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer. I. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T joint covers, termination reglets, cover strips, seam cleaners, and other accessories. 2.3 ROOF INSULATION A. One of the following, as standard with roofing manufacturer: 1. Molded -Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578 Type II, 1.35-Ib/cu. ft. minimum density. 2. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: a. Closed -cell, HCFC-free, with fiberglass facers on both sides. b. Calculations for thickness shall be based on thermal resistance values not to exceed an R- value of 5.6 per inch (conductivity k=0.18) for polyisocyanurate insulation. B. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory -tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. 2.4 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. Except as specified herein, provide roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing. B. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion -resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. C. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass -mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/2 inch thick; Dens -Deck" by Georgia-Pacific Corporation. Fiberboard is not acceptable. 2.5 WALKWAYS A. Flexible Walkways: Factory -formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip -resisting, surface -textured walkway rolls, approximately 3/16 inch thick, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Carefully examine substrate and adjacent construction, and verity that conditions are suitable for installation of the work as indicated and specified. Inspection shall ascertain that: 1. All surfaces to be covered by roofing are properly pitched to drain, suitable for installation of roofing system free from susceptibility to puddling. 2. Work of other trades is complete, including installation of blocking and grounds, vents, drains, curbs, and other projections. 3. Substrate surface is clean and free from lumps, foreign matter, surface spalling or flaking, and excessive amounts of dust. 4. Penetrations through the roof deck are properly configured and are a minimum of 16 inches between their closest edges. 5. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof drains are securely clamped in place. 6. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation. 07541-4 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 07541 — MECHANICALLY ATTACHED THERMOPLASTIC ROOFING 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections. B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof -drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast. C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. 3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. B. Comply with membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. D. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2 inches or greater, install 2 or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. E. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water. F. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation. G. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations. H. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board -type roof insulation to deck type. Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. I. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Stagger joints from joints in insulation below a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck. Fasten to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. 3.4 MECHANICALLY FASTENED ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install roofing membrane over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing membrane and allow to relax before installing. B. Accurately align roofing membranes and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. C. Mechanically or adhesively fasten roofing membrane securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing. D. Apply roofing membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible. E. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing membrane, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofing membrane according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. 1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of roofing membrane. 2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair seam sample areas. 07541-5 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 07541 — MECHANICALLY ATTACHED THERMOPLASTIC ROOFING 3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing membrane that does not meet requirements. F. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal roofing membrane in place with clamping ring. G. In -Splice Attachment: Secure one edge of roofing membrane using fastening plates or metal battens centered within membrane splice and mechanically fasten roofing membrane to roof deck. Field - splice seam. 3.5 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Apply solvent -based bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing. C. Flash penetrations and field -formed inside and outside corners with sheet flashing. D. Clean seam areas and overlap and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation. E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars. 3.6 WALKWAY INSTALLATION A. Install walkway products in locations indicated. B. Heat weld to substrate or adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. C. Cut rolls into minimum 4 foot to maximum 8 foot lengths and install pads with approximately 1 inch between sections. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform roof tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect. 1. Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection. C. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.8 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. END OF SECTION 07541-6 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sheet metal flashing and trim not provided in other Sections. 2. Requirements for flashing and sheet metal provided in other Sections. B. Related Sections: 1. 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and nailers. 2. 07541 — Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing. 3. 08415 - Aluminum Storefronts and Windows: Flashing provided as part of the window system. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. A167 - Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. 2. A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. 3. B32 - Solder Metal B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, latest Edition. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide flashing and trim systems to prevent water leakage to the building interior. B. Fastening systems shall allow for the thermal movement of the materials without buckling, loosening, and leakage. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Division 1. B. Samples: Submit three samples representative of finish and color of flashing materials. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate material, profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, materials, gages, fastening methods, and installation details. D. Product Data: Catalog cuts and installation instructions for manufactured products. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator: Company specializing in sheet metal flashing work with 5 years minimum experience. B. Unless indicated or specified otherwise, perform work in accordance with the recommendations of SMACNA. C. Pre -Installation Conference: Attend pre -installation conference as specified in Section 07514. 1.6 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store products under provisions of Division 1 07620-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM B. Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. C. Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discoloration, staining, or damage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET MATERIALS A. Prefinished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A525, G90; 24 gage core steel, factory prefinished with 70% resin Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 fluorocarbon coating; custom (non -exotic) color as selected by the Architect from coil coater's full line. B. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A525, G90; 24 gage core steel. C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A167; Type 302 or 304. D. Lead Sheet: 4 psf. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Fastener: Galvanized steel or stainless steel with soft neoprene washers at exposed fasteners. Finish exposed fasteners same as flashing metal. B. Sealant: Butyl rubber type; one of the following: 1. Curtain Wall Sealant, by Tremco; 2. Adcoseal BP-400, by Adco Products, Inc. C. Epoxy/Polyurethane Shop Finish Materials: 1. Epoxy Primer: Tnemec Series 69 Epoxoline II", Carboline 888, Ameron "Amercoat 385," or approved. 2. Urethane Finish Coats: Tnemec Series 75 "Endura-Shield III" Acrylic Polyurethane Enamel, Carboline "D833," Ameron "Amercoat 450SA," or approved; semi -gloss or satin sheen; custom colors as selected by the Architect. D. Solder: ASTM B32 E. Cold Galvanizing Compound: ZRC Products Company "Cold Galvanizing Compound," or approved product meeting the requirements of FS DOD-P-21035. F. Flexible Flashing: W. R. Grace Company; "Vycor Ultra". 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Shop fabricate all flashing and sheet metal. 2. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work. 3. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. 4. Fabricate cleats and starter strips of same material as sheet; interlockable with sheet; continuous. 5. Form pieces in longest practical lengths, except as limited by expansion joint requirements. 6. Non -Moving Joints: a. Shop fabricate to the greatest practical extent. b. Solder all non-moving shop fabricated joints in steel and stainless steel flashing. c. Prefinished Galvanized Steel: Lap joints 1 inch, minimum; accurately cut and fit as necessary to maintain profile; embed contact surfaces in sealant; rivet with stainless steel or color matched coated steel pop rivets at 3 to 4 inches o.c. 7. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. 8. Shop fabricate corners with minimum 18 inch long legs. 07620-2 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 9. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip. 10. Form seams lapped in the direction of water flow. B. Fabricate all flashing to detail and as specified below. Use minimum 24 gage prefinished galvanized steel sheet unless indicated or specified otherwise. 1. Parapet Caps (Copings): 22 gage; joints in accordance with SMACNA Table 3-1; J5, or J9 through J12. 2. Scuppers: 20 gage stainless steel sheet; soldered joints; dull finish. 3. Conductor Heads: Figure 1-25F. 4. Downspouts: Prefinished galvanized steel; SMACNA Figure 1-32; 3" x 4" rectangular (Figure 1- 32B). 5. Counterflashing and Receivers: Removable type; SMACNA Fig 4-2 snaplock configuration; shop fabricated corners; prefinished or shop finished. 6. Roof Penetration Flashing: a. Framing Elements: SMACNA Fig 4-15. b. Piping and Conduit: SMACNA Fig 4-14, except flexible boot type flashing may be used. 7. Embedded Flashing: Fabricate embedded flashing with provisions for removable counter flashing (SMACNA Figure 4-2 snaplock configuration; shop fabricated corners). Fabricate all receivers and flashings which are built into brick veneer, precast concrete, and other similar construction, of 24 gage stainless steel. Fully exposed and removable counter flashing which is connected to embedded flashing may be 24 gage prefinished sheet. Furnish embedded flashing to the appropriate installers for installation as a part of their Work. C. Shop Finish; Polyurethane Special Finish: 1. Prepare surfaces in accordance the coating manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Primer: Spray apply in accordance with manufacturer's current printed instructions, 2.5 to 3 mils over unprimed galvanized surfaces. 3. Finish: Spray, brush, or roller apply in accordance with manufacturer's current printed instructions to finish film thickness of 2.5 to 4 mils finish film thickness. 4. Locations: Provide at locations where, because of gage or fabrication method, prefinished metal is not available. Use prefinished material in all other locations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Coordinate and sequence flashing installation with the work of other sections. B. Verify reglets, curbs, nailing strips, roof membrane, and other related construction are sufficiently complete to begin the work of this section. C. Beginning installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install starter and edge strips, and continuous cleats before starting installation. B. Parapet Cap Fastening: 1. Secure flashings using continuous cleats whenever possible. Use exposed fasteners only at the backside of copings, and at other locations not exposed to public view, unless otherwise approved by the Architect. 2. Exposed fasteners shall be gasketed and placed at 8 inches on center through slotted holes. 3. For nailing into wood, use barbed roofing nails, 1-1/4 inches long by eleven gage. C. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. D. Insert flashings into receivers to form tight fit. 07620-3 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM E. Install flashings with provision for plus or minus 1/16 inch thermal movement at each end; provide expansion joints at 12'-0" o.c., maximum. 3.3 FIELD TESTING A. Upon request of the Architect, demonstrate that installation is completely watertight by hosing with water as directed. END OF SECTION 07620-4 01/18/06 , WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 07724 - ROOF HATCH PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Roof access hatch. B. Related Sections 1. 06100 -Rough Carpentry: Wood curbs. 2. 07541 — Mechanically Attached Thermoplastic Roofing: Coordination. 3. 09900 - Painting: Painting of preprimed accessories. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: No substitute products will be considered. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ROOF ACCESS HATCH A. Manufacturer: The Bilco Company, or Milcor, Inc. B. Type: Bilco "S-20" or Milcor "M-1." C. Size, Configuration: 30 x 36 inch nominal size, single leaf type. D. Curb: 14 gage galvanized steel with 1 inch rigid insulation; integral cap flashing to receive roof flashing system; extended flange for mounting. E. Cover: 14 gage galvanized steel with minimum one inch glass fiber insulation retained by inner liner. Continuous gasket to provide weatherproof seal. F. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard manually operated'type with compression spring or torsion bar counterbalance, positive snap latch with turn handles inside and out and padlock hasps; automatic hold -open arm with grip handle for easy release. G. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard heavy duty zinc -plated pintle type. H. Safety Pole: Telescoping post as safety extension to roof ladder; Bilco "LadderUp" or similar. I. Provide for removal of condensation. J. Provide neoprene or closed cell compression weather seal and weathertight assembly. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that deck openings, supports, and other items affecting the work of this Section are complete and positioned correctly. B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 07724-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 07724 - ROOF HATCH 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as indicated. Coordinate with concrete roof insulation system, built-up roofing, flashing, and other trades as necessary to ensure secure and watertight installation. END OF SECTION 07724-2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cleaning and preparation of joint surfaces. 2. Sealant and backing materials. B. Related Sections: 1. 03001 - Concrete: Expansion joints. 2. 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Sealants provided as part of flashing and sheet metal work. 3. 08415 - Aluminum Storefronts and Entrances. 4. 09250 - Gypsum Board: Control joints. 5. 09300 - Tile: Expansion joints in tile fields to receive sealant. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 01600. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): C1193 - Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Division 1. 1. Product Literature for each material used. 2. Manufacturer's surface preparation and installation instructions. 3. Samples: a. Submit cured samples of each sealant type and color proposed for the work. b. For each sealant type indicated for "color as selected," or for which no color is indicated, submit manufacturer's standard color card indicating available stock colors for entire line of sealants of each type. c. For custom colors, request color selection from the Architect prior to sample submittal. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installers: Use only skilled workmen specially trained in the techniques of sealing, and familiar with the published recommendations of the manufacturers of the sealants being used. B. Verify that sealants are compatible with the substrates and accessory materials provided under other Sections. Notify Architect of evidence of incompatibility. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Install and protect installed sealants under conditions recommended by the manufacturer and as follows: 1. Do not apply sealant when ambient temperatures are below 40 degrees F, or expected to fall below 40 degrees F before sealant cure is complete. 2. Do not apply sealant to substrates or accessories that are moist. 07920-1 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SEALANTS A. Type P - Multi -Component Polyurethane, Non -Sag Type: ASTM C920, Type M, grade NS, Class 25; Tremco "Dymeric," Bostik "Chem -Calk 500," Pecora "Dynatrol II," Sonneborn "Sonalastic NP-2," PRC Permapol RC-2," or approved. B. Type S - Neutral Cure Silicone Sealant: Dow Corning 790 Silicone Building Sealant," Dow Corning 795 Silicone Structural Glazing and Weatherproofing Sealant," or Pecora "890 Architectural Silicone Sealant." C. Type PT - Polyurethane Traffic Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade P, class 25; Tremco "THC 901", Sonneborn "Sonolastic SL 1," Pecora "Urexpan NR-201", or approved. D. Type PTNS: ASTM C920, Type M, grade NS, Class 25; Pecora "Dynatred," Tremco "HPL," or approved; custom colors to match the Architect's samples. E. Type A - Single Component Acrylic Sealant: ASTM C834; Tremco "Acrylic Latex Caulk", Pecora "AC- 20", Sonneborn "Sonolac" or approved. F. Type SM Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant: USDA Approved; Dow Corning 786," GE "Sanitary Sealant," or approved; color as scheduled. 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Primer: Non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner: Non -corrosive and non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Filler: Closed cell polyethylene foam; round profile; thickness approximately 130% of joint width. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. E. Precompressed prefaced self-adhesive open cell polyurethane foam tape; "Backerseal" by Emseal Joint Systems, Ltd., or approved. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. C. Verify joint dimensions and conditions are acceptable to receive the work of this Section. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and prepare joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove any loose materials and other foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. B. Apply masking tightly around joints to protect adjacent surfaces from excess sealant. C. Prime as required for proper bond to substrate materials. 07920-2 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS D. Place backing materials to achieve proper sealant width/depth ratios and to prevent sealant sag. Use bond breaker where required. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with ASTM C1193, unless specified otherwise or recommended otherwise by the sealant manufacturer. B. Sealant beads shall have a sectional width to depth ratio of 2 to 1, except no bead shall have a depth greater than 3/4 inch. Install Type PTNS sealant full depth in tile expansion joints with no joint filler rod. C. Apply sealant within recommended temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within recommended temperature ranges. D. Tool joints concave, unless indicated otherwise. Finish free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. 3.4 CLEANUP A. Clean adjacent surfaces free of excess sealant as the work progresses. Use cleaning agents recommended by the sealant manufacturer. B. Upon completion, remove and dispose of masking. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect sealant in joints subject to dirt, moisture, and traffic during the sealant curing process. Protection shall be able to resist traffic while remaining securely in position. 3.6 SCHEDULE A. Type P: Provide at all exterior joints, unless specified otherwise; color (similar to brick mortar or portland cement plaster color) as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standard line. B. Type S: Provide at all exterior joints associated with aluminum storefront [and window ]framing; color as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standard line. C. Type PT: Provide at all exterior and interior horizontal joints subject to traffic and abrasion, unless specified otherwise; standard colors as selected. D. [Type PTNS]: Provide at all expansion joints in tile; custom colors to match grout samples submitted by the tile installer. E. Type A: Provide at all interior joints, unless specified otherwise; standard colors to match adjacent construction. F. Type SM: Provide translucent sealant at joints around countertops in Breakroom and toilet rooms; provide white at joints around plumbing fixtures. END OF SECTION 07920-3 01/18/06 0 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 08115 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rolled steel doors and frames. 2. Knock down metal frames B. Related Sections: 1. 08710 - Door Hardware. 2. 08730 - Door and Hardware Installation: Hardware locations. 3. 08800 - Glazing: Glass for glazed openings. 4. 09900 - Painting: Field painting of doors and frames. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 01600. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Steel Door Institute (SDI) 1. SDI-100 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 2. SDI-105 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A366 - Specification for Steel, Carbon, Cold Rolled Sheet Commercial Quality. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of SDI-100. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01330. B. Submit shop drawings and product data. Indicate frame configuration, anchor types and spacings, location of cutouts for hardware, reinforcement, and finish. Indicate door elevations, internal reinforcement, closure method, and reinforcing. C. Submit manufacturer's published literature for doors and frames. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. In accordance with Section 01600. B. Protect doors and frames with resilient packaging. C. Store on -site to permit ventilation. 08115-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 08115 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Members of the Steel Door Institute and of the National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturer's, subject to compliance with the specified requirements. 2.2 DOORS A. SDI-100, Type II, Style 3; (flush design). B. Minimum 18 gage face sheets for interior doors; minimum 16 gage face sheets for exterior doors. C. Fabricate face sheet from ASTM A366 steel sheet. D. Top and bottom shall be closed with 16 gage steel channels; flush top. E. Core: Polystyrene or polyurethane foam core. 2.3 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. Design: Double rabbet, unless indicated otherwise; fully welded. B. Gages: 1. Exterior Frames: Minimum 14 gage. 2. Interior Frames: Minimum 16 gage for frames of door openings up to and including 4 feet in width; 14 gage for frames greater than 4 feet in width. 2.4 KNOCK DOWN METAL FRAMES A. Prefinished Steel Door frames by Timely, Pacoima, CA (818-896-3094). B. Fabrication: 1. Frames: ASTM A366; cold rolled sheet steel; 18 gage minimum. 2. Casings: Steel to match frame. 3. Roll or break form frame to the shapes indicated. If not otherwise indicated, supply Timely TA-8 standard steel casing. 4. Size frame as required to fit wall construction indicated with additional clearance as required to accommodate tile waterproof membrane installed at the wall base. 5. Finish: Factory applied baked -on polyester coatings; custom color to match paint P-5. C. Provide 14 gage multi -purpose reinforcing brackets to receive field installed door hardware. D. Provide knock -down metal frames at interior doors only. At Contractor's option, welded frames may be used at interior openings. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate frames as one piece welded units to the shapes indicated. B. Shop fabricate units to accommodate the hardware specified in Section 08710. C. Fabricate frames and doors with hardware reinforcement plates welded in place. Reinforce for butts, closers, and other similar moving hardware items. Reinforcing shall be minimum 3/16 inch steel plate. Reinforce each butt with minimum 10-1/2 x 1-1/2 inch plate on hinge sides of both door and frame. Reinforce for closers the full width of the door. D. Prepare frame for silencers; three single rubber silencers for single doors, and mullions of double doors, on strike side, and two single silencers on frame head at double doors without mullions. E. Close top edge of exterior door flush with inverted steel channel closure. Seal joints watertight. 08115-2 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 08115 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES F. Attach fire rated label to each frame and door unit. G. Finish at Exterior Units: 0.60 oz/sq ft. galvanized, with modified epoxy ester baked -on primer to receive urethane coating specified in Section 09900. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of.the work. B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF FRAMES A. Install hollow metal frames in accordance with SDI-105 and in accordance with labeling requirements. B. Install knock -down frames in strict compliance with manufacturer's printed instructions. C. Coordinate with wall construction for anchor placement. D. Installation Tolerances: 1. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner. 2. Install doors plumb and level to 1/16 inch in 7 feet. E. Door and hardware installation is specified in Section 08730. END OF SECTION 08115-3 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 08210 - WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wood doors. 2. Door accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. 08115 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Steel frames. 2. 08710 - Door Hardware. 3. 08730 - Door and Hardware Installation. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI): Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, current edition. B. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and windows. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Division 1. B. Submit shop drawings and product data. Indicate door elevations, stile and rail reinforcement, internal blocking for hardware attachment. C. Submit two 8 x 10 inch samples of each transparent door finish applied to specified veneer. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. In accordance with Division 1. B. Package, deliver, and store doors in accordance with AWI requirements. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's standard warranty under provisions of Division 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DOORS A. Solid Core Flush Doors: 1. AWI Section 1300, Premium grade. 2. Core: Solid particle board core, unless required otherwise for fire labeling requirements. 3. AWI PC-5 or PC-7 (5 or 7 ply construction). 4. Face Veneer: As scheduled: a. Transparent Finish Veneer: Provide AWI Grade I Red Oak, plain sliced, book matched; minimum 1/50". b. Paint Grade Veneer: Medium density overlay or paint grade Birch. 5. 1-3/4 inch thick, unless scheduled otherwise. 6. At transparent finish doors, vertical edges shall be wood to match face veneer. 08210-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 08210 - WOOD DOORS 2.2 FABRICATION A. Fabricate doors to the configurations indicated, in accordance with the AWI standards specified, and to fire rated labeling requirements. B. Bond stiles and rails to solid core with hot melt or RF cured adhesive. C. Where matching hardwood edges are required, provide minimum 1/2 inch thick continuous edge strips, finger joints not permitted. D. Bevel latch edge 1/8 inch in 2 inches on all single acting doors. E. Prefit and premachine doors and frames in accordance with AWI 1300-S-6. Premachine for hardware specified in Section 08710, and locate as specified in Section 08730. F. Transparent Finish: Factory prefinished as scheduled to match Architect's sample; AWI Quality Standards Section 1500 Finishing Standards, Polyurethane Conversion Varnish or Acrylated UV Curable Urethane. G. Flush Door Blocking: For flush doors, provide solid lock blocks and special blocking as required for the hardware components specified elsewhere. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation of wood doors is specified in Section 08730. END OF SECTION 08210-2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 08310 -ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire resistive rated and non -rated access doors and frames and accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. 09111 - Lightgage Metal Support Framing: Framing of openings for access doors. 2. 09250 - Gypsum Board: Finishes for concealed access doors. 3. 09900 - Painting: Field paint finish. 4. 10999 - Miscellaneous Specialties: Exterior metal access doors. 5. Divisions 15 and 16: Access door requirements. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Division 1. B. Submit product data. Include sizes, types, finishes, scheduled locations, and details of adjoining work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Where an access door is required in fire rated construction, the access door assembly shall be labeled by Underwriter's Laboratory, Warnocke Hersey, or any other testing laboratory approved by the local code authorities, to meet the hourly fire resistance rating of the construction in which the access door is installed. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL AND CEILING ACCESS DOORS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Milcor LP. (Lima OH; 800-441-6899). 2. Karp Associates, Inc. (Maspeth NY;718-784-2105). 3. MM Systems Corporation (Tucker GA; 770-938-7570). 4. Nystrom Products Co. (Minneapolis MN; 612-781-7850). 5. JL Industries (Bloomington, MN; 612-835-6850) B. Door Types: 1. Non Rated Concealed Drywall Access Door: a. Recessed type design. b. Minimum 13 gage frame; minimum 16 gage door panel recessed to receive drywall. c. Integral attachment flange and drywall bead for flush installation. d. Fully concealed pivot rod hinge. e. Latches: Screw driver operated cam latch. C. Sizes: 12" x 12" size for hand access, 22" x 22" size for man entry, unless indicated otherwise. D. Finish: Galvanized steel with wiped coat finish; prime units with manufacturer's standard primer to receive paint coatings as specified in Section 09900. 08310-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 08310 - ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. C. Verify rough openings for door and frame are correctly sized and located. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install access doors of sizes and in locations as indicated. Provide access doors'for access to balancing and fire dampers, trap primers, valves, fans, terminal units, and other equipment requiring periodic inspection through finished walls and ceilings, whether indicated or not. Coordinate access requirements with other trades. B. Provide concealed access doors at public locations such as lobby and platform areas. C. Install frames plumb and level in wall and ceiling openings, with plane of door surface in accurate alignment with plane of wall or ceiling surface. D. Secure rigidly in place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 08310-2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 08415 - ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS AND ENTRANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Exterior aluminum framed hurricane resistant storefront and entry systems. 2. Exterior aluminum framed hurricane resistant windows. 3. Interior aluminum framed storefront systems. 4. Aluminum framed glass doors. B. Related Sections: 1. 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Support angles. 2. 07920 -Joint Sealants: Perimeter joint fillers. 3. 08710 - Door Hardware: Door hardware other than that specified in this Section; templates. 4. 08730 - Door and Hardware Installation: Installation of aluminum door hardware. 5. 08800 - Glazing: Glass and glazing C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate. 2. B221 - Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes. 3. E283 - Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors. 4. E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. B. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer's Association (AAMA). 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System Description: 1. Performance Requirements - Exterior Aluminum Window and Storefront System: Provide aluminum storefront systems that comply with performance requirements indicated, as demonstrated by testing manufacturers assemblies in accordance with South Florida Building Code Protocol PA 201-94, PA 202-94 and PA 203-94. a. Air Infiltration: Completed storefront systems shall have 0.02 CFM/FT2 (0.37 m3/h•m2) maximum allowable infiltration when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283-91 at differential static pressure of 6.24 psf (299 Pa). b. Water Infiltration: No uncontrolled water other than condensation on indoor face of any component when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331-93 at test pressure differential of 12 psf (575 Pa). Water test to be performed immediately after design pressure test. c. Wind Loads: Completed storefront system shall withstand wind pressure loads normal to wall plane indicated on the Drawings. d. Deflection: Maximum allowable deflection in any member when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330-90 with allowable stress in accordance with AAMA Specifications for Aluminum Structures. 1) Without Horizontals: U175 or 3/4" (19.1mm) maximum. 2) With Horizontals: U175 or U240 + 1/4" (6.4mm) for spans greater than 13'-6" (4.1m) but less than 40'-0" (12.2m). e. Thermal Movement: Provide for thermal movement caused by 180 degrees F. (82.2 degrees C.) surface temperature, without causing buckling stresses on glass, joint seal 08415-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 08415 - ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS AND ENTRANCES failure, undue stress on structural elements, damaging loads on fasteners, reduction of performance, or detrimental effects. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Division 1. B. Shop Drawings: Include wall opening dimensions, component dimensions, tolerances required, anchorages and fasteners, and installation details. C. Samples: Submit two samples indicating color and finish. D. Submit either of the following to verify that the proposed systems meet the structural performance requirements specified. 1. Shop drawings signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State where the project is located. 2. Certified test report data verifying structural compliance of systems similar to those to be provided. E. Submit verification that the systems have been tested to meet the performance requirements specified. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Code Requirements: 1. Aluminum framed glazing systems shall be tested assemblies meeting the requirements of the Florida Building Code, including Protocol PA 201 for Large Missile Impact. 2. Provide all test reports, certifications, calculations, Notices of Acceptance (NOA), labels, and other documentation as required to obtain approval of the installation. B. Installers: Under the direct supervision of the manufacturer of the storefront system. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer capable of providing field service representation during construction, approving acceptable installer and approving application method. D. Design: Structural design of the exterior storefront systems shall be by a Structural Engineer Licensed to practice in the State of where the Project is located. E. All materials shall conform to the Metal Curtain wall Guide Specifications as published by the Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer's Association. 1.6 MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY A. Furnish five year written warranty executed to the Owner, from the manufacturer of the storefront system, against defects in materials and workmanship, in accordance with Division 1. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. In accordance with Division 1. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Products of by YKK AP America, Inc, Austell, GA (678-838-6000) are listed as the standard for approval. Similar and equal products by Kawneer may be used subject to the specified requirements.. 08415-2 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 08415 - ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS AND ENTRANCES 2.2 MATERIALS: A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221; 6063 T5 alloy and temper. B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM 8209; 5005-H32 alloy, or approved. C. Glass: As specified in Section 08800. D. Glazing Materials: 1. Exterior Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard silicone compatible EPDM glazing gaskets to inhibit water infiltration at the exterior. 2. Interior Glazing Sealant: Dow Corning 995 Structural Silicone Adhesive with fixed stops at the interior. 3. Spacers: Silicone. E. Fasteners: ASTM A164; aluminum, stainless steel, or zinc plated steel. F. Flexible Flashing: 1. W.R. Grace Wycor Plus.". 2. Monsey Bakor "Blueskin" 40 mil thickness. 3. DuPont Company "Tyvek FlexWrap" 2.3 EXTERIOR STOREFRONT, WINDOW, AND ENTRY SYSTEMS: A. Storefront Framing: YKK AP YHS 50 FI; Center set, exterior flush glazed; jambs and vertical mullions continuous; head, sill, intermediate horizontal attached by screw spline joinery. Continuous and wept sill flashing.. B. Aluminum Storefront Doors: YKK 35H Impact Resistant Heavy Duty Swing Doors; medium stile configuration; provide with special 10 inch high bottom rail.. C. Door Hardware: Provide products similar to the ones listed below. 1. Hinges: (1-1/2 to 2) pair of Grade 1 mortise butt hinges per leaf; ball bearing; 4'/z" x 4" brass with US26D or stainless steel with US32D finish. 2. Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard. D. At window openings in framed walls, provide factory or field -attached "nailing" or flashing flanges at jamb and sill. 2.4 INTERIOR STOREFRONT SYSTEM A. Acceptable Manufacturers: YKK, EFCO, Arcadia, or approved. B. Interior Storefront and Window Framing: Manufacturer's standard nominal 2" x 4" center -glazed non - thermally broken storefront framing system. C. Interior Doors: Extruded aluminum frame; medium stile. D. Door Hardware: hardware is specified in Section 08710. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate frames allowing for shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation. B. Rigidly fit joints and corners. Accurately fit and secure corners tight. Make comer joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof. Seal joints with sealant. C. Provide drainage holes to allow water to flow to exterior. D. Prepare components to receive anchorage devices. Fabricate anchorage items. 08415-3 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 08415 - ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS AND ENTRANCES E. Provide internal reinforcement in mullions with members to maintain rigidity. Provide reinforcing at all door strike jambs. F. Fabricate storefront system to accommodate hardware using templates furnished from Section 08710. G. Fabricate custom extrusions, closures, and sheet materials to the shapes indicated; fabricate for attachment with concealed fasteners to the greatest possible extent. H. Finish: .7 mil clear anodized finish, to AAMA AA-M31 C22A41. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Provide at all exposed aluminum surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify wall openings are ready to receive work of this Section. B. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions, prior to installation. Do not install units until such conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install frames, doors, and hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use anchorage devices to securely attach frame to structure. C. Align frames plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. D. Install aluminum flashings at head and sill. Finish to match storefront and windows. E. Perimeter sealant is provided under Section 07920. I F. Adjust hardware installed in this section for smooth operation. G. Protect aluminum from dissimilar materials with a coating of bituminous paint, a minimum 1 mil thickness of zinc chromate primer, plastic separator materials, or isolation tape. Keep isolation materials unexposed to view. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. After completion of all glazing and sealing work, hose test all glazed storefront and window systems. i B. All areas which exhibit water penetration to the inside of the building shall be repaired, resealed, and retested until watertightness can be demonstrated. END OF SECTION 08415-4 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Finish hardware items. B. Related Sections 1. 01770 - Closeout Procedures: Submittal of keys. 2. 08115 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 3. 08210 - Wood Doors. 4. 08730 - Door and Hardware Installation. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Make all submittals in accordance with Division 1 B. Schedules: Upon award of hardware contract, submit three copies of the finish hardware schedule, organized into "hardware sets" and indicating complete designation of every item required for each door or opening. List in vertical form. Architect's review of hardware schedules does not relieve Contractor's responsibility to fulfill project requirements in accordance with Contract Documents. C. Templates: Furnish hardware templates to door and frame fabricators, and hardware installers. Upon request, check shop drawings of such other work to confirm that adequate provisions will be made for the proper installation of hardware. D. Manufacturer's Data: Submit three copies of manufacturer's data for each item of finish hardware. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supplier: Finish hardware shall be supplied by recognized builders' hardware supplier who has been furnishing hardware in the same area as the project for a period of not less than two years. The supplier's organization shall include a member of the American Society of Architectural Hardware Consultants who is available at all reasonable times during the course of the work to meet with the Owner, Architect or Contractor for project hardware consultation. B. Installer: Finish hardware shall be installed only by experienced tradesmen in compliance with trade union jurisdictions, either at the door and frame fabrication plant or at the project site. C. Codes: 1. All finish hardware shall comply with applicable local and/or state current building codes. 2. Hardware for fire -rated openings shall also be in compliance with all fire building codes applicable to the district in which the building is located. Provide only hardware which has been tested and listed by UL for the types and sizes of doors required, and which complies with the requirements of the door and door frame labels. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver all hardware in manufacturers' original unopened undamaged packages, clearly identifying manufacturer, brand name, and contents. B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary. C. Mark each item of hardware as to description and location of installation in accordance with approved hardware schedule. D. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the finish on hardware before, during and after installation. 08710-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE 1.5 GUARANTEES A. In addition to required one year warranty under Conditions of the Contract, furnish 5-year unconditional guarantees for all door closers, under provisions of Division 1. 1.6 MAINTENANCE A. Factory representatives for door closers, exit bolts, and locksets shall be available during the construction to instruct the Contractor on the proper method of installation of their materials. They shall inspect and adjust their materials at the completion of the work, and supply proper maintenance manuals to the Owner. B. Furnish two (2) sets of special tools for installation and maintenance of hardware. Tools for maintenance and adjustments are to be delivered to the Owner upon completion of the work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HARDWARE A. Furnish hardware items as scheduled and specified. B. Except as listed in the following paragraphs, no substitutions of materials will be allowed unless approved by the Architect five days prior to bid opening. 2.2 FINISHES A. In general, unless otherwise indicated, finishes shall be satin chrome US26D. 2.3 KEYING A. General: Construction master -key all locksets and cylinder items; provide 12 construction masterkeys. B. Keying: Contractor shall be responsible for final keying, as follows: 1. Consult with Owners authorized representative and prepare detailed keying schedule accordingly. Owner's representative will coordinate keying requirements with authorized representative of Hardware Supplier. 2. Provide 50 keys, all keyed alike, numbered sequentially starting at "1". 3. Stamp "Do Not Duplicate" on all keys. 4. Stamp FC Number on all keys. Coordinate FC Number with Owners Project Director. 5. Keying at new ATM's where applicable is defined below. C. Consult with Owner's authorized representative and prepare detailed keying schedule accordingly. Owner's representative will coordinate keying requirements with authorized representative of Hardware Supplier. 2.4 DOOR HARDWARE A. Butts: 1. In the following paragraphs where Hager numbers are listed, equivalent items of Lawrence, McKinney Sales Company, or the Stanley Works may be supplied. 2. Exterior doors (outswing) 38" wide or less shall have Hager BB1191 butts, size 4 1/2 x 4 1/2. 3. Interior doors 38" wide or less shall have Hager BB1279 butts, size 4 1/2 x 4 1/2. 4. Provide butts on exterior doors with nonremovable pins (set screw in barrel, pin nonremovable when door is closed), and safety stud. 5. All doors shall have 3 butts, aluminum entrance doors shall have pivots. 6. Provide full threaded wood screws for wood doors and/or jambs. 7. Butt widths listed are minimum. Provide butts of wider throw to suit conditions for 1800 operation of doors, structural conditions permitting. 08710-2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE 8. Types: As indicated on the Drawings. B. Locksets, Deadlocks, Cylinders and Padlocks: 1. Manufacturer: a. Locks and Deadlocks - Schlage, Adams Rite, or approved. b. Cylinders and Padlocks - Schlage. 2. Provide new cylinder at each existing door that has deadlock or lockset. 3. Provide lock strikes with minimum projection to protect trim. 4. Provide wrought boxes for locksets and deadlocks. 5. Provide deadlocks with armored fronts. 6. Where ATM Drive -Through is indicated, provide cylinder to Owner's ATM vendor, with 30 keys keyed alike but separately from building keys. Keys shall be stamped "ATM" in addition to other requirements within this Section. 7. Function as indicated in hardware groups. 8. Dead bolts at exterior doors shall have a minimum throw of 1 inch and minimum embedment of 3/4 inch. 9. Types: As indicated on the Drawings. C. Electronic Hardware 1. Types: As indicated on the Drawings. D. Door Closers: 1. Manufacturers: a. Overhead closers: Corbin. b. Floor Closers: Rixson. 2. All overhead closers to be mounted on interior side of door. No thru bolts. 3. Provide mounting brackets and proper length arms to suit all conditions. Provide arm options as scheduled or recommended by manufacturer. Finish shall match locksets 4. Sizes shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. Closers shall have a 5-year unconditional guarantee. 5. Provide standard full covers at overhead closers; finish to match arms, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Closure Pressure: Set to 8.5 pounds for exterior doors and 5 Ibs for interior doors, per current requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act, unless otherwise required by local jurisdictional authorities. 7. Types: As indicated on the Drawings. E. Door Stops and Overhead Stops: 1. Manufacturer: a. Ives as scheduled. b. Rixson 2. Locate floor stops free from foot traffic. 3. Types: As indicated on the Drawings. F. Push/Pull Bars and Sets: 1. Types: As indicated on the Drawings. G. Weatherstrip, Thresholds, Door Bottom and Gaskets: 1. Manufacturer: Pemko Mfg. Co., or approved equal by Rixson. 2. Types: As indicated on the Drawings. H. Miscellaneous: 1. Provide silencers for all door jambs, 3 for single jambs and 4 for double jambs. 2. Types: As indicated on the Drawings. 2.5 HARDWARE GROUPS A. Furnish for each door the items scheduled within the designated hardware groups as shown on the Drawings. 08710-3 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation of hardware is specified in Section 08730. END OF SECTION 08710-4 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 08730 - DOOR AND HARDWARE INSTALLATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Installation of wood doors. 2. Installation of hardware specified in Section 08710. 3. Installation of aluminum and hollow steel doors in frames installed in other Sections. B. Related Sections 1. 08115 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 2. 08210 - Wood Doors. 3. 08415 - Aluminum Storefronts and Entrances. 4. 08710 - Door Hardware. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installers of doors and finish hardware shall be skilled mechanics experienced in this type of work. 1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not subject wood doors to abnormal heat, dryness, or humidity, or sudden changes thereof. Condition doors to average prevailing humidity prior to hanging. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 DOORS, FRAMES, AND HARDWARE A. Doors, frames and hardware are specified in other sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install doors at locations indicated with the hardware scheduled. 3.2 WOOD DOOR INSTALLATION A. Fit and prepare doors for installation in accordance with the door manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Install doors plumb and square. C. Fabricate for 1/8 inch clearance at head and each jamb, 1/8 inch between pairs of doors, 3/8 inch clearance from hard surface finish floor, 3/4 inch from hard surface beneath doors at openings indicated to receive carpeting, and 3/16 inch clearance above top of threshold. D. Install roses, kick plates, closers, and other surface mounted hardware only after door finishing is complete and finishes are completely cured. E. Closer arms shall be installed with screws of sufficient length to penetrate wall framing 3/4 inch, minimum. 3.3 HOLLOW STEEL DOOR INSTALLATION A. Fit hollow metal doors accurately to the respective frames, within clearances specified in SDI 100. 08730-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 08730 - DOOR AND HARDWARE INSTALLATION ' 3.4 FINISH HARDWARE INSTALLATION A. Installer shall receive delivery and unpack, tag, index, and file all keys. Keep hardware in a separate room under lock and key at the site until installation is made. B. Verify all dimensions and be responsible for the correct installation and fit of hardware at the locations indicated on the drawings and as specified. C. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. D. Wherever cutting and fitting are required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, install each item completely and then remove and store in a secure place during the finish application. After completion of the finishes, reinstall each item. Do not install surface -mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. E. Hardware Mounting Heights: Mounting heights are based on recommendations of the National Builders Hardware Association (NBHA). Generally, mount hardware units at the following locations on each door or door opening, except as otherwise indicated on the drawings or required to meet code and handicapped requirements. Verify any conflicts with location of other hardware for proper clearances for installation prior to cutting or milling for specified hardware. Notify Architect immediately if such conflicts are determined. 1. Latch and Locksets: 38 inches finish floor to center of knob. 2. Dead Locks: 52 inches finish floor to center of cylinder. 3. Emergency Exit Cross Bar: 36 inches from finish floor. 4. Top Hinge: 5 inches from top of door to top of hinge. 5. Bottom Hinge: 10 inches from finish floor to bottom of hinge. 6. Center Hinge: Equal distance between top and bottom hinges. 7. Multiple hinge locations shall be equally spaced between top and bottom hinge. 8. Wall Stops: Centerline of knob or point of first contact. 9. Thresholds: Mount at exterior doors such that slope breakpoint on threshold is at lead edge of door. Set in full bed of caulking material. 10. Closing: Mount for maximum degree of opening obtainable considering other hardware provided and opening conditions. Size closers for conditions and code requirements. 11. Trim/Protection: Kickplate shall be 2" LDW x height indicated. 12. Horizontal Push Bar: 36 inch from finish floor to center of bar. 13. Vertical Pull Bar: 36 inches to bottom of pull. 14. Other hardware items shall be located as recommended by NBHA, or as may be shown or required otherwise. 3.5 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation of function of every unit. Lubricate moving parts with graphite type lubricant unless otherwise recommended by the hardware manufacturer. Replace units which cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. 3.6 FINAL ADJUSTMENT A. Wherever hardware installation is made more than 1 month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make a final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space of area. Clean and relubricate operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment, spring power, back check, closing and latching speeds, and handicap requirements. B. Protect all items of finish hardware from damage until acceptance of the building. C. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper adjustment of hardware and hardware finishes during the final adjustment of hardware. END OF SECTION 08730-2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 08800 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Glass and glazing for aluminum windows. 2. Glass and glazing for aluminum entrance and storefront. B. Related Sections: 1. 08415 - Aluminum Storefronts and Entrances: Metal framing and glazing materials. 2. 08520 — Aluminum Windows. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1. 1.2 REFERENCES i A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass. 2. C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat Treated Flat Glass, Kind HS, Kind FT (Coated and Uncoated). 3. E773 - Test Method for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units. 4. E774 - Specifications for Sealed Insulating Glass Units. B. Glass Association of North America (GANA): "Glazing Manual."' C. American National Standard (ANSI): Z97.1 - Performance Specifications and Test Methods for Safety Glazing Materials in Buildings. D. International Conference of Building Officials - Uniform Building Code (UBC) - currently enforced edition. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Division 1. B. Warranty: Submit draft of manufacturer's and fabricator's warranty for Architect's review prior to glass ordering. C. Product Data: Submit product data on glass, glazing materials, and insulating glass system. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with all pertinent recommendations contained in the GANA "Glazing Manual." B. Code Requirements for Hurricane Resistant Projects: 1. Exterior glazing shall be a part of aluminum framed glazing systems which have been tested assemblies meeting the requirements of the Florida Building Code, including Protocol PA 201 for Large Missile Impact. 2. Provide all test reports, certifications, calculations, -Notices of Acceptance (NOA), labels, and other documentation as required to obtain approval of the installation. C. Qualifications of Glazers: Provide personnel thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills required, and at least one person completely familiar with the referenced standards and the requirements of this Work, who shall personally direct installation of work herein. 08800-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 08800 - GLAZING 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 1. B. Provide cushions at edges of glass to prevent impact damage during shipment and storage. C. Keep vacuum cups free from foreign material that could scratch glass. D. Comply with insulating unit fabricators requirements for limits on exposure to reduced barometric pressure during shipment. 1.6 WARRANTY I A. Submit warranties under provisions of Division 1 B. Insulating Glass Units: Furnish ten year manufacturer's warranty, including coverage of units for seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS A. Float or Plate Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I, class 1, clear, quality q3 glazing select. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene; 70-90 Shore A durometer hardness; 4 inches long x 1/4 high x width as required for application indicated. B. Glazing Sealant: Compatible with insulating glass seal. C. Opaque Film: Translucent Film: Madico Inc (Woburn MA 800/225-1926); MT-200-X-Gray (2 mil). 2.3 FABRICATION A. Insulating Glass Units: 1. Dual lite units fabricated from glass as scheduled; 1/2 inch nominal airspace. 2. Twin primary seals of polyisobutylene and secondary seal of silicone or polysulfide sealant. Outer seal shall be compatible with glazing system. 3. Spacer Bar: Mill finish aluminum; fill with desiccant; corners shall be partially miter cut and bent not cut through), or formed with corner keys ultrasonically soldered in place. 4. Certified through the Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGC) in accordance with ASTM E773 and E774; certified to level CBA. 5. Each piece shall bear certification number, date, and manufacturer's identification mark. 6. Assembly of insulating units shall be by a fabricator approved by the glass materials manufacturer. B. Tempered and Heat Strengthened Glass: 1. Tempered Glass: Glass which has been heat treated to strengthen glass in bending to not less than 4 times the annealed strength; free of "tong marks". Certified safety glass in accordance with ANSI Z97.1. 2. Heat Strengthened Glass: ASTM C1048; glass which has been heat treated to strengthen glass in bending to not less than 1.8 times annealed strength; free of tong marks. 3. Fabricate tempered and heat strengthened glass units so that principle distortion will be in the horizontal direction in the finished installation. 4. Unless otherwise approved by the building official, provide manufacturer's label on each light, indicating type and thickness of glass. 5. Comply with local jurisdictional authorities for identification and labeling of safety -glazing materials in hazardous locations subject to human impact loads. 08800-2 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 08800 - GLAZING C. Hurricane Resistant Laminated Glass Interlayer: SentryGlas® composite by DuPont, StormGuard by Solutia, or Saf-Glas'" by Security Impact Glass as required to meet the performance requirements. Thicknesses as required to meet the specified requirements. D. Low E Coating: PPG Industries, Pittsburgh, PA "Solarban 60"; Viracon, Owatonna MN "VE 1-2M;" or approved PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready for work of this Section. B. Beginning of installation constitutes acceptance of framing systems as within acceptable tolerances and suitable for retention of glazing materials. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal frame corner joints, and other leakage points with sealant. At insulating glass units the sealant shall be compatible with the seal of the unit. Do not plug weep holes. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant, unless otherwise recommended by the sealant manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Setting Blocks: Place setting blocks in frames for support of glass. Place at quarter points unless approved otherwise. B. Set glass tightly in position with proper clearances in accordance with the referenced standards. C. Perimeter glass clearances within setting frame shall be as recommended by GANA and as necessary to meet applicable requirements for wind and thermal expansion. D. Unless specified otherwise, glaze units with gaskets furnished with the framing systems specified in other sections. E. Adjust glazing materials to form a uniform sightline. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean excess glazing materials from adjacent finished surfaces. B. Remove labels after work is completed. 3.5 SCHEDULE A. Provide the following glass types in locations as indicated on the Drawings: B. TYPE 1: 1. Clear 1/4 inch thick glass. Provide tempered where indicated and specified. 2. All interior glazing shall be TYPE 1 unless otherwise indicated. C. TYPE 2: All new exterior storefront glazing unless indicated otherwise: 1. Insulating glass unit with air space between two panes of glass as follows: a. Exterior Pane: Clear heat strengthened or tempered glass with low a coating on #2 surface. b. Interior Pane: Clear hurricane resistant laminated glass to meet wind and hurricane load requirements 08800-3 01/18/06 I WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD i SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 08800 - GLAZING B 11 D. TYPE 3: Not Used. E. TYPE 4: Not Used. F. TYPE 5: One layer of opaque film applied to new glazing units as indicated, on interior surface of glazing. G. Provide tempered safety glass when located in the following areas: 1. Glass whose nearest vertical edge is within 24 inches of a door opening, and whose bottom edge is less than 60 inches above the floor or walking surface. 2. Glass units whose bottom edge is within 18 inches of a floor or walking surface within 36 inches of the glass unit. END OF SECTION 088004 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09111 - LIGHTGAGE METAL SUPPORT FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Partition framing. 2. Ceiling and soffit framing. 3. Furring. B. Related Sections: 1. 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing: Exterior framing. 2. 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Partial height wall bracing. 3. 06100 -Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking. - 4. 07211 - Batt and Blanket Insulation: Insulation between framing members. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. C645 - Non-Loadbearing Steel Studs, Runners, and Rigid Furring Channels. 2. C754 - Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw -Attached Gypsum Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water -Resistant Backing Board. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Structural Design: 1. Select framing systems, gages, supports, bracing, and connections as necessary to meet the structural requirements specified. 2. Partition framing shall conform to the widths indicated, unless approved otherwise. Provide thicker gages and increased stud spacing as necessary to meet the design requirements. B. Design Loads: 1. Interior Ceiling Assemblies: 5 pounds per square foot uniform live load, plus dead loads. 2. Interior Partitions without Wall Mounted Casework: 5 pounds per square foot uniform live lateral load. 3. Interior Partitions with Wall Mounted Casework: 5 pounds per square foot uniform live lateral load, casework dead load, and casework live load of 25 PSF of shelf area. C. Deflection Requirements: 1. Maximum deflection of 1/240 for flexible finish materials such as gypsum board. 2. Maximum deflection of 1/360 for rigid finish materials including ceramic tile. r 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Division 1. B. Product Data: Submit complete published literature for framing systems and components. Include span tables for proposed framing systems indicating design loads, gages, spacing and deflection. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Unless indicated or specified otherwise, perform work in accordance with ASTM C754. 09111-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09111 - LIGHTGAGE METAL SUPPORT FRAMING B. Code Requirements: 1. Provide assemblies meeting the hourly fire ratings indicated and specified. Assemblies shall been tested in accordance with ASTM E119, and shall be approved by the local jurisdictional code authorities. Coordinate installation of other materials which are a part each assembly. 2. Fire rating requirements take precedence over the construction requirements indicated. In the event of conflict, notify the Architect, and do not begin construction in the area of conflict until the conflict has been resolved. 3. Provide all calculations, drawings, product data, and other verification as required by the jurisdictional code authority to obtain approval of the lightgage metal framing installation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Non -Load Bearing Light Gage Metal Framing: 1. ASTM C645; galvanized; minimum 25 gage unless otherwise required. 2. Studs: "C" shaped with return lip and not less than 1-1/4 inch flanges and prepunched openings for the installation of stiffening channels and mechanical and electrical items. 3. Accessories: U shaped runners, hat and "Z" shaped furring channels, and other sizes and shapes as indicated on the drawings, and required in the standards referenced. 4. Gages: As required to meet deflection requirements, unless indicated or specified otherwise. B. Channels: Hot or cold rolled channels; rust inhibitive paint coating; sizes in accordance with ASTM C754. C. Screws: Self tapping; low profile head; galvanized D. Other Framing Materials: Furnish in accordance with ASTM C754. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. B. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. C. Do not begin work until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 3.2 INTERIOR PARTITION FRAMING A. Runners: 1. Secure runners with fasteners at maximum 24 inches oc. 2. Align to tolerances specified. 3. At concrete floors, use powder driven fasteners or drilled in concrete anchors. B. Unless indicated otherwise, install studs vertically at 24 inches o.c, and not more than 2 inches from abutting construction, at each side of openings, and at corners. C. Install double studs at the jamb of each door frame and cased opening. Studs shall be the same size as the adjacent studs, but no less than 20 gage. Provide diagonal steel stud bracing to structure at each jamb at partitions which do not extent to structure. D. Provide minimum 20 gage studs at all partitions supporting casework or counter tops. 09111-2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09111 - LIGHTGAGE METAL SUPPORT FRAMING E. Secure studs to floor track with rigid connection and install in single lengths from floor to ceiling track. Where interior partition ceiling track is directly anchored to structural members, and unless flexible ceiling track is installed, cut studs 1/2 inch short of web of track and secure in position with metal channels or gypsum board anchored to the studs, only. 3.3 BACKING A. Blocking and backing shall be provided in accordance with Section 06100. 3.4 CEILING, SOFFIT, AND FASCIA FRAMING A. Coordinate locations of hangers and supports with the work of other Sections. B. Ceiling framing shall consist of stud and runner framing, and suspended framing as indicated and specified. C. Stud and Runner Framing: 1. Secure runners to structure above with fasteners at a maximum of 24 inches on center. Size fasteners and use reinforcements as necessary to support the dead loads applied. 2. Screw fasten framing at each flange joint. 3. Space studs at 16 inches on center at horizontal locations. 4. Select members to meet the structural requirements specified. D. Suspended Framing: 1. Install in accordance with ASTM C754, unless indicated or specified otherwise. 2. Suspend ceiling from overhead structural elements only. Do not support from any electrical, HVAC, plumbing, or sprinkler system components. 3. Space carrying channels 4 feet on center with all splices lapped 12 inches and tied. 4. Support cold rolled carrying channels with hanger wires spaced at 4 feet on center for gypsum board ceilings. Loop hanger wire around support element and tightly wrap around vertical wire 3 times; cut off neatly. 5. Space furring channels 16" o.c. with all splices lapped 12", minimum and tied; clip or saddle tie to runner channels with 16-gage tie wire. 6. Where overhead obstructions prevent the regular spacing of hangers, provide secondary carrying members for indirect support of the suspension system, or reinforce the nearest adjacent hangers and related framing components as required to span the required distance. E. Stabilize suspended ceiling, soffit, and fascia framing against lateral movement by means of diagonal bracing. 3.5 TOLERANCES ' A. Install members to provide surface plane with maximum variation of 1/2 inch in 10 feet in any direction. B. Locate assemblies within 1/4 inch of required locations. END OF SECTION 09111-3 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Portland cement plaster. 2. Metal lath and plaster accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing: Exterior framing. 2. 07056 - Air Barrier System: Building paper and flexible flashing. 3. 07920 - Joint Sealants: Sealing of expansion joints between accessories; sealant materials at butt joints. 4. 09111 - Lightgage Metal Support Framing: Soffit and ceiling framing. 5. 16500 - Lighting: Escutcheons and trim rings. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): Latest published version, unless otherwise indicated: 1. C144 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortar 2. C150 - Portland Cement. 3. C206 - Finishing Hydrated Lime. 4. C207 - Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. 5. C260 - Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 6. C847 - Standard Specifications for Metal Lath 7. C897 - Specification for Aggregate for Job Mixed Portland Cement -Based Plasters. 8. C926 - Application of Portland Cement -Based Plaster. 9. C932 - Specification for Surface -Applied Bonding Agents for Exterior Plastering. 10. C1063 - Lathing and Furring for Portland Cement and Portland Cement Lime Plastering, Exterior Stucco) and Interior. 11. C1784 - Rigid Poly(vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(vinyl Chloride) CPVC) Compounds. 1.3 SUBMITTALS I A. Make submittals in accordance with Division 1. B. Product Data: Submit for each plaster trim accessory, admixture, fiber reinforcing, and bonding agent proposed for the work. C. Finish Samples: Submit one 24" x 24" cured cement plaster sample of each texture on 3/4" plywood substrate for approval of finish texture only. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Building Codes: Materials, systems, and installation shall meet requirements of the jurisdictional code authorities. 09220-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER B. Pre -Installation Meeting: 1. Prior to ordering materials and starting work of this Section, and in accordance with Section 01312, meet with the following parties: a. Owner. b. Architect. c. General Contractor. d. Cement Plaster Contractor. e. Sealant Contractor. 2. Review procedures, details, scaffolding, and order of application regarding cement plaster and related construction. Discuss and determine responsibility for protection of the completed work. C. Mock-up 1. On a portion of the building as approved by the Architect, provide a mock-up of the finished cement plaster surface, approximately 150 square feet in area, for review of texture and finish detailing. 2. Remove scaffolding as directed to eliminated shadows, prior to inspection. 3. Mock-up will be inspected for uniformity of texture, levelness, compliance with tolerance requirements, and alignment with accessories. 4. Approved mock-up shall be incorporated into the work, and will be the standard for approval of subsequent cement plaster work. 5. Unsatisfactory mock-up shall be removed as necessary for replacement with complying work. 6. Protect mock-up from damage for duration of the work. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of Division 1 1.6 COORDINATION A. Properly coordinate work with work of other trades. Verify location of ceiling framing channels and hangers at locations where work of other trades is indicated to penetrate cement plaster work. B. Coordinate with work of other Sections for installation of sleeves, boxes, flanges, and other related work. C. Install all parts of work of this Section so that there is no direct contact with mechanical work, except as detailed, at points of penetration. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not apply cement plaster unless minimum ambient temperature of 40 degrees F is maintained continuously in the area to be plastered; maintain temperature 48 hours prior to application of plaster, while the plastering is being applied, and during the curing operation. B. Do not apply plaster to any frozen surfaces or surfaces containing frost; protect plaster coats against freezing for a period of 24 hours after application. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTER AND ASSOCIATED MATERIALS A. Cement: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I; gray for base coats. B. Sand: Natural type, conforming to requirements of ASTM C144 or C897; gradation and use recommended for portland cement basecoat and finish coat plastering. 09220-2 . 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER C. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C260, free of calcium chloride and thiocyanates, not more than 0.05 percent chloride ions. D. Water: Clean, potable fresh and free from amounts of matter deleterious to quality of cement plaster materials. E. Hydrated Lime: Special finishing type, as follows. 1. For scratch and brown coats: ASTM C206 or C207, Type S. 2. For finish coat: ASTM C206, Type S. F. Fiber Reinforcing: One of the following. 1. Fibermesh Company "Fibermix 25"; 1/4 inch long monofilament polypropylene fibers. 2. Hill Brothers Chemical Co. "Hi-Fibe P-1510"; 1/2 inch long monofilament polypropylene fibers. G. Pumping Additives: Manufactured additives as required for improving pumpability of the mix. H. Finish Coat: 1. 100 percent acrylic EIFS finish coat; custom integral color as selected by the Architect; listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. as having a flame spread of 25 or less. 2. Acceptable Manufacturer's: a. Dryvit System Inc. (800-556-7752). b. STO Industries, Inc. (800-221-2397). c. Senergy, Inc./Div. MSC (800-221-WALL). d. TEC Specialty Products Inc. (Palatine IL; 800-323-7407). I. Bonding Agent: ASTM C932; non -oxidizing; non -crystallizing; non -re -emulsifiable. 2.2 LATH AND UNDERLAYMENT A. Metal Lath: Expanded type, 3.4 Ibs/s.y. weight; ASTM C847; self -furring type, galvanized. B. Building Paper: As specified in Section 07056. C. Flexible Flashing: As specified in Section 07056. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Furnish attachment devices as required for secure anchoring of plaster accessories; furnish connection devices and splice plates for reveals and plastic expansion joints, to ensure accurate alignment, allowance for axial movement, where required. B. Corner Beads: Stockton Wire Products (213/245-5193) "Plastic Nose Cornerbead" or approved; 2-1/2" woven wire flanges; plastic coated nose wire. C. Casing Beads: USG #66 Long Flange; zinc alloy; 3/4'; lengths as required for minimum number of joints in each uninterrupted run. D. Control Joints: USG #75; solid zinc alloy; lengths as required for minimum number of joints in each uninterrupted run. E. Reveal Moldings, Vent Screeds, and Other Similar Trim: 1. Extruded aluminum; configurations as indicated. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Fry Reglet Corporation, Alpharetta, GA (800/237-9773). b. Flanery, Inc., Las Vegas, NV (702/220-4700) c. Gordon Inc., Shreveport, LA (800/877-8746) d. Pittcon Industries, Inc., Riverdale, MD (800/637-7638) also acceptable. 3. Intersections: Furnish prefabricated "+" and "T" intersections, and splice alignment plates. 4. Finish: Manufacturer' standard epoxy prime or chemical conversion coat finish 09220-3 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER F. Weep Screeds: SJB078W312Z by Superior Metal Trim, Belmont, CA (800/892-8673); 7/8 inch depth, zinc alloy, vented design, closed ends, lengths as required for minimum number of joints in each uninterrupted run. G. Reveals: Fry Reglet Co, Pittcon Industries, Inc., Gordon Inc, or approved; aluminum extrusions; shapes as indicated; two piece control joint screed similar to Fry Reglet PCS-75 series; provide factory fabricated intersections; manufacturer's standard prime paint finish. H. Soffit Edge Vent Screed: Fry Reglet Corporation (818/289-4744)"TRM -75 V 1125'T' Molding'; manufacturer's standard prime paint finish. I. Expansion Joints: Fry Reglet Co, Pittcon Industries, Inc., Gordon Inc, or approved; aluminum extrusions; shapes as indicated; two piece control joint screed similar to Fry Reglet PCS-75 series; provide factory fabricated intersections; manufacturer's standard prime paint finish. J. Anchorages for Lath and Accessories: 1. Minimum 3/8 inch head diameter; minimum length of 3/4 inch. 2. Screws: Galvanized or copolymer coated steel self tapping wafer head screws. 3. Nails: Galvanized hardened concrete stub nails. 2.4 CEMENT PLASTER MIXES A. Proportions (By Volume): 1. Scratch Coat: 1 part portland cement, 4 to 5 parts sand, 1/2 to 3/4 part lime, and 1 lb of polypropylene strands for each 1000 Ibs of mix (dry). 2. Brown Coat: 1 part portland cement, 4 to 5 parts sand, 1/2 to 3/4 part lime, and 1 lb of polypropylene strands for each 1000 Ibs of mix (dry). 3. Finish Coat: As specified. B. Mixing: 1. Unless otherwise specified or approved by the Architect, provide mechanical mixing of plaster in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C926. Keep water to a minimum, using only the amount necessary to maintain consistency. 2. Add air entrainment admixtures to provide 2 to 4 percent entrainment in all coats. 3. Incorporate pumping additives as required in the approved mix design. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that work is complete to the point where work of this section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF LATH, UNDERLAYMENT, AND ACCESSORIES A. Install specified products and systems in accordance with referenced standards and specifications, unless indicated or specified otherwise. B. Verify that building paper has been installed in compliance with Section 07056. C. Accessories: 1. Fasten accessories through sheathing to metal studs; at CMU predrill and fasten accessories with threading fasteners. 09220-4 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 2. Install accessories as indicated in combination with cement plaster work. 3. Field cut accessories as necessary for accurate alignment and conformance to details; make all cuts neat and straight; remove burrs before installation. 4. Install accessories in alignment, straight, and according to details. Install continuous shims behind flanges of accessories as necessary to achieve proper face location for accurate screeding to finished surface. 5. Field drill accessories as necessary for anchorage. 6. Install accessories for accurate alignment at end to end joints. 7. Apply sealant behind end to end joints in control joint accessories, prior to application of plaster. 8. Construct joints and intersections in accessories to preclude rainwater leakage. Provide weeps or washes at bottom of vertical reveals and control joints. 9. Control Joints: a. Install control joints where shown. Where not shown, place control joints to form rectangular areas not exceeding 144 square feet maximum. Verify exact locations with the Architect prior to installation. b. Run metal lath continuous under control joints. c. Secure control joints by screwing flanges through to framing, or by wire tying to lath. 10. Reveals: a. Provide butyl tape backup in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. b. Run vertical joints continuous through "+" intersection. c. Seal all splices and intersections. 11. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints as indicated. When not indicated provide at expansion joint locations in substructure, such as at compensating channels between floors. Verify exact location with the Architect prior to installation. Size cement plaster expansion joint to match substrate, expansion joint size. 12. Except as otherwise detailed, case finishes terminating at dissimilar materials; install corner bead at all outside corners. 13. Stops, other than casings, where shown or required around lighting fixtures, air diffusers, etc., are to be furnished under other Sections for installation as part of the cement plaster work. Type of stop, if not shown, shall be submitted to the Architect for review and must be approved by the Architect before installation. D. Lath: 1. Attach metal lath in accordance with ASTM C1063 unless specified otherwise. 2. Metal Stud and Sheathing Substrate: Fasten lath through sheathing to steel studs and furring members with galvanized wafer head screws. Screws shall pass through the sheathing and penetrate metal framing a minimum of 3/8 inches. Space fasteners a maximum of 24 inches o.c. horizontally, and 6 inches o.c. vertically. 3. Concrete Masonry Substrate: Attach to concrete masonry units with galvanized roofing nails. Fasten to the surfaces with approved galvanized fasteners at 24 inches on center horizontally and a maximum of 8 inches on center vertically. Use self furring lath. 4. Concrete Substrate: Fasten with galvanized powder driven fasteners at 12 inches on center vertically and horizontally. Use self furring lath. The fasteners shall be rated by testing reports acceptable to the jurisdiction to resist a downward shear force of 96 lbs (12 lb load with a safety factor of 8). Select fasteners which conform to the performance specified under each installation condition, including the compressive strength of the concrete, which may be greater than that indicated or specified. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF BASE COATS A. Verify that accessories have been installed within tolerance limits specified, prior to application of each coat. B. Standards: Apply in accordance with ASTM C926 and as specified herein. 09220-5 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER C. Thicknesses: Apply base coats to permit installation of finish coat for total system thicknesses as follows: 1. 3 Coat Application Over Metal Lath: 7/8 inch total thickness. 2. 2 Coat Application Direct Applied Over Concrete Masonry: 1/2 inch total thickness D. Application Over Metal Lath: 1. Apply scratch coat to a minimum 3/8 inch thickness, allow to partially set, then very lightly score in horizontal direction only. Cure for a minimum of 48 hours. 2. Dampen scratch coat to obtain a uniform suction, and then apply brown coat to a minimum 3/8 inch. Rod to a true plane and trowel -float surface uniformly. Cure for a minimum of 7 days in accordance with ASTM C926. Protect surfaces from flowing water until hardened sufficiently. 3.4 FINISH COAT APPLICATION A. Finish coating shall be applied as recommended by the finish coat manufacturer. B. Trowel apply skim coat of manufacturer's recommended fiber reinforced polymer modified mortar to obtain smooth and flat surfaces within a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 10 feet, and to fill surface imperfections. Use bonding agent as necessary for adequate bond. C. Apply color match primer. D. Provide finish coat in sandblast finish to match Architect's sample. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean all beads, screeds, reveals, metal base, metal trim, electrical outlets, and other items in contact with cement plaster, leaving work ready for decoration by others. As work is completed in each area, remove all rubbish, utensils, and surplus materials, leaving surrounding areas broom clean. B. Remove masking from accessories masked to prevent cement plaster clogging. 3.6 TOLERANCES A. Flat plaster surfaces shall be straight within 1/8" in 10 feet when tested with a straightedge in any direction. B. Accessories shall be installed free of visible wave, straight within 1/16 inch in 1 foot and 1/8 inch in 10 feet of any plane through the axis of the accessory, when tested with a straightedge; horizontal accessories shall be installed level. C. Curved Surfaces: True to the radius indicated with no flat spots or waves; radii shall be uniform and not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/8" in 10 feet. D. Comers and Edges: Sharp with no build up of surface material; straight within 1/16 inch in 1 foot and 1/8 inch in 10 feet. E. Alignment: Joints between accessories shall be aligned to within 1/32 inch. END OF SECTION 09220-6 01/18/06 WASHINGT.ON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY . A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Gypsum soffit board. B. Related Sections: 1. 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking. 2. 07211 - Batt and Blanket Insulation: Thermal and acoustical insulation. 3. 09300 -Tile: Finish materials. r C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. r.. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1. ' 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. C475 - Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallboard Construction. 2. C1002 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board. 3. C1396 - Specification for Gypsum Board. B. Gypsum Association (GA): GA-216 - Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE , A. Perform work in accordance with GA 216, unless specified otherwise, or required otherwise to meet fire rating requirements. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Provide assemblies meeting the hourly fire ratings indicated and specified. Assemblies shall be approved by the local jurisdictional authorities. 2. Fire rating requirements take precedence over the construction requirements indicated. In the event of conflict, notify the Architect, and do not begin construction in the area of conflict until the conflict has been resolved. C. Assembly Instructions: Contractor shall keep at the site and make available to installers a copy of the following: 1. Installation requirements for each fire rated assembly. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS A. Furnish boards of maximum permissible length for type of installation indicated, tapered edge for boards to be exposed, taped and finished; square edge for boards in concealed applications; 5/8 inch thick unless noted or specified otherwise. B. Types: 1. Standard Board: ASTM C1396. 2. Water Resistant Board: ASTM C1396. 3. Exterior Water Resistant Soffit Board: ASTM C1396. 09250-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustical Sealant: Non -hardening, non -skinning, for use in conjunction with gypsum board; similar to USG "Acoustical Sealant" or W.W. Henry Company "Henry 313." B. Trim: 1. Conform to GA 216,• unless indicated or specified otherwise. 2. Concealed flange crimp -on or tape -on type; metal or PVC at Contractor's option. 3. Control Joint Trim: USG 093 or approved. 4. Soffit Vent: Fry Reglet, "WPM-75-V400" or approved. C. Joint Compound, Tape, and Finishing Compound: ASTM C475; use chemical setting type joint compound at water resistant gypsum board and exterior soffit board. D. Screws: ASTM C1002. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 3.2 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION A. Install gypsum board in accordance with GA 216, and fire rated assembly requirements. B. Erect wallboard so that all edges and corners are firmly supported. C. Where gypsum board ceilings are indicated at exterior soffits, install exterior soffit boards.. D. Install water resistant board as a substrate for surfaces scheduled to receive bonded finishes in Restrooms and Janitor closets. E. Trim: 1. Use longest practical lengths, with no piece less than 2 feet long for continuous runs greater than 8 feet. Securely fasten and align trim ends at joints. 2. Place concealed flange comer beads at all external corners. At angles other than 90 degrees, bend the flange to conform to the angle. 3. Place concealed flange type L trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. 4. Use J trim where sealant joint is indicated. F. Where the gypsum board extends to overhead structure at concealed locations, allow a 1/4 to 1/2 inch gap between the gypsum board edge and the overhead structure. 3.3 FINISHING A. Taping: 1. Apply a uniform layer of taping compound to all joints and angles to be reinforced. 2. Apply reinforcing tape immediately centered over the joint and seated into the compound. 3. Skim coat shall follow immediately but shall not function as a fill or second coat. 4. Tape shall be properly folded and embedded in all angles to provide a true angle. 5. Use water resistant taping compound at joints in interior water resistant board and exterior water resistant soffit board. 09250-2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD B. Filling: 1. After taping compound has hardened, apply taping compound, filling the board flush with the surface. 2. The fill coat shall cover the tape and feather out slightly beyond the tape. C. Finishing: 1. Fastener Depressions: Apply taping compound to all fastener depressions followed when hardened by at least 2 coats of taping compound, leaving all depressions level with the plane of the surface. 2. Apply taping compound to all bead and trim, feathering out from the ground to the plane of the surface as specified for joints. 3. Finish joints with at least 2 coats of taping compound, each coat extending beyond preceding coat. Joints shall be feathered to 12 inches each side of the joint. 4. Feather the finish coat from the ground to the plane of the surface, with a maximum camber of 1/32 inch. 5. Where necessary to sand, do so without damaging the face of the gypsum board. 6. Provide a smooth wall surface with joints fully concealed. D. Except as otherwise indicated, provide a smooth wall (Level 4) finish. E. Provide Level 5 finish (skim coat) at all curved surfaces. F. Acoustical Sealant: Install acoustical sealant around perimeter of all acoustically insulated partitions, one bead each side of framing member interface with substrate for single layer construction, and at edge of base layer for double layer construction. Seal all penetrations. 3.4 TOLERANCES A. Install gypsum board with 1/8 inch in 10 feet maximum variation from plane in any direction. END OF SECTION 09250-3 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09300 - TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior floor tile. 2. Interior wall and base tile. 3. Sealer for lobby tile. B. Related Sections: 1. 03001 - Concrete: Substrate. 2. 07920 - Joint Sealants: Expansion joint fillers. 3. 09250 - Gypsum Board: Substrate. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. A108.5 - Ceramic Tile Installed with Dry -Set and Latex Portland Cement Mortar. 2. A108.4 - Ceramic Tile Installed with Organic Adhesives. 3. A118.4 - Latex -Portland Cement Mortar. 4. A136.1 - Organic Adhesive for Installation of Ceramic Tile. 5. A137.1 - Ceramic Tile B. Tile Council of America (TCA): Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation, current edition. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Expansion Joints: Unless otherwise detailed, expansion joints in tile fields are sealant -filled joints to accommodate expansion and contraction of tile and possible substrate movement at slab control and construction joints. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Division 1. B. Product Data: Submit for each type of grout, adhesive, additive, and accessory proposed for the work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to ANSI Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile. B. Installation products, including primers, crack isolation membrane, mortar, and grout, shall be from the same manufacturer and as required for manufacturers extended warranty. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. In accordance with Division 1. 1.7 WARRANTY/GUARANTEE A. Provide manufacturer's extended 10-year warranty, executed to the Owner, covering all products by that manufacturer in specified floor tile system. 09300-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09300 - TILE B. In accordance with Division 1, furnish from the tile installer, a two year written guarantee, executed to the Owner, against defects in workmanship. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 TILE A. General: Furnish the manufactured in accordance with ANSI A137.1. B. Special Shapes: Unless otherwise indicated or specified, furnish special shapes as standard with the tile manufacturer for uniform transitions and concealed edges in the finished installation. Shapes shall include bullnoses, corner bullnoses, cove assemblies, and other special shapes C. Tile Types: As indicated in the Finish Schedule. 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Setting Materials: 1. Thinset Mortar: Latex modified; minimum 400 psi 28 day shear strength to porcelain impervious) tiles; "Kerabond" with "Universal Keralastic" by Mapei Corp., or "211 Crete Filler Powder" with "4237 Latex Thin -set Mortar Additive," by Laticrete International, Inc. 2. Rapid -Set Thin Bed Mortar: Latex modified; minimum 400 psi 28 day shear strength to porcelain impervious) tiles; "Grani/Rapid" with "KER 318" Flexible Admixture" by Mapei Corp., or "211 Crete Filler Powder" with "4237 Latex Thin -set Mortar Additive" and "101 Rapid Set Latex"(proportions as recommended by the manufacturer for the setting time required)," by Laticrete International, Inc.. 3. Organic Adhesives: ANSI A136.1, type I; provide primer/sealer as recommended by the adhesive manufacturer. B. Grout: 1. Grout: "Keracolor S" by Mapei Corp., or "500 Series Sanded Grout' with "1776 Grout Admix Plus" by Laticrete International, Inc. 2. Fast Setting: "Ultra/Color" by Mapei Corp., or "Floor Joint and Grout Filler" with "3701 Latex Mortar Admixture" and "101 Rapid Set Latex", by Laticrete International, Inc. (proportions as recommended by the manufacturer for the setting time required); sanded, except unsanded at joints scheduled at 1/16 inch wide. C. Metal Screed: As manufactured by Schluter Systems, Inc. (800/225-8902), or Ceramic Tool Company, (414/258-9066); clear anodized aluminum tile edging trim; sizes as required for installation of top of screed flush with top of tile, as detailed. D. Crack Isolation Membrane: One of the following. 1. "Mapelastic SM" by Mapei Corp. 2. "Laticrete Blue 92" by Laticrete International, Inc. E. Lobby Grout Sealer: One of the following: 1. "CeramaSeal Magic Seal," by Bostik/CeramaSeal (800/726-7845). 2. "MiraSeal 511 Impregnator" by Laticrete. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. B. Verify that locations of control joints and construction joints in substrate correspond to tile expansion joint locations. 09300-2 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09300 - TILE C. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. D. Do not begin work until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces free of grease, dirt, dust, organic impurities, curing agents, and other materials which would impair bond. Clean floors with "Blast -track" unit if necessary. 3.3 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE A. Substrate Examination: 1. Substrates are subject to examination by the Owner and the Architect prior to installation of the or slab leveling materials. Furnish a minimum of 7 days notice. 2. The examination will determine the need for additional crack isolation membrane at shrinkage cracks and other special conditions. 3. Provide additional crack isolation membrane in locations as directed, up to the minimum quantity specified. B. Install crack isolation membrane in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, unless indicated or specified otherwise. C. Provide crack isolation membrane at following locations: 1. At control and construction joints in concrete floors. 2. At changes in substrate materials. D. Extend a minimum of 12 inches each side of crack or joint. E. Do not apply crack isolation membrane at joints which will be reflected as expansion joints in the tile. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF TILE A. Interior Floor Application - Thinset over Concrete Substrate or Crack Isolation Membrane: 1. TCA System: F113. 2. Installation Standard: ANSI A108.5. 3. Setting Materials: Thinset mortar; 3/32 inch minimum thickness. B. Wall Application - Gypsum Board Substrate: 1. TCA System: W223. 2. Installation Standard: ANSI A108.4. 3. Setting Materials: Organic adhesive. C. Joint Pattern: 1. Lay out tile pattern prior to commencing tile installation. 2. Accurately locate grout joints on lines indicated; where not indicated, adjust grout joints within specified tolerances to minimize use of cut tiles at field edges. 3. Where cut tiles are necessary, position floor tile such that cut tile at each edge of each rectilinear field is not less than half of a full size unit. D. Installation Tolerances, Level: 1. Install tile fields level to within tolerance specified for finished concrete substrate. 2. No portion of a the surface shall vary more than 1/16 inch above or below an adjacent tile surface. E. Mix tiles from several boxes prior to installation to ensure that color variations within each the field are uniformly distributed throughout the field. 09300-3 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09300 - TILE F. Install tiles with faces in same plane, and aligned with adjacent finishes, where indicated. G. Except as otherwise indicated, install bullnose tiles at exposed the edges, including without limitation, external corners, and tops of bases and wainscots. H. Install ceramic tile for square corners at vertical inside corners. I. Clean joints of mortar to minimum depth of 1/4 inch to allow subsequent grout installation. J. Joint Tolerances: 1. Joint Width Variation: Plus or minus 25% of the proposed joint width. 2. Taper: Plus or minus 25% from one end to the other. K. Special Bank Floor Tile Installation Requirements: 1. Wash backs of each tile to remove dust and soil that would compromise adhesion. 2. Dampen substrate as necessary to prevent excessive suction. 3. Key the mortar into the substrate with the flat side of the trowel. 4. Comb mortar over the previously keyed substrate in one direction using the notch side of the trowel. 5. Firmly press each tile into the mortar. Press down and move the tile back and forth perpendicularly across the ridges approximately 1/8 to 1/4 inch to flatten the ridges and fill in the valleys of the combed mortar. 6. Set tiles in accurate alignment. L. Screed Installation: 1. Install screeds at tile field edges at the locations indicated. 2. Accurately cut to length for flush tightly butted joints. Provide miter cut angle joints. Remove burrs at field cuts. 3. Install in longest possible lengths, except that no screed section shall be longer than 12 feet or shorter than 4 feet in length for continuous runs greater than 16 feet. 4. Install screeds free from waves and variations in height, flush with top of adjacent tile surfaces. 5. Set screeds directly in setting bed as the tile installation proceeds. Comply with screed manufacturer's instructions to achieve mortar tightly compacted between screed and tile edge. 6. Grind screed joints as necessary to correct minor misalignment and to ease sharp outside corners. 3.5 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Place expansion joints at locations indicated, but in no case at greater than maximum 30 foot intervals for interior installations. B. Place expansion joints at control and expansion joints in concrete slabs, and at intersections with walls and columns. C. Joint Sizes: Set to match width of typical grouted joint; but in no case less than 1/4". D. Leave expansion joints free of mortar. E. Sealant materials and installation are specified in Section 07920. 3.6 GROUTING A. Mix grouts in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Grout all joints, except expansion joints, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Float joints to a slightly concave profile. C. Remove excess grout from tile surfaces in accordance with the grout and tile manufacturer's recommendations. Do not use excess amounts of water. 09300-4 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09300 - TILE D. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage if acid cleaners are used. E. Do not grout joints indicated to receive sealants, including inside right angle corner joints between floors and walls of column bases. Grout joints perpendicular to expansion joints shall be finished flush with tile edges. F. Cured grout joints shall be made free of efflorescence, prior to sealing. 3.7 CURING A. Cure installation in accordance with the grout manufacturer's recommendations. Protect tile and grout during curing operations. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect tile installations from damage, in accordance with Division 1 B. Replace all damaged tiles. 3.9 CLEANING A. In accordance with Division 1 B. Coordinate final cleaning with work of Section 07920 - Sealants. Do not begin cleaning operations until tile expansion joints sealants are fully cured. C. Prior to Substantial Completion, wash and thoroughly rinse all tile. Leave all tile surfaces clean. 3.10 GROUT SEALING A. Apply sealer to lobby floor in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Wipe surfaces after each application as necessary to remove all visible sealer residue. END OF SECTION 09300-5 01/18/06 N WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09510 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Suspended acoustical ceilings. B. Related Sections: 09250 - Gypsum Board: Adjacent wall and ceiling surfaces. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. C635 - Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings. 2. C636 - Recommended Practice for the Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panels. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Code: Comply with the requirements of the local code authorities. 1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and humidity of 20 to 40 percent prior to, during, and after installation. 1.5 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING A. Do not install acoustical ceilings until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. B. Schedule installation of acoustic units after interior wet work is dry. 1.6 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide 5% extra quantity of acoustic units under provisions of Division 1. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Exposed T System: ASTM C635, heavy duty classification; direct hung; exposed "T" design; factory baked on finish to match acoustical panels. Furnish stabilizer bars, splices, edge and wall moldings, and other items as required to complete suspended ceiling grid system. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS A. AC-1: 24 x 24 inch size; square edge; white color; flame spread of 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84; manufacturer, style and texture as indicated on Drawings. B. AC-2: 24 x 48 inch size; square edge; white color; flame spread of 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84; manufacturer, style and texture as indicated on Drawings. 09510-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09510 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that existing conditions are ready to receive work. B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. C. Install after major above -ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. Ensure the layout of hangers are located to accommodate fittings and units of equipment which are to be placed after the installation of ceiling grid system. D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION, SUSPENDED TILE SYSTEMS A. Install system in accordance with ASTM C636, Drawing and code requirements for lateral bracing, the manufacturer's instructions, and as supplemented in this Section. B. Install suspension systems in a manner to support all superimposed loads, with maximum permissible deflection of 1/270 of span. C. Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, provide secondary carrying members for indirect support of the suspension system, or reinforce the nearest adjacent hangers and related carrying channels as required to span the required distance. D. Center system on room axis according to reflected ceiling plans. E. Provide all anchors required for the installation of the ceiling system. F. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest practical lengths. Miter corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions. Fabricate edge moldings to fit the surfaces encountered. G. Form expansion joints as detailed. Maintain visual closure. H. Fit acoustic lay -in panels in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. Fit border units neatly against abutting surfaces. Scribe and mill recessed tegular edge into partial border units supported at edge by wall molding. I. Adjust sags or twists which develop in the ceiling system and replace any part which is damaged or faulty. J. Install hold-down clips to retain panels tight to grid system within 20 ft of an exterior door. K. Install after major above -ceiling work is complete. L. Tolerances: 1. Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet 2. Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: Two degrees maximum. END OF SECTION 09510-2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO - SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09614 - CONCRETE SEALER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Sealing of concrete floor slabs exposed to view in the finished work. B. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. C. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Division 1. B. Submit product data. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. In accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Provide adequate ventilation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SEALER A. Acrylic Sealer: Water emulsion acrylic, VOC compliant; one of the following: 1. "Sealtight VOCOMP-25" by W. R. Meadows, Inc., Elgin, IL (800/342-5976). 2. "Kure-N-Seal" by Sonneborn Division of ChemRex Inc., Shakopee, MN (800/433-9517). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces to receive sealer, using manufacturer's recommended cleaning compounds, and in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. B. Mask or otherwise protect adjacent surfaces. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply concrete floor sealer to all interior concrete floor slabs scheduled to remain exposed in the finished work. 09614-1 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09614 - CONCRETE SEALER B. Roller or spray apply sealer in accordance with the manufacturer's application instructions. Apply two coats. END OF SECTION 09614-2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient tile flooring. 2. Sheet vinyl. 3. Resilient base., B. Related Sections: 1. 03001 - Concrete; substrate. 2. 09680 - Carpet. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: No substitute products will be considered. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Installers: 1. Use only skilled and experienced resilient flooring installers for preparation of substrate and actual installation of resilient flooring. 2. Helpers and apprentices used for such work shall be under full and constant supervision at all times by thoroughly skilled resilient flooring installers. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. In accordance with Division 1. 1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain minimum 70 degrees F air temperature at flooring installation area for three days prior to, during, and for 24 hours after installation. i B. Store flooring materials in area of application. Allow three days for material to reach equal temperature as area. 1.5 EXTRA STOCK A. Deliver 10 percent of installed quantity of each color and pattern of floor tile and base material required for project, for maintenance use. B. Clearly identify each box or roll. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING A. Resilient Tile Flooring: Vinyl composition the and special resilient the flooring as scheduled on the Drawings. 2.2 SHEET VINYL A. Sheet Vinyl: As scheduled on the Drawings. 09650-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING 2.3 RESILIENT BASE A. Resilient Base: Rubber; 1/8 inch thick; coved style; roll stock; manufacturer, color and height as scheduled on the Drawings. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex filler, mixed with water to produce a cementitious paste. B. Primers and Adhesives: Types recommended by resilient flooring and base manufacturers for specific application. C. Transition Strips: As scheduled on the Drawings. D. All other materials not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper installation of resilient flooring, shall be only as recommended by the manufacturer of the material to which it is applied and shall be subject to approval by the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Ensure concrete floors are dry (maximum 7 percent moisture content) and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting. C. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Install subfloor filler to fill low spots, cracks, construction joints, holes and other defects, and as required to adjust level to meet adjacent finishes. Feather to maximum slope of 1/8 inch in 3 feet; float to smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic over filler. 3.3 FLOORING INSTALLATION A. Install all resilient flooring where scheduled in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Unless indicated otherwise, install resilient flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines. C. Terminate resilient flooring at centerline of door at door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar, and where no threshold is indicated. D. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges where flooring terminates. E. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. F. Clean substrate. Spread cement evenly in quantity recommended by manufacturer to ensure adhesion over entire area of installation. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of flooring before initial set. G. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to ensure full adhesion. 09650-2 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING H. Special Requirements for Resilient Tile: 1. Open floor tile cartons, enough to cover each area, and mix tile to ensure shade variations do not occur within any one area. 2. Install tiles as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Install with minimum tile width 1/2 full size at room or area perimeter, unless indicated otherwise. 4. Arrange to square grid pattern as indicated on the Drawings with all joints aligned. Special Requirements for Sheet Flooring: 1. Install sheet flooring to a minimum 1/3 full material width, with length of sheet parallel to length of room. Where cutting is required, double cut and weld as specified. Trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Heat weld seams in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. Use welding rod in color as selected by the Architect. 3. Unless indicated otherwise, lay flooring with seams parallel to building lines to produce minimum number of seams. J. Special Requirements for Flash -Cove Installations: 1. Provide cove fillet at wall edges to ease transition at intersection of floor and wall. Miter cut, fit and weld at internal and external corners with welding rod. Extend flooring to 5 inches above floor level, accurately cut, and cap exposed top edge with brushed aluminum metal trim, securely fastened in place, with top edge of trim level, and with all trim joints mitered. Install trim in maximum possible lengths, with no piece shorter than 18 inches for continuous runs longer than 18 inches. K. Seal joint between flooring and adjacent materials at restrooms, bathrooms, kitchens, and other moist areas with clear silicone sealant. 3.4 BASE INSTALLATION A. Adhesive install base materials in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Install straight style base at all walls where resilient base is scheduled in areas with carpeted floors; install cove style base at walls scheduled for resilient base abutting hard surface and resilient floors. C'. Coordinate with Owner's casework vendor and provide base to wood casework toe kicks where required. D. Coordinate installation of straight base with work of Section 09680. E. Fit joints tight and vertical, in accurate alignment. F. Score back of base material with grooving tool, at all outside corners; maintain minimum leg length 18 inches where wall length permits. Mount base so that scored groove is accurately aligned with comer, and with base tightly adhered to wall at both sides of corner, with no visible gaps at top of base. Where cove base is formed around outside corners, stretch toe of cove for smooth transition around corner, with toe in uniform contact with the finish flooring. G. Miter or cope inside corners for accurate fit. H. Scribe and fit to door frames, stairs, and other obstructions. I. Install straight and level to maximum variation of plus or minus 1/8 inch over 10 feet. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Unless recommended otherwise by the adhesive manufacturer, prohibit traffic from resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation. 09650-3 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING 3.6 CLEANING A. Upon completion of the installation, immediately remove all surplus adhesive from adjacent surfaces. B. As soon as practical after installation, and in accordance with the timing recommended by the manufacturers, clean the entire resilient flooring surface using the materials recommended for that purpose by the flooring materials manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09650-4 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09680 - CARPET PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Related Sections: 1. 03001 - Concrete: Substrate. 2. 09650 - Resilient Flooring: Rubber base. B. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. C. Substitutions: No substitute products will be considered. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Division 1, unless specified otherwise. B. Product Data: Submit for accessories required for the Work. C. Layout Drawings: Show field conditions, seam layout, trim locations, and materials for transition to other flooring materials. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Carpet Installer: Minimum of 3 years experience in carpet installations of similar size and scope. Able to show evidence of experience when requested by the Architect. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. In accordance with Division 1. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. HVAC system shall be permanently in operation. B. Space shall be maintained at a minimum of 68 degrees F. a minimum of 72 hours prior to carpet installation. 1.6 INSTALLATION GUARANTEE A. Furnish a 1 year written guarantee covering defects in installation of carpets. Guarantee work shall include, without limitation, regluing, and all other procedures required to resolve installation deficiencies. B. In addition to the requirements of the 1 year guarantee, if installation defects have caused irreparable damage to the carpet, the Contractor shall furnish and install new materials to match that damaged at no additional cost to the Owner, at a time convenient to the Owner. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET A. Carpet: As indicated in the Finish Schedule. 09680-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09680 - CARPET 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesives: Use adhesives as recommended by the manufacturer of the carpet. When none is recommended use adhesives as manufactured by Roberts Consolidated Industries Adhesives; waterproof for installation of carpets and mats at entries, sinks, and other wet areas. B. Latex Underlayment: White premix latex filler, mixed with water to produce cementitious paste. Dependable Chemical Company, Inc., "Dependable White Skimcoat Underlayment," with "Latex Liquid" additive; or approved. C. Hot Melt Tape: Roberts "50-330 Supertape;" Orcon "CT-3 Super Tape;" or approved. D. Edge Strips: Vinyl reducer strips as indicated on the Drawings; size as appropriate for conditions; color as selected from the manufacturer's standard line. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect the preparatory work of other trades, and verify that such work is acceptable for the proper performance of the work of this Section. Report unacceptable conditions to the Architect. Do not begin work until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. B. Ensure that concrete floors are free from scaling, and exhibit acid neutrality. C. Moisture Testing of Concrete Slabs: Tape and seal a 24 inch square polyethylene sheet to the floor for a 24 hour period. Contact the Architect, and do not commence installation if condensation appears under the sheet. D. Upon commencement of carpet installation, the Contractor accepts the substrate and responsibility for unacceptable finished work caused by prior observable substrate conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean floors of dust, dirt, grease, and other substances which would be detrimental to the proper performance of adhesive and carpet. B. Fill low spots and cracks over 1/8 inch in width with latex underlayment. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Carpet installation shall be tight and flat to the subfloor, securely adhered in position, and shall present a uniform appearance. Provide color, pattern, and texture match within each area. Seams shall be strong, tightly butted, and flat. B. Install carpets, in strict accordance with the respective manufacturer's printed instructions for the type of substrate and application indicated. C. Unless otherwise indicated, install resilient edge strips at carpet edges where carpet meets concrete or resilient flooring. Where carpet to resilient or concrete surface flooring transition is indicated at door openings, locate to center resilient edge strip under door. 3.4 ROLL STOCK CARPET INSTALLATION A. Perform installation using sequential rolls. B. Install all patterned carpet with exact end and side matches. C. Glue -Application at Coupon Booth Counters: Direct glue carpet in a single piece to counter, trim for tight fit to adjacent walls, wrap around countertop apron and staple to backside as detailed. 09680-2 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09680 - CARPET 3.5 REMNANTS A. Upon completion of the installation, contact the Owner's Representative for selection of remnants. Carefully wrap and mark separately the selected remnants for each type of carpet, and note the type and location(s) where installed. Deliver selected remnants to a location on site as directed by the Owner's Representative. Remove and dispose of remainder at a legal off -site location. 3.6 CLEANUP A. The premises shall be kept free from unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment and surplus materials during the progress of the work. B. Remove threads with sharp scissors. Remove spots with manufacturer's recommended spot remover. C. Immediately after laying, thoroughly power vacuum entire surface using equipment with motor driven brushes. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect carpet from damage during remainder of construction and move -in period. END OF SECTION 09680-3 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09682 - CARPET TILES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Carpet tiles, glued down to concrete substrate. B. Related Section: 1. 03001Concrete: Substrate; slab level tolerances. 2. 09650 - Resilient Flooring: Rubber base. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: No substitute products will be considered. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing $ Materials (ASTM): 1. D4263 - Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method. 2. E648-78 - Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. 3. F1869 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride. B. American Association of Textile Chemists & Colorists (AATCC): 134-1975 - Electrostatic Propensity of Carpet. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with provisions of Division 1. B. Product Data: Submit carpet manufacturer's material specification and installation instructions. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Carpet Installer: Minimum of 3 years experience in carpet installations of similar size and scope. Able to show evidence of experience when requested by the Architect. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. In accordance with Division 1. 1.6 JOB CONDITIONS A. Precondition: Leave carpet tiles in area to be tiled for 48 hours prior to installation. B. Environmental Conditions: Maintain temperature in space in accordance with carpet or adhesive manufacturer's recommendations, but in no case less than 60 degrees F for 24 hours prior to, during, and after installation. Permit no traffic over newly laid adhesive applied carpet for a minimum of 24 hours after installation. 1.7 WARRANTIES A. Installed carpeting shall be warranted by the manufacturer for a period of ten years from the date of purchase, against wear in excess of ten percent of face weight, backing delamination, edge ravel, and change in dimension, and cup, dome, or dish. 09682-1 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09682 - CARPET TILES B. Furnish a 1 year written guarantee covering defects in installation of carpets. Guarantee work shall include, without limitation, regluing, and all other procedures required to resolve installation deficiencies. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET TILE: As scheduled on the Drawings. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesives: 1. Use adhesives as recommended by the manufacturer of the carpet. 2. Carpet adhesive shall be release type, allowing carpet tiles to be removed and replaced at a later date without damaging or removing the adjacent the pieces. B. Latex Underlayment: White premix latex filler, mixed with water to produce cementitious paste. Dependable Chemical Company, Inc., "Dependable White Skimcoat Underlayment," with "Latex Liquid" additive; or approved. C. Edge Strips: Vinyl reducer strips as indicated on the Drawings; size as appropriate for conditions; color as selected from the manufacturer's standard line. D. Protection Paper: Fortifiber Corporation "Seekure 892," or approved heavy, reinforced, non -staining kraft laminated paper. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. General: Do not start work under this Section until work of other trades, including painting, is substantially completed. Inspect surfaces to receive carpet; do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Commencement of work constitutes acceptance of surfaces. B. Preparation: Surfaces shall be dry, firm, sound and free from oil, dirt, paint, joint compound, bond - breaking or curing compounds, or other foreign matter. Surfaces shall be free from unusual roughness and sharp edges such that the installed carpet will present an even, smooth appearance. Damp mop floors with warm water and vacuum after mopping. C. Cracks: Fill cracks, indents and other imperfections which could interfere with satisfactory installation with latex underlayment, mixed and applied in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. Trowel to smooth surface. Allow underlayment to fully dry before applying carpet adhesive. D. Moisture Test: 1. Test at all new concrete slabs indicated to receive carpet tile, to determine the vapor emission rate. 2. Perform tests in accordance with ASTM F1869. 3. Notify the Architect if tests results show a vapor emission rate which exceeds 5 ibs per 1000 sf in a 24 hour period. 4. Test kits are available from VAPRECISION 800-449-6194. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Floor adhesive shall be applied in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's recommendations using a roller to ensure 100 percent contact. Allow adhesive to dry to the point recommended by manufacturer. 09682-2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09682 - CARPET TILES B. Installation: Place all carpet tiles in accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedures. All carpet the shall be oriented in the same direction and shall lay completely flat. C. Lay out area such that cut perimeter tiles will be not less than 8 inches wide. Commence laying tile in center of room or space and work toward perimeters; cut border tile after field tiles have been installed. Cut carpet evenly and accurately to fit neatly at walls, columns, and projections. Lay tile square with area of installation. Joints shall be tight and unnoticeable upon completion. D. All cutting of carpet for telephone and electrical outlets shall be the responsibility of the carpet installer. E. Carpet the installation shall be rolled and rerolled on the day following installation to assure complete transfer of adhesive. F. Install floor transition strips at terminations where required. Secure strips to substrate with specified anchors, spaced 6" o.c., maximum. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Cleaning: Remove all spillage and adhesive from the face of the installed carpet immediately. Use recommended cleaning materials. On completion of installation, the entire carpet area shall be cleaned with an upright beater -type vacuum cleaner. B. All defective and damaged carpet tiles, improperly cut tiles, and carpet tiles on which there are stains which cannot be completely removed to the satisfaction of the Architect or Owner, shall be replaced with new. The entire installation shall be left clean and free from imperfections. C. Protection: Following cleaning and vacuuming, protect the carpeting from soiling and damage until final acceptance. In areas where painting or other wet work is to be performed subsequent to carpeting installation, protection shall be accomplished using specified protection paper. Lap edges of paper 6 inches and secure with non -staining tape. The covering shall be kept in repair and damaged portions replaced during the construction period. END OF SECTION 09682-3 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09775 - REINFORCED PLASTIC PANEL WALL COVERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Reinforced plastic panel wall covering. 2. Adhesives, sealants, and related accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. 09250 - Gypsum Board: Substrate. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Division 1. B. Product Data: 1. Product literature on adhesives and sealants to be used in conjunction with panel system installation. 2. Manufacturer's product literature for system components. C. Samples: 1. Three samples of wall paneling material proposed for the work; 3 x 4 inch minimum size. 2. One each of each cap, corner, and division molding proposed for the work; minimum 4 inches in length. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Panel system shall be USDA approved for use in food preparation and service areas. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of Division 1. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 60 degrees F and relative humidity as prescribed by the adhesive manufacturer, during installation, and until installed adhesive is fully cured. B. Allow no containers of adhesive to be opened until all potential sources of flame or spark have been shut down or extinguished and until warnings against their ignition during adhesive application have been posted. C. Provide ventilation to disperse fumes during application of solvent based adhesive. 09775-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09775 - REINFORCED PLASTIC PANEL WALL COVERING PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PANEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Panel Material: 1. Manufacturer/Type: a. Marlite Brand Class I/A Fire Rated FRP by Marlite (Dover, OH 330/343-6621); color as scheduled in the Finish Legend. b. Fire-X Glasbord with Surfaseal, by Kemlite Company (Joliet, IL 800/435-0080); color as scheduled in the Finish Legend. 2. Panel Type: Fiberglass reinforced polyester panels, with embossed textured face. 3. Thickness: 3/32 inch. 4. Size: 48 inches x length required for conditions indicated. 5. Fire Rating: Maximum 25/450 flame spread / smoke developed in accordance with ASTM E84. B. Moldings: 1. Manufacturer's standard PVC cap, corner, and division moldings; color to match panels. 2. Omit bottom trim where panel abuts flash cove base. C. Adhesive: 1. For Panel Installation: Marlite Brand C-375 or C-551 Construction Adhesive by Marlite, or 444 Non -Flammable F.R.P. Panel Adhesive by W. W. Henry Company, 2. For Molding Installation: Marlite Brand C-375 C-551 Adhesive by Marlite, or 444 Non -Flammable F.R.P. Panel Adhesive by W. W. Henry Company. 3. Furnish adhesive spreaders with 3/16 inch V-notches, 5/16 inch apart for application of adhesive to panels. D. Sealant: Flexible waterproof sealant for bedding panel edges, Marlite Brand Silicone Sealant MS-251 by Marlite, or Silicone Sealant S255C by Kemlite Company. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDITION OF SURFACES A. Substrate: Verify that drywall substrate is clean, dry, solid, straight, and free from projections. B. Where conditions require installation of paneling prior to installation of flooring, coordinate with other trades to establish accurate location of top of base. C. Do not start work until other work requiring penetration of wall covering has been completed, or accurately located. D. Commencement of plastic paneling wall covering work constitutes installer's acceptance of the substrate. 3.2 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Cut panels accurately to size with proper allowance for expansion and moldings. B. Sand or file all edges smooth without chipping. C. Cut openings for penetrations in accurate location with approximate 1/8 inch clearance around penetrations. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install base molding to wall at proper elevation, in solid bed of adhesive. Allow adhesive to set thoroughly prior to installation of paneling. 09775-2 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09775 - REINFORCED PLASTIC PANEL WALL COVERING B. Seal base molding to top of wall base. C. Establish centerline of each distinct flat area to be covered. Trim division moldings to mate with base moldings; install in solid bed of adhesive, either on centerline, or offset 24inches from center, as necessary to maximize panel widths at corners. Molding shall be installed straight and plumb. D. Cut top cap and division or corner moldings to shape, with edges trimmed to fit to adjacent moldings. i E. Apply sealant into installed moldings in sequence with panel installation. F. Apply adhesive to backs of panels in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. G. Maintain lines and levels of panel edges and moldings. H. Allow 1/8 inch gap between top cap, corner, or division molding posts, and panel edge; all edges shall be firmly bedded to the moldings in sealant. I. Promptly remove sealant squeeze out with a damp cloth, as work progresses; remove adhesive with appropriate solvent. J. Install sealant behind flanges and at penetrations through paneling, and between top cap of panel and substrate. K. Install panels tight to flash -cove base trim. 3.4 CLEANING A. Inspect surfaces of paneling and remove excess adhesive from face of laminate using solvent recommended by manufacturer. B. Promptly remove unused cut pieces from the site. C. Prior to substantial completion of each area where reinforced plastic panel wall covering is installed, clean all surfaces of plastic panels, using procedures recommended by the manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09775-3 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09900 - PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Site applied paint coatings. 2. Requirements for paint coating shop applied in other Sections. B. Related Sections 1. 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Pre -primed metal surfaces. 2. 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Option for shop and field applied finishes. 3. 07620 - Flashing and Sheet Metal: Shop applied finishes. 4. 08115 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Preprimed metal surfaces. 5. 08210 - Wood Doors: Option for prefinished doors. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Division 1. B. Materials List: Submit a typewritten list of materials proposed. Organize list to indicate painting systems to be used with each substrate. Include manufacturer's specifications and other data as required to verify compliance with the specified requirements. C. Paint Samples: 1. Submit three 8x10 samples of each paint finish on an 8"x10" piece of substrate which accurately demonstrates final color and finish. Reference manufacturer, type of paint, color, sheen, substrate, and application. 2. Furnish additional samples until all paint finishes are approved. D. Transparent Finish Samples: Submit the following when coating systems are to be field applied. 1. Submit samples of each wood species and transparent finish combination. 2. Submit samples in sets of three or more illustrating the full range of grain and color variations. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with a minimum of three years documented experience. B. Environmental Requirements for Solvent Based Paints: Comply with the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) requirements for volatile solvents content limitations, as applicable to each classification of coating. C. Visual Standards: Each distinct area of the finished work shall be free of variations in color and sheen, orange peel, runs, sags, blistering, checking, cracking, scratches, dust, dirt, and other contaminants. 09900-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09900 - PAINTING 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. In accordance with Division 1. B. Delivery: Deliver paint materials to the jobsite in sealed, original, labeled containers, each bearing manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, color designation, and instructions for mixing and/or reducing. C. Storage Materials: Store paint materials at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F. in a well ventilated area. D. Toxic, acidic, and combustible materials: Take all necessary precautionary safety measures as recommended by the material manufacturers and governing regulations. E. Place cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard in closed metal containers and daily remove from the site. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Weather Conditions: 1. Do no exterior work on unprotected surfaces when raining, or other moisture is present or expected, or before applied paints can dry or attain proper cure. 2. Allow wetted surfaces to dry and attain temperatures and condition specified hereinafter before proceeding with previously started work. B. Temperature: 1. Do no painting work when surface and air temperatures are below 40 degrees F or below those temperatures recommended by the manufacturer for the material type used. 2. Minimum temperatures for latex finishes: 45 degrees F for interior work and 50 degrees F. for exterior work, unless approved otherwise. C. Lighting: Maintain a lighting level of 15 foot-candles minimum on the surfaces to be painted or finished. D. Ventilation: Provide adequate continuous ventilation. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish quantity of paint equal or greater than 10 percent of the quantity of each type, color, and sheen of paint used in interior work, except amount shall be not more than two (2) one -quart cans, of each type of interior finish coat of each color and sheen required. B. Material shall be furnished in manufacturer's labeled and unopened containers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS A. Except for specific products specified below, "first quality" commercial products from The Sherwin- Williams Company, Kelly -Moore / Preservative Paints, Pittsburgh Paints, ICI Paints North America, Benjamin Moore Paint Company, and Pratt & Lambert may be used, subject to the Architect's approval. B. Materials not specifically noted and otherwise required for the work, such as linseed oil, shellac, thinners and the like shall be of a quality not less than that required by applicable published Federal or State Specification Standards, and as manufactured by approved firms. C. Products for each general purpose shall be compatible. Each system shall be products of one manufacturer where ever possible. 09900-2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09900 - PAINTING D. Epoxy/Urethane System: 1. Epoxy Primer: Tnemec Series 69 Epoxoline II, Carboline 890, or approved. 2. Urethane Finish Coats: Tnemec Series 75 "Endura-Shield III" Acrylic Polyurethane Enamel, Carboline 133HB," or approved; semi -gloss or satin sheen; custom color to match color scheduled. E. Direct -To -Metal (DTM) acrylic primer: 1. ICl/Devoe "Devflex 4020" primer. 2. Sherwin Williams "DTM Acrylic Primer." F. Acrylic Wall Size: William Zinsser & Co., Inc. (Somerset NJ) "Shieldz Universal Pre -Wall covering Primer'; acrylic primer/sealer. 2.2 MIXING A. Furnish paints ready -mixed unless otherwise specified, except site mixed coatings which are in paste or powder form, or to be site catalyzed, in accordance with manufacturer's directions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect the preparatory work of other sections, and verify that such work is acceptable for the work of this section. Report all unacceptable conditions to the Architect. Do not begin work in areas of unacceptable conditions until the conditions have been resolved. B. Starting painting work shall constitute Contractor acceptance of surfaces, and responsibility for unacceptable work caused by prior observable substrate conditions. 3.2 PROTECTION A. Adequately protect surfaces not to be painted, from spills, drips, over painting, and other damage caused by this work. Include surfaces within the paint storage and preparation areas. B. Hardware and Miscellaneous Items: 1. Carefully remove electrical outlet and switch plates, mechanical diffusers, escutcheons, surface hardware, fittings and fastenings prior to starting work. 2. Carefully store, clean and replace these items upon completion of work in each area. 3. Use no solvent or abrasives to clean hardware that will remove the permanent lacquer finish normally used on some of these items. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Prepare surfaces by removing all dirt, dust, grease, oil, moisture, and other contaminants which will impair the proper adhesion of the finish. B. Ferrous Metal Shop Primed Under Other Sections: Solvent clean previously primed surfaces to remove oil and grease. Remove loose rust, blistered and peeling paint to bare metal by scraping, sanding, and wire brushing in accordance with SSPC-SP2 and SSPC-SP3. Immediately apply touch up prime damaged or abraded surfaces. Lightly sand all shop prime painted surfaces to receive paint finish. C. Galvanized Ferrous Metal: Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC SP-1. D. Gypsum Wall Board: Remove all light dust and dirt. 09900-3 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09900 - PAINTING 3.4 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Unless specified or indicated otherwise, follow paint manufacturer's label directions for general application procedures and coverage rates. B. Apply primer coats untinted. Where more than one coat of paint is required, tint each succeeding coat up to the final coat similar in tint, but slightly lighter in value (shade). Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish. C. Do not apply finishes on surfaces that are not sufficiently dry. Make sure each coat of finish is dry and hard before a following coat is applied unless the manufacturer's directions state otherwise. D. Paint rollers shall have a nap 3/8 inch or less. E. Where roller finishes are scheduled for application to gypsum board surfaces, apply first coat with a 3/8 inch nap roller to achieve desired stipple texture; finish coats may be spray applied at Contractor's option. Backroll spray applied finish coats immediately after application. F. Factory Primed Surfaces: Apply scheduled finish system, less primer coat, except as necessary to for patching damage to factory prime coating. 3.5 EXTERIOR PAINTING SYSTEMS A. Exterior Gypsum Board - Latex System: 1. System: Two coats: first coat alkyd or latex primer, second coat 100% acrylic exterior latex paint. 2. Sheen: Flat sheen, unless indicated otherwise. 3. Application: Exterior gypsum soffit board surfaces. B. Preprimed Ferrous Metal - Epoxy/Urethane System: 1. System: Spray, brush, or roller apply one coat epoxy primer, and two urethane finish coats in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Apply epoxy primer over all shop applied primers, except when the specified primer was shop applied. Verify compatibility with shop applied primer; provide tie coat as recommended by the paint manufacturer to bond with preprimed surfaces. 2. Sheen: Semi -gloss or satin sheen, unless indicated otherwise. 3. Applications: Use on hollow metal doors and frames (both interior and exterior surfaces), exterior wall louvers, roof hatches, and all exterior preprimed ferrous metal surfaces. C. Galvanized Metal - Epoxy/Urethane System: 1. System: Spray, brush or roller apply one coat epoxy primer, and two urethane finish coats in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Sheen: Semi -gloss or satin sheen, unless indicated otherwise. 3. Applications: Use on exterior bollards, exposed surfaces of brick relieving angles, exterior canopy steel frame, access doors, and all other all exterior galvanized metal surfaces. 3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING AND FINISHING SYSTEMS A. Gypsum Board - Latex System: 1. System: Three coats - first coat latex primer sealer (untinted), second and third coat latex paint, roller finish. 2. Sheen: Provide eggshell sheen, unless scheduled otherwise. Verify locations of each sheen with Architect before proceeding with work. 3. Applications: Use on all exposed gypsum board surfaces, unless specified otherwise. B. Gypsum Board - Surfaces to Receive Wall Covering: Apply one coat of acrylic wall sise. 09900-4 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 09900 - PAINTING C. Wood - Opaque Finish Alkyd/Latex System: 1. System: Three coats; first coat alkyd wood primer, and second and third coat acrylic latex enamel. 2. Sheen: Semi -gloss, unless indicated otherwise. 3. Application: Use on all wood trim indicated to receive opaque coating. D. Interior Wood -Stained System: 1. Filler and Sanding Sealer: Conform to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Stain: Sherwin-Williams, Wood Classics, and as scheduled on Drawings. 3. Sheen, Semi -gloss. 4. Application: Wood, except factory finished wood, as shown on Drawings. E. Ferrous Metal - Acrylic System: 1. System: Three coats; first coat DTM primer, second and third coats 100% acrylic latex enamel. Primer may be eliminated at pre -primed surfaces. 2. Sheen: Semi -gloss sheen, unless indicated otherwise. 3. Applications: Use on all interior ferrous metal surfaces including exposed steel surfaces including electrical panels, fire extinguisher cabinets, and access doors and panels 3.7 CLEANUP A. As the work proceeds and on completion of the work, promptly remove all sealers, primers, paints and finishes where spilled, splashed or splattered in a manner not to damage the surface from which it is removed. B. Remove masking. C. Clean, or replace with new, all lamps and electrical fixtures damaged by overspray; replace with new identical components all lighting fixture louvers and reflectors damaged by overspray. 3.8 COLOR AND SHEEN SCHEDULE A. Provide paint colors to match those indicated on the Drawings. Where a paint color is listed from a specific manufacturer, paint products from other approved manufacturers may be used, provided the color exactly matches the specified color, and the paint system meets the specified requirements. Where no paint color is indicated, provide color and sheen as selected by the Architect. END OF SECTION 09900-5 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 10536 - METAL AWNINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior metal awnings and frame. 2. Bidder design of support framing and attachments to adjacent construction. 3. Bidder design of panel and panel attachment to support framing. B. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. C. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Structural Design: 1. Design the support framing systems to withstand dead loads plus 25 Ibs per square foot live load with a maximum deflection of structural members of 1/180th the span. In addition, design the awning system to withstand positive and negative windloads of 25 Ibs per square foot with a maximum deflection of 1/180th the span of the framing members. 2. Attachment to structure shall include reinforcing as necessary to prevent overstressing of existing structure at attachment points. 3. Structural design shall be performed by a Structural Engineer licensed in the state where the Project is located. B. Sealing Design: Provide and design flashing or sealing systems to eliminate leakage at the intersection of the awnings and adjacent construction. Flashing systems shall be neat, unobtrusive and compatible with the adjacent construction. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Division 1. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, data sheets and installation instructions for the materials used. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate dimensions, layout, seam locations, anchorage to structure, flashing details, materials, sizes of framing members, and installation details. 2. Shop drawings shall be signed by a licensed Structural Engineer. D. Samples: Submit three samples of panel finish proposed for the panel faces, minimum 6 inches square. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A minimum of 3 years experience in the fabrication of awnings similar to the work of this project. B. Perform work in accordance with best trade practice which will insure a finished product of the highest quality obtainable within the trade. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace panels that show evidence of finish deterioration within 10 years from date of Substantial 10536-1 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 10536 - METAL AWNINGS Completion. Deterioration of finish includes, but is not limited to, color fade, chalking, cracking, peeling, and loss of film integrity. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Framing: 1. Extrusions: ASTM B221, 6063-T5 alloy and temper. 2. Sheet: ASTM B209, 5005-H32 alloy and temper. B. Awning Panels: Sheet aluminum panels with extruded aluminum framework, as follows: 1. Aluminum: a. Extrusions: ASTM B221, 6063-T5 alloy and temper. b. Sheet: ASTM B209, 5005-H32 alloy and temper. 2. Fabricated Panels: Factory finished aluminum sheet; minimum .125" thick. 3. Shop Finish: Minimum 70 percent resin Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 polyvinylidene fluoride system in accordance with AAMA 2605. 4. Color: Custom non -exotic color, as selected by the Architect. C. Accessories: 1. Fasteners: Aluminum or series 300 non-magnetic stainless steel. D. Support Framing Finish Materials: Where support framing is not factory -finished, provide the following: 1. Epoxy Primer: One of the following; color similar to finish coat. a. "Series 69 Epoxoline," by Tnemec. b. "Carboline 888." 2. Urethane Finish Coats: Semi -gloss or satin sheen; custom color for each item as selected by the Architect; one of the following, unless approved otherwise. a. "Series 75 "Endura-Shield III' Acrylic Polyurethane Enamel' by Tnemec (816-483-3400). b. "134HS" by Carboline. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Verify site dimensions prior to fabrication of awning frames. B. Frames: 1. Fabricate awning frames and supports from structural aluminum extrusions in the configurations indicated. 2. Provide welded joints, unless approved otherwise; remove burrs and sharp edges. All welds shall be continuous. Cap all open tube ends. 3. Finish: Prepare surfaces and apply one coat primer and two finish coats in accordance with the finish coat manufacturer's recommendations. C. Awnings: 1. Fabricate awnings in accordance with approved shop drawings. 2. Fabricate awning for secure attachment to framework. Use no attachment systems which would penetrate the composite panel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. 10536-2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 10536 - METAL AWNINGS B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install awning frames plumb, level, true and in proper alignment. After work is properly positioned, rigidly fasten in place. Use stainless steel fasteners. B. Securely fasten awnings to adjacent construction, using methods to prevent leakage. END OF SECTION 10536-3 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 10810 -TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Toilet and bath accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking. 2. 09111 - Lightgage Metal Support Framing: Perimeter wall construction; metal backing. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will not be considered. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturers product data, including a description of each item to be supplied, under provisions of Division 1. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver accessories to site until rooms in which they are to be installed are ready to receive them. B. Pack accessories individually in a manner to protect accessory and its finish. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCESSORIES A. Provide accessories as manufactured by Bobrick Washroom Equipment Company, unless otherwise indicated. B. Products in Restrooms: 1. Paper Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle: B-369. 2. Seat Cover Dispenser: B-3013 3. Toilet Paper Dispenser: B-3888 (Men's Room only) 4. Toilet Paper Dispenser/Sanitary Napkin Receptacle: B-35704 (Women's Room only) 5. Grab Bar: B-5806 6. Soap Dispenser: B-822 7. Coat Hook/Purse Hook: B-7672 8. Mirror: B-165 2436 C. Products in Breakroom: 1. Paper Towel Dispenser: B262 D. Products in Janitor: 1. Mop Hanger: B-223 E. Other Products: 1. Paper Cup Dispenser: Bradley Corporation, Atlanta GA (404/493-8811); Model 9495. 2. Install adjacent to water fountain when so indicated. 10810-1 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 10810 - TOILET ACCESSORIES i PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough -in frames to jobsite at appropriate time for building -in. B. Furnish templates and rough -in measurements as required. C. Before starting work notify Architect in writing of conflicts detrimental to installation or operation of units. D. Protect adjacent or adjoining finished surfaces from damage during installation of work of this Section. E. Verify exact location of accessories. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install true, plumb, and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. C. Use tamper -proof fasteners. END OF SECTION 10810-2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 10999 - MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Clear plastic corner guards. 2. Exterior metal access doors. 3. Fire extinguishers. 4. Fire extinguisher cabinets. 5. Plastic signs 6. Kitchen appliances. 7. Security key box. B. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. C. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Division 1. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Division 1. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data for each item specified. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. In accordance with Division 1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CORNER GUARDS A. Clear polycarbonate angle, 1/8" thick x 2-1/2" x 2-1/2" x 4'-0" long. Tri-Guards, Inc. TG4212, or approved; furnish with predrilled countersunk mounting holes and chrome plated oval head mounting screws. B. Installation: As indicated "PCG" on the Drawings; set bottom of corner guard flush with wall base. 2.2 EXTERIOR METAL ACCESS DOORS A. Type: Karp Associates, Inc., "DSB-123SD Security Access Door," Nystrom "HS-GMZ" or approved. 1. Size: 24 in x 24 in. 2. Frames: 3/16" x 2" x 2" angle welded with joints ground smooth; applied 1/8" x 1" x 1" stop on four sides.. 3. Door: 10 gauge steel plate. 4. Hinges: Provide fully concealed hinge(s). 5. Lock: prepared for interchangeable 5-pin cylinder lock, as specified in Section 08710. 6. Weatherstrip: Provide continuous seal as necessary to maintain assembly watertight when closed. 7. Finish: Factory primed for field finish with manufacturer's standard rust -inhibitive powder coat, color as indicated on the Drawings. 10999-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 10999 - MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 2.3 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS (FE): A. Dry Chemical Type - ABC Multi -purpose Type: 1. Type: Standard Fire -west Model ABC-5, Potter -Roemer Model No. 3005, Larsen's Manufacturing Company Model MPS, J.L. Industries Cosmic 5E, or approved. 2. 5 lb. capacity, UL rated 2A-10B:C, approximately 4-1/2 inch diameter x 14 inches high, baked enamel steel shell. 3. Agent: Ammonium Phosphate Base. , 4. Location: Provide at all fire extinguisher and fire extinguisher cabinet locations, unless noted otherwise. 2.4 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS (FEC): A. Allowed Products: Potter -Roemer, Inc. #7023-A, Larsen's Manufacturing Company #2409-R3-FG, J.L. Industries #1817-F-11. B. Style: Semi -recessed (approximately 2-1/2" projection); steel door with full glass insert. C. Finish: White baked enamel interior and doorframe. D. Lettering: Red lettering in vertical format. E. Submittal: Manufacturer's shop drawings including cabinet dimensions, finishes, door style and lettering. 2.5 PLASTIC SIGNS A. Type: Plastic signs, colors as scheduled. 1. Manufacturer: Best Sign Systems, or approved. 2. Text: As indicated. 3. Style/Size: Helvetica Medium; minimum 5/8" high. 4. Submit sign for approval. B. Schedule 1. At each toilet room door: Handicap graphic; "MEN" or "WOMEN" as appropriate; manufacturer's standard "#140 Blue" color with white letters; accompanied with Grade 2 Braille symbol; mounting location as indicated. 2. "Employees Only" on interior doors where indicated on the Drawings; Pantone PMS 262C with white letters; mount at +66" AFF; mounting location as indicated. C. Mounting: 1. Install signage as referenced in the Graphics Schedule and other items as specified below. 2. Graphics shall be mounted level and plumb and in accurate alignment, unless indicated otherwise. 3. Use templates for proper alignment and spacing. 4. Where screw mounting is indicated over gypsum board surfaces, use hollow wall screw anchors or similar anchor devices. 5. Where double stick tape is used for mounting, the tape shall not be visible in the installed position. 2.6 VINYL SIGNS: A. Type: Pressure sensitive adhesive back; machine blade cut; custom colors as scheduled. 1. Text: As indicated. 2. Style/Size: Helvetica Medium; 1" high, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Submit sign for approval. B. Schedule: 1. Suite Numbers: 3" high individual letters; text and color as directed by Architect. 10999-2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 10999 - MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 2. At Entry doors in UBC jurisdictions: "This door to remain unlocked during business hours;" single sign at each entry; size as required; Pantone PMS 262C with white letters. 3. At Entry doors in other jurisdictions: Wording as indicated, or verify with local code authority for correct wording of sign if wording not indicated; Pantone PMS 262C with white letters. 4. "Emergency Exit Only" on rear exterior door (where applies); Pantone PMS 262C with white letters; mount at +66" AFF. C. Mounting: 1. Adhere by removing protective backing sheet and pressing firmly to surface, following accurate spacing. 2. Remove all residue around letters, wipe clean. 2.7 LOUNGE/FIXTURES AND APPLIANCES: A. Install Owner furnished appliances, including refrigerator, microwave oven, and coffee maker, as scheduled on the Drawings. 2.8 SECURITY KEY BOX A. Lund Equipment Company, Bath OH (330/659-4800) 1. Deluxe Wall Key Cabinet 2. Capacity: 60 keys 3. Model: #1201, Dual Lock, keyed alike. B. Provide 15 keys, numbered sequentially starting at "1". C. Stamp "Do Not Duplicate" on all keys. D. Stamp FC Number on all keys. Coordinate FC Number with Owner's Project Director. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. C. Install each item in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, as detailed, and in accordance with special requirements of each article. END OF SECTION 10999-3 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 12491 - HORIZONTAL BLINDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Horizontal window blinds with accessories for attachment. B. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. C. Substitutions: No substitute products will be considered. I ' 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. In accordance with Division 1. 1.3 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Do not install blinds before painting in the immediate area is complete. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 BLINDS A. Levolor Home Fashions, High Point N.C. (800/232-2028), "Riviera Contract 1" Blind, or similar by Springs Window Fashions Division, Montgomery PA (800/5444749); horizontal blinds with slats; tilter with wand and disengaging clutch mechanism; cord lock with "crash proof' safety feature; cord lock and titter locations as directed; factory -painted; color Levolor #34 "Brushed Aluminum" with Dustguard". PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install window blinds in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Secure with concealed fasteners where possible. C. Adjust blinds for smooth operation. END OF SECTION 12491-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO - SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 13852 — FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL A. SECTION INCLUDES. 1. Fire alarm control panels. 2. Manual fire alarm stations. 3. Automatic smoke and heat detectors. 4. Fire alarm signaling appliances. 5. Auxiliary fire alarm equipment. B. REFERENCES: 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 1999. 2. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code; National Fire Protection Association; 1999. 3. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire Protection Association; 2000. C. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: 1. The Fire Alarm Contractor shall furnish and install all fire alarm work as required by any one of the following criteria: a. The Landlord's Tenant Criteria Manual - The Fire Alarm Contractor must obtain a copy of the Landlord's Tenant Criteria Manual prior to submitting a bid for the work under this contract. Failure to obtain the Landlord's Tenant Criteria Manual will not be cause for consideration of additional compensation for any work that arises out of the Contractor's failure to obtain this document. b. Any local or national code requirements. c. Any site specific criteria indicated on the Electrical Drawings. 2. It is not the intent of this section to require the installation of a new fire alarm system in an existing tenant space or building which does not currently have a fire alarm system or the rough -in for a fire alarm system. This section only applies to those spaces where a fire alarm system is present in an existing tenant space or is roughed in by the landlord for tenant installation of fire alarm components. 3. Fire Alarm System: NFPA 72, manual and automatic local fire alarm system with connections to municipal system, Landlord's system or central station. D. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1. Conform to requirements of NFPA 72, NFPA 70 and NFPA 101. 2. Products: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. or Factory Mutual as suitable for purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. MAINTENANCE SERVICE: 1. Furnish service and maintenance of fire alarm system for one year from Date of Substantial Completion. B. FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION CONTROL PANEL: 1. Control Panel: Modular construction with flush wall -mounted enclosure. 2. Power supply: Adequate to serve control panel modules, remote detectors, remote annunciators, smoke dampers, and relays, and alarm signaling devices. Include battery -operated emergency power supply with capacity for operating system in standby mode for 24 hours followed by alarm mode for 5 minutes. 3. System Supervision: Component or power supply failure places system in trouble mode. 13852 - 1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO - SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 13852 — FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 4. Initiating Device Circuits: Supervised zone module with alarm and trouble indication; occurrence of single ground or open condition places circuit in trouble mode but does not disable that circuit from initiating an alarm. 5. Indicating Appliance Circuits: Supervised signal module, sufficient for signal devices connected to system; occurrence of single ground or open condition places circuit in trouble mode but does not disable that circuit from signaling an alarm. 6. Remote Station Signal Transmitter: Electrically supervised, capable of transmitting alarm and trouble signals over telephone lines to central station receiver. 7. Provide TROUBLE ACKNOWLEDGE, DRILL, and ALARM SILENCE switch. 8. Alarm Reset: System remains in alarm mode until manually reset with key -accessible reset function; system resets only if initiating circuits are out of alarm mode. 9. Lamp Test: Manual lamp test function causes alarm indication at each zone at fire alarm control panel at annunciator panel. C. INITIATING DEVICES: 1. Manual Station: Semi -Flush mounted, coded type, single action manual station with break -glass rod. 2. Provide manufacturer's standard back box. 3. Spot Heat Detector: Fixed temperature, rated 135 degrees F (57 degrees C) and temperature rate of rise of 15 degrees F (8.3 degrees C). 4. Ceiling Mounted Smoke Detector: NFPA 72, photoelectric type with visual indication of detector actuation, adjustable sensitivity, plug-in base, and auxiliary relay contact, suitable for mounting on 4 inch (102 mm) outlet box. Provide power supply and signal circuits. 5. Duct Mounted Smoke Detector: NFPA 72, photoelectric type with auxiliary SPDT relay contact, key -operated NORMAL -RESET -TEST switch, duct sampling tubes extending width of duct, and visual indication of detector actuation, in duct -mounted housing. Provide power supply and signal circuits. D. SIGNALING APPLIANCES: 1. Alarm Lights: NFPA 72, minimum 75 candela, ADA Compliant strobe lamp and flasher with white lettered "FIRE" on red faceplate. Synchronize all flashers. 2. Alarm Horn: NFPA 72, flush type fire alarm horn. a. Sound Rating: 87 dB at 10 feet (3M). b. Provide integral NFPA 72, minimum 75 candela, ADA Complaint strobe lamp and flasher with white lettered "FIRE" on red faceplate. Synchronize all flashers. E. FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE 1. Fire Alarm Power Branch Circuits: Building wire as specified in Section 16123. 2. Initiating Device and Indicating Appliance Circuits: Building wire as specified in Section 16123. PART 3 - EXECUTION A. INSTALLATION: 1. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Install manual stations with operating handle 4 feet (1.2 M) above floor. Install audible and visual signal devices 6.67 feet (2.0 M) above floor. 3. Use 16 AWG minimum size conductors for fire alarm detection and 14 AWG signal circuit conductors. Install wiring in conduit. 4. Make conduit and wiring connections to fire suppression system control panels and duct smoke detectors. 5. Automatic Detector Installation: Conform to NFPA 72. 13852 - 2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO - SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 13852 — FIRE ALARM SYSTEM B. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: 1. Test in accordance with NFPA 72. C. FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE COLOR CODE: 1. Provide fire alarm circuit conductors with insulation color coded as follows, or using colored tape at each conductor termination and in each junction box. 2. Power Branch Circuit Conductors: Black, red, white. 3. Initiating Device Circuit: Black, red. 4. Detector Power Supply: Violet, brown. 5. Signal Device Circuit: Blue (positive), white (negative). 13852 - 3 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO - SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 13910 — FIRE PROTECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL A. SECTION INCLUDES: 1. Pipe, fittings, valves, and connections for sprinkler systems. 2. The scope of work includes any and all modifications of the existing fire sprinkler system required to accommodate the remodeled configuration of the bank. Adjustments shall be made to the number and locations of fire sprinkler heads as required to provide complete NFPA 13 compliance within the remodeled bank. All fire sprinkler work shall be completed in accordance with the Landlord's Tenant Criteria Manual by a Landlord approved Fire Sprinkler Contractor. No exceptions. 3. It is not the intent of this section to require the installation of a new fire sprinkler system in an existing tenant space or building which does not currently have fire sprinkler protection or the rough -in for fire sprinkler protection. This section only applies to those spaces where a fire sprinkler protection system is present in an existing tenant space or is roughed in by the landlord for tenant sprinkler installation. B. REFERENCES: 1. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 1999. 2. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. C. SUBMITTALS 1. See Section 01300 — Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. 2. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings. 3. Shop Drawings: Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor and wall penetration seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and support details, and piping connections. 4. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and tag numbering. 5. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions and spare parts lists. D. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1. Conform to UL requirements. 2. Sprinkler Systems: Conform work to NFPA 13. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. GENERAL SYSTEM AND PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS: 1. Sprinkler Systems: Conform work to NFPA 13. B. ABOVE GROUND PIPING: 1. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53 Schedule 40, ASTM A 135 Schedule 10, or ASTM A 135 UL listed light wall type, black. a. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B16.1, flanges and flanged fittings and ASME B16.4, threaded fittings. b. Malleable Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, threaded fittings. C. PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: 1. Conform to NFPA 13. 13910 - 1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 13910 — FIRE PROTECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 3 - EXECUTION A. INSTALLATION: 1. Install sprinkler system and service main piping, hangers, and supports in accordance with NFPA 13. 2. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient. 3. Install piping to conserve building space, to not interfere with use of space and other work. 4. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls, and floors. 5. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. 6. Pipe Hangers and Supports: a. Install in accordance with NFPA 13. 7. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level. END OF SECTION 13910 - 2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO - SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 13925 — FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS PART 1 - GENERAL A. SECTION INCLUDES: 1. Wet -pipe sprinkler system. 2. System design, installation, and certification. B. SYSTEM DESIGN: 1. The scope of work includes any and all modifications of the existing fire sprinkler system required to accommodate the remodeled configuration of the bank. Adjustments shall be made to the number and locations of fire sprinkler heads as required to provide complete NFPA 13 compliance within the remodeled bank. All fire sprinkler work shall be completed in accordance with the Landlord's Tenant Criteria Manual by a Landlord approved Fire Sprinkler Contractor. No exceptions. 2. It is not the intent of this section to require the installation of a new fire sprinkler system in an existing tenant space or building which does not currently have fire sprinkler protection or the rough -in for fire sprinkler protection. This section only applies to those spaces where a fire sprinkler protection system is present in an existing tenant space or is roughed in by the landlord for tenant sprinkler installation. 3. Coordinate with work of all other trades as indicated in the Documents, including location of Mechanical and Electrical equipment, to ensure that intent of Contract Documents is maintained. C. REFERENCES: 1. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 1999. 2. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. D. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: 1. System to provide coverage for the entire tenant space. The scope of this contract shall include any and all modifications to the existing NFPA 13 fire sprinkler system necessary to accommodate the interior remodeling of the bank. 2. Interface system with the building fire alarm and smoke control system as required by the Landlord's Tenant Criteria Manual. E. SUBMITTALS: 1. See Section 01300 — Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. 2. Product Data: Provide data on sprinklers, valves, and specialties, including manufacturers catalog information. Submit performance ratings, rough -in details, weights, support requirements, and piping connections. 3. Shop Drawings: a. Submit preliminary layout of finished ceiling areas indicating only sprinkler locations coordinated with ceiling installation. b. Indicate hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, sprinklers, components and accessories. Indicate system controls. c. Submit shop drawings to authority having jurisdiction for approval. Submit proof of approval to Architect. 4. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of sprinklers and deviations of piping from drawings. Indicate drain and test locations. 5. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that system has been tested and meets or exceeds specified requirements and code requirements. 13925 - 1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 13925 — FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1. Conform to UL requirements. 2. Design system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed at the place where the Project is located. 3. Equipment and Components: Provide products that bear UL label or marking. 4. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. SPRINKLERS: 1. Suspended Ceiling Type: All sprinkler heads in Financial Center or other public accessible areas shall be concealed pendant type with matching push on escutcheon plate. a. Finish: Enamel, color bright white in all acoustical ceiling areas. Satin chrome plated in all translucent panels and purple soffit areas. b. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type temperature rated for specific area hazard. 2. Suspended Ceiling Type: All sprinkler heads in non-public accessible areas (back of house) shall be Semi -recessed pendant type with matching push on escutcheon plate. a. Finish: Chrome Plated. b. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type temperature rated for specific area hazard. 3. Exposed Area Type: Standard upright type with guard. a. Finish: Brass. b. fusible Link: Fusible solder link type temperature rated for specific area hazard. PART 3 - EXECUTION A. INSTALLATION: 1. Install in accordance with referenced NFPA design and installation standard. 2. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work. 4. Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings. 5. Center sprinklers in ceiling system and arrange symmetrically with other ceiling appurtenances. Where the drawings show sprinkler head layouts, variation from the layouts shown must be approved by the Architect prior to installation. END OF SECTION 13925 - 2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 15072 - VIBRATION ISOLATION PART 1 GENERAL A. SECTION INCLUDES 1. Vibration isolators. 2. Seismic restraints. (Where required by local codes.) PART 2 PRODUCTS A. VIBRATION ISOLATORS 1. Open Spring Isolators: a. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. Color code springs for load carrying capacity. b. Spring Mounts: Provide with leveling devices, minimum 0.25 inch (6 mm) thick neoprene sound pads, and zinc chromate plated hardware. c. Sound Pads: Size for minimum deflection of 0.05 inch (1.2 mm); meet requirements for neoprene pad isolators. 2. Spring Hanger: a. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. Color code springs for load carrying capacity. b. Housings: Incorporate neoprene isolation pad meeting requirements for neoprene pad isolators. c. Misalignment: Capable of 20 degree hanger rod misalignment. 3. Neoprene Pad Isolators: a. Rubber or neoprene waffle pads. 1) Hardness: 30 durometer. 2) Thickness: Minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm). 3) Maximum Loading: 50 psi (345 kPa). 4) Rib Height: Maximum 0.7 times width. 4. Rubber Mount or Hanger: Molded rubber designed for 0.4 inch (10 mm) deflection with threaded insert. 5. Seismic Snubbers: a. Type: Non -directional and double acting unit consisting of interlocking steel members restrained by neoprene elements. b. Elements: Replaceable neoprene, minimum of 0.75 inch (18 mm) thick with minimum 1/8 inch (3 mm) air gap. c. Capacity: 4 times load assigned to mount groupings at 0.4 inch (10 mm) deflection. d. Attachment Points and Fasteners: Capable of withstanding 3 times rated load capacity of seismic snubber. PART 3 EXECUTION A. INSTALLATION 1. Support piping connections to equipment mounted on isolators using isolators or resilient hangers to nearest flexible pipe connector. END OF SECTION 15072 - 1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 15082 - PIPING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL A. SECTION INCLUDES 1. Piping insulation. 2. Jackets and accessories. B. REFERENCES 1. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 1999. 2. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 1995. 3. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 1996. 4. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 1996. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723. B. GLASS FIBER 1. Insulation: ASTM C 547 and ASTM C 795; semi -rigid, noncombustible, end grain adhered to jacket. a. 'K' ('Ksi') value: ASTM C 177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F (0.035 at 24 degrees C). b. Maximum service temperature: 650 degrees F (343 degrees C). c. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. 2. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film; moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96 of 0.02 perm -inches (0.029 ng/Pa s m). 3. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: a. Compatible with insulation. C. FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION 1. Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying with ASTM C 534; use molded tubular material wherever possible. a. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive. PART 3 EXECUTION A. INSTALLATION 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. 3. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. 4. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: a. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory -applied or field -applied. Secure with self- sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic. b. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers. 15082 - 1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP' PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 15082 - PIPING INSULATION 5. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature: a. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory -applied or field - applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples. b. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers. 6. Inserts and Shields: a. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches (40 mm) diameter or larger. b. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. c. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish, jacket. d. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches (150 mm) long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. e. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range. 7. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, provide approved fire stopping system meeting the fire resistive rating of the separation. 1 B. SCHEDULES 1. The insulation thicknesses specified herein shall be considered minimum acceptable standards. Where local code or applicable energy code requirements exceed the minimum requirements contained herein, the applicable code requirements shall take precedence. 2. Plumbing Systems: a. Domestic Cold Water Supply: 1) Glass Fiber Insulation: a) Pipe Size Range: All b) Thickness:1/2" b. Domestic Hot Water & Recirculation: i 1) Glass Fiber Insulation: a) Pipe Size Range: All. b) Thickness:1/2". END OF SECTION 15082 - 2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 15086 - DUCT INSULATION PART1 GENERAL A. SECTION INCLUDES 1. Duct insulation. 2. Duct Liner. B. REFERENCES 1, ASTM C 518 - Standard Test Method for Steady -State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 1998. 2. ASTM C 1071 - Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material); 1998. 3. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 1999. 4. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 1995. 5. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 1996. 6. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 1995, Second Edition with Addendum No. 1. 7. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 1996. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723. B. GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE 1. Insulation: ASTM C 553; flexible, noncombustible blanket. a. 'K' ('Ksi') value: 0.31 at 75 degrees F (0.045 at 24 degrees C), when tested in accordance with ASTM C 518. b. Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F (121 degrees C). c. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.20 percent by volume. 2. Vapor Barrier Jacket: a. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. b. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E 96; 0.02 perm. c. Secure with pressure sensitive tape. 3. Vapor Barrier Tape: a. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive. C. DUCT LINER 1. Insulation: Incombustible glass fiber complying with ASTM C 1071; flexible blanket, rigid board, and preformed round liner board; with poly vinyl acetate polymer impregnated surface and edge coat. a. Apparent Thermal Conductivity: Maximum of 0.31 at 75 degrees F (0.045 at 24 degrees C). b. Service Temperature: Up to 250 degrees F (121 degrees C). c. Rated Velocity on Coated Air Side for Air Erosion: 5,000 fpm (25.4 m/s), minimum. d. Minimum Noise Reduction Coefficients: e. 1 inch (25 mm) Thickness: 0.45. 15086 - 1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD j SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 15086 - DUCT INSULATION 2. Adhesive: Waterproof, fire -retardant type. 3. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, self-adhesive pad with integral head. PART 3 EXECUTION A. INSTALLATION 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Insulated ducts conveying air below ambient temperature: a. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets. b. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket. c. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. d. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. 3. Insulated ducts conveying air above ambient temperature: a. Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket. b. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of insulation. 4. External Duct Insulation Application: a. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor barrier adhesive or tape to match jacket. b. Secure insulation without vapor barrier with staples, tape, or wires. c. Install without sag on underside of duct. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners where necessary to prevent sagging. Lift duct off trapeze hangers and insert spacers. d. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive. Use of adhesive pins is not permitted. e. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without disturbing wrapping. 5. Duct Liner Application: a. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Refer to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible for spacing. b. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse joints. c. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive. d. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow. Increase duct size to allow for insulation thickness. B. SCHEDULES 1. The insulation thicknesses specified herein shall be considered minimum acceptable standards. Where local code or applicable energy code requirements exceed the minimum requirements contained herein, the applicable code requirements shall take precedence. 2. Supply Ducts: a. Rectangular, Low Velocity: 1" Duct Liner. b. Round, Low Velocity: 1-1/2" Flexible Glass Fiber Duct Wrap. 3. Return and Relief Ducts: a. Rectangular: 1" Duct Liner. b. Round: None. 4. Ducts Exposed to Outdoors or Unconditioned Spaces: As scheduled above plus 3" Fiberglass duct wrap with vapor barrier jacket and external sheet metal jacket. Gauge of external jacket shall comply with ductwork construction specifications. END OF SECTION 15086 - 2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO - SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 15145 - PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 GENERAL A. SECTION INCLUDES 1. Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems. a. Sanitary sewer. b. Domestic water. c. Storm water. d. Gas. B. REFERENCES 1. ANSI Z21.22 - American National Standard for Relief Valves and Automatic Gas Shutoff Devices for Hot Water Supply Systems; 1999. 2. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1998. 3. ASME B16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1999. 4. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1984, Reaffirmed 1994 (ANSI B16.18). 5. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1995, 1998 Addenda. 6. ASME B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1992. 7. ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1988. 8. ASME 616.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1994. 9. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1998 ANSI/ASME B31.1). 10, ASME B31.2 - Fuel Gas Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1968. 11. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1996 (ANSI/ASME B31.9). 12. ASME (BPV IV) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV - Rules for Construction . of Heating Boilers; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1998. 13. ASTM A 53/A 53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated, Welded and Seamless; 1999b. 14, ASTM A 74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 1998. 15, ASTM A 234/A 234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service; 1999. 16. ASTM B 32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 1996. 17. ASTM B 42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes; 1998. 18. ASTM B 75 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube; 1999. 19. ASTM B 88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 1999. 20. ASTM B 88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric); 1999. 21. ASTM B 306 - Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV); 1999. 22. ASTM C 425 - Standard Specification for Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Fittings; 1998b. 23. ASTM C 564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 1997. 24. ASTM C 700 - Standard Specification for Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength, and Perforated; 1999. 25, ASTM D 1785 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120; 1999. 15145 - 1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO - SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 15145 - PLUMBING PIPING 26. ASTM D 2466 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40; 1999. 27. ASTM D 2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) PVC) Plastic Piping Systems; 1996a. 28, ASTM D 2665 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings; 1998. 29, ASTM D 2729 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 1996a. 30, ASTM D 3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 1998. 31. ASTM F 477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe; 1999a. 32. ASTM F 708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers; 1992 (Reapproved 1997). 33. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains; American Water Works Association; 1999 ANSI/AWWA C651). 34. CISPI 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste and Vent Piping Applications; Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; 1997. 35. CISPI 310 - Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications; Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; 1997. 36. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 1993. 37. MSS SP-69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 1996. 38. MSS SP-80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 1997. 39. MSS SP-85 - Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 1994. 40. MSS SP-89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 1998. 41. MSS SP-110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket -Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 1996. 42. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code; National Fire Protection Association; 1999. C. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Perform Work in accordance with State of Georgi , standards. 2. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. 3. Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification, ASTM specification, potable water certification, water pressure rating. D. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1. Perform Work in accordance with all applicable National, State and Local Codes of the location of the project. 2. Conform to applicable code for installation of backflow prevention devices. 3. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of installation of backflow prevention devices. E. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION 1. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. 15145 - 2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 15145 - PLUMBING PIPING 2. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. 3. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. 4. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. F. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 1. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET (1500 mm) OF BUILDING 1. Vitrified Clay Pipe: ASTM C 700, Standard Strength. a. Fittings: Clay. b. Joints: Bell -and -spigot, with ASTM C 425 compression joint device. 2. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 3034 SDR 35. (Where permitted by local code.) a. Fittings: PVC. b. Joints: Push -on, using ASTM F 477 elastomeric gaskets. B. SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET (1500 mm) OF BUILDING 1. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 74 service weight. a. Fittings: Cast iron. b. Joints: Hub -and -spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C 564 neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum. 2. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665 or ASTM D 3034. (Where permitted by local code.) a. Fittings: PVC. b. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement. C. SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE 1. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 74, service weight. a. Fittings: Cast iron. b. Joint Seals: ASTM C 564 neoprene gaskets, or lead and oakum. 2. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight. a. Fittings: Cast iron. b. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp -and -shield assemblies. 3. Copper Tube: ASTM B 306, DWV. a. Fittings: ASME B16.29, wrought copper, or ASME B16.32, sovent. b. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn50 solder. 4. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2729. (Where permitted by local code and not located in plenum return air ceilings.) a. Fittings: PVC. b. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement. D. WATER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET (1500 mm) OF BUILDING 1. Copper Pipe: ASTM B 42, hard drawn. a. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and bronze. b. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn95 solder. E. WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET (1500 mm) OF BUILDING 1. Copper Pipe: ASTM B 42, hard drawn. a. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and 15145 - 3 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD,,FLORIDA SECTION 15145 - PLUMBING PIPING bronze. b. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn95 solder. F. WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE 1. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 88M), Type L (B), Drawn (H). a. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze. b. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy lead free for all pipe 2"' and smaller, sil/fos or Phasco for all 2 1/2" and larger and for all below grade locations solder. All flux shall be non corrosive type. G. STORM WATER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET (1500 mm) OF BUILDING 1. Vitrified Clay Pipe: ASTM C 700 standard strength. a. Fittings: Clay. b. Joints: Bell -and -spigot, with ASTM C 425 compression joint device of either lead and oakum, neoprene gasket system, or neoprene gasket and clamp system. 2. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 3034 SDR 35. (Where permitted by local code.) a. Fittings: PVC. b. Joints: Push -on, using ASTM F 477 elastomeric gaskets. H. STORM WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET (1500 mm) OF BUILDING 1. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 74 service weight. a. Fittings: Cast iron. b.s20 Joint Seals: ASTM C 564 neoprene gaskets, or lead and oakum. 2. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665 or ASTM D 3034. (Where permitted by local code.) a. Fittings: PVC. b. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement. I. STORM WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE 1. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 74 service weight. a. Fittings: Cast iron. b. Joint Seals: ASTM C 564 neoprene gaskets, or lead and oakum. 2. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665 or ASTM D 3034. (Where permitted by local code.) a. Fittings: PVC. b. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement. J. NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE 1. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M Schedule 40 black. a. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A 234/A 234M, wrought steel welding type. b. Joints: NFPA 54, threaded or welded to ASME B31.1. 2. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 88M), Type K (A) or L (B) annealed. a. Fittings: ASME B16.26, cast bronze. b. Joints: Flared. K. FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS 1. Unions for Pipe Sizes 3 Inches (80 mm) and Under: a. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions. b. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints. 2. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. Electrolysis protection is required between all ferrous and non-ferrous metals. Gasket selection shall take into account the temperature of the piping system and the media being transfered. Gaskets on 15145 - 4 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 15145 - PLUMBING PIPING dielectric unions shall be EPDM for all glycol systems, not butyl rubber or Teflon. For small pipe supports on Uni-Strut, utilize Hydra-Zorb. L. PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 1. Plumbing Piping - Drain, Waste, and Vent: a. Conform to ASME B31.9. b. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch (15 mm) to 1-1/2 Inches (40 mm): Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. c. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches (50 mm) and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. d. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. e. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches (80 mm): Cast iron hook. f. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches (100 mm) and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. g. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. h. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. i. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. 2. Plumbing Piping - Water: a. Conform to ASME B31.9. b. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch (15 mm) to 1-1/2 Inches (40 mm): Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. c. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches (50 mm) and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. d. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded supports or spacers and hanger rods. e. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches (150 mm) and Over: Steel channels with welded supports or spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll. f. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches (80 mm): Cast iron hook. g. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches (100 mm) and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. h. Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches (150 mm) and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron pipe roll. i. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. j. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. M. BALL VALVES 1. Construction, 4 Inches (100 mm) and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150,400 psi (2760 kPa) CWP, bronze, two piece body, chrome plated brass ball, regular port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle with balancing stops, solder ends with union. N. PLUG VALVES 1. Construction 2-1/2 Inches (65 mm) and Smaller: MSS SP-78, 175 psi (1200 kPa) CWP, cast iron body and plug, pressure lubricated, Teflon or Buna N packing, threaded ends. Provide wrench operator. O. WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES 1. Up to 2 Inches (50 mm): a. MSS SP-80, bronze body, stainless steel and thermoplastic internal parts, fabric reinforced diaphragm, strainer, threaded single union ends. 2. Over 2 Inches (50 mm): 15145 - 5 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 15145 - PLUMBING PIPING a. MSS SP-85, cast iron body, bronze fitted, elastomeric diaphragm and seat disc, flanged. P. RELIEF VALVES 1. Temperature and Pressure Relief: a. AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, temperature relief maximum 210 degrees F 98.9 degrees C), capacity ASME (BPV IV) certified and labelled. Q. FIRE STOP SYSTEMS 1. General Purpose Fire Stopping Sealant: a. Water based, nonslumping, premixed sealant with intumescent properties, rated for 3 hours per ASTM E 814 and UL 1479. 2. General Purpose Vibration Resistant Fire $topping Sealant: a. Silicone based, nonslumping, premixed sealant with intumescent properties, vibration and moisture resistant, rated for 3 hours per ASTM E 814 and UL 1479, 3. Plastic Pipe Systems Fire Stopping Sealant: a. Silicone based, premixed sealant with intumescent properties, vibration and moisture resistant, rated for 3 hours per ASTM E 814 and UL 1479 with metal collars. PART 3 EXECUTION A. EXAMINATION 1. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over -excavated. B. PREPARATION 1. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. 2. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. 3. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. C. INSTALLATION , 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Provide non -conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. 3. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. 4. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space. 5. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. 6. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. 7. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 15082. 8. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. 9. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than two ft 0,6 m) of cover, or as required by local code. 10. Install vent piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly. All roof penetrations shall be performed by the Landlord's approved roofing contractor. Cost of roof penetrations shall be included in the Mechanical Contractor's bid. 11. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies. 12. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream. 13. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. 14. Install water piping to ASME B31.9. 15145 - 6 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 15145 - PLUMBING PIPING 15. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors. 16. Pipe Hangers and Supports: a. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9, ASTM F 708, and MSS SP-89. b. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. c. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch (15 mm) space between finished covering and adjacent work. d. Place hangers within 12 inches (300 mm) of each horizontal elbow. e. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. f. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. g. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping. h. Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint. D. APPLICATION • 1. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. 2. Install ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. 3. Provide plug valves in natural gas systems for shut-off service. E. ERECTION TOLERANCES 1. Drainage Piping: Establish invert elevations within 1/2 inch (10 mm) vertically of location indicated and slope to drain at minimum of 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) slope. 2. Water Piping: Slope at minimum of 1/32 inch per foot (1:400) and arrange to drain at low points. F. DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM 1. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean. 2. Ensure Ph of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric). 3. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual. 4. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets. 5. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. 6. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. 7. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L. 8. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651. G. SERVICE CONNECTIONS 1. Provide new sanitary sewer services. Before commencing work check invert elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing. 2. Provide new water service complete with approved water meter with by-pass valves, pressure reducing valve, and sand strainer. 3. Provide new gas service complete with gas meter and regulators. Gas service distribution piping to have initial minimum pressure of 7 inch wg (1.75 kPa kPa). Provide regulators on each line serving gravity type appliances, sized in accordance with equipment. H. SCHEDULES 15145 - 7 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD j SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 15145 - PLUMBING PIPING 1. Pipe Hanger Spacing: a. Metal Piping: 1) Pipe size: 1/2 inches (15 mm) to 1-1/4 inches (32 mm): a) Maximum hanger spacing: 6.5 ft (2 m). b) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inches (9 mm). 2) Pipe size: 1-1/2 inches (40 mm) to 2 inches (50 mm): a) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft (3 m). b) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inch (9 mm). 3) Pipe size: 2-1/2 inches (65 mm) to 3 inches (75 mm): a) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft (3 m). b) Hanger rod diameter: 1/2 inch (13 mm). b. Plastic Piping: 1) Pipe size: 2 inches (50 mm) and Larger: 232a) Maximum hanger spacing: 6 It (1.8 m). b) Hanger rod diameter: 1/2 inch (12 mm). c) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inch (9 mm). END OF SECTION 0 15145 - 8 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 15146 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL A. SECTION INCLUDES 1. Floor drains. 2. Cleanouts. 3. Hydrants. 4. Backflow preventers. 5. Water hammer arrestors. B. REFERENCES 1. ASME Al 12.21.2M - Roof Drains; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1991 (R1998). 2. ASME Al 12,26.1 M - Water Hammer Arrestors; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1984. 3. ASSE 1013 - Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced Pressure Fire Protection Principle Backflow Preventers; American Society of Sanitary Engineering; 1999. C. SUBMITTALS 1. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. 2. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough -in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. 3. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views. D. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with not less than three years documented experience. E. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION 1. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage. F. EXTRA MATERIALS 1. See Section 01600 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Supply for Owner's use in maintenance of project: a. Two loose keys for outside hose bibbs. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. DRAINS 1. Roof Drains: See plans for specifications. 2. Roof Overflow Drains: See plans for specifications. 3. Floor Drains: See plans for specifications. B. CLEANOUTS / 1. Cleanouts at Exterior Surfaced Areas: See plans for specifications. 2. Cleanouts at Exterior Unsurfaced Areas: See plans for specifications. 3. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Floor Areas: See plans for specifications. 4. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Wall Areas: See plans for specifications. 5. Cleanouts at Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas: Calked or threaded type. Provide bolted stack cleanouts on vertical rainwater leaders. 15146 - 1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 15146 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES C. HOSE BIBBS 1. Interior Hose Bibbs: a. Bronze or brass with integral mounting flange, replaceable hexagonal disc, hose thread spout, chrome plated where exposed with handwheel, integral vacuum breaker in conformance with ASSE 1011. D. HYDRANTS 1. Wall Hydrants: See plans for specifications. E. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS 1. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: a. ASSE 1013; bronze body with bronze internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve located between check valves; third check valve that opens under back pressure in case of diaphragm failure; non -threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves, strainer, and four test cocks. F. DOUBLE CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLIES 1. Double Check Valve Assemblies: a. ASSE 1012; Bronze body with corrosion resistant internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating check valves with intermediate atmospheric vent. G. WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS 1. Water Hammer Arrestors: a. Stainless steel construction, bellows type sized in accordance with PDI-WH 2O1, precharged suitable for operation in temperature range-100 to 300 degrees F (-73 to 149 degrees C) and maximum 250 psi (1700 kPa) working pressure. PART 3 EXECUTION A. INSTALLATION 4 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system. 3. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade. 4. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor. 5. Install approved potable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination of domestic water may occur; on boiler feed water lines, janitor rooms, fire sprinkler systems, premise isolation, irrigation systems, flush valves, interior and exterior hose bibs. 6. Pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain. 7. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and cold water supply piping to lavatories sinks and toilets. END OF SECTION 15146 - 2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO - SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 15186 - REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section Includes 1. Piping. 2. Refrigerant. B. Related Sections 1. Section 15082 - Piping Insulation. C. References 1. ASHRAE Std 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 1994. 2. ASHRAE Std 34 - Number Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 1997, and latest addenda. 3. ASME (BPV VIII, 1) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1 - Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1998. 4. ASME (BPV IX) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding and Brazing Qualifications; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1998. 5. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1995, 1998 Addenda. 6. ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1992. 7. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1996 ANSI/ASME B31.9). 8. ASTM B 280 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service; 1999. 9. AWS A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding; American Welding Society; 1992. D. System Description 1. Where more than one piping system material is specified ensure system components are compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system is not jeopardized. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided. 2. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.5 unless indicated otherwise. E. Quality Assurance 1. Installer: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section, with minimum five years of documented experience. F. Regulatory Requirements 1. Conform to ASME B31.9 for installation of piping system. 2. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME (BPV IX) and applicable state labor regulations. 3. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME (BPV IX). G. Delivery, Storage, And Handling 1. Deliver and store piping and specialties in shipping containers with labeling in place. 2. Protect piping and specialties from entry of contaminating material by leaving end caps and plugs in place until installation. 3. Dehydrate and charge components such as piping and receivers, seal prior to shipment, until connected into system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Piping 1. Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, H58 hard drawn or 060 soft annealed. 15186-1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 15186 - REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES a. Fittings: ASME 616.22 wrought copper. b. Joints: Braze, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy. 2. Pipe Supports and Anchors: a. Conform to ASME B31.5. b. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch (13 to 38 mm): Malleable iron adjustable swivel, split ring. c. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. d. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. e. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. f. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. g. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded. B. Refrigerant 1. Refrigerant: ASHRAE Std 34; a. R-22: Monochlorodifluoromethane. PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Preparation 1. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. 2. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. 3. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. B. Installation 1. Install refrigeration specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Route piping in orderly manner, with plumbing parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient. 3. Install piping to conserve building space and avoid interference with use of space. 4. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations and locations. Slope piping one percent in direction of oil return. 5. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. 6. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Insulate all refrigerant suction piping with 1" elastomeric foam insulatior. 7. Flood piping system with nitrogen when brazing. 8. Follow ASHRAE Std 15 procedures for charging and purging of systems and for disposal of refrigerant. 9. Fully charge completed system with refrigerant after testing. C. Field Quality Control 1. Test refrigeration system in accordance with ASME B31.5. 2. Pressure test system with dry nitrogen to 200 psi (1380 kPa). Perform final tests at 27 inches 92 kPa) vacuum and 200 psi (1380 kPa) using halide torch. Test to no leakage. D. Schedules 1. Hanger Spacing for Copper Tubing. a. 1/2 inch (13 mm), 5/8 inch (16 mm), and 7/8 inch (22 mm) OD: Maximum span, 5 feet 1500 mm); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.3 mm). END OF SECTION 15186-2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 15410 - PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 GENERAL A. SECTION INCLUDES 1. Water closets. 2. Lavatories. 3. Sinks. 4. Floor mop sinks. 5. Electric water coolers. t B. REFERENCES 1. ARI 1010 - Self -Contained, Mechanically -Refrigerated Drinking -Water Coolers; Air - Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute; 1994. 2. ASME Al 12.6.1 M - Supports for Off -the -Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1997. 3. ASME Al 12.18.1 - Plumbing Fixture Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2000. 4. ASME Al 12.19.2M - Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1998. 5. ASME Al 12.19.3M - Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (Designed for Residential Use); The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1987 (131996). 6. ASME All 12.19.5 - Trim for Water -Closet Bowls, Tanks and Urinals; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1999. C. SUBMITTALS 1. Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough -in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and finishes. D. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. E. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. F. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION 1. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage. 2. Protect all existing and relocated fixtures throughout construction. Damaged fixtures shall be replaced without additional cost to the Owner. 3. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use. G. WARRANTY 1. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for electric water cooler. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. WATER CLOSETS 1. Bowl: a. Manufacturers: 1) American Standard Inc: www.americanstandard.com. 2) Crane. 15410 - 1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 15410 - PLUMBING FIXTURES 3) Eljer: www.eljer.com. 4) Kohler Company: www.kohlerco.com. 5) Toto. 2. Flush Valve Manufacturers: a. Sloan Valve Company: www.sloanvalve.com. b. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. 3. See plans for fixture and valve specifications. B. LAVATORIES 1. Manufacturers: a. American Standard Inc: www.americanstandard.com. b. Crane. c. Eljer: www.eljer.com. d. Kohler Company: www.kohlerco.com. e. Toto. 2. See Plans for Fixture Specifications. C. SINKS 1. Manufacturers: a. Elkay. b. Just. t 2. See Plans for Fixture Specifications. D. ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS 1. Manufacturers: a. Oasis Corporation: www.oasiswatercoolers.com. b. Elkay Manufacturing Company: www.elkay.com. c. Haws Corporation: www.hawsco.com. d. Oasis Company. 2. See Plans for Fixture Specifications. E. FLOOR MOP SINKS 1. Manufacturers: a. Fiat. b. Stern Williams. 2. See Plans for Fixture Specifications. PART 3 EXECUTION A. EXAMINATION 1. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures. 2. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics. 3. Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top lavatories and sinks. B. PREPARATION 1. Rough -in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough -in schedule for particular fixtures. C. INSTALLATION 1. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. 2. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with wheel handle stops, reducers, and escutcheons. 15410 - 2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 15410 - PLUMBING FIXTURES 3. Install components level and plumb. 4. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall supports and bolts. 5. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with acrylic sealant, color to match fixture. 6. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended hold fixture in place. D. ADJUSTING 1. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow. E. CLEANING AND PROTECTION 1. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. F. SCHEDULES 1. Fixture Heights: Install fixtures to heights above finished floor as indicated on the drawings. 2. Fixture Rough -In a. Flush Tank Water Closet: 1) Cold Water: 1/2 Inch (15 mm). 2) Waste: 4 Inch (100 mm). 3) Vent: 2 Inch (50 mm). b. Lavatory: 1) Hot Water: 1/2 Inch (15 mm). 2) Cold Water: 1/2 Inch (15 mm). 3) Waste: 1-1/2 Inch (40 mm). 4) Vent: 1-1/4 Inch (32 mm). c. Sink: 1) Hot Water: 1/2 Inch (15 mm). 2) Cold Water: 1/2 Inch (15 mm). 3) Waste: 1-1/2 Inch (40 mm). 4) Vent: 1-1/4 Inch (32 mm). d. Floor Mop Sink: 1) Hot Water: 1/2 Inch (15 mm). 2) Cold Water: 1/2 Inch (15 mm). 3) Waste: 3 Inch (80 mm). 4) Vent: 1-1/2 Inch (40 mm). e. Electric Water Cooler: 1) Cold Water: 1/2 Inch (15 mm). 2) Waste: 1-1/4 Inch (32 mm). 3) Vent: 1-1/4 Inch (32 mm). END OF SECTION 15410 - 3 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 15735 - PACKAGED ROOF TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS PART 1 GENERAL A. SECTION INCLUDES 1. Packaged roof top unit. 2. Unit controls. 3. Roof mounting curb and base. 4. Maintenance service. B. REFERENCES 1. ARI 210/240 - Unitary Air -Conditioning and Air -Source Heat Pump Equipment; Air - Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute; 1994. 2. ARI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment; Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute; 1995. 3. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 1999. C. SUBMITTALS 1. Product Data: Provide capacity and dimensions of manufactured products and assemblies required for this project. Indicate electrical service with electrical characteristics and connection requirements, and duct connections. 2. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing. 3. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. D. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum five years of documented experience. 2. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. E. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION 1. Protect units from physical damage by storing off site until roof mounting curbs are in place, ready for immediate installation of units. F. WARRANTY 1. Provide a five year warranty to include coverage for refrigeration compressors. G. MAINTENANCE SERVICE 1. Furnish service and maintenance of packaged roof top units for one year from Date of Substantial Completion. 2. Provide maintenance service with a two month interval as maximum time period between calls. Provide 24-hour emergency service on breakdowns and malfunctions. 3. Include maintenance items as outlined in manufacturer's operating and maintenance data, including minimum of six filter replacements, minimum of one fan belt1replacement, and controls check-out, adjustments, and recalibration. 4. Submit copy of service call work order or report, and include description of work performed. f 15735 - 1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 15735 - PACKAGED ROOF TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS PART 2 PRODUCTS A. MANUFACTURERS 1. The Carrier Corporation: www.carrier.com. 2. Lennox Industries, Inc: www.lennox.com 3. The Trane Company: www.trane.com. B. AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 1. General: Roof mounted units having gas burner and electric refrigeration. 2. Description: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled and prewired, consisting of cabinet and frame, supply fan, heat exchanger and burner, controls, air filters, refrigerant cooling coil and compressor, condenser coil and condenser fan. C. FABRICATION 1. Cabinet: Galvanized steel with baked enamel finish, including access panels with screwdriver operated flush cam type fasteners. Structural members shall be minimum 18 gage (1.20 mm), with access doors or panels of minimum 20 gage (0.90 mm). 2. Insulation: 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick neoprene coated glass fiber with edges protected from erosion. 3. Heat Exchangers: Aluminized steel, of welded construction. 4. Supply Fan: Forward curved centrifugal type, resiliently mounted with V-belt drive, adjustable variable pitch motor pulley, and rubber isolated hinge mounted motor or direct drive as indicated. Isolate complete fan assembly. Refer to Section 15072. 5. Air Filters: 2 inch (50 mm) thick glass fiber disposable media in metal frames. Refer to Section 15860. 6. Roof Mounting Curb: 14 inches (350 mm) high galvanized steel, channel frame with gaskets, nailer strips. D. BURNER 1. Gas Burner: Induced draft type burner with adjustable combustion air supply, pressure regulator, gas valves, manual shut-off, intermittent spark or glow coil ignition, flame sensing device, and automatic 100 percent shut-off pilot. 2. Gas Burner Safety Controls: Energize ignition, limit time for establishment of flame, prevent opening of gas valve until pilot flame is proven, stop gas flow on ignition failure, energize blower motor, and after air flow proven and slight delay, allow gas valve to open. 3. High Limit Control: Temperature sensor with fixed stop at maximum permissible setting, de -energize burner on excessive bonnet temperature and energize burner when temperature drops to lower safe value. E. EVAPORATOR COIL 1. Provide copper tube aluminum fin coil assembly with galvanized drain pan and connection. 2. Provide capillary tubes or thermostatic expansion valves for units of 6 tons (21 kw) capacity and less, and thermostatic expansion valves and alternate row circuiting for units 7.5 tons (26 kw) cooling capacity and larger. COMPRESSOR 1. Provide hermetic compressors, 3600 rpm maximum, resiliently mounted with positive lubrication, crankcase heater, high and low pressure safety controls, motor overload protection, suction and discharge service valves and gage ports, and filter drier. 2. Five minute timed off circuit to delay compressor start. 15735 - 2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 15735 - PACKAGED ROOF TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS G. CONDENSER COIL 1. Provide copper tube aluminum fin coil assembly with subcooling rows and coil guard. 2. Provide direct drive propeller fans, resiliently mounted with fan guard, motor overload protection, wired to operate with compressor. H. MIXED AIR CASING 1. Dampers: Provide outside, return, and relief dampers with damper operator and control package to automatically vary outside air quantity. Outside air damper to fall to closed position. 2. Gaskets: Provide tight fitting dampers with edge gaskets maximum leakage 5 percent at 2 inches (500 Pa) pressure differential. 3. Mixed Air Controls: Maintain selected supply air temperature and return dampers to minimum position on call for heating and above 75 degrees F (24 degrees C) ambient, or when ambient air temperature exceeds return air temperature. OPERATING CONTROLS - THERMOSTATS 1. Electronic Programmable Room Thermostats: a. Service: cooling and heating. b. Product: All thermostats and sensors shall be TCS BASYS controls. Provide single, two or three stage thermostats for standard or heat pump duty as applicable. No exceptions will be permitted. See details on drawings. All existing thermostats shall be replaced with new TCS BASYS controls thermostats as specified herein. 1) Interface Boards: Where the existing equipment does not have an interface for a conventional thermostat, furnish all necessary interface boards to properly operate the existing equipment with the thermostat specified above. PART 3 EXECUTION A. EXAMINATION 1. Verify that roof is ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. 2. Verify that proper power supply is available. B. INSTALLATION 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Install in accordance with NFPA 90A. 3. Mount units on factory built roof mounting curb providing watertight enclosure to protect ductwork and utility services. Install roof mounting curb level. 4. Check and verify location of thermostats and exposed control sensors with plans and room details before installation. Locate 60 inches (1500 mm) above floor. 5. Provide conduit and electrical wiring in accordance with Section 16155. Electrical material and installation shall be in accordance with appropriate requirements of Division 16. Conduit shall be provided for all temperature control wiring installed in all concealed spaces (in walls, above gypsum board ceilings). Except where prohibited by local codes and jurisdiction, conduit is not required above accessible tiles ceilings. On projects with plenum return ceilings, provide plenum related Teflon jacketed cable unless wiring is installed in conduit. Where local code requires the use of all conduit wiring system, all thermostat and temperature control wiring shall be installed in conduit along its entire length. C. STARTING EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS 1. Provide initial start-up and shut -down during first year of operation, including routine 15735 - 3 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 15735 - PACKAGED ROOF TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS servicing and check-out. END OF SECTION 15735 - 4 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 15810 - DUCTS PART 1 GENERAL A. SECTION INCLUDES 1. Metal ductwork. B. REFERENCES 1. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 1997a. 2. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 1999a. 3. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 1999. 4. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 1995, Second Edition with Addendum No. 1. 5. UL 181 - Standard for Factory -Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 1996. C. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts. D. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A standards. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS 1. Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A 653/A 653M galvanized steel sheet, Forming Steel FS) designation, with G60/Z180 zinc coating. 2. Insulated Flexible Ducts: a. UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex adhesive supported by helically wound spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation; polyethylene or aluminized vapor barrier film. 1) Pressure Rating: 10 inches WG (2.5 kPa) positive and 1.0 inches WG (250 Pa) negative. 2) Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm (20.3 m/sec). 3) Maximum flame spread and smoke developed rating of 25/50. Rated for installation in a plenum ceiling. 4) Temperature Range: -20 degrees F to 210 degrees F (-28 degrees C to 99 degrees C). 3. Hanger Rod: ASTM A 36/A 36M; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded. B. DUCTWORK FABRICATION 1. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. 2. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows must be used, provide air foil turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. 15810 - 1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 15810 - DUCTS 3. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 20 degrees convergence downstream. 4. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than duct gages indicated in SMACNA Standard. Joints shall be minimum 4 inch (100 mm) cemented slip joint, brazed or electric welded. Prime coat welded joints. 5. Provide standard 45 degree lateral wye takeoffs unless otherwise indicated where 90 degree conical tee connections may be used. C. MANUFACTURED METAL DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS 1. Manufacture in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION A. INSTALLATION 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining. 3. Install and seal metal and flexible ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. 4. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. 5. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inch (200 mm) and smaller with crimp in direction of air flow. 6. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. 7. Connect terminal units to supply ducts with one foot (300 mm) maximum length of flexible duct. Do not use flexible duct to change direction. 8. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts with 5 feet (1.5 m) maximum length of flexible duct held in place with strap or clamp. 9. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands. 10. Horizontal duct supports shall be at 4 ft. o.c. maximum. Anchor hanger strips to structure. All vertical ducts shall be supported at each floor. Supports shall support the weight of each section with out any deflection or distortion. B. SCHEDULES 1. Ductwork Pressure Class: a. High Velocity Supply: 2 inch (500 Pa). b. Low Velocity Supply: 1 inch (250 Pa). c. General Exhaust: 1/2 inch (125 Pa). END OF SECTION 15810 - 2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 15820 - DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL A. SECTION INCLUDES 1. Air turning devices/extractors. 2. Combination fire and smoke dampers. 3. Duct access doors. 4. Fire dampers. 5. Flexible duct connections. 6. Smoke dampers. 7. Volume control dampers. 8. Disposable panel filters. B. REFERENCES 1. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 1999. 2. NFPA 92A - Standard on Smoke -Control Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 1996. 3. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 1995, Second Edition with Addendum No. 1. 4. UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire -Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 1993. 5. UL 555 - Standard for Fire Dampers; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 1999. 6. UL 555S - Standard for Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 1999. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. AIR TURNING DEVICES/EXTRACTORS 1. Multi -blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel construction; with individually adjustable blades, mounting straps. B. COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS 1. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A, UL 555, UL 555S, and as indicated. 2. Provide factory sleeve and collar for each damper. 3. Coordinate damper operator type, voltage and operational requirements with the fire alarm system and building smoke system controls. C. DUCT ACCESS DOORS 1. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. 2. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable. D. FIRE DAMPERS 1. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555, and as indicated. 2. Fusible Links: UL 33, separate at 160 degrees F (71 degrees C) with adjustable link straps for combination fire/balancing dampers. E. FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS 1. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. 2. Flexible Duct Connections: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip. 15820 - 1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 15820 - DUCT ACCESSORIES a. Fabric: UL listed fire -retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density 30 oz per sq yd (1.0 kg/sq m). 1) Net Fabric Width: Approximately 2 inches (50 mm) wide. b. Metal: 3 inches (75 mm) wide, 24 gage (0.6 mm) thick galvanized steel. F. SMOKE DAMPERS 1. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555S, and as indicated. 2. Coordinate damper operator type, voltage and operational requirements with the fire alarm system and building smoke system controls. G. VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS. 1. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. 2. Single Blade Dampers: Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 x 30 inch (150 x 760 mm). 3. Multi -Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 x 72 inch (200 x 1825 mm). Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware. 4. End Bearings: Except in round ducts 12 inches (300 mm) and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil -impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings. H. Disposable Panel Filters 1. Media: UL 900 Class 2, fiber blanket, factory sprayed with flameproof, non -drip, non- volatile adhesive. a. Thickness: 1" or 2" as compatible with equipment filter frames. 2. Performance Rating: a. Face Velocity: 500 FPM (2.54 m/sec). b. Initial Resistance: 0.15 inch WG (37 Pa). c. Recommended Final Resistance: 0.50 inches WG (125 Pa). 3. Casting: Cardboard frame. PART 3 EXECUTION A. INSTALLATION 1. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section 15810 for duct construction and pressure class. 2. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch (200 x 200 mm) size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch (450 x 450 mm) size for shoulder access, and as indicated. Provide 4 x 4 inch (100 x 100 mm) for controls only. Review locations prior to fabrication. 3. Provide fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and smoke dampers at locations indicated, where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components, and where required by authorities having jurisdiction or Landlord system requirements. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges. 4. Install smoke dampers and combination smoke and fire dampers in accordance with NFPA 92A. 5. At fans and motorized equipment associated with ducts, provide flexible duct connections immediately adjacent to the equipment. 15820 - 2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 15820 - DUCT ACCESSORIES 6. At equipment supported by vibration isolators, provide flexible duct connections immediately adjacent to the equipment. 7. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2 duct widths from duct take -off. 8. Provide balancing dampers on duct take -off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly. Do not extend damper operators through finished ceilings. 9. Provide filters on all units throughout all construction operations. Replace all filters in all units upon final delivery to the Owner. Provide one extra set of filters to the Owner for all units. END OF SECTION 15820 - 3 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 15850 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART 1 GENERAL A. SECTION INCLUDES B. REFERENCES 1. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 1996. 2. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 1995, Second Edition with Addendum No. 1. C. SUBMITTALS 1. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, and noise level. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. ROUND CEILING DIFFUSERS 1. Type: Round, adjustable pattern, stamped or spun, multi -core diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree pattern. Diffuser collar shall project not more than 1 inch (25 mm) above ceiling. In plaster ceilings, provide plaster ring and ceiling plaque. 2. Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel off-white finish. 3. Accessories: Radial opposed blade damper and multi -louvered equalizing grid with damper adjustable from diffuser face. B. RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS 1. Type: Square and rectangular, multi -louvered diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree pattern. 2. Frame: Surface mount type. In plaster ceilings, provide plaster frame and ceiling frame. 3. Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel off-white finish. 4. Accessories: Radial opposed blade damper and multi -louvered equalizing grid with damper adjustable from diffuser face. C. CEILING GRID CORE EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES 1. Type: Fixed grilles of 1/2 x 112 x 1 inch (13 x 13 x 25) louvers. 2. Fabrication: Aluminum with factory off-white enamel finish. 3. Frame: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) margin with concealed mounting. PART 3 EXECUTION A. INSTALLATION 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. 3. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection. 4. Provide balancing dampers on duct take -off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, despite whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly. 5. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. END OF SECTION 15850 - 1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 15950 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING PART 1 GENERAL A. SECTION INCLUDES 1. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems. 2. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of hydronic systems. 3. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems. B. REFERENCES 1. AABC MN-1 - National Standard for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems; Associated Air Balance Council; 1989, Fifth Edition. 2. ASHRAE Std 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air -Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 1988. 3. NEBB (TAB) - Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems; National Environmental Balancing Bureau; 1998, Sixth Edition. C. SUBMITTALS 1. Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance. a. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies for Architect and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals. b. Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC MN-1 forms, forms prepared following ASHRAE Std 111, or NEBB forms. D. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Perform total system balance in accordance with AABC MN-1, ASHRAE Std 111, or NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems. 2. TAB Agency Qualifications: Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this Section with minimum five years documented experience. 3. Perform Work under supervision of AABC Certified Test and Balance Engineer or NEBB Certified Testing, Balancing and Adjusting Supervisor experienced in performance of this Work and licensed at the. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION A. EXAMINATION 1. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following conditions: a. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition. b. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. c. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters. d. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open. e. Air outlets are installed and connected. f. Duct system leakage is minimized. 15950 - 1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 15950 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING B. INSTALLATION TOLERANCES 1. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design for supply systems and plus or minus 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 10 percent of design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design. C. ADJUSTING 1. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions. 2. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. 3. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified. 4. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings. D. AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE 1. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities. 2. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct. 3. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets. 4. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise. 5. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extend that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters. 6. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation. 7. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters. 8. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions. 9. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions. E. SCHEDULES 1. Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing: a. Packaged Roof Top Heating/Cooling Units b. Fans c. Air Inlets and Outlets 2. Report: a. Summary Comments: 1) Design versus final performance 2) Notable characteristics of system 3) Nomenclature used throughout report 4) Test conditions 3. Air Moving Equipment: a. Manufacturer b. Model number c. Arrangement/Class/Discharge d. Air flow, specified and actual 15950 - 2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 15950 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING e. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual f. Fan RPM 4. Return Air/Outside Air: a. Identification/location b. Design outside air flow c. Actual outside air flow 5. Exhaust Fans: a. Manufacturer b. Model number c. Air flow, specified and actual d. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual e. Sheave Make/Size/Bore f. Number of Belts/Make/Size g. Fan RPM 6. Air Distribution Tests: a. Air terminal number b. Room number/location c. Terminal type d. Terminal size e. Area factor f. Design velocity g. Design air flow h. Test (final) velocity i. Test (final) air flow j. Percent of design air flow END OF SECTION 15950 - 3 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 GENERAL A. SECTION INCLUDES 1. Grounding and bonding components, including equipment grounding conductors and bonding to complete grounding system consisting of: a. Metal underground water pipe. b. Metal frame of the building. c. Rod electrodes. B. REFERENCES 1. NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 1999. 2. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 1999. C. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1. Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms. D. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. 2. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. ELECTRODES 1. Rod Electrodes: Copper. a. Diameter: 3/4 inch (19 mm). b. Length: 10 feet (3000 mm). B. CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES 1. Mechanical Connectors: Bronze. 2. Exothermic Connections: as required. 3. Wire: Stranded copper. 4. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION A. EXAMINATION 1. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work. 2. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes. B. INSTALLATION 1. Install ground electrodes at locations indicated. Install additional rod electrodes as required to achieve specified resistance to ground. 2. Provide grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in foundation footing. Bond steel together. 3. Provide bonding to meet requirements described in Quality Assurance. 4. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated conductor within each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing. 16060 - 1 01/18/06 END OF SECTION WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO - SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 - 2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 16070 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART1 GENERAL A. SECTION INCLUDES 1. Conduit and equipment supports. 2. Anchors and fasteners. B. REFERENCES 1. NECA (INST) - NECA Standard of Installation; National Electrical Contractors Association; 1993. 2. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 1999. C. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. 2. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS 1. Hangers, Supports, Anchors, and Fasteners - General: Corrosion -resistant materials of size and type adequate to carry the loads of equipment and conduit, including weight of wire in conduit. 2. Supports: Fabricated of structural steel or formed steel members; galvanized. 3. Anchors and Fasteners: a. Concrete Structural Elements: Use expansion anchors. b. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps, steel spring clips, or welded fasteners. c. Concrete Surfaces: Use self -drilling anchors or expansion anchors. d. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners. e. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors. f. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. g. Wood Elements: Use wood screws. PART 3 EXECUTION A. INSTALLATION 1. Locate and install anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation". a. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit. b. Obtain permission from Architect before drilling or cutting structural members. 2. Rigidly weld support members or use hexagon -head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts. 3. Install surface -mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. 4. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions. END OF SECTION 16070 - 1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 16075 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 GENERAL A. SECTION INCLUDES 1. Nameplates and labels. 2. Wire and cable markers. 3. Conduit markers. B. REFERENCES 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 1999. C. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. 2. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. NAMEPLATES AND LABELS 1. Nameplates: Engraved three -layer laminated plastic, black letters on white background. 2. Locations: a. Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure. B. WIRE MARKERS 1. Description: Cloth, tape, split sleeve, or tubing type wire markers. 2. Locations: Each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet boxes, and junction boxes each load connection. 3. Legend: a. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated on drawings. b. Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams on drawings. 4. At branch circuit wiring junction boxes, junction boxes may be marked with a permanent marker on the interior with the branch circuit number in lieu of wire markers specified above. C. CONDUIT MARKERS 1. Location: Furnish markers for each conduit longer than 6 feet (2 m). 2. Spacing: 20 feet (6 m) on center. 3. Color: a. Fire Alarm System: Red. PART 3 EXECUTION A. PREPARATION 1. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels. B. INSTALLATION 1. Install nameplates and labels parallel to equipment lines. 2. Secure nameplates to equipment front using adhesive. END OF SECTION 16075 - 1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO - SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 16123 - BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE PART 1 GENERAL A. SECTION INCLUDES 1. Wire and cable for 600 volts and less. 2. Wiring connectors and connections. B. REFERENCES 1. NECA (INST) - NECA Standard of Installation; National Electrical Contractors Association; 1993. 2. NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 1999. 3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 1999. C. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. 2. Products: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. WIRING REQUIREMENTS 1. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire with Type THHN/THWN insulation in raceway or metal clad cable. 2. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire with Type THHN/THWN insulation in raceway. 3. Exterior Locations: Use only building wire with Type THHN/THWN insulation in raceway. 4. Underground Installations: Use only building wire with Type THHN/THWN insulation in raceway. 5. Use solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. 6. Use stranded conductors for control circuits. 7. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power• and lighting circuits. 8. Use conductor not smaller than 16 AWG for control circuits. 9. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet 25 m). 10. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuits longer than 200 feet 160 m). 11. Conductor sizes are based on copper. Aluminum or "AL" is not acceptable. B. BUILDING WIRE 1. Description: Single conductor insulated wire. 2. Conductor: Copper. 3. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. 4. Insulation: NFPA 70, Type THHN/THWN. C. METAL CLAD CABLE 1. Description: NFPA 70, Type MC. 2. Conductor: Copper. 3. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. 4. Insulation Temperature Rating: 60 degrees C. 5. Insulation Material: Thermoplastic. 6. Armor Material: Steel. 16123 - 1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 16123 - BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 7. Armor Design: Interlocked metal tape. PART 3 EXECUTION A. EXAMINATION 1. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather. 2. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. 3. Verify that raceway installation is complete and supported. B. INSTALLATION 1. Route wire and cable as required to meet project conditions. a. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned. b. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing and lengths required. c. Include wire and cable of lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft 3000 mm) of location shown. 2. Install wire and cable in accordance with the NECA "Standard of Installation." 3. Use wiring methods indicated. 4. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time. 5. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger. 6. Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips or metal cable ties to support cables from structure or ceiling suspension system. Do not rest cable on ceiling panels. 7. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. 8. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. 9. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. 10. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise. 11. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor. 12. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps, 8 AWG and smaller. 13. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10 AWG and smaller. 14. Trench and backfill for direct burial cable installation as specified in Division 2. Install warning tape along entire length of direct burial cable, within 3 inches (75 mm) of grade. 15. Identify wire and cable under provisions of Section 16075. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated. Color code all wiring to match the color coding of the existing building system. Where existing wiring is not color coded, color code as follows: 120/208 volt system. Phase A — Black, Phase B — Red, Phase C — Blue, Neutral — White, Equipment Ground — Green. 277/480 volt system: Phase A — Brown, Phase B — Orange, Phase C — Yellow, Neutral — White, Equipment Ground — Green. END OF SECTION 16123 - 2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 16131 - CONDUIT PART 1 GENERAL A. SECTION INCLUDES 1. Conduit, fittings and conduit bodies. B. REFERENCES 1. ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard Specification for Rigid Steel Conduit -- Zinc Coated; 1995. 2. ANSI C80.3 - American National Standard Specification for Electrical Metallic Tubing — Zinc Coated; 1995. 3. NECA (INST) - NECA Standard of Installation; National Electrical Contractors Association; 1993. 4. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1993. 5. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1999. 6. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 1999. C. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. 2. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. D. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage. 2. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering. 3. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS 1. Conduit Size: Comply with NFPA 70. a. Minimum Size: 1/2 inch (13 mm) unless otherwise specified. 2. Underground Installations: a. More than Five Feet (1.5 Meters) from Foundation Wall: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, plastic coated conduit, thickwall non-metallic conduit, or thinwall non-metallic conduit. b. Within Five Feet (1.5 Meters) from Foundation Wall: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, plastic coated conduit, thickwall nonmetallic conduit, or thinwall non-metallic conduit. c. In or Under Slab on Grade: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, plastic coated conduit, thickwall non-metallic conduit, or thinwall non-metallic conduit. d. Minimum Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm). 3. Outdoor Locations Above Grade: Use rigid steel conduit. 4. Wet and Damp Locations: Use rigid steel conduit or intermediate metal conduit. 5. Dry Locations: a. Concealed: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, or electrical metallic tubing. b. Exposed: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, or electrical metallic tubing. 16131 - 1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO - SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 16131 - CONDUIT B. METAL CONDUIT 1. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. 2. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel. 3. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit. C. PVC COATED METAL CONDUIT 1. Description: NEMA RN 1; rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating, 20 mil (0.05 mm) thick. 2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel fittings with external PVC coating to match conduit. D. FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT 1. Description: Interlocked steel construction. 2. Fittings: NEMA FB.1. E. LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT 1. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket. 2. Fittings: NEMA FB 1. F. ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) 1. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing. 2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel or malleable iron compression type. G. NONMETALLIC CONDUIT 1. Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC. 2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3. PART 3 EXECUTION A. EXAMINATION 1. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings. 2. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough -in. 3. Conduit routing is shown on drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to complete wiring system. B. INSTALLATION 1. Install conduit in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation. 2. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. 4. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay -in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers. 5. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel; provide space on each for 25 percent additional conduits. 6. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 16070, 7. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports. 8. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. 9. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. 10. Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls. 11. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls. 12. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point. 13. Do not cross conduits in slab. 16131 - 2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 16131 - CONDUIT 14. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping. 15. Maintain 12 inch (300 mm) clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F (40 degrees C). 16. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de -burr cut ends. 17. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. 18. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum. 19. Use conduit hubs to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations. 20. Install no more than equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one shot bender to fabricate bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch (50 mm) size. 21. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. 22. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses seismic. 23. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples. 24. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. 25. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 16060. 26. Identify conduit under provisions of Section 16075. C. INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS 1. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods acceptable to the authority having jursidiction. 2. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork wherever possible. Where separate roofing penetration is required, coordinate location and installation method with roofing installation specified in appropriate Division 7 section. END OF SECTION 16131 - 3 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO - SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 16138 - BOXES PART 1 GENERAL A. SECTION INCLUDES 1. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes. 2. Floor boxes. 3. Pull and junction boxes. B. REFERENCES 1. NECA (INST) - NECA Standard of Installation; National Electrical Contractors Association; 1993. 2. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1993. 3. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1996. 4. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1997. 5. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 1999. C. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. 2. Products: Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. OUTLET BOXES 1. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. a. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; include 1/2 inch (13 mm) male fixture studs where required. 2. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, aluminum. Provide gasketed cover by box manufacturer. Provide threaded hubs. 3. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 16140. B. FLOOR BOXES 1. Floor Boxes: NEMA OS 1, fully adjustable, 1-112 inches (38 mm) deep. 2. Material: Cast metal. 3. Shape: Round. C. PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES 1. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. PART 3 EXECUTION A. EXAMINATION 1. Verify locations of floor boxes and outlets in offices and work areas prior to rough -in. B. INSTALLATION 1. Install boxes in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." 2. Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and as required by NFPA 70. 3. Coordinate installation of outlet boxes for equipment connected under Section 16155. 4. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights indicated. 16138 - 1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 16138 - BOXES 5. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. a. Adjust box locations up to 10 feet (3 m) if required to accommodate intended purpose. 6. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 16140. 7. Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance. 8. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. 9. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches 150 mm) from from removable recessed luminaire. 10. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods as required. 11. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes. 12. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan. 13. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. 14. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. 15. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. 16. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches (150 mm) separation. Provide minimum 24 inches (600 mm) separation in acoustic rated walls. 17. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. 18. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. 19. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness. 20. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. 21. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires. 22. Support boxes independently of conduit. 23. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. 24. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations. 25. Use cast floor boxes for installations in slab on grade; formed steel boxes are acceptable for other installations. 26. Set floor boxes level. 27. Large Pull Boxes: Use hinged enclosure in interior dry locations, surface -mounted cast metal box in other locations. C. ADJUSTING 1. Adjust floor boxes flush with finish flooring material. 2. Adjust flush -mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. 3. Install knockout closures in unused box openings. D. CLEANING 1. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material. 2. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish. END OF SECTION 16138 - 2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL A. SECTION INCLUDES 1. Wall switches. 2. Receptacles. 3. Device plates and decorative box covers. B. REFERENCES 1. NECA (INST) - NECA Standard of Installation; National Electrical Contractors Association; 1993. 2. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1999. 3. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1997. 4. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 1999. C. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. 2. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. 3. Products: Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. MANUFACTURERS 1. Arrow Hart: www.arrowhart.com. 2. GE Industrial: www.geindustrial.com. 3. Leviton Manufacturing, Inc: www.leviton.com. B. WALL SWITCHES 1. Wall Switches: NEMA WD 1, Heavy Duty, AC only general -use snap switch. a. Body and Handle: Ivory plastic with toggle handle. b. Ratings: Match branch circuit and load characteristics. 2. Switch Types: Single pole, double pole, 3-way, and 4-way. C. RECEPTACLES: 1. Receptacles: NEMA WD 1, Heavy duty. a. Device Body: Ivory plastic. Utilize Gray devices only for all designated circuits for computer circuits b. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, type as specified and indicated. 2. Convenience Receptacles: Type 5 - 20. 3. GFCI Receptacles: Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter to meet regulatory requirements. 4. Tamperproof Receptacles: Convenience receptacle with integral shutter mechanism to prevent the insertion of small objects into receptacle slots. D. WALLPLATES: 1. Decorative Cover Plates: Ivory, nylon. 2. Weatherproof Cover Plates: Gasketed cast metal with hinged. 16140 - 1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES E. FLOOR MOUNTED SERVICE FITTINGS 1. Flush Cover Convenience Receptacles: a. Material: Aluminum. b. Configuration: Duplex flap opening. 2. Flush Cover Communication Outlets: a. Material: Aluminum. b. Configuration: 2-1/8 inch (54 mm) x 1 inch (25 mm) combination threaded opening. 3. Carpet Rings: Aluminum or Polycarbonate. PART 3 EXECUTION A. EXAMINATION 1. Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height. 2. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. 3. Verify that floor boxes are adjusted properly. 4. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices. B. PREPARATION 1. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. 2. Clean debris from outlet boxes. C. INSTALLATION 1. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." 2. Install devices plumb and level. 3. Install switches with OFF position down. 4. Install receptacles with grounding pole on bottom. 5. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. 6. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas. 7. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal. 8. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets. D. INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS 1. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 16138 to obtain mounting heights specified. 2. Install wall switch 48 inches (1.2 m) above finished floor to center of box. 3. Install convenience receptacle, telephone, data or other device at 18 inches (450 mm) above finished floor to center of box. 4. Install all other devices as indicated on by plus dimensions on the drawings. Dimensions indicated on the drawings supercede dimensions stated herein. All dimensions are to center of box. E. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. Inspect each wiring device for defects. 2. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation. 3. Verify that each receptacle device is energized. 4. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity. 5. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation. F. ADJUSTING 16140 - 2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. G. CLEANING 1. Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish. END OF SECTION 16140 - 3 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 16155 - EQUIPMENT WIRING PART 1 GENERAL A. SECTION INCLUDES i 1. Electrical connections to equipment. B. REFERENCES 1. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1999. 2. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1997. 3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 1999. C. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. 2. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. D. COORDINATION 1. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections. 2. Determine connection locations and requirements. 3. Sequence rough -in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation of equipment. 4. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up of equipment. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. MATERIALS 1. Cords and Caps: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for equipment. a. Attachment Plug Construction: Conform to NEMA WD 1. b. Cord Construction: NFPA 70, Type SO multiconductor flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations. c. Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit overcurrent protection. 2. Disconnect Switches: As specified in Section 16412. 3. Wiring Devices: As specified in Section 16140. 4. Flexible Conduit: As specified in Section 16131. 5. Wire and Cable: As specified in Section 16123. 6. Boxes: As specified in Section 16138. PART 3 EXECUTION A. EXAMINATION 1. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization. B. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 1. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions. 2. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations. 3. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered. 16155 - 1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 16155 - EQUIPMENT WIRING 4. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug. 5. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete equipment wiring requirements. 6. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements. 7. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring requirements. END'OF SECTION 16155 - 2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 16210 - ELECTRICAL UTILITY SERVICES PART 1 GENERAL A. SECTION INCLUDES 1. Metering transformer cabinets. 2. Meter bases. B. REFERENCES 1. NECA (INST) - NECA Standard of Installation; National Electrical Contractors Association; 1993. 2. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 1999. C. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1. System Characteristics: 208Y/120 volts, three phase, four -wire, 60 Hertz. D. SUBMITTALS 1. Submit utility company -prepared drawings. E. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Utility Company: 2. Perform work in accordance with utility company written requirements and NFPA 70. 3. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PRE -INSTALLATION MEETING 1. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section. Review service entrance requirements and details with Utility Company representative. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. COMPONENTS 1. Metering Transformer Cabinets: Sheet metal cabinet with hinged door, conforming to utility company requirements, with provisions for locking and sealing. a. Size: As required by utility. 2. Meter Base: Rated 320 amperes continuous duty. 3. Utility Transformer Pad: Construct in accordance with the utility company specifications. PART 3 EXECUTION A. PREPARATION 1. Arrange with utility company to obtain permanent electric service to the Project. 2. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on utility company drawings. B. INSTALLATION 1. Install service rack, weatherhead, transformer pad, metering transformer cabinets, and meter base as required by utility company. 2. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." END OF SECTION 16210 - 1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 16412 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES PART 1 GENERAL A. SECTION INCLUDES 1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. B. REFERENCES 1. NECA (INST) - NECA Standard of Installation; National Electrical Contractors Association; 1993. 2. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1986. 3. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1996. 4. NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 1999. 5. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 1999. C. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. 2. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. MANUFACTURERS 1. Cutler -Hammer: www.ch.cutler-hammer.com. 2. GE Industrial: www.geindustrial.com. 3. Square D: www.squared.com. 4. ITE Company. B. COMPONENTS 1. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, Type GD enclosed load interrupter knife switch. a. Externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. b. Handle lockable in OFF position. c. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU1, Class R fuses. 2. Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, Type GD enclosed load interrupter knife switch. a. Externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. b. Handle lockable in OFF position. 3. Enclosures: NEMA KS 1. a. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1. b. Exterior Locations: Type 3R. PART 3 EXECUTION A. INSTALLATION 1. Install in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation. 2. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches. 3. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and size installed. 16412 - 1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 16412 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES B. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. Perform field inspection in accordance with Section 01400. 2. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS, except Section 4. 3. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.5. END OF SECTION 16412 - 2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 16443 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL A. SECTION INCLUDES 1. Lighting and appliance panelboards. B. REFERENCES 1. NECA (INST) - NECA Standard of Installation; National Electrical Contractors Association; 1993. 2. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1993. 3. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1995. 4. NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1996. 5. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 1999. C. SUBMITTALS 1. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch - arrangement and sizes. D. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. 2. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART PRODUCTS A. MANUFACTURERS 1. Cutler -Hammer: www.ch.cutier-hammer.com. 2. GE Industrial: www.geindustrial.com. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.: www.siemens.com. 4. Square D: www.squared.com. B. LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS 1. Description: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboard. 2. Panelboard Bus: Aluminum, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard; provide insulated ground bus where scheduled. 3. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: a. 240 Volt Panelboards: 22,000 amperes rms symmetrical, Series Rated. 4. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, bolt -on type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, with common trip handle for all poles. a. Type SWD for lighting circuits. b. Type HACR for air conditioning equipment circuits. c. Do not use tandem circuit breakers. 5. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1. 6. Cabinet Box: 6 inches (153 mm) deep, 20 inches (508 mm) wide for 240 volt and less panelboards, 20 inches (508 mm) wide for 480 volt panelboards. 7. Cabinet Front: Flush cabinet front with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge, metal directory frame, and flush lock all keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel. 16443 - 1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 16443 - PANELBOARDS PART 3 EXECUTION A. INSTALLATION 1. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1 and the NECA Standard of Installation. 2. Install panelboards plumb. Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes. 3. Height: 6 feet (1800 mm) to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6 feet 1800 mm) with bottom no more than 4 inches (100 mm) above floor. 4. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards. 5. Provide typed or neatly handwritten circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads. 6. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 16075. 7. Provide spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to an accessible location above ceiling. Identify each as SPARE. a. Minimum spare conduits: 3 empty 1 inch (DN27). 8. Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 16060. B. ADJUSTING 1. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the panelboard to balance the phase loads to within 20 percent of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi -wire branch circuits. END OF SECTION 16443 - 2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 16491 - FUSES PART 1 GENERAL A. SECTION INCLUDES 1. Fuses. B. REFERENCES 1, NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1986. 2. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 1999. C. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. 2. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. MANUFACTURERS 1. Bussman. B. FUSES -GENERAL 1. Dimensions and Performance: NEMA FU 1, Class as specified or indicated. 2. Voltage: Rating suitable for circuit phase -to -phase voltage. 3. Feeder Switches Larger than 600 amperes: Class L (time delay). 4. Load Feeder Switches: Class RK1 (time delay). 5. Motor Branch Circuits: Class L time delay. PART 3 EXECUTION A. INSTALLATION 1. Install fuses with label oriented such that manufacturer, type, and size are easily read. END OF SECTION m 16491 - 1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 16510 - INTERIOR LUMINAIRES PART 1 GENERAL A. SECTION INCLUDES 1. Interior luminaires and accessories. 2. Exit signs. 3. Ballasts. 4. Fluorescent lamp emergency power supply. 5. Lamps. 6. Luminaire accessories. B. REFERENCES 1. ANSI C78.379 - American National Standard for Electric Lamps -- Reflector Lamps -- Classification of Beam Patterns; 1994. 2. ANSI C82.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts; 1985 (R1992). 3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 1999. 4. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire Protection Association; 2000. C. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 101. 2. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. MANUFACTURERS 1. All lighting fixtures will be furnished by the Owner including lamps for installation by the Electrical Contractor. B. LUMINAIRES 1. The Owner will furnish products as indicated in Schedule included on the Drawings. C. BALLASTS AND CONTROL UNITS 1. Fluorescent Lamp Emergency Power Supply: Emergency battery power supply suitable for installation in ballast compartment of fluorescent luminaire. a. Lamp Ratings: One lamp, 1100 lumens minimum. b. Battery: Sealed lead calcium type, rated for 10 year life. c. Include TEST switch and AC ON indicator light, installed to be operable and visible from the outside of an assembled luminaire. D. LAMPS 1. All lamps will be furnished by the Owner, including spare lamps for each lamp type. PART 3 EXECUTION A. INSTALLATION 1. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan. 2. Install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement. 3. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below. 4. Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to meet 16510 - 1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 16510 - INTERIOR LUMINAIRES regulatory requirements for fire rating. Provide gypsum enclosures if required to meet regulatory requirements. 5. Install clips to secure recessed ceiling supported luminaires in place. 6. Install wall mounted luminaires, emergency lighting units, and exit signs at height as indicated on Drawings. 7. Install accessories furnished with each Iuminaire and as required for a complete installation. 8. Connect luminaires and exit signs to branch circuit outlets provided under Section 16138 using flexible conduit. 9. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within Iuminaire. 10. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. 11. Install specified lamps in each emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and Iuminaire. B. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. Operate each Iuminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation. C. ADJUSTING 1. Aim and adjust luminaires as directed. 2. Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated. D. CLEANING 1. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials. 2. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures. 3. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. 4. Clean finishes and touch up damage. E. PROTECTION 1. Relamp luminaires that have failed lamps at Substantial Completion. F. SCHEDULE- See Drawings END OF SECTION 16510 - 2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 16520 - EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES PART 1 GENERAL A. SECTION INCLUDES 1. Exterior luminaires and accessories. B. REFERENCES 1. ANSI C78.379 - American National Standard for Electric Lamps -- Reflector Lamps -- Classification of Beam Patterns; 1994. 2. ANSI C82.4 - American National Standard for Ballasts for High -Intensity -Discharge and Low Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple -Supply Type); 1992. 3. ANSI 05.1 - American National Standard for Wood Poles -- Specifications and Dimensions; 1992. 4. IESNA RP-8 - American National Standard Practice for Roadway Lighting; Illuminating Engineering Society of North America; 1983 (Reaffirmed 1993) (ANSI/IES RP8). 5. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 1999. C. SUBMITTALS 1. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data. D. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. 2. Electrical Components: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. LUMINAIRES 1. Furnish products as indicated in Schedule included on the Drawings. B. BALLASTS 1. High Intensity Discharge (HID) Ballasts: ANSI C82.4, mercury vapor lamp ballast, suitable for lamp specified. a. Voltage: 120 volts. C. LAMPS 1. Lamp Types: As specified for each luminaire. PART 3 EXECUTION A. INSTALLATION 1. Install lamps in each luminaire. 2. Bond luminaires, metal accessories, and metal poles to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. Provide supplementary grounding electrode at each pole. B. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for improper connections and operation. C. CLEANING 1. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials. 2. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure. 3. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. 16520 - 1 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 16520 - EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES 4. Clean finishes and touch up damage. D. PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK 1. Relamp luminaires which have failed lamps at Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 16520 - 2 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP j PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD I SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 16721 - TELEPHONE, DATA AND SECURITY PATHWAYS t F PART1 GENERAL A. SECTION INCLUDES I.S 1. Equipment and terminal backboards. 2. Premises wiring and outlets. a i PART 2 PRODUCTS A. COMPONENTS: 1. Telephone Termination Backboards: Plywood. a. Size: As indicated. f b. Paint light gray with minimum two coats of fire retardant paint. c. Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm). B. TELEPHONE, DATA AND SECURITY WIRE AND CABLE 1. Premises Wiring: By Division 17 specifications. PART 3 EXECUTION A. INSTALLATION ! 1. Finish paint termination backboards with durable light gray fire retardant enamel under the provisions of Section 09900 prior to installation of telephone equipment. 2. Support raceways, backboards, and cabinets under the provisions of Section 16070. 3. Install termination backboards plumb, and attach securely to building wall at each corner. Install cabinet trim plumb. 4. Install pullwire in each empty telephone conduit over 10 feet (3 m) in length or containing a bend. END OF SECTION 16721 - 1 01/18/06 ns WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 17000 - STRUCTURED CABLING INFRASTRUCTURE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Category 5e Structured Cabling System. 2. Telecommunications Room. 3. Manufacturer Certification. 4. General contract and installation requirements. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 — Closeout Procedures: Manufacturer's Warranties. 2. Division 7 - Firestopping: Fire Barrier Sealant Systems. 3. Division 16 — Electrical General Provisions: Electrical Record Drawings. 4. Division 16 — Basic Electrical Materials and Methods: Installation of sleeves for cable penetrations through floors, shafts and walls; providing,conduit and outlet box systems with pull wire; floor boxes and poke through devices. C. The provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section Division 1. 1.2 DATA AND VOICE COMMUNICATIONS CONTRACT WORK A. General: 1. Provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services for the installation as indicated, in accordance with general provisions of specifications and the Contract Drawings. 2. Completely coordinate work with all other trades. 3. Provide all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation, whether or not specifically indicated in the Contract Documents. 4. Provide all cable trays and open cable support systems. a 5. Provide labor for permanent link testing of Structured Cabling Systems. 6. Provide copper testing documentation, record drawings and O&M manuals. 7. Provide labor for installing 3kVA UPS, MasterSwitch, 8-Port Share -UPS Interface and Environmental Monitoring unit. B. Provide complete installation of the telecommunications infrastructure including but not limited to: 1. Category 5e UTP horizontal cables. 2. Work Area (WA) Telecommunications Outlets (TO). 3. Wall mounted voice outlets. 4. Equipment mounting racks with: a. Category 5e modular patch panels. b. Wire management panels and equipment shelving. 5. Category 5e patch cords. 6. Testing of the Structured Cabling System permanent link. 7. Firestopping materials. 8. Bonding and grounding of telecommunications equipment. C. Telecommunications Contractor shall purchase all materials required to complete the work specified by this Section and the Contract Drawings. 17000-1 01 /18/06 I WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 17000 - STRUCTURED CABLING INFRASTRUCTURE D. Purchasing: 1. Purchase all telecommunications materials specified from Anixter per Washington Mutual/Anixter National Price Agreement. Contact Washington Mutual/Anixter National Account Representative at 1-800-426-7665. E. Work and materials not included: 1. Computer hardware and related networking software and equipment provision. 2. Installation of network and ATM patch cords and adapter cables. 3. Installation of modular cables assembly for remote TCD. TCD cables assemblies to be furnished by DeLaRue. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals. shall be prepared and submitted in accordance with Division 1. B. All submittals shall be submitted at one time to the Owner Representative for approval. Partial submittals shall not be considered. C. Telecommunications Pre -Construction Submittal: 1. Submit in booklet form, with data arranged under basic categories, i.e., Personnel, Products, etc. 2. Include a typewritten index with dividers, identifying tabs between sections and references to Section of the Specifications. 3. Submit product data information sheets with the item or model to be used clearly marked, showing ratings where appropriate for approval and coordination. 4. Submit the resumes and certifications of all technicians and the project manager who will support this project. The certifications shall include: a. Structured Cabling and termination equipment installation certification. b. Approved manufacturer classes satisfactorily completed. D. Test Reports: 1. At a time agreed upon between the Telecommunications Contractor and Owner prior to the turnover of the completed spaces, the Telecommunications Contractor shall submit to the Owner's Representative an electronic copy of all test results. 2. Test results shall be reproduced on a CD-ROM. 3. Include a final copy of the test reports, on CD-ROM, in each O & M Manual. E. Record Drawings: 1. A complete set of all telecommunications drawings shall be kept in the job -site office to show actual installation of cables and equipment during construction. 2. The use of this set of drawings shall only be used for recording as -built conditions. 3. Where any material, equipment or system component is installed differently from that shown, the difference shall be indicated clearly and neatly using ink or indelible pencil in the color red. 4. Prior to project completion, the record set of drawings in electronic format shall be submitted to the Owner. 5. Include a copy of the record drawings, on CD-ROM, in each O&M Manual. 6. Include a final printed copy of the record drawings in each O&M Manual. F. Deliver O&M manuals to the Owner's Representative under provisions of Division 1. 1.4 DEFINITIONS Administration: The method for labeling, identification, documentation and usage needed to implement moves, additions and changes of the telecommunications infrastructure. Bonding: The permanent joining of metallic parts to form an electrically conductive path that will assure electrical continuity and the capacity to conduct safely any current likely to be imposed on it. Cable: An assembly of one or more insulated conductors or optical fibers, within an enveloping sheath. 17000-2 01 / 18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 17000 - STRUCTURED CABLING INFRASTRUCTURE Cable run: A length of installed media, which may include other components along its path. Cabling: A combination of all cables, jumpers, cords, and connecting hardware. Channel: The end -to -end transmission path between two points at which application -specific equipment is connected. Connecting hardware: A device providing mechanical cable terminations. Consolidation point: A location for interconnection between horizontal cables extending from building pathways and horizontal cables extending into furniture pathways. Cross -connection: A connection scheme between cabling runs, subsystems, and equipment using patch cords or jumpers that attach to connecting hardware"on each end. Demarcation point: A point where the operational control or ownership changes. Equipment room: An environmentally controlled centralized space for telecommunications equipment that usually houses amain or intermediate cross -connect. Ground: A conducting connection,, whether intentional or accidental, between an electrical circuit (e:g., telecommunications) or equipment and the earth, or to some conducting body that serves in place of earth Horizontal cabling: The cabling between and including the telecommunications outlet connector and the horizontal cross -connect. Horizontal cross -connect: A cross -connect of horizontal cabling to other cabling, e.g., horizontal, backbone, and equipment. Infrastructure' (telecommunications): A collection of those telecommunications components; excluding equipment, which together provide the basic support for the distribution of all information within a building or campus. Main cross -connect: A cross -connect for first level backbone cables, entrance cables, and equipment , cables: Modular jack: A female telecommunications connector that maybe keyed or unkeyed and may have 6 or contact positions, but not all the positions need be equipped .with jack,contacts. Outlet/connector.(telecommunications): A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or outlet cable terminates. Patch cord: A length of cable with a plug on one or both ends. Patch panel: A connecting hardware system that facilitates cable'termination and cabling administration using patch cords. Pathway: A facility for the placement of telecommunications cable. Permanent link: A test configuration for a link excluding test cords and patch cords, but including the mated connection with the. link. Plenum: A compartment or chamber to which one or more air ducts are connected and thaf'forms part of the air distribution system. Room, telecommunications: An enclosed space for housing telecommunications equipment, cable terminations, and cross -connect cabling, that is the recognized location of the horizontal, cross -connect. Star topology: A topology in which telecommunications cables are distributed from a central point. 17000-3 01/18/06 I WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO - SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 17000 - STRUCTURED CABLING INFRASTRUCTURE er p o Telecommunications: Any transmission, emission, and reception of signs, signals, writings, images, and sounds, that is information of any nature by cable, radio, optical, or other electromagnetic systems. Work area (workstation): A building space where the occupants interact with telecommunications terminal Y equipment. Work area cable (cord): A cable connecting the telecommunications outlet/connector to the terminal equipment. i 1.5 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Installation Standards: Cable and equipment installation shall comply with the following standards. All I publications must be of the latest issue and addenda: 1. ANSIO/TIA/EIA-568-B.1-2001: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Part 1: General Requirements (Approved April 2001) 2. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1-1: Addendum 1 - Minimum 4-Pair UTP ScTP Patch Cable Bend Radius July 2001) 3. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B2-2001: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling (Approved April 2001) 4. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1: Addendum 1 - Transmit Performance Specifications for 4-Pair 100 Ohm Category 6C (June 2002) 5. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-2: Addendum 2 6. ANSI/TIA/EIA -568-B.2-3: Addendum 3 - Additional Considerations for insertion Loss and Return Loss Pass/Fail Determination (March 2002) 7. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3-2000: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Part 3: Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standards (Approved March 2000). 8. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3-1: Transmission Performance Specifications for 50/125 um Optical Cables April 2002). 9. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A:r Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces (February 1998). 10. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A-1: Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces Addendum 1 - Surface Raceways (March 2000): 11. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A-2: Addendum 2 - Furniture Pathways and Spaces (March 2000). 12. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A-3: Addendum 3 - Access Floors (March 2000)., 13. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A-4: Addendum 4 - Poke-Thru Fittings (March 2000). 14. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A-5: Addendum 5 - In Floor Systems (June 2001). 15. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A-6: Addendum 6 - Multi -Tenant Pathways and Spaces (September 2001)., 16. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A-7: Addendum 7 - Cable Trays and Wirelines (December 2001). 17. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A. The Administration Standard for the Telecommunications infrastructure of Commercial Building (May 2002). 18. ANSI/TIA/EIA-607. Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications (August 1994). 19. ANSI/TIA/EIA-758. Customer Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling Standard (April 1999). 20. ANSI/TIA/EIA-758-1. OSP Optical Fiber Cabling Practices, Addendum to TIA-758 (April 1999). 21. ANSI/TIA/EIA-455-A. Standard Test Procedures for Fiber Optic Cables and Transducers, Sensors, Connecting and Terminating Devices, and other Fiber Optic Components. 22. ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-14-A-1998. Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant-OFSTP-14A. 23. ANSI/TIA/EIA-598-Color Coding of Optical Fiber Cables. t 24. ANSI/TIA/EIA-604-3, FOCIS 3. Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard. B. Telecommunications contractor shall have read the above documents and shall be familiar with the requirements that pertain to this installation. The documents may be obtained from: 1. Global Engineering Documents, 15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, CO, 80112-5776, 800-854- 7179, fax: 303-397-2740, http-.//global.his.com/ 17000-4 01 / 18/06 - a a WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO - SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 17000 - STRUCTURED CABLING INFRASTRUCTURE C. Materials: 1. All materials shall be UL listed and labels indicating so shall be affixed where labeling is normally visible. 2. Equipment shall be regularly catalogued items of the manufacturer and shall be supplied as a complete unit in accordance with the manufacturer's standard specifications with any optional items required for proper installation unless otherwise noted. 3. All telecommunications connectivity and cabling shall be independently tested to meet current TIA standards. D. Codes: Comply with the governing requirements indicated in Division 1. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. The telecommunications work specified in this Section is acknowledged to require special skills mastered by education, experience, or both. Bidders for telecommunications work described in this Section shall be telecommunications contractors, who may be a division of the Division 16 Subcontractor. B. Specialty Subcontractors bidding telecommunications work shall have a minimum of three years experience in the construction, testing, and servicing of systems of the type and magnitude specified 1 herein. The Subcontractor shall have completed at least ten projects equal or larger in size to this project within the past three years. C. The telecommunications contractor must be an approved Ortronics Certified Installer as a Plus tier (CIP, CIP-Gold, CIP-Platinum). The Telecommunications contractor Shall be responsible for workmanship and installation practices in accordance with the Ortronics CIP Program. Ortronics will provide a NetClear 25 year Applications Warranty to Washington Mutual once the Telecommunications contractor fulfills all requirements under Ortronics CIP program. D. Telecommunications contractor shall have direct access to all tools and test equipment required to complete the telecommunications work when.the work is bid. E. Provide the names of the Telecommunications Contractor's personnel to be assigned to this project and the specific experience of each: G. The Telecommunications Subcontractor's project superintendent (in office) and foreman (field) shall have five years experience at the superintendent and foreman levels, respectively, on completed Telecommunications projects of like magnitude and complexity. The project superintendent shall have the certification of a Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) through Building Industry Consulting Service International (BICSI). H. Demonstrate and document to the extent necessary that sufficient physical and personnel resources are available to accomplish the telecommunications work of this project without endangering timely and proper completion of the work. I. All field technicians who will work independently at any given time during the project shall have a minimum of two years experience on completed telecommunications projects of like magnitude and i complexity. All field technicians working at the job site shall have completed a technician installation training class approved by the manufacturer's warranty requirements. 1.7 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETING A. Telecommunications contractor shall schedule a Pre -Installation meeting a minimum of 21 calendar days prior to commencing work of this Section. B. Agenda: Clarify questions related to work to be performed, scheduling, and coordination. C. Attendees: Telecommunications Contractor, General Contractor, Architect, Owner's representatives, Telecommunications Consultant and other parties affected by work of this Section. 17000-5 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 17000 - STRUCTURED CABLING INFRASTRUCTURE 1.8 MANUFACTURER CERTIFICATION A. Structured Cabling Systems shall be covered by a NetClear Application Assurance Warranty. 1. This warranty shall cover passive structured cabling products and cable for a period of 25 years from date of installation registration, and will support any existing or future applications designed to operate over a 100 MHz horizontal channel as defined in the current ANSI/TIA/EIA-568B cabling standard. 2. Installation practices shall follow the installation guidelines and procedures specified in the Manufacturer Certified Installer training course and the current ANSI/TIA/EIA-568B cabling Standard. 3. Acceptable manufacturer partner is Ortronics/Berk-Tek, "Netclear" solution. B. The Telecommunications Contractor shall provide the original hard copy certificate for the Application Assurance Warranty to the Owner Representative. 1.9 MAINTENANCE A. Deliver maintenance materials to the Owner under provisions of Division 1. B. Modular Patch Cords: Provide the following quantities, lengths, and colors: Turn over to Washington Mutual Owner Representative 30 days prior to Branch Turnover (Before Active equipment installation). Item # Cable Length `Color Qusnfity , ', Part Number System Ground Up 1 9'-0" White 20 each Ortronics #OR-MC5E09-09 Data 2 3'-0" Blue 10 each Ortronics #OR-MC5E03-06 Data 3 5-0" Blue 10 each Ortronics #OR-MC5E05-06 Data 4 5'-0" Black 5 Each Ortronics #OR-MC5E05-00 Data 5 7'-0" Black 5 Each Ortronics #OR-MC5E07-00 Data 6 9'-01, Black 5 Each Ortronics #OR-MC5E09-00 Data Tenant Improvement (2,500 s.f. — 5,000 s.f.) 1 9'-0" White 20 Each Ortronics #OR-MC5E09-09 Data 2 3'-0" Blue 10 Each Ortronics #OR-MC5E03-06 Data 3 5-0" Blue 10 Each Ortronics #OR-MC5E05-06 Data 4 5'-0" Black 5 Each Ortronics #OR-MC5E05-00 Data 5 7'-0" Black 5 Each Ortronics #OR-MC5E07-00 Data 6 9'-0" Black 5 Each Ortronics #OR-MC5E07-00 Data Tenant Improvement (1,000 s.f. — 2,500 s.f.) 1 9'-0" White 20 Each Ortronics #OR-MC5E09-09 Data 2 3'-0" Blue 10 Each Ortronics #OR-MC5E03-06 Data 3 5-0" Blue 10 Each Ortronics #OR-MC5E05-06 Data 4 5'-0" Black 5 Each Ortronics #OR-MC5E05-00 Data 5 7'-0" Black 5 Each Ortronics #OR-MC5E07-00 Data 6 9'-0" Black 5 Each Ortronics #OR-MC5E09-00 Data In -Store 1 9'-0" White 15 Each Ortronics #OR-MC5E09-09 Data 2 5'-0" Blue 15 Each Ortronics #OR-MC5E05-06 Data 3 9'-0" Black 3 Each jOrtronics #OR-MC5E09-00 Data 17000-6 01 /18/06 j WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO —SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 17000 - STRUCTURED CABLING INFRASTRUCTURE PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 OPEN CABLE SUPPORT SYSTEM A. All cable supports outside of the cable tray shall comply with Category 5e standards- 1 . J-Hooks: Shall comply with TIA requirements for structured cabling system and with galvanized finish. Provide all hardware necessary for secure mounting to the structure.. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for quantity of cables supported. 2. Acceptable manufacturer Erico Caddy: Part No. CAT721 with Part No. CATHBA for angled hanger bracket. B. All tie wraps installed in the plenum spaces shall be plenum rated. 1. Acceptable manufacturer is Panduit: Part No. PLT-2S-C702. C. Provide spiral wrap for any exposed horizontal cabling routed in casework for cable management and protection of cabling; The spiral wrap shall be yellow in color. 1. Acceptable manufacturer is Panduit: Part No. T50N-C4. 2.2 HORIZONTAL UTP COPPER CABLE A. Each cable shall be constructed from 24 AWG thermoplastic insulated solid copper conductor formed into four individually twisted pairs and enclosed by a thermoplastic jacket.. Cable shall be plenum rated unless otherwise noted. B. Each conductor shall have an impedance of 1000 ±15% / 100m. C. Each cable shall meet most current technical characteristics of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 standards for Category 5e 100Q UTP cable: 1. Wire map a. Continuity to the remote end. b. Shorts between any two or more conductors c. Reversed pairs d. Split pairs e. Transposed pairs f. Any other miswiring 2. Length 3. Insertion Loss (Attenuation) 4. Near -end Crosstalk (NEXT) loss 5. Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio (ACR) 6. Equal -level far -end crosstalk (ELFEXT) 7. Power sum equal -level far -end crosstalk (PSELFEXT) loss 8. Return loss 9. Propagation delay 10. Delay skew 11. Acceptable manufacturer is Berk-Tek: Part No. 10032060. D. Multi Pair Cable: Provide 25 pair cables in quantities as required. Cable shall be Category 5 UTP, 24 AWG, solid copper conductors for voice cross -connects from the voice cross -connect patch panels to the 110 cross -connect blocks on the plywood backboard and Category 5, UTP, 24 AWG, solid copper conductors for extending voice demarcation points. Provide UL listed type CMR for general applications. Telecommunications contractor shall notify Owner if cabling pathways are a plenum before installation of cable. Provide cable with blue jacket. Provide plenum cable as necessary to meet jurisdictional codes. 1. Acceptable manufacturer is Berk-Tek: Part No. 10033967 (Category 5, CMR). 2. Acceptable manufacturer is Berk-Tek: Part No. 10061911 (Category 5, CMP). 17000-7 01 / 18/06 I -. I Ij I WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA f, A { SECTION 17000 - STRUCTURED CABLING INFRASTRUCTURE 2.3 110 SERIES WIRING BLOCKS A. Provide 100-pair Wall Mount Wiring Base Kits as indicated on Contract Drawings. B. 110 wiring blocks shall be constructed of fire retardant molded plastic. C. Each kit shall include white horizontal identification strips that secure and organize 25 pairs each. D. Each block shall include legs to allow back cable routing. E. The wiring blocks shall accommodate 22 through 24 AWG cable conductor size. 1. Acceptable manufacturer is Ortronics: Part No. OR-110ABC5E100. F. Provide Horizontal Cord Managers with legs above and below each 110 100 pair wiring block. 1. Acceptable manufacturer is Ortronics: Part No. OR-30200140. G. Provide voice cross -connections for auxiliary connections utilizing twisted pair cross -connect wire in the color blue/white and white/blue, or provide voice cross -connect with 110 C1 clip to 110 C1 clip cable assembly. 1. Acceptable manufacturer is Ortronics: Part No. OR-8360560391-xx. Where xx = length. H. For existing voice infrastructures, provide voice cross -connect from the station patch panel to the 110 cross -connect field utilizing an RJ-45 to 110 C1 clip cable assembly activating the blue pair. 1. Acceptable manufacturer is Ortronics: Part No. OR-827056020-xx. Where xx = length. I. Provide 66 block with orange hinged cover for extension of demarcation point and mount next to 110 blocks on the telecommunications plywood backboard. 2.4 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTOR A. Where indicated on drawings, telecommunications connectors shall share a common faceplate. All four pairs of the UTP cable shall be terminated on each Category 5e connector. B. Category 5e Connectors: 1. 8 Position-8 Conductor modules shall be Category 5e, non -keyed, universal, color electrical ivory for data with white data icon, color electrical ivory for voice with blue data icon, color electrical ivory for blank module, wired in accordance with the T568B pin configuration standard and used to terminate Category 5e UTP cables as specified herein. a. Acceptable manufacturer is Ortronics: 1) Category 5e module, Part No. OR-TJ5E00-13. 2) Blank module, Part No. OR-42100002-13 (pkg. of 10). 3) Data icon, Part No. OR-40309200. 4) Voice icon, Part No. OR-40326100. C. Flush Mounted Outlets 1. Faceplate a. Faceplate shall be a single gang plastic manufactured to hold four Category 5e connectors. b. Faceplate shall be electrical ivory in color. C. Faceplate shall have recessed designation strips with clear plastic covers in accordance with the TIA/EIA-606 labeling standard. d. Acceptable manufacturer is Ortronics: Part No. OR-40300546-13. D. Surface Mounted Outlet Boxes: 1. Surface Mounted Outlet Boxes shall be a single gang plastic box with a 1.9-inch depth. 2. Outlet box shall be electrical ivory in color. 3. Acceptable manufacturer is Ortronics: Part No. OR-40300185-13. 17000-8 01 / 18/06 r p WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 17000 - STRUCTURED CABLING INFRASTRUCTURE E. Power Pole/Floor Box: 1. Faceplate a. Faceplate shall be a quad 106 style duplex outlet manufactured to hold four Category 5e connectors. b. Faceplate shall be light almond in color. c. Acceptable manufacturer is Ortronics: Part No. OR-40800019-33. 2. Floorbox a. Faceplate shall ,be a quad stylistic style outlet receptacle manufactured to hold four Category 5e connectors. b. Faceplate shall be fog white in color. c. Acceptable manufacturer is Ortronics: Part.No. OR-41900018. F. Wall Phone Outlets 1. Wall phone outlets shall be a 6 Position-4 Conductor connector. 2. Faceplate shall be stainless steel. 3. Acceptable manufacturer is Leviton: Part No. 40223-S. G. Category 5e Modular Patch Panels 1. Category 5e, 8 Position-8 Conductor module, non -keyed, 110 printed circuit board style patch panels wired in accordance with the T568B pin configuration standard and used to terminate Category 5e UTP cables as specified herein. 2. Provide quantities and port configurations as indicated on the applicable Contract Drawings. 3. Acceptable manufacturer is Ortronics: a. Part No. OR-PHD5E6U24 (24 port) or Part No. OR-PHD5E6U48 (48 port). 2.5 TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROOM A. Equipment Mounting Racks: 1. Equipment Racks and Components. a. Equipment racks shall be Ortronics Mighty Mo III Cable Management Racks in 19 inch or 23 inch configuration, Part No. OR-60400169. b. Each rack shall be equipped with the following equipment. Quantities.shall be determined from applicable drawings. 1) Ortronics 4-inch Vertical Cable Management Channel, Part No. OR-60400435. 2) Ortronics Feed -Through Cable Management Panel,- Part No. OR-808044915. 3) Ortronics Equipment Shelf, Part No. OR-60400006 (19 inch).;. 4) Ortronics Heavy -Duty Equipment Shelf, Part No. OR-60400355 (19 inch) or OR-60400517 (23 inch). 5) Ortronics Keyboard/Monitor Shelf, Part No. OR-60400550 (19 inch) with Part No. OR-60400606 or OR-60400551 (23 inch) with Part No. OR-60400606. 6) ' Ortronics Server Bracing Kit, Part No. OR-60400523. 7) Ortronics Monitor Bracing Kit, Part No. OR-70700126. 8) Ortronics Management Straps, Furnish 50 straps total, Part No. OR-70700079-00. 9) Ortronics Vertical Power Strip, Provide power strip as indicated on contract drawings, Part No. OR-60400381. 10) Ortronics Equipment Mounting Screws, Provide 5 packages of screws for each telecommunications room, Part No. OR-60400005 (4 screws per package). 11) Ortronics UPS Equipment Support Bracket, Part No. OR-60400383. c. Each free standing equipment rack shall be secured to the concrete floor"with a Chatsworth Concrete Floor Mounting Kit, Part No. 40604-001. d. Ortronics Cable Management Rings, Part No. OR-60400614 (1 set of 14). 2. UPS and Peripheral Equipment in Telecommunications Racks. a. Each telecommunications room shall be equipped with the`following UPS equipment types and quantities based upon applicable drawings. All UPS equipment shall -be owner furnished contractor installed. Coordinate equipment delivery with Anixter at the time of materials procurement. 1) APC 3KVA UPS Part No. with SNMP Network Card. 17000-9 01 / 18/06 i WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA ` d SECTION 17000 - STRUCTURED CABLING INFRASTRUCTURE 2) APC Environmental Monitoring Unit. 3) APC Master Switch. 4) APC Share -UPS. 3. Equipment Wall Mount Enclosure. a. Equipment wall mount enclosure shall be Ortronics Mighty Mo Wall Mount Cable Management Cabinet, Part No. OR-405000090. 1) Provide rear cabling entry base plate for the bottom of the wall mount enclosure for cabling entry, Part No. OR-60400464. b. Each wall mount enclosure shall be equipped with the following equipment. Quantities shall be determined from applicable drawings and parts lists. 1) Ortronics Feed -Through Cable Management Panel, Part No. OR-60400129. 2) Ortronics Equipment Shelf, Part No. OR-60400006. 3) Provide horizontal power strip utilizing one rack unit, rated for 20Amp capacity and 8 simplex receptacles. Provide 1 power strip for each wall mount enclosure installed unless indicated otherwise, Ortronics Part No. OR-50900091. 4. Racks shall be grounded using stranded, insulated copper conductor - #6AWG. Provide all required bonding material and hardware, and bond to building grounding electrode subsystem at building electrical service entrance. a. Provide Ortronics grounding kit for each equipment rack Part No. OR-60400010. 5. Where applicable, each freestanding equipment rack shall be seismically braced from the top of the rack to a structural component beam, column, bearing wall, etc. of the building. Each geographical area shall be considered on an individual basis to ascertain whether seismic bracing is required and if structural engineering services are required. B. Cable Tray: 1. Cable tray shall be continuous, rigid, welded steel wire mesh cable management system. Material shall be stainless steel wire, AISI 316L, 213, finished cold drawn wire. 2. The cable tray shall be 12 inches wide x 2 inches deep with all necessary support hardware and seismic bracing. Contractor shall provide all accessories required for a complete installation including seismic bracing. a. Cablofil EZ-Tray Part No. CF 54/300 EZ. 3. Cable tray sections shall be mechanically and electrically continuous at all splices, changes in elevation, etc. Connections between sections shall attach using hardware and accessories of the same manufacturer as the cable tray and shall be installed per manufacturer's recommendations. Connections shall be listed by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory as electrically continuous for purpose of grounding continuity, or supplemental bonding jumpers shall be provided at connections. a. Cablofil EZ-Tray Part No. EDRN. 4. Support system shall be Cablofil FAS system. Provide L brackets as required for wall installation as indicated on drawings. Install per manufacturer's recommendations. a. Cablofil EZ-Tray Part No. FAS L300. 5. Provide manufacturer's cable bend radius accessories where cables exit tray. a. Cablofil EZ-Tray Part No. CABLEXIT. C. Fire Retardant Plywood Backboards: 1. Material: Type CDX plywood. 2. Size: 3/4 inch thick x 8 feet high to cover walls as shown on drawings. 3. Finish: Flat latex, intumescent fire retardant paint, Flame Control Coatings No. 20-20, or as approved, with semi -gloss class "A" fire retardant enamel overcoat, Flame Control No. 30-30, or as approved. Final coat of white anti -static sealer or overcoat paint. Paint plywood on all sides and edges prior to mounting on walls. 2.6 TELECOMMUNICATION GROUNDING MATERIALS 1. Pipe Clamps: a. Copper UL listed grounding connector with pre -drilled lug pad allowing 2-hold compression terminal; the size of connector will be dictated by pipe size. 17000-10 01/18/06`* WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECTOCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 17000 - STRUCTURED CABLING INFRASTRUCTURE b. Manufacturer: Burndy GAR-TC series or approved equivalent. 2. Communication Grounding Rods:. a. Copper -clad steel, 1/2" x 15' long; provide ground connector: b. Manufacturer: Burndy GAR series, T&B GUV series, or approved equal. 3. Grounding Conductors: a. Grounding conductors shall'be bare or insulated copper. 4. Exothermic Welding: a. Cadweld or Thermoweld; appropriate fittings as required. 5. Grounding Bars: a. Ground bars shall be constructed from copper plate, 1/4" thick x 4" wide x 10" long. b. Bars shall be pre -drilled for bolts to secure bar to insulating standoffs (one each end - coordinate size requirements with standoffs) and 3/8" bolts on 1" centers for connectors c. Provide hole layout to accommodate (6) 250 kcmil lugs and (10) #6 AWG lugs. 6. Insulating Standoffs: a. Provide thermoplastic insulating standoffs to secure ground bar to building structure approximately two inches off of the surface. b. Manufacturer: Glastic, or approved equivalent. 7. Cable Terminals: a. Non -insulated copper compression long barrel terminal, requiring 3/8" bolts on 1" centers. b. Manufacturer: Burndy YA-2TC series, T&B 256-30695 series, or approved equivalent. 8. Cable Tray Grounding Terminal: a.. Provide terminal bolted to spine of cable tray with a design to allow laying the #6 AWG stranded copper cable into the terminal without cutting and splicing the cable. 2.7 MODULAR PATCH CORDS A. Category 5e Modular Patch Cords: Furnish quantities and lengths as indicated in Section 1.9 Maintenance. 1 Provide storage of spare patch cords in the telecommunications room. 2. Acceptable Manufacturer is Ortronics: Part No. OR-MCSEXX-yy. Where xx = length and yy ' color. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Telecommunications Contractor shall provide suitable barriers and take any other safety precautions required by applicable codes. B. Telecommunications Contractor shall keep the working area free from debris of all types and remove all rubbish resulting, from their work on the premises. Upon completion, Telecommunications Contractor shall vacuum and clean room floors and equipment where their work has been performed. C. Telecommunications Contractor shall be responsible for any building repairs made necessary by their work or caused by negligence of their employees. No cutting, notching, drilling oraltering of any kind shall be done to the building without first obtaining permission from the Owner. D. The Owner shall have other contracts in connection with this work, for the installation of software and equipment for data, voice and video applications. Telecommunications Contractor shall provide other Trade Contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and execution of their work and shall properly coordinate other trade's work with theirs as required. E. Unless otherwise specified, legal and procedural conditions for the performance of work shall be consistent with those published in AIA Document A201 - " General Conditions of the Contract for Construction". 17000-11 01 / 18/06 t I i WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP j PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 17000 - STRUCTURED CABLING INFRASTRUCTURE r F. Telecommunications Contractor shall install all patch panels and blocks shown on the telecommunications drawings whether or not they are fully populated with cables. i G. Telecommunications Contractor shall install all cables and devices as shown on the drawings. I l H. Telecommunications Contractor shall neatly route horizontal cables in bundles from the telecommunications rooms utilizing cable trays and open cabling pathways to the telecommunications outlet where provided. 1. Feed. cables into modular furniture using power poles, floor monuments, and/or wall outlets as 9 shown on drawings. 2. Route cable runs from workstations parallel to building grid lines and directly to open cabling G pathways without passing over adjacent office spaces or cubicles. 3. Leave 10 feet of slack in neatly suspended loops above each workstation and 5 feet of slack neatly - coiled in the cable tray in the telecommunications room. 4. Trim all excess length from velcro straps.;' p 5. Cables shall contact only dedicated and properly protected cable accesses and support mechanisms. 6. Maintain the following distances between cables and other building systems: a. One foot from fluorescent lights. ? i b. Six feet from motors and transformers. c. Three feet from water piping or other mechanical equipment. d. One foot from electrical conduits or other electrical equipment. =; Open Cable Support installation: 1. Telecommunications Contractor shall provide all supports for cables specified in this section. 2. Cable supports shall be spaced no further than 4'-0" apart. 3. Provide all additional cable management products as required to protect exposed cabling and complete the installation of cables in a neat professional manner. 4. All floor penetrations shall be at columns, exterior walls or equipment rooms, 5. Cable supports shall be installed on their own support system. The use of ceiling grid supports shall be prohibited. 6. Do not support cables from ductwork, sprinkler piping, water piping, waste piping, conduit or other system supports. 7. J-hooks shall be filled to a maximum of 50 Category 5e four pair cables. 8. Installers shall observe the applicable requirements and recommended good practices contained within ANSI/TIA/EIA TSB40-A — "Installation Practices for Unshielded Twisted Pair Cabling." Cabling shall be organized and identified so as to facilitate locating and handling individual sheaths for maintenance functions. 1. Each bundle shall be neatly tied without cinching or stressing cable, using cable tie wraps in open cabling installations and velcro straps. in the telecommunications room. 2. Bundles shall be clearly marked identifying the frame and terminal block to which routed, the station numbers served by the bundle, and any other information that may assist in administration. 3. Great care shall be taken to protect all cabling from physical damage beneath floors, or elsewhere. Cables shall not be exposed to any forces or handling factors that will degrade performance, such as crushing, pull stressing, twisting, or damaging sheathing materials. When left unattended, all cabling shall be secured and protected so to avoid damage. K. Cable Installation: 1. All cables shall be bundled using plenum rated ties 2'-0" on center. 2. The minimum amount of cable insulation required to complete that cable termination shall be removed, i.e., '/2 inch maximum for Category 5e cable. 3. All low voltage cables shall be run exposed as "open cabling" in ceiling spaces and ceiling plenums. 4. Structured Cabling System shall be installed in continuous runs from termination locations at equipment to outlet locations. Splices are not permitted. 0 i 17000-12 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 17000 - STRUCTURED CABLING INFRASTRUCTURE 5. All cables shall be labeled at each termination. See drawings for label designations. 6. All cables running through rated floors and walls shall be firestopped in accordance with requirements of Division 7. 7. All cables shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, including but not limited to maximum tensile loading and maximum bend radius. 8. Velcro straps shall be utilized in the telecommunications room for all cable bundling. Tie wraps are prohibited in the telecommunication room. 9. A spare pull string shall be installed at every outlet installed. 3.2 TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROOM EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. The primary function of a telecommunications room is the termination of horizontal and service entrance cables to compatible connecting hardware. B. A telecommunications room also provides a controlled environment to house.telecommunications equipment, connecting hardware, and splice closures serving a portion of the building. C. Provide a minimum of one fire retardant plywood backboard 4' w x 8' h x 1/4" thick installed vertically at 6" AFF painted with white fire retardant paint as shown on drawings. See Section2.5C for additional information. D. Provide telecommunications equipment including the following, but not limited to, shall be installed according to Contract Drawings: 1. Equipment racks with shelves and trays, as indicated. 2: Equipment rack seismic bracing kits. 3. Cross -connect patch panels and termination blocks, whether they are populated or not. 4. Telecommunications outlets and connectors. 5. Cable tray. E. Telecommunications contractor shall install the UPS and peripheral equipment as shown on the telecommunications drawings. The telecommunications contractor shall provide 1 rack unit of space at the bottom of the rack and install the rear support bracket for the UPS. The telecommunications contractor shall install the SNMP network card into the UPS. The owner's data network vendor will provide the programming and IP configuration. Telecommunications contractor shall remove the rubber, non -slip feet from the APC equipment prior to installation. UPS equipment shall be installed, prior to site certification. F. Telecommunications contractor shall provide P-Touchlabels that identify the Wide Area, Network Service Provider and data network vendors where to install the equipment. Labels shall be as follows: 1 " WAN CSU/DSU and modems" Place label on front lip of shelf. 2. " WAN Router" Label shall be 2 rack units in length (3.5"), Place label on left side of rack. 3. " WAN DIGIPORT Server" Label shall be 1 rack unit in length (1.75"), place label on left side of rack. 4. " LAN Switch" Label shall be 1 rack unit in length, place label on left side of rack. Provide a label for each switch required. Labels can be 2 lines in height but no longer than the rack units shown. 5. " Servers" Place label on front lip of shelf. Provide a label for each server shelf required. 6. " Monitor" Place label on front lip of shelf. 7. " LAN OOBM" Place label on patch panel when indicated on applicable drawings. G. Provide digital pictures of the front and rear of the telecommunications racks and telecommunications backboard when installation is complete. Submit pictures to owner/owners representative. 3. 3 INSTALLATION OF HORIZONTAL UTP CABLING A. Category 5e Cable Installation and termination: 1. Maximum cable lengths shall be 295 feet (90 m). 17000- 13 01 /18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO - SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA y SECTION 17000 - STRUCTURED CABLING INFRASTRUCTURE 2. Provide all necessary installation materials, tools and equipment to perform insulation displacement type terminations at all the communications outlets, patch panels and 110 cross -connect blocks. 3. All cable pairs in each cable shall be terminated on a 110 block, modular patch panel or telecommunications connector in accordance with this specification. 4. Each cable shall be labeled with typewritten legible text in accordance with this specification. 5. Each Telecommunications Outlet shall be provided with 1, 2, 3 or 4, 8 Position-8 Conductor modules. a. Install one Category 5e 4 pair UTP cable from the designated patch panel to each module. b. Terminate each cable on the module at the patch panel and telecommunications outlet. c. Test each cable in accordance with the testing procedures in this specification. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF MODULAR PATCH CORDS A. The telecommunications contractor shall furnish Ortronics patch cords to each branch and store patch cords and cable assemblies in the telecommunications room. B. Washington Mutual voice and data integration vendors shall provide data network interconnects and voice system cross -connects in the following patch cord color installation scheme: 1. White patch cords shall be installed for data interconnects from the workstation device's telecommunications outlet connector to the computer network interface card (NIC). 2. Blue patch cords shall be installed for data interconnects from the horizontal station Category 5e patch panel to the Owner provided Ethernet switch. 3. Black patch cords shall be installed for network interconnects. 4. Black patch cords provided by data integration vendor shall be installed for network interconnects for unsecured firewall connections. 5. Yellow patch cords provided by data integration vendor shall be installed for network interconnects for secured firewall connections. 6. Green patch cords shall be installed for voice digital cross -connects from the horizontal station Category 5e patch panel to the voice digital Category 5e, 24-port cross -connect patch panel. 7. Purple patch cords shall be installed for voice analog cross -connects from the horizontal station Category 5e patch panel to the voice analog Category 5e, 24-port cross -connect patch panel. 8. Pink patch cords provided by ATM integration vendor shall be installed for network interconnects for ATM connections. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF TELECOMMUNICATIONS GROUNDING SYSTEM A. Connect grounding conductors to ground bars. 1. Provide bonding jumper in electrical rooms. B. Grounding cables routed through ferrous conduit for more then 3' shall be bonded to each end of the conduit by a #6 AWG wire. C. Grounding cables shall be routed in as direct a manner as possible, avoiding changes in elevation and sharp bends. D. Cable Terminals: 1. Utilize manufacturer's recommended compression die and recommended compression pressure to compress terminal. to cable. 2. All grounding system cable terminations shall be compression terminals as specified in the products section except those connections to grounding rods, raised floor and cable tray grounding terminals which shall be connected by a Cadweld. E. Exothermic Welding: 1. Use exothermic welding as noted and where grounding connections are made underground, embedded in masonry or concrete, or installed in other inaccessible spaces. 2. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions. 17000-14 01/18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD l SANFORD, FLORIDA SECTION 17000 - STRUCTURED CABLING INFRASTRUCTURE F. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation. G. Test system at all bonded points and provide test results in report form. 1. Maximum readings at any point shall be 5 ohms. 3.6 LABELING A. General: 1. Labeling shall be in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-606 -The Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Building. 2. All labels shall be permanent labels produced by a labeling machine. 3. Labels shall be installed on all cables at each end. Ensure labels are securely fastened. 4. All labels shall be located within 6 inches of cable termination and placed so they can be easily read. 5. Labeling information will be reviewed at the Pre -Installation Meeting. B. Telecommunications Outlet Labeling: 1. Each telecommunications outlet shall be labeled in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-606 -The Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Building and the Owner's standards. 2. The label shall be produced to fit into the recess provided and covered with a clear plastic cover. 3. The labeling shall be a follows: a. TR-1-1-1 where: 1) TR= Telecommunication Room. 2) —1= Rack Number 3) —1= Patch Panel Number 4) —1= Port Number C. MC Rack Labeling: 1. Provide plastic lamacoid name plate for each equipment rack in the Telecommunications Room. 2. Plastic lamacoid name plate shall be black with white letters. The nameplate shall be machine engraved with a size 36 font. 3. Mount name plate at the top of each equipment rack. 4. Labeling scheme is provided on the Contract Drawings. 3.7 TESTING A. Test procedures shall be as prescribed by the Insulated Cable Engineers Association and the National Electrical Testing Association. B. Copper UTP: 1. All wiring shall be certified to meet or exceed the specifications as set forth in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568B for Category 5e requirements for horizontal cabling. 2. Certifications shall include the following parameters for each pair of each cable installed: a. Building Identification f I'1 b. Cable Identification. c. Date of test d. Test equipment manufacturer and model number e. Wire map 1) Continuity to the remote end. 2) Shorts between any two or more conductors 3) Reversed pairs 4) Split pairs 5) Transposed pairs 6) Any other miswiring f. Length g. Insertion Loss (Attenuation) 17000-15 01 / 18/06 WASHINGTON MUTUAL FINANCIAL GROUP PROJECT OCCASIO — SOUTH SANFORD SANFORD, FLORIDA I SECTION 17000 - STRUCTURED CABLING INFRASTRUCTURE h. Near -end Crosstalk (NEXT) i. Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio (ACR) j. Equal -level far -end crosstalk (ELFEXT) k. Power sum equal -level far -end crosstalk (PSELFEXT) loss I. Return loss m. Propagation delay n. Delay skew 3. The network testing equipment shall be from a manufacturer that has a minimum of five years experience in producing field test equipment and must have a certified calibration from the manufacturer within the past six months. 4. The test equipment shall be TIA Level II-E as indicated by an independent laboratory. 5. The test equipment must be ISO 9001 certified. 6. The test results shall be reproduced on a CD-ROM. The results shall be delivered in a Windows° based format. 7. The report shall be organized by building identification and cable identification number. 8. The Telecommunications Contractor shall maintain an electronic copy of the manufacturer's testing procedures in the job site office. 9. The test equipment batteries shall be charged daily and a level of greater than twenty-five percent of capacity shall be maintained during the testing. 10. Any horizontal cabling system link that fails will be documented, identifying the reason for test failure and a corrective action plan. 11. After corrective action has been completed, the link shall be retested. 12. It is the Telecommunications Contractor's responsibility to insure 100 percent of the network horizontal cabling system links pass all tests. 13. Permanent link testing is to be completed on all Category 5e connectors for each telecommunications outlet installed. END OF SECTION 17000-16 01/18/06 Washington Mutual Occasio Master Parts List Nomenclature Manufacturer Part No. Patch Cords Category 5e, 4 Pair, 24 AWG, Stranded, White, PVC, Oruonics OR-MC5E09-09 Category 5e. 4 Pair. 24 AWG. Stranded. Blue. PVC, Ortronics OR-MC5EXX-06 Category 5e, 4 Pair, 24 AWG, Stranded, Blue. PVC, Patch Cord, 5 ft. Ortronics OR—MC5E05-06 Category 5e, 4 Pair, 24 AWG, Stranded, Black. PVC, Patch Cord, 5 ft. Ortronics OR-MC5E05-00 Category 5e, 4 Pair, 24 AWG. Stranded. Black. PVC. Ortronics OR-MC5EXX-00 Category 5e, 4 Pair, 24 AWG. Stranded, Black. PVC. Patch Cord. 9 0. Ortronics OR-MC5E09-00 Category 5e Modular Patch Cords Ortronics OR-MC5Exx-v Twisted Pair Cross -Connect Wire Onronics OR-8360560391.XX RJ-45 to 110 C4 Clip Ortronics OR-827056020-XX Cabling J-hooks Cadd CAT721 Angled brackets for J-hooks Caddy CATHBA Plenum Tie Wraps Panduit PLT-2S-C702 Spiral wrap, Yellow Panduit T50N-C4 Category 5e LAN, UTP, 4 Pair. Category 5e. Horizontal Cable, Plenum, CMP, Yellow Berk-Tek 10032060 Category 5 LAN, UTP, 25 Pair, CMR Berk-Tek 10033967 Category 5 LAN. UTP. 25 Pair, CMP Berk-Tek 10051278 Telecommunications Room Mighty Mo III Cable Management Rack, 7 foot. 19 inches wide, Black Ortronics OR-60400169 Equipment Wall Mount Enclosure Onronics OR-405000090 Rear Entry Base Plate Ortronics OR-60400464 Feed -Through Cable Management Panel Ortronics OR-60400129 E ui ment Shelf Ortronics OR-60400006 Horizontal Power Strip Onronics OR-50900091 Vertical Cable Management Channel, 7 foot. 4 inches wide. Black Onronics OR-60400435 Cable Management Panel, Feed Through Ortronics OR-808044915 Standard Equipment Shelf, 19 inches, 12 inches deep, Black Ortronics OR-60400006 Heavy—DutyHeavy-Dury Equipment Shelf 19". Black Ortronics OR-60400355 Heavy - Duty Equipment Shelf 23". Black Onronics OR-60400517 Keyboard/ Monitor Shelf 19" rack Ortronics OR-60400550 Keyboard/ Monitor Shelf 23" rack Ortronics OR-60400551 Keyboard/ Monitor Shelf Adapter Ortronics OR-60400606 Monitor Bracing Kit, Black Onronics OR-70700126 Server Bracing Kit, Black Ortronics OR-60400523 Velcro Cable Management Straps, 12 inch. Black Ortronics OR-70700079-00 Vertical Power Strip, 16 Position Outlet Strip Ortronics OR-60400381 Grounding Kit Ortronics OR-60400010 Grounding Connector Bumdy GAR-TC Grounding Rod Bumdy GAR series/T&B GUV Cable Terminals Bumdy YA-2TC/T&B256-30695 Equipment Mounting Screws Ortronics OR-60400005 Concrete Mounting Kit Chatsworth 40604-001 12" Wide x 2" High Cable Tray Cablofil CF 54/300 EZ L" Wall Bracket Cable Tray Support Cablofil FAS L300 Bend Radius Support for Cable Entry & Exit Cablofil CABLEXIT Cable Tray J-Boh Interconnect to Equipment Rack Cablofil EZ JB 5/16 Cable Tray )tampers Cablofil EDRN 110 Wiring Block w/Legs. 100 Pair, Label Strip Holders w/ White Label Strips. C4 Connectors. C5 Connectors Onronics OR-30203506 110 Wiring Trough w/ Lees Onronics OR-30200140 Desi nation Strip 110 Color Coded. Red Omomes OR-70400271-22 Cable Management Rings Onronics OR-50900091 Des-i nation St" 110 Color Coded. Blue Ortronics OR-70400271-26 Cate o Se Patch Panel. 24 Pon Onronics OR-PHD5E6024 Category5e Patch Panel, 48 Port Ortronics OR-PHD5E6048 Ortronics/Berk-Tek Structured Cabling System Washington Mutual Occasio Master Parts List Work Station Trac-Jack Stainless Steel Wall Phone Faceplate w/ Ortronics OR-854045212 Trac-Jack Single Gang Wall Plate. No •, 4-Port Ortronics OR-40300546-13 Trac-.lack Module, Category 5e. hory Ortronics OR-T15E00-13-13 Trac-.lack Module, Blank, Ivory Onronics OR-42100002-13 Data Icon, White Ortronics OR-40309200 Voice Icon. Blue Ortronics OR-40326100 Power Pole Ortronics OR-40800019-33 Surface Mount Outlet Box I Ortronics OR-40300185-13 Ortronics/Berk-Tek Structured Cabling System Plans' Archived r